BS 2000M

BS-2000M Chemistry Analyzer
Service Manual
2012 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved.
For this Service Manual, the issued Date is 2012-11 (Version: 1.0).
i
Intellectual Property Statement
SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD.
(hereinafter called Mindray) owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray
product and this manual. This manual may refer to information protected by
copyrights or patents and does not convey any license under the patent rights of
Mindray, nor the rights of others. Mindray does not assume any liability arising out
of any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information.
Disclosure of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the
written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rent, adaption and translation of
this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is
strictly forbidden.
, , , , , are the
registered trademarks or trademarks owned by Mindray in China and other countries.
All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for editorial purposes
without the intention of improperly using them. They are the property of their
respective owners.
ii
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party
Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not
be liable for errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages in
connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Mindray is responsible for safety, reliability and performance of this product only in
the condition that:
all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this
product are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable
national and local requirements;
the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
Upon request, Mindray may provide, with compensation, necessary circuit diagrams,
calibration illustration list and other information to help qualified technician to
maintain and repair some parts, which Mindray may define as user serviceable.
Note
This equipment is to be operated only by medical professionals trained and
authorized by Mindray or Mindray-authorized distributors.
Warning
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to carry
out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in machine
breakdown or injury of human health.
iii
Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any
transportation or other charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential
damages or delay resulting from the improper use or application of the product or
the use of parts or accessories not approved by Mindray or repairs by people other
than Mindray authorized personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:

any Mindray product which has been subjected to misuse, negligence or
accident;
any Mindray product from which Mindray's original serial number tag or product
identification markings have been altered or removed;
any product of any other manufacturer.
iv
Return Policy
Return Procedure
In the event that it becomes necessary to return this product or part of this product
to Mindray, the following procedure should be followed:
Obtain return authorization: Contact the Mindray Service Department and
obtain a Customer Service Authorization (Mindray) number. The Mindray
number must appear on the outside of the shipping container. Returned
shipments will not be accepted if the Mindray number is not clearly visible.
Please provide the model number, serial number, and a brief description of the
reason for return.
Freight policy: The customer is responsible for freight charges when this
product is shipped to Mindray for service (this includes customs charges).
Return address: Please send the part(s) or equipment to the address offered by
Customer Service department
Company Contact
Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
Address: Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, Hi-tech Industrial
Park, Nanshan, ShenZhen 518057, P.R.China,
Tel: +86 755 26582479 26582888
Fax: +86 755 26582934 26582500
v
vi
Preface
Please read and understand this manual thoroughly before repairing the product.
After reading this manual, keep it properly in a place easy to get when you need it.
1
Who Should Read This Manual
This manual is geared for servicing personnel of or authorized by Mindray.
2
Conventions Used in This Manual
Safety Symbols
The table below lists the safety symbols used in this manual. Each symbol should be
used together with the text next to it.
When you see ... Then
WARNING Read the statement following the symbol. The
statement is alerting you to an operating hazard
that can cause personal injury.
BIOHAZARD Read the statement following the symbol. The

statement is alerting you to a potentially
biohazardous condition.
CAUTION Read the statement following the symbol. The

statement is alerting you to a possibility of
system damage or unreliable results.
NOTE Read the statement following the symbol. The

statement is alerting you to information that
requires your attention.
Labels and Silkscreens

The labels and silkscreens used on the chemistry analyzer are explained below.
Serial number
Date of manufacture
Manufacturer
In Vitro diagnostic equipment
Biohazard: risk of potentially biohazardous infection
Warning: risk of personal injury or equipment damage
Warning: risk of burn
Warning: risk of eye hurt
3
Electrical ground
Environment-friendly use period (20 years)
Graphics
All graphics in this manual, including screenshots and printouts, are for illustration
purpose only and must not be used for any other purposes.
4
Summary of Hazards
Observe the following safety precautions when using the product. Ignoring any of
these safety precautions may lead to personal injury or equipment damage.
WARNING
If the product is used in a manner not specified by our company, the protection
provided by the product may be impaired.
Electric Shock Hazards

Observe the following instructions to prevent electric shock.
WARNING
When the MAIN POWER is turned on, users other than the servicing personnel
authorized by our company must not open the rear cover or side cover.
Spillage of reagent or sample on the product may cause equipment failure and even
electric shock. Do not place sample and reagent on the product.
Moving Parts Hazards

Observe the following instructions to prevent personal injury caused by moving
parts.
WARNING
When the system is in operation, do not touch such moving parts as sample probe,
reagent probes, mixers, and cuvette wash station.
Do not put your fingers or hands into any open part when the system is in operation.
Photometer Lamp Hazards

Observe the following instructions to prevent personal injury caused by photometer
lamp or bar code reader.
WARNING
Light sent by the photometer lamp and bar code reader may hurt your eyes. Do not
stare into the lamp when the system is in operation.
If you want to replace the photometer lamp, switch off the MAIN POWER and then
wait at least 15 minutes for the lamp to cool down before touching it. Do not touch
the lamp before it cools down, or you may get burned.
5
Biohazards
Observe the following instructions to protect against the biohazardous infection by
samples, calibrators and control samples.
BIOHAZARD
Inappropriate handling of samples may lead to biohazardous infection. Do not touch
samples, control solutions, calibrators, mixtures or waste with your bare hands.
During operation, wear gloves and lab coat, if necessary, goggles.
In case your skin contacts the samples, follow standard laboratory safety procedure
and consult a doctor.
Reagent and Wash Solution Hazards
WARNING
Reagents and concentrated wash solution are corrosive to human skins. Exercise
caution when using reagents and concentrated wash solution. In case your hand or
clothes contact them, wash them off with soap and water. If reagents or wash
solution spills into your eyes, rinse it with water and consult an oculist.
Waste Hazards
Observe the following instructions to prevent environmental pollution and personal
injury caused by waste.
BIOHAZARD
Some substances contained in reagent, control, concentrated wash solution and
waste are subject to regulations of contamination and disposal. Dispose of the waste
in accordance with your local or national rule for biohazard waste disposal and
consult the manufacturer or distributor of the reagents for details.
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
System Disposal Hazards

Observe the following instructions to dispose of the waste analyzer.
WARNING
Materials of the analyzer are subject to contamination regulations. Dispose of a
waste analyzer in accordance with your local or national rule for waste disposal.
Fire and Explosion Hazards

Observe the following instructions to prevent fire and explosion.
WARNING
Ethanol is flammable substance. Please exercise caution while using ethanol.
6
Precautions on use
To use the product safely and efficiently, pay attention to the following operating
precautions.
Intended Use
WARNING
This product is intended for in vitro quantitative determination of clinical
chemistries in serum, plasma, urine, and cerebral spinal fluid samples. Please
consult us before you use the instrument for other purposes.
When drawing a clinical conclusion, please also refer to patients clinical symptoms
and other test results.
Operator
WARNING
The instrument is to be operated only by clinical professionals, doctors or laboratory
experimenters trained by Mindray or Mindrays authorized distributors.
Environment Precautions
CAUTION
Please install and operate the system in an environment specified by this manual.
Installing and operating the system in other environment may lead to unreliable
results and even equipment damage.
Electromagnetic Noise Precautions
CAUTION
Electromagnetic noise may interfere with operations of the system. Do not install
devices generating excessive electromagnetic noise around the system. Do not use
such devices as mobile phones or radio transmitters in the room housing the system.
Do not use other CRT displays around the system.
Do not use other medical instruments around the system that may generate
electromagnetic noise to interfere with their operations.
7
Operating Precautions
CAUTION
(1) Operate the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate use of the
system may lead to unreliable test results or even equipment damage or personal
injury.
(2) When using the system for the first time, first run calibrations, and then QC tests
to make sure the system is in proper state.
(3) Be sure to run QC tests every time when you use the system, otherwise the result
may be unreliable.
(4) Do not uncover the sample carousel or reagent carousel when the system is in
operation. Keep the covers closed.
(5) The RS-232 port on the analyzer is used for connection with the operation unit
only. Do not use it for other connections. Use the cables provided by our company or
your local distributor for the connection.
(6) The operation unit is a personal computer with the operating software installed.
Installing other software or hardware on the computer may interfere with the
system operation. Do not run other software when the system is working.
Computer virus may destroy the operating software or the test data. Do not use the
computer for other purposes or connect it to the Internet.
(7) Do not touch the display monitor, mouse or keyboard with wet hands or hands
with chemicals.
(8) Do not place the MAIN POWER to ON again within 10 seconds since placing it to
OFF; otherwise the system may enter the protection status. If it does so, place the
MAIN POWER to OFF and place it to ON again.
System Maintenance
CAUTION
(1) Repair the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate
maintenance may lead to unreliable results, equipment damage or personal injury.
(2) When the instrument is stored for a long time, dust may accumulate on the
surface. To wipe off dust from the system surface, use a soft, clean and wet (not too
wet) cloth soaked with soap water if necessary. Do not use such organic solvents as
ethanol for cleaning. After cleaning, wipe the surface dry with dry cloth.
Switch off all the powers and disconnect the power plug before cleaning. Take
necessary measures to prevent water ingression, otherwise equipment damage or
personal injury may be caused.
(3) Replacement of such major parts as photometer lamp, photometer, sample probe,
reagent probes, mixers, and syringe plunger assembly must be followed by a
calibration.
8
Chemistry Parameter Configuration Precautions
CAUTION
To define such parameters as sample volume, reagent volume and wavelength,
follow the instructions in this manual and the instructions of reagents.
Sample Precautions
CAUTION
(1) Use serum sample that has been completely separated or urine sample that
contains no suspended matters. If samples contain insoluble substances like fibrin or
suspended matter, the sample probe may be blocked.
Medicines, anticoagulants or preservative in the samples may lead to unreliable
results.
Hemolysis, icterus or lipemia in the samples may lead to unreliable test results;
running a sample blank, therefore, is recommended.
(2) Store the samples properly. Improper storage may change the compositions of
samples and lead to unreliable results.
(3) Sample volatilization may lead to unreliable results. Do not leave the sample
open for a long period.
(4) Some samples may not be analyzed with the test parameters and reagents.
Consult the reagent suppliers for details.
(5) Sample samples need processing before analysis. Consult the reagent suppliers
for details.
(6) The system has a specific requirement on the minimum sample volume. Refer to
this manual for proper sample volume.
(7) Load samples to correct positions on the sample carousel before the analysis
begins; otherwise reliable results may not be obtained.
Reagent, Calibrator and Control Precautions
CAUTION
(1) Use proper reagents, calibrators and controls on the system.
(2) Select appropriate reagents according to the performance characteristics of the
system. Consult the reagent suppliers, our company or our authorized distributor for
details, if you are not sure about your reagent choice.
(3) Store and use the reagents, calibrators and controls strictly as instructed by the
suppliers; otherwise, reliable results or best performance of the system may not be
obtained.
Improper storage of reagents, calibrators and controls may lead to unreliable results
and bad performance of the system even in validity period.
(4) Perform calibration after changing the reagents, otherwise reliable results may
not be obtained.
(5) Contamination caused by carryover among reagents may lead to unreliable test
results. Consult the reagent suppliers for details.
9
Data Archiving Precautions
NOTE
The system automatically stores the data to the built-in hard disk. Data loss,
however, is still possible due to mis-deletion or physical damage of the hard disk. You
are recommended to regularly archive the data to such medium as CDs.
Computer and Printer Precautions
NOTE
For operating instructions and precautions of the computer and printer, please refer
to their operation manuals.
External Equipment Precautions
WARNING
External equipment connected to the analogue and digital interfaces must be
complied with relevant safety and EMC standards (e.g., IEC 60950 Safety of
Information Technology Equipment Standard and CISPR 22 EMC of Information
Technology Equipment Standard (CLASS B)). Any person, who connects additional
equipment to the signal input or output ports and configures an IVD system, is
responsible for ensuring that the system works normally and complies with the
safety and EMC requirements. If you have any questions, consult the technical
services department of your local representative.
10
Contents
Intellectual Property Statement ............................................................................................................... ii

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party ............................................................................................ iii
Warranty .................................................................................................................................................... iv
Exemptions ................................................................................................................................. iv
Return Policy.............................................................................................................................................. v
Return Procedure ........................................................................................................................ v
Company Contact........................................................................................................................ v
Preface 1
Who Should Read This Manual .............................................................................................................. 2
Conventions Used in This Manual ......................................................................................................... 3
Safety Symbols ............................................................................................................................. 3
Labels and Silkscreens ................................................................................................................ 3
Graphics ........................................................................................................................................ 4
Summary of Hazards ............................................................................................................................... 5
Precautions on use .................................................................................................................................... 7
Contents I
1 System Description 1-1
1.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2 Components of Analyzer ............................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.2 Functions of the System ................................................................................................ 1-4
1.3 Components of Rack Feeder System ........................................................................................... 1-7
1.4 Functions of Rack Feeder System................................................................................................. 1-9
1.5 Requirements on External Devices............................................................................................. 1-10
1.5.1 Operation Unit .............................................................................................................. 1-10
1.5.2 Display Monitor ............................................................................................................ 1-10
1.5.3 Printer ............................................................................................................................. 1-10
1.5.4 Water Supply Equipment ............................................................................................. 1-10
1.5.5 Power Supply Equipment ............................................................................................ 1-11
I
1.6 Product Configuration .................................................................................................................. 1-12
1.7 Technical Specifications ................................................................................................................ 1-13
1.7.1 Common Specifications ............................................................................................... 1-13
1.7.2 Sample Specifications ................................................................................................... 1-14
1.7.3 Reagent Specifications .................................................................................................. 1-16
1.7.4 Specifications of Reaction System ............................................................................. 1-17
1.7.5 Specifications of Operation Unit ............................................................................... 1-18
2 Timing Control 2-1
2.1 Biochemistry Test Procedure ......................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 Working Mode.................................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.3 Sequential Actions of Reaction Carousel ..................................................................................... 2-4
2.4 Sequential Actions of Probes and Mixers .................................................................................... 2-5
2.4.1 Sequential Actions of Reagent Probe .......................................................................... 2-6
2.4.2 Sequential Actions of Sample Probe ........................................................................... 2-7
2.4.3 Sequential Actions of Mixer Unit................................................................................. 2-8
2.5 Test Procedure ............................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.5.1 Test Procedure of Double-Reagent Chemistry ........................................................ 2-10
2.5.2 Antigen Addition Procedure ....................................................................................... 2-12
2.5.3 Sample Dilution Procedure ......................................................................................... 2-13
2.5.4 Special Wash Procedure ............................................................................................... 2-14
2.5.5 Dilution Procedure of Concentrated Wash Solution .............................................. 2-15
2.5.6 Start/End Points of Test ............................................................................................. 2-15
2.6 ISE Test ........................................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.6.1 Workflow of ISE module ............................................................................................ 2-17
2.6.2 Startup Procedure ......................................................................................................... 2-17
2.6.3 Normal Test Procedure................................................................................................ 2-18
2.6.4 Two-Point Slope Calibration Procedure .................................................................... 2-19
2.6.5 Electrode Wash Procedure .......................................................................................... 2-19
2.6.6 Tube Wash Procedure .................................................................................................. 2-20
2.7 Resetting Procedure....................................................................................................................... 2-21
2.7.1 Failure Restore ............................................................................................................... 2-21
2.7.2 System Reset .................................................................................................................. 2-21
2.7.3 Mechanical Reset ........................................................................................................... 2-22
2.8 Sequential Actions of Startup and Shutdown ........................................................................... 2-23
2.9 Sequential Actions of Pumps ...................................................................................................... 2-25
2.9.1 Refrigeration Circulating Pump P02 .......................................................................... 2-25
2.9.2 Deionized Water Circulating Pump P03 .................................................................... 2-25
2.9.3 Degassed Water Booster Pumps P04 and P13 ......................................................... 2-25
2.9.4 Concentrated Wash Solution Pump P05 ................................................................... 2-25
2.9.5 Wash Solution Circulating Pump P06 ........................................................................ 2-26
2.9.6 Waste Pump P07 ........................................................................................................... 2-26
II
2.9.7 Primary Vacuum Pumps P08/P14 and External Vacuum Pump P10(optional) . 2-27
2.9.8 Whole Unit Degassing Pump P09 .............................................................................. 2-28
2.9.9 ISE Degassing Pump.................................................................................................... 2-28
3 Software Introduction 3-1
3.1 Software Installation ........................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.1.1 Introduction of Installation Package ........................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 Folder Structure .............................................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.3 Log Files ........................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.4 Software Running............................................................................................................ 3-5
3.1.5 Auto Startup .................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.1.6 Software Running Parameters ....................................................................................... 3-7
3.1.7 Normal Startup Procedure ............................................................................................ 3-9
3.2 Software Upgrading....................................................................................................................... 3-11
3.3 Software Uninstallation ................................................................................................................. 3-12
3.3.1 Uninstalling BS-2000M Software................................................................................ 3-12
3.3.2 Uninstalling SQL Database ......................................................................................... 3-12
3.4 Comparison of User Permissions ............................................................................................... 3-13
4 Hardware Circuits 4-1
4.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Summary of Hazards ...................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.3 Summary of PCBAs ........................................................................................................................ 4-4
4.4 Locations of PCBA ......................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.5 Removing PCBA ............................................................................................................................ 4-11
4.6 Functions of PCBA....................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.6.1 Main Control Board...................................................................................................... 4-12
4.6.2 Wash Temperature Control Board ............................................................................. 4-17
4.6.3 Control Drive Board (Sample) .................................................................................... 4-24
4.6.4 Control Drive Board (R1) ............................................................................................ 4-32
4.6.5 Control Drive Board (R2) ............................................................................................ 4-39
4.6.6 AC drive board .............................................................................................................. 4-46
4.6.7 Reagent Refrigeration Board ....................................................................................... 4-50
4.6.8 Reaction Carousel Temperature Collection Board ................................................... 4-57
4.6.9 Cleaning fluid temperature collection board............................................................. 4-60
4.6.10 AD collection board ................................................................................................... 4-63
4.6.11 Preamplifier Board...................................................................................................... 4-69
4.6.12 Light Source Monitoring Preamplifier Board ......................................................... 4-72
4.6.13 Reagent probe level sense board............................................................................... 4-74
4.6.14 Sample Probe Level Sense Board ............................................................................. 4-78
4.6.15 Mixer Motor Drive Board.......................................................................................... 4-80
4.6.16 Pressure detection board ........................................................................................... 4-84
4.6.17 Clog detection board .................................................................................................. 4-87
III
4.6.18 Water quality detection board ................................................................................... 4-91
4.6.19 External Vacuum Pump Drive Board ...................................................................... 4-93
4.6.20 Five-Probe/Mixer Conversion Board ...................................................................... 4-94
4.6.21 Communication Conversion Board ......................................................................... 4-97
4.6.22 Network Interface Conversion Board ..................................................................... 4-98
4.6.23 Main Control Board (SDM) ...................................................................................... 4-99
4.6.24 Control Drive Board (SDM) ...................................................................................4-102
4.6.25 Track Control Drive Board .....................................................................................4-106
4.6.26 Interconnection Conversion Board (SDM) ..........................................................4-110
4.6.27 Interconnection Conversion Board (Rack Transfer Unit) ..................................4-112
4.7 Power Supply System ..................................................................................................................4-115
4.7.1 Power Supply System of Whole Unit ......................................................................4-115
4.7.2 Power Supply System of Analyzer ...........................................................................4-116
4.7.3 Performance Indices ...................................................................................................4-118
4.7.4 Functional Diagram ....................................................................................................4-119
4.7.5 BA40 power supply assembly ....................................................................................4-119
4.7.6 12V/30A power supply board ..................................................................................4-128
4.7.7 24V/6A power supply board ....................................................................................4-130
4.7.8 Analog power supply conversion board ..................................................................4-132
4.7.9 DC power supply conversion board ........................................................................4-134
4.7.10 Maintenance of Power Supply System ..................................................................4-136
4.8 Wiring Diagram of Analyzer .....................................................................................................4-138
4.9 Wiring Diagram of Rack Feeder System..................................................................................4-157
5 Mechanics 5-1
5.1 Shells Assembly ................................................................................................................................ 5-2
5.1.1 Module Functions and Compositions.......................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 Locations and FRU Details ........................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.3 Removing and Reinstalling Shielding Cover Assembly (M1) and Back Shielding
Cover .......................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.1.4 Removing and Reinstalling Left Panel ......................................................................... 5-8
5.1.5 Removing and Reinstalling Track Panel ....................................................................... 5-8
5.1.6 Removing and Reinstalling Reagent Carousel Back Cover Assembly ................... 5-10
5.1.7 Replacement of Air Spring .......................................................................................... 5-10
5.1.8 Replacement of Left/Right Front Doors and Hinges ............................................ 5-11
5.1.9 Replacement of Left/Right Columns and Covers ................................................... 5-11
5.1.10 Replacement of Lock Catch...................................................................................... 5-13
5.1.11 Removing and Reinstalling SDM Front and Rear Panels ..................................... 5-13
5.1.12 Removing and Reinstalling SDM Side Panel and Front Panel Assembly ........... 5-14
5.2 Reaction Carousel Assembly ........................................................................................................ 5-16
5.2.1 Module Functions ......................................................................................................... 5-16
5.2.2 Locations and FRU Details ......................................................................................... 5-16
5.2.3 Replacement of Constant Temperature Bath Cables .............................................. 5-17
IV
5.2.4 Replacement of Cuvette Spring Plate ........................................................................ 5-21
5.2.5 Replacement of Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor of Reaction Carousel5-23
5.2.6 Replacement of High-Speed Motor Assembly......................................................... 5-24
5.2.7 Replacement of Reaction Cuvette .............................................................................. 5-26
5.3 Reagent Carousel Assembly ......................................................................................................... 5-27
5.3.3 Replacement of R12/R22 Inner Reagent Carousel Assembly ............................... 5-29
5.3.4 Replacement of R11/R21 Outer Reagent Carousel Assembly .............................. 5-30
5.3.5 Replacement of Built-In Bar Code Reader ............................................................... 5-32
5.3.6 Replacement of Reagent Antifogging Heating Assembly ...................................... 5-33
5.3.7 Replacement of Antifogging Heater .......................................................................... 5-35
5.3.8 Replacement of Reagent Refrigeration Temperature Sensor ................................. 5-36
5.3.9 Replacement of Carousel Cover Sensor .................................................................... 5-38
5.3.10 Replacement of Sample Motor Assembly .............................................................. 5-39
5.3.11 Replacement of Air Vent Plug with O Ring and Plug with O Ring ................... 5-40
5.4 Sample Carousel Assembly........................................................................................................... 5-42
5.4.3 Replacement of Outer Sample Carousel Assembly and Tube Holder Base 2 ..... 5-44
5.4.4 Replacement of Inner Sample Carousel Assembly, 16 Tube Holder and 13 Tube
Holder Adapter ....................................................................................................................... 5-45
5.4.5 Replacement of Sample Carousel Motor Assembly ................................................ 5-47
5.4.6 Replacement of Coder Sensor and Carousel Home Position Sensor ................... 5-49
5.4.7 Replacement of Sample Bar Code Reader Assembly .............................................. 5-52
5.5 Syringe Assembly ........................................................................................................................... 5-56
5.5.3 Replacement of Sample Syringe 250l and Reagent Syringe 1ml ......................... 5-57
5.5.4 Replacement of Sample/Reagent Syringe Drive Modules ..................................... 5-58
5.5.5 Replacement of Syringe 42 Step Motor Assembly .................................................. 5-60
5.5.6 Replacement of Clog Detection T-Piece Assembly ................................................ 5-62
5.6 Mixer Assembly.............................................................................................................................. 5-64
5.6.3 Replacement of Mixers ................................................................................................ 5-65
5.6.4 Replacement of Mixer Module Assembly ................................................................. 5-66
5.6.5 Replacement of Mixer Rotation Speed Optical Coupler Conversion Board ....... 5-69
5.6.6 Replacement of Mixer Motor Drive Board .............................................................. 5-70
5.6.7 Replacement of Horizontal Motor Assembly .......................................................... 5-71
5.6.8 Replacement of Vertical Motor Assembly ................................................................ 5-73
5.6.9 Replacement of Mixer Drive Assembly .................................................................... 5-74
V
5.6.10 Replacement of Mixer Horizontal/Vertical Sensors ............................................. 5-76
5.6.11 Replacement of Mixer Wash Well ............................................................................ 5-78
5.7 Cuvette Wash Station .................................................................................................................... 5-79
5.7.3 Replacement 7-Phase Probe Assemblies and Wipe Phase Probe Assemblies ..... 5-80
5.7.4 Replacement of Wash Probe Drive Assembly ......................................................... 5-81
5.7.5 Replacement of 42 Step Motor .................................................................................. 5-82
5.7.6 Replacement of Vertical Home Position Sensor ...................................................... 5-84
5.7.7 Replacement of Obstruct Sensor ............................................................................... 5-85
5.7.8 Replacement of Wash Phase Probe Assembly ......................................................... 5-86
5.7.9 Alignment of Cuvette Wash Station .......................................................................... 5-87
5.8 Sample Probe Assembly ............................................................................................................... 5-89
5.8.3 Replacement of Sample Probe, Level Sense Board, Anti-collision Spring, and Arm
Assembly .................................................................................................................................. 5-90
5.8.4 Replacement of 5-Probe Zero Position Sensor and Obstruct Sensor .................. 5-92
5.8.5 Replacement of Sample Probe Drive Assembly ...................................................... 5-94
5.8.6 Replacement of 5-Probe Vertical Motor Assembly................................................. 5-95
5.8.7 Replacement of 5-Probe Horizontal Motor Assembly ........................................... 5-96
5.8.8 Replacement of 5-Probe Vertical Sensor .................................................................. 5-97
5.9 Probe R11 Assembly ..................................................................................................................... 5-98
5.9.3 Replacement of Reagent Probe Assembly, Level Sense Board, Anti-collision
Spring, and Arm Assembly (R11) ........................................................................................ 5-99
5.9.4 Replacement of 5-Probe Zero Position Sensor and Obstruct Sensor ................5-101
5.9.5 Replacement of Probe R11 Drive Assembly ..........................................................5-103
5.9.6 Replacement of 5-Probe Vertical Motor Assembly...............................................5-103
5.9.7 Replacement of 5-Probe Horizontal Motor Assembly .........................................5-104
5.9.8 Replacement of 5-Probe Vertical Sensor ................................................................5-105
5.10 Probe R12 Assembly .................................................................................................................5-107
5.10.1 Module Functions .....................................................................................................5-107
5.10.2 Locations and FRU Details .....................................................................................5-107
Spring, and Arm Assembly (R12) ......................................................................................5-109
5.10.4 Replacement of 5-Probe Zero Position Sensor and Obstruct Sensor..............5-110
5.10.5 Replacement of Probe R12 Drive Assembly ........................................................5-112
5.10.6 Replacement of 5-Probe Vertical Motor Assembly.............................................5-113
5.10.7 Replacement of 5-Probe Horizontal Motor Assembly .......................................5-113
5.10.8 Replacement of 5-Probe Vertical Sensor ..............................................................5-114
5.11 Probe R21 Assembly .................................................................................................................5-116
VI
5.12 Probe R22 Assembly .................................................................................................................5-125
5.13 Sample Probe Wash Well ..........................................................................................................5-134
5.13.3 Replace of Sample Probe Wash Well .....................................................................5-134
5.14 Reagent Probe Wash Well.........................................................................................................5-136
5.14.3 Replace of Reagent Probe Wash Well....................................................................5-136
5.15 Rack Transfer Unit ....................................................................................................................5-138
5.15.2 Module Profile and FRU .........................................................................................5-138
5.15.3 Replacement of Track Motor Assembly and Tensioning Mechanism Spring .5-140
5.15.4 Replacement of Reflective Optical Coupler .........................................................5-141
5.15.5 Replacement of Lane Change Stopper Station ....................................................5-142
5.15.6 Replacement of Lane Change Part ........................................................................5-143
5.15.7 Replacement of Post-Aspiration Stopper Station ................................................5-145
5.15.8 Replacement of Aspirate Buffer Stopper Station ................................................5-146
5.15.9 Replacement of STAT Aspirate Positioning Station ...........................................5-148
5.15.10 Replacement of Routine Aspirate Positioning Station......................................5-150
5.15.11 Replacement of Return Push-out Part ................................................................5-153
5.16 Sample Delivery Module ..........................................................................................................5-155
5.16.2 Rack Supply Unit ......................................................................................................5-155
5.16.3 Rack Storage Unit .....................................................................................................5-163
VII
5.16.4 Rack Buffer Unit .......................................................................................................5-167
5.16.5 Retrieval Push-In Part ..............................................................................................5-171
5.16.6 Scanning Push-In Part..............................................................................................5-173
5.16.7 Scanning Push-Out Part ..........................................................................................5-176
5.16.8 Lane Bracket Assembly ............................................................................................5-179
6 Hydropneumatic System 6-1
6.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2 Principles of Hydropneumatic System ......................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.2 Probe/Mixer Wash Unit ................................................................................................ 6-3
6.2.3 Cuvette Wash Unit .......................................................................................................... 6-7
6.2.4 Water Supply Unit ........................................................................................................... 6-8
6.2.5 Waste Unit ........................................................................................................................ 6-9
6.2.6 ISE Hydropneumatic Unit........................................................................................... 6-11
6.2.7 Other ............................................................................................................................... 6-12
6.3 Introduction of Fluidic Actions .................................................................................................. 6-13
6.3.1 Auto Water Supply ........................................................................................................ 6-13
6.3.2 Auto Dilution Procedure ............................................................................................. 6-13
6.3.3 Cuvette Wash ................................................................................................................. 6-14
6.3.4 Establish Vacuum ......................................................................................................... 6-15
6.3.5 Release Vacuum ............................................................................................................. 6-15
6.3.6 Emptying Primary Vacuum Container ...................................................................... 6-15
6.3.7 Fluidic Initialization ...................................................................................................... 6-16
6.3.8 ISE Fluidic Initialization .............................................................................................. 6-17
6.4 Removing and Installing Hydropneumatic Components ........................................................ 6-18
6.4.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 6-18
6.4.2 Probe/Mixer Wash Unit .............................................................................................. 6-19
6.4.3 Cuvette Wash Unit ........................................................................................................ 6-21
6.4.4 Water Supply Unit ......................................................................................................... 6-27
6.4.5 Waste Unit ...................................................................................................................... 6-31
6.4.6 ISE Hydropneumatic Unit........................................................................................... 6-34
6.5 List of Hydropneumatic Materials .............................................................................................. 6-36
6.5.1 Pump ............................................................................................................................... 6-36
6.5.2 Solenoid Valve ............................................................................................................... 6-37
6.5.3 Restrictive Valve ............................................................................................................ 6-39
6.5.4 Connector and Conversion Tube ............................................................................... 6-40
6.5.5 Tube ................................................................................................................................ 6-53
6.6 Hydropneumatic Diagram ............................................................................................................ 6-57
7 Pyrology7-1
7.1 Refrigeration Unit ............................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.2 Locations and FRU Details ........................................................................................... 7-2
VIII
7.1.3 Replacement of Refrigerant .......................................................................................... 7-4
7.1.4 Removing/Installing Reagent Refrigeration Module ................................................. 7-9
7.1.5 Removing/Installing Refrigeration Circulating Pump Assembly .......................... 7-11
7.1.6 Removing/Installing Refrigeration Fans ................................................................... 7-14
7.1.7 Removing/Installing Refrigeration Temperature Sensors ...................................... 7-16
7.2 Preheating Unit (110V/220V) ..................................................................................................... 7-19
7.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 7-19
7.2.2 Removing/Installing Whole Unit Preheating Assembly (110V/220V) ................ 7-20
7.2.3 Removing/Installing Cuvette Wash Solution Preheating Assembly (110V/220V)7-22
7.2.4 Removing/Installing Cuvette Cleaning Fluid Preheating Assembly (110V/220V)7-25
7.3 Reaction Carousel Temperature Control Unit........................................................................... 7-28
7.3.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 7-28
7.3.3 Replacement of Reaction Carousel Heating Assembly ........................................... 7-29
7.3.4 Replacement of Reaction Carousel Temperature Sensor ....................................... 7-29
7.4 Whole Unit Radiation Unit .......................................................................................................... 7-31
7.4.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 7-31
7.4.3 Removing/Installing Fans ........................................................................................... 7-33
7.4.4 Removing Dust Screens ............................................................................................... 7-34
7.4.5 Test and confirmation .................................................................................................. 7-34
8 Optical System 8-1
8.1 Module Functions ............................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.2 Composition and Structure of Optical System ........................................................................... 8-3
8.2.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.2 Composition of Optical Measurement Assembly ..................................................... 8-3
8.3 Light source assembly ..................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.4 Component Locations and Replacement Methods .................................................................... 8-7
8.4.1 Locations and FRU details ............................................................................................ 8-7
8.4.2 Replacing optical assembly ............................................................................................ 8-7
8.4.3 Replacement of Lamp .................................................................................................... 8-9
8.4.4 Replacement of Lamp Radiating Fan ........................................................................ 8-10
8.4.5 Replacement of Reaction Cuvettes ............................................................................ 8-12
8.5 Adjustment of Photometer .......................................................................................................... 8-14
8.5.1 Photometer Alignment Window................................................................................. 8-14
8.5.2 Adjustment of New Photometer's Energy Parameters........................................... 8-15
8.5.3 Gain Parameter Adjustment of Each Channel......................................................... 8-16
8.5.4 Light Intensity Adjustment .......................................................................................... 8-18
8.5.5 Adjustment of Photoelectric Waveform and Signal Collecting Position ............. 8-19
8.5.6 Photoelectric Signal Collection (alignment) .............................................................. 8-23
8.5.7 Lamp Hour Inquiry ...................................................................................................... 8-25
IX
9 Troubleshooting 9-1
9.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2 Result Flags ....................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.3 Error Code........................................................................................................................................ 9-6
X
1 System Description
1-1
1.1 Overview
The BS-2000M/BS-2200M is a fully automated and computer-controlled chemistry
analyzer designed for in vitro determination of clinical chemistries in serum, plasma,
urine, and cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) samples. It is composed of the Analyzer, Sample
Delivery Module (SDM), and Operation Unit.
Figure 1.1 BS-2000M/BS-2200M Chemistry Analyzer
Analyzer SDM
1-2
1.2 Components of Analyzer
1.2.1 Introduction
The system has a throughput of 2000 tests per hour for single-/double-reagent
analysis with 3.6 seconds for each measuring period. It employs the "4 carousels + 5
probes + 2 sets of mixers" solution, which include one reaction carousel, one sample
carousel, one reagent carousel 1, one reagent carousel 2, reagent probes R11/R12,
reagent probes R21/R22, one sample probe (two needles on one probe arm), and
two mixer assemblies (6 paddles for each assembly). The two sets of reagent probes
respectively dispense R1 and R2, and the mixer assemblies stir sample and R2. The
photometric system, which is composed of gratings and diode array, performs
photometric measurement to the reaction cuvettes that hold sample/reagent mixture.
After testing, an 8-phase automatic cuvette washing is conducted by the cuvette wash
station.
The BS-2000M/BS-2200M has been designed with dual measuring system, which
consists of a two-ring reaction carousel, two cuvette wash stations, reagent probes
and sample probes for inner/outer reaction carousel, and two photometric systems.
The two measuring systems are independent from each other.
Figure 1.2 Overall structure of the system (left view)
Sample mixer assembly Reaction carousel Cuvette wash Reagent mixer Sample carousel
assembly assembly assembly assembly
R1 reagent carousel
R2 reagent carousel
ISE module
Concentrated ISE buffer Water tank Syringe assembly
wash solution
1-3
Figure 1.3 Overall structure of the system (right view)
Sample probe assembly Probe R21 Probe R11 Probe R12
Probe R22
Vacuum pump
assembly
Diluted wash
Fluidic interfaces Refrigeration module
solution tank
1.2.2 Functions of the System

The working procedure of the system is described as follows.
1. The system resets to initialize all mechanical units and wash the exterior and
interior of the probes and mixers.
2. Reaction cuvettes are washed through 8 phases, and run water blank test after
phase 6.
3. Reagent carousel 1 rotates to the first specified reagent position, and the probes
R11/R12 lower down simultaneously to aspirate reagent.
4. The reaction cuvettes are carried to the reagent dispense position after the 8-phase
washing. Probes R11 and R12 rotate simultaneously to the reaction carousel and
dispense R1 into the cuvettes on inner ring and outer ring.
5. R1 is incubated for several periods in the cuvettes.
6. The sample carousel rotates to the specified dispense position, and the sample
probe lowers down to aspirate specified amount of sample.
7. The reaction cuvettes with R1 added are carried to the sample dispense position,
and the sample probe rotates to the reaction carousel inner ring and then the outer
1-4
ring to dispense sample.
8. The reaction cuvettes with sample added are carried to the sample mixing position
for stirring.
9. For double-reagent tests, the reagent carousel 2 rotates to the second specified
reagent position after a fixed period, and the probes R21/R22 lower down to aspirate
reagent.
10. The reaction cuvettes are carried to the second reagent dispense position, and the
probes R21 and R22 rotate simultaneously to the reaction carousel and dispense R2
into the cuvettes on inner ring and outer ring.
11. With R2 added, the reaction cuvette rotates to the reagent mixing position for
stirring.
12. During each period, the reaction cuvette receives photometric measurement
(absorbance reading taking) when passing by the photometric unit;
13. Triple-/quadruple-reagent analysis is similar to single-/double-reagent analysis
stated above. (As for triple-/quadruple-reagent tests, the reaction cuvette with R2
dispensed will not be washed when passing by the wash station.)
14. The reaction cuvettes in which reaction is finished will be washed automatically
when passing by the wash station.
Table 1.1 Functions of system units

Unit Name Descriptions
Sample Performs aspiration and dispensing for all biochemistries and ISE
probe unit tests.
Sample Provides 140 positions to hold samples.
carousel 1 The two carousels are coaxial, with 90 positions on the external
and 2 two rings and 50 positions on the inner two rings.
The inner ring of the inner carousel provides a refrigerating
environment.
All positions on two rings of the outer carousel and outer ring of
the inner carousel support bar code scanning.
A fixed position is available on the front panel for holding sample
probe wash solution. Apply a bottle adapter before loading the
CD80 wash solution.
Probe R1 Provides two reagent probes: R11 and R12, to perform aspiration
unit and dispensing of R1 and R3 for all biochemistry tests.
Probe R2 Provides two reagent probes: R21 and R22, to perform aspiration
unit and dispensing of R2 and R4 for all biochemistry tests.
Reagent Two reagent carousels, each with two coaxial rings. The carousels
carousel 1/2 are used to hold reagents and wash solution, with two rings driven
unit independently. Each reagent carousel has 40 positions on outer
ring and 30 positions on inner ring.
All the positions support reagent bar code scanning.
20ml and 62ml, as well as 70ml (of HITACHI) reagent bottles are
supported.
The reagent carousel provides a refrigerating environment which
is constant within 2C-8C for 24 hours a day.
1-5
Unit Name Descriptions
Reaction 206 cuvettes respectively on inner ring and outer ring, 412
carousel cuvettes in total.
unit
Sample and Consists of two mixer units, with three mixer sets for each unit
reagent and two mixers for each set. The mixers are used to stir reaction
mixer unit liquid on inner/outer rings of the reaction carousel. Before
stirring, the mixers are cleaned with wash solution and then with
deionized water.
Photometric Two photometers for photometric measurement on inner/outer
unit rings of the reaction carousel. Reversed optics with 13
wavelengths: 340nm, 380nm, 412nm, 450nm, 505nm, 546nm,
570nm, 605nm, 660nm, 700nm, 740nm, 800nm, and 850nm.
Cuvette Dual-layer cuvette wash station for washing reaction cuvettes on
wash unit reaction carousel inner/outer rings through 8 phases. The wash
station is capable of detecting obstruct in vertical direction and of
preheating wash solution.
ISE unit Employs the ISE module of A&T. The theory of measurement is
(optional) indirect ion-selective electrode method.
The module supports Na+, K+, Cl-, and reference electrodes.
1-6
1.3 Components of Rack Feeder System
The rack feeder system consists of the sample delivery module (SDM) and rack
transfer unit. The SDM is an independent module attached to the right side of the
analyzer. No matter how many analyzers are interconnected, only one SDM is
configured. The rack transfer unit is installed in front of the analyzer, and the
quantity of rack transfer unit depends on that of the analyzer. The SDM is
composed of the rack supply unit, rack storage unit, rack buffer unit, bar code
scanning channel, and retrieval channel. The rack transfer unit consists of the passing
lane, normal lane, return lane, and lane change part.
Figure 1.4 Sample delivery module
1
2
1 - Rack buffer unit; 2 - Retrieval channel; 3 - Rack storage unit; 4 - Rack supply unit;
5 - Bar code scanning channel
1-7
Figure 1.5 Rack transfer unit
1 - Passing lane; 2 - Normal lane; 3 - Return lane; 4 - Lane change part
1-8
1.4 Functions of Rack Feeder System
The rack feeder system delivers sample to the aspirate position through sample racks
and retrieves samples that have finished sampling. The table below describes the
functions of each function area:
Table 1.2 Description of function areas

Function unit Function descriptions
Rack supply unit Used to load samples and supports the insertion
of STAT samples. It has a push-in part and STAT
push-back part. The push-in part of the rack
supply unit feeds samples into the bar code
scanning channel, while the STAT push-back
part responds to pressing of the STAT key and
pushes back the sample racks for a distance in
order to facilitate the insertion of STAT
samples.
Rack storage unit Provides area for retrieving the samples that
have finished testing. A push-in part is designed
to push sample rack into the storage unit.
Sensors are employed to detect the almost full
or the completely full status of the sample
retrieval area.
Rack buffer unit Receives sample racks that return from the rack
transfer unit and wait until test results are
worked out. Whether the samples need to be
rerun is determined while they wait here. In
addition, this unit provides the function for
transferring sample rack to the rack transfer
unit.
Bar code scanning channel Scans the bar code on sample racks and sample
tubes and detects whether samples have been
placed. In addition, it transfers sample rack to
the rack transfer unit. It has a push-in part and
push-out part.
Retrieval channel It is the passage to transfer sample rack to the
storage unit or the supply unit. It has a push-in
part used to carry sample rack to the storage
unit or back to the supply unit.
Passing lane Transfers sample rack directly to the quick lane
(or passing lane) of the next analyzer. It also
provides the function of STAT sample aspiration.
Normal lane Provides the function of aspirating sample on
routine sample racks.
Return lane Used to return sample tracks to the SDM that
have finished measurement.
Lane change part Used to switch the lanes, and provides the
function of switching between passing lane and
normal lane, passing lane and return lane,
normal lane and return lane.
1-9
1.5 Requirements on External Devices
1.5.1 Operation Unit

The operation unit (computer) is installed with the operating software to control the
running and operation of the analyzer and to process test data. The computer should
at least meet the following requirements:
CPU: Intel Core 2 Duo, 3.0GHz, dual-core.
Main board: BIOS, supporting network remote boot.
Hard disk: 320GB, with SATA interface.
Memory: 2GB.
Network adapter: Gigabit network card.
USB interface: 2.0, 2 or more.
Parallel port: 1.
Serial port: 3 or more.
Other: Built-in speaker.
Operating system: Windows 7 (32 bits, Professional).
1.5.2 Display Monitor

17 touchscreen monitor, with resolution of 12801024.
1.5.3 Printer
Supports inkjet printer, laser printer and stylus printer.
1.5.4 Water Supply Equipment

Water supply pressure: 49kPa - 392kPa.
Average flow: 95L/hour; transient peak flow: 4L/minute.
Water quality: meeting requirements of CLSI type II with specific resistance
greater than 1M.cm and silicate less than 0.1mg/L.
When the instrument uses water supplied by a water unit,
Make sure that the tube connecting the water unit outlet with the instrument
inlet is no longer than 10m.
The water tube provided by the instrument is ID12mm*OD18mm PVC tube,
which should be installed by the water unit supplier.
The water unit outlet tube has internal diameter no less than 7mm in order to
prevent insufficient water supply or too high water supply pressure.
When the instrument uses water supplied by a water supply module(optional),
1-10
Lay the water supply module between the deionized water tank (with cap) and
the instrument.
Make sure that the tube connecting the deionized water tank (with cap) with
the instrument inlet is no longer than 10m.
Choose a deionized water tank (with cap) with capacity of 150L - 250L.
Lay the water supply module on the ground.
1.5.5 Power Supply Equipment

Use an online UPS with power output no less than 5300VA, and connect the power
cord of the analyzer to an air switch fixed on wall. The air switch should be at least
16A, and 20A for the better. The power cord is 4mm2; and the earthing wire is
independently set with resistance less than 5 .
1-11
1.6 Product Configuration
Table 1.3 Product configuration list
Function module Configuration mode
Analyzer Standard
Sample delivery module Standard
Operation unit (PC) Standard (For domestic only)
Printer Optional
ISE module Optional
Built-in sample bar code reader Optional
Built-in sample rack bar code Standard
reader
Built-in reagent bar code reader Standard
External vacuum pump (For use in Optional
places above 2000m)
Built-in waste pump Standard
Water supply module Optional
Chemistry analyzer operating Standard
software
Data Management Software Standard
Windows 7 Operating System Accompanying the operation unit and
not sold alone.
1-12
1.7 Technical Specifications
1.7.1 Common Specifications

System
Random selection, multiple channels, multiple chemistries, continuous sample load,
and allowing new tests added at any time.
System structure
SDM + Analyzers + Computer.
Sample type
Serum, urine, plasma.
Maximum number of tests run simultaneously
67/67(single-/double-reagent) N analyzers.
Throughput
2000 tests/hour * N analyzers.
Up to 2200 tests/hour with ISE module configured.
Reaction types
Endpoint, Kinetic and Fixed-time; supporting
single-/double-/triple-/quadruple-reagent tests, and single-/double-wavelength tests.
Reaction time
The longest reaction time is 9 minutes for single-reagent test, and 5 minutes for
double-reagent test.
Reaction temperature
370.3C.
Test type
Clinical chemistries, Immunoturbidimetry, Therapeutic Drug Monitoring (TDM).
Predilution
Dilution ratio: 4~134. Dilution is done in reaction cuvette.
Operation mode
Tests are defined one by one via the operating software; panels and calculation tests
are supported.
Calibration math model
Single-point linear, two-point linear, multi-point linear, Logit-Log 4P, Logit-Log 5P,
Spline, Exponential, Polynomial, and Parabola.
Control
Westgard multi rules, Cumulative sum check, Twin plot.
1-13
Data processing
Capable of storing and outputting various types of data and charts, and calculating
among different chemistries.
Dimensions
Analyzer: 1165 mm1145 mm1580mm (Depth Height Length).
SDM: 1010 mm 920 mm 700mm (Depth Height Length).
Rack transfer unit: 215 mm 235 mm 1580mm (Depth Height Length).
Weight
Analyzer with rack transfer unit: 600kg20kg.
SDM: 139kg5kg.
Rack transfer unit: 150Kg5kg.
STAT sample
STAT samples can be inserted at any time and analyzed on the sample carousel or
STAT sample racks.
Networking
Allowed to connect with a LIS (Laboratory Information Management System).
1.7.2 Sample Specifications

Sample loading
Samples are loaded through racks and sample carousel.
Sample containers
Microtube: 1425mm, 0.5ml (Beckman); 1425mm, 2ml (Beckman);
1237mm, 2ml (Hitachi).
Primary tube: 1268.5mm, 1299mm, 12.775mm, 12.775mm,
12.7100mm, 1375mm, 1395mm, and 13100mm.
Plastic tube: 1268.5mm, 1299mm, 12.775mm, 12.775mm,
12.7100mm, 1375mm, 1395mm, and 13100mm.
Some sample positions (more than 25) support 16.592mm, 1675mm and
16100mm.
The sample racks support sample tubes with diameter of 13mm-16mm.
Dead volume of sample containers
Table 1.4 Dead volume of sample containers

Sample Container Specification Dead Volume
Sample container 1425mm, 0.5ml (Beckman) 210l
Sample container 1425mm, 2ml (Beckman) 150l
Sample container 1237mm, 2ml (Hitachi) 120l
1-14
Sample Container Specification Dead Volume
Primary tube or 1268.5mm 8mm more over the
plastic tube unacceptable sample
level height
Primary tube or 1299mm 8mm more over the
level height
Primary tube or 12.775mm 8mm more over the
level height
level height
level height
level height
Sample carousel
The sample carousel consists of two coaxial carousels, and each carousel has two
rings. The inner ring of the inner carousel provides a refrigerating environment, and
the other three rings support bar code scanning.
Sample positions on sample carousel
140 sample positions are available; 90 positions on two rings of the outer carousel
and 50 positions on two rings of the inner carousel. Standard, control, STAT and
dilution positions are included.
Sample rack
10 sample positions are available on each rack. Maximum of 30 sample racks can
be held simultaneously in the supply unit.
STAT sample
STAT samples can be inserted at any time and analyzed on the sample carousel or
the STAT sample rack.
Sample volume
1.5l - 25l, with an increment of 0.1l.
ISE sample: 22l.
Sample probe
One sample probe with two needles, featuring fluid level detection,
horizontal/vertical obstruct detection, clog detection, and sample level tracking.
Sample probe wash
The exterior and interior of the sample probe is washed with carryover rate less than
0.1%.
Sample input mode (bar code, etc)
1-15
Table 1.5 Sample bar code parameters
Parameter Value
Symbology Codabar, ITF, code128, code39, UPC/EAN, Code93
Minimum bar code density 0.19mm
Data bits 3-27
Format and content Defined by user
Maximum width 55mm
Minimum height 10mm
Maximum inclination 5
angle
Print quality No less than Class C according to the ANSI MH10.8M
Print Quality Specification.
Width and narrowness 2.5:1 to 3.0:1
1.7.3 Reagent Specifications

Reagent loading
R1 and R3 are placed on R1 reagent carousel, and R2 and R4 on R2 reagent carousel.
Dead volume of reagent bottles
Table 1.6 Dead volume of Mindray reagent bottles

Bottle Specification Dead Volume
20ml 2ml
62ml 3.5ml
70ml (For domestic only) 6ml
Reagent bar code

Code128 is supported, with bar code density of 0.19mm and width/narrowness ratio
of 2.5:1.
Table 1.7 Reagent bar code parameters

Parameter Value
Symbology Codabar, ITF, code128, code39, UPC/EAN, Code93
Minimum bar code density 0.25mm
Data bits 13-30
Format and content Defined by user
Maximum width 55mm
Minimum height 10mm
Maximum inclination angle 5
Print quality Class A (ANSI MH10.8M)
Width and narrowness 2.5:1 to 3.0:1
Note: Mindray reagents use the code128 bar code.
1-16
Reagent refrigeration
Refrigeration temperature: 2-8C.
Reagent addition approach
Reagent is aspirated and dispensed precisely by syringe, which is capable of detecting
fluid level and checking reagent volume.
Supported reagent types
R1, R2, R3 and R4.
Reagent volume
10l - 200l, with 0.5L increment.
Reagent carousel
Includes R1 and R2 reagent carousels, respectively holding R1/R3 and R2/R4. Each
carousel consists of two rings driven to rotate by separate step motors.
Number and volume of reagent bottle
Each reagent carousel has 40 positions on outer ring and 30 positions on inner ring.
20ml and 62ml, as well as 70ml (of HITACHI) reagent bottles are supported.
Reagent probe
4 reagent probes, including R11/R12 and R21/R22. All of them are capable of
sensing fluid level and detecting obstruct in horizontal and vertical directions.
Reagent probe wash
The exterior and interior of the probes are washed with carryover rate less than
0.1%.
Specifications and dead volume of reagent bottle
Reagent bottle: Mindray 20ml and 62ml, and Hitachi 70ml.
Dead volume: 20ml - 2ml, 62ml - 3.5ml, 70ml - 6ml.
Prevention of reagent cross contamination
Users are allowed to perform carryover settings, e.g. washing interior and exterior of
reagent probes and inserting special wash between tests.
1.7.4 Specifications of Reaction System

Optical pathlength of reaction cuvette
5mm
Specification and material of reaction cuvette
Internal dimensions: 5mm4mm29mm; external dimensions: 6mm5mm30mm;
made of permanent glass, with optical pathlength of 5mm.
Note: Due to different dimensions, the cuvettes cannot be replaced by those of the
BS-400 series, BS-800 series and BS-480 series.
Number of reaction cuvettes
206 cuvettes respectively on inner and outer rings of reaction carousel, 412 in total.
1-17
Mixing method
Sample and reagent mixer units are available, each unit having three mixer sets and
each set having two mixers. The two units are designed for stirring reaction liquid
when sample and R2/R3/R4 are respectively dispensed.
Reaction volume
80-280l.
Photometric system
Two photometers for optical measurement on inner/outer rings of the reaction
carousel.
Wavelength
13 wavelengths: 340nm, 380nm, 412nm, 450nm, 505nm, 546nm, 570nm, 605nm,
660nm, 700nm, 740nm, 800nm, and 850nm.
Light source
12V/50W tungsten halogen lamp, with its light divided by fibers into two bundles as
light input of the two photometers.
Grating type
Reversed optics of holographic concave flat-field gratings.
Wavelength accuracy
2nm
Number of wavelengths simultaneously measured for each test
One or two wavelengths.
Absorbance range
0-3.4A, optical path: 10mm
Resolution of photometer
0.001OD
1.7.5 Specifications of Operation Unit

Display monitor
17" LCD touchscreen monitor.
Operating system
Windows 7 (32 bits, Professional).
Communication interface
RS232, compatible with TCP/IP.
Printer
Supports inkjet printer, laser printer and stylus printer.
Data input
Keyboard, mouse, 17" touchscreen monitor, bar code reader, Remote Management
1-18
System (RMS, communicating through TCP/IP interface of static IP address), and
LIS (HL7 and ASTM1394, communicating through TCP/IP of static IP address or
serial port).
Data output
Display monitor, printer, RMS (communicating through TCP/IP interface of static
IP address), and LIS.
Data storage
Hard disk and USB interface.
1-19
1-20
2 Timing Control
2-1
2.1 Biochemistry Test Procedure
Figure 2.1 Biochemistry test procedure
According to the reaction curve as shown below, there is a measuring point in every
5 short periods. The first measuring point happens when R1 is dispensed; sample is
dispensed after the 3rd measuring point and mixed after the 4th one; R1 reacts with
sample from the 5th to 16th measuring point; R2 is dispensed and mixed with R1
after the 16th measuring point; from the 17th to 33rd measuring point, R1, sample
and R2 react with each other. See the figure below:
Figure 2.2 Reaction curve
2-2
2.2 Working Mode
The BS-2000M/BS-2200M has two sets of sampling systems and measuring systems,
with 3.6 seconds for each working period. The throughput for
single-/double-reagent test, therefore, is 2*3600/3.6=2000 tests/hour.
Conditions for achieving constant speed of 2000 tests/hour: Each sample has even
number of tests, which can be equally allocated on inner and outer rings of the
reaction carousel. Since the test is sequenced by sample, only if the sample probe
finishes sample dispensing in every 3.6 seconds for two tests on inner and outer rings
of the reaction carousel can the maximum test speed 2000 tests/hour be achieved.
The two rings of the reaction carousel correspond to the two measuring systems,
which can work in serial mode, parallel mode and mixed mode.
Serial mode: The two measuring systems performs photometric measurement for
different chemistries, that is, unique chemistries.
Parallel mode: The two measuring systems performs photometric measurement for
the same chemistries, that is, common chemistries.
Mixed mode: The two measuring systems performs photometric measurement for
both unique and common chemistries.
The chemistries corresponding to each measuring system should be run for
calibration and quality control. The specific mode used on each analyzer
can be defined by user. In practical situation, the first mode (serial mode) is often
used.
The purpose of distributing chemistries for two measuring systems on each analyzer
is to achieve the highest test efficiency. The bottleneck lies in the sample probe with
two needles, and only when the most of the probe is made can the highest test
efficiency be obtained. The principle of chemistry distribution, therefore, is to
allocate as evenly as possible the tests of each sample on the two measuring systems.
To be specific, chemistry distribution does not apply to the serial mode; in parallel
mode, if the sample has odd number of tests, the two measuring systems differ from
each other for one test, otherwise, they can have equal number of tests; in mixed
mode, the unique chemistries should be first allocated, and then the remaining
common chemistries be allocated as evenly as possible.
Moreover, in serial and mixed modes, those chemistries that may contaminate each
other can be allocated according to the carryover settings on different measuring
systems under the average allocation principle.
It is user that determines chemistries to be run by each measuring system and places
the relevant reagents on the reagent carousels. The two measuring systems can
perform photometric measurement for same or different chemistries, and the same
chemistries must be respectively run for calibration and quality control on each
system.
2-3
2.3 Sequential Actions of Reaction Carousel
The reaction carousel has 206 cuvettes on each of the two rings. In each working
period, it rotates counterclockwise for 41 cuvette positions and then stops. In every 5
periods it rotates for 205 cuvette positions, that is, it go backwards clockwise for one
cuvette position for every 5 periods. A working period is 3.6 seconds. The reaction
carousel rotates for 41 cuvette positions, which takes about 1 second, and then it
stops for about 2.5 seconds. When it stops in each period, the system performs
cuvette wash, R1/R3 dispensing, R2/R4 dispensing, sample dispensing, sample
mixing, and reagent mixing.
2-4
2.4 Sequential Actions of Probes and Mixers
For better description, components of the two measuring systems and their
functions are defined below: The basic principle of the following definition is that,
the measuring system for the reaction carousel inner ring is numbered 1 and the one
for the outer ring is numbered 2. The definition is as follows:
Probe R11: the first reagent probe assembly in the short arm radius. It aspirates
R1 from the outer ring of reagent carousel 1 and dispenses it to the reaction
carousel inner ring.
Probe R12: the first reagent probe assembly in the long arm radius. It aspirates
R1 from the inner ring of reagent carousel 1
and dispenses it to the reaction carousel outer ring.
Probe R21: the second reagent probe assembly in the short arm radius. It
aspirates R2 from the outer ring of reagent carousel 2
and dispenses it to the reaction carousel inner ring.
Probe R22: the second reagent probe assembly in the long arm radius. It
aspirates R2 from the inner ring of reagent carousel 2
and dispenses it to the reaction carousel outer ring.
Reagent carousel 1: the reagent carousel in the front of the instrument panel
intended for holding R1 and R3.
Reagent carousel 2: the reagent carousel in the back of the instrument panel
intended for holding R2 and R4.
Reagent carousel R11: outer ring of reagent carousel 1, holding R1 and R3 for
use in test on reaction carousel inner ring.
Reagent carousel R12: inner ring of reagent carousel 1, holding R1 and R3 for
use in test on reaction carousel outer ring.
Reagent carousel R21: outer ring of reagent carousel 2, holding R2 and R4 for
use in test on reaction carousel inner ring.
Reagent carousel R22: inner ring of reagent carousel 2, holding R2 and R4 for
use in test on reaction carousel outer ring.
S1: sample probe needle for dispensing sample to reaction carousel inner ring in
biochemical test and ISE test.
S2: sample probe needle for dispensing sample to reaction carousel outer ring.
Sample mixer unit
Mixer MS11: #1 sample mixer of first measuring system (for reaction
carousel inner ring).
Mixer MS12: #1 sample mixer of second measuring system (for reaction
carousel outer ring).
2-5
Reagent mixer unit
Mixer MR11: #1 reagent mixer of first measuring system (for reaction
Mixer MR12: #1 reagent mixer of second measuring system (for reaction
2.4.1 Sequential Actions of Reagent Probe

Sequential actions of probes R11 and R21 (with short arms)
Sequential actions: Lower into reagent bottle -> aspirate reagent -> raise to above
reagent carousel -> rotate to reaction carousel -> lower to reaction carousel ->
dispense reagent -> raise to above reaction carousel -> rotate to wash well -> start to
wash -> rotate to above reagent carousel. See the figure below:
Figure 2.3 Actions of reagent probes
Rotate to top of reaction carousel

Vertical home position
Mechanical zero position
Rotate to wash position Rotate to top of reagent carousel
Rise to vertical home position
Rise to vertical Washing position

wash position
Lower to aspirate position
Dispense position
Aspirate position
Process of reagent aspiration: While lowering to the reagent carousel, the reagent
probes, after detecting fluid level, move for certain steps and then stop. They aspirate
2-6
the specified volume of reagent plus 5l, raise for 10mm and then aspirate 1l air.
They cannot detect fluid level when stopping above the instrument panel.
Process of reagent dispensing: Probe R11 calculates the dispense position by tracking
fluid level and waits for fluid level signal while lowering to the reaction carousel.
When the probe detects fluid level, the system deems the cuvette wash residue
relatively high and gives an alarm. The probe cannot detect fluid level when stopping
above the instrument panel.
For probe R21, it is considered normal if the probe detects fluid level from lowering
to reaction carousel to finishing reagent dispensing; otherwise, an alarm will be given.
If probe R11 or R21 (with short arms) rotates to aspirate and dispense liquid,
probe R12 or R22 will also move horizontally for washing no matter it needs to
dispense reagent or not. If probe R12 or R22 does not need to dispense reagent, it
will not lower down for aspirating and dispensing.
Sequential actions of probes R12 and R22 (with long arms)
Sequential actions: Lower into reagent bottle -> aspirate reagent -> raise to above
reagent carousel -> rotate to reaction carousel -> lower to reaction carousel ->
dispense reagent -> raise to above reaction carousel -> rotate to wash well -> start to
wash -> rotate to above reagent carousel.
While lowering to the reagent carousel, the reagent probes, after detecting fluid level,
move for certain steps and then stop. They cannot detect fluid level when stopping
above the instrument panel.
The probes aspirate the specified volume of reagent plus 5l.
The probes raise for 10mm and then aspirate certain volume of air. Process of
reagent dispensing: Probe R12 calculates the dispense position by tracking fluid level
and waits for fluid level signal while lowering to the reaction carousel. When the
probe detects fluid level, the system deems the cuvette wash residue relatively high
and gives an alarm. The probe cannot detect fluid level when stopping above the
instrument panel. For probe R22, it is considered normal if the probe detects fluid
level from lowering to reaction carousel to finishing reagent dispensing; otherwise, an
alarm will be given, and the probe will raise to the home position for other actions
after the syringe finishes dispensing.
If probe R12 or R22 (with long arms) rotates to aspirate and dispense liquid, probe
R11 or R21 (with short arms) will also move horizontally for washing no matter it
needs to dispense reagent or not. If probe R11 or R21 does not need to dispense
reagent, it will not lower down for aspirating and dispensing.
2.4.2 Sequential Actions of Sample Probe

The sample probe consists of two needles as shown in the figure below, and the
syringe and fluidic path of each needle are controlled by a separate drive system. In
each working period, if one of the two needles needs to dispense sample, the entire
probe rotates to the sample container for aspirating and then to the target cuvette for
dispensing; if both needles need to dispense sample, they aspirate sample
simultaneously and then dispense to two cuvettes successively; if the two needles are
required to dispense sample to cuvettes on outer and inner rings of the reaction
carousel, dispensing to inner ring precedes that to outer ring.
2-7
Figure 2.4 Sample probe
Sequential actions of sample probe:

Lower into sample container -> aspirate sample -> raise to above sample carousel ->
rotate to reaction carousel inner ring -> lower to reaction carousel -> dispense
sample -> raise to above reaction carousel -> rotate to reaction carousel outer ring ->
lower to reaction carousel -> dispense sample -> raise to above reaction carousel ->
rotate to wash well -> start to wash -> rotate to above wash well -> rotate to sample
rack, reaction carousel, or aspirate position on sample carousel. See the figure below:
Figure 2.5 Actions of sample probe
Rise to vertical position

after cleaning
Rotate to wash well
for cleaning
Rise to vertical wash
position after aspirating
Height over
wash well Height for dispensing sample
Height for
aspirating sample
When aspirating liquid, the sample probe, after detecting fluid level, moves for
certain steps and then stops. The probe cannot detect fluid level
when stopping above the instrument panel in order to prevent error.
It aspirates excessive 5l for each aspiration.
When dispensing sample to reaction cuvette, the sample probe calculates the
stopping height by tracking fluid level, and the dispense position is certain steps
above the height inside the cuvette.
2.4.3 Sequential Actions of Mixer Unit

The sample and reagent mixer modules adopt a 6-mixer structure and respectively
stir the reaction liquid for the two measuring systems. The following description is
based on one of the measuring systems.
In each period, the three mixer sets are washed with wash solution in phase 1, and
then washed with deionized water and stir in phase 2. Each mixer set completes
washing in two periods. The mixers start next action when the reaction carousel
stops rotating. When the mixers start lowering down, the wash valve is turned on,
and the mixer motor starts when the mixers lower down for certain steps. Rotation
2-8
of the mixers are driven by a step motor.
The two mixer modules are the same in working mode. On each module, each mixer
set works in the following procedure: phase-1 wash with wash solution in period 1,
phase-2 wash with deionized water in period 2, and stirring reaction liquid in period 3.
They rotate successively in the following angles: 120clockwise, 120clockwise and
then 240counterclockwise. That is, when a mixer set is stirring, the other two are
being cleaned respectively with wash solution in phase 1 and with deionized water in
phase Working timing of mixer: In every batch of test, the mixers work through the
process from the two periods before stirring for the first test till the six periods after
stirring for the last one (including the special wash in three periods after test). They
are washed normally with wash solution and deionized water in the first two periods
and only with deionized water in the last four (with V12 and V13 kept off). In this
way, each mixer set is washed completely through two phases with no wash solution
left.
No matter each chemistry requested is of single reagent or double reagent, R2
mixing is required, so that the mixers are washed completely before and after every
batch of test. Performing reagent stirring for all tests can ensure the consistency of
test conditions.
2-9
2.5 Test Procedure
A working period is 3.6 seconds, and the first period is when R1 is dispensed into
cuvette. The following test procedure is based on any of the cuvettes.
Period 1, 6, 11, 16, 21, and 26: washing No.N cuvette through phase 1 to 6.
Period 31: measuring water blank for No.N cuvette.
Period 36 and 41: washing No.N cuvette through phase 7 and 8.
Period 43: dispensing R1 to No.N cuvette.
Period 59: dispensing sample to No.N cuvette.
Period 62: mixing sample in No.N cuvette, with single-reagent chemistry starting
reaction.
Period 123: dispensing R2 to No.N cuvette in the case of double-reagent chemistry.
Period 126: mixing R2 in No.N cuvette, with double-reagent chemistry starting
reaction.
Period 207: finishing single-/double-reagent chemistry test, and, if not
triple-/quadruple chemistry,
washing cuvette for phase 1.
Period 249: dispensing R3 to No.N cuvette in the case of triple-/quadruple-reagent
chemistry.
Period 268: mixing R3 in No.N cuvette by sample mixer.
Period 329: dispensing R4 to No.N cuvette in the case of quadruple-reagent
chemistry.
Period 332: mixing R4 in No.N cuvette by reagent mixer.
Period 413: washing No.N cuvette for phase 1. The reaction is finished in this period.
2.5.1 Test Procedure of Double-Reagent Chemistry

The test procedure of double-reagent chemistry is as shown below. The maximum
reaction time of such chemistry is about 5 minutes.
2-10
Figure 2.6 Test procedure of double-reagent chemistry
Add R1
Add S
Stir S
Add R2
Stir R2
Reaction ends
8-phase wash
8-phase wash
Test procedure of double-reagent chemistry
A photometric measuring period is 18 seconds. The measuring points for

single-/double-reagent chemistry are defined as follows:
2-11
Table 2.1 Definition of measuring points for single-/double-reagent chemistry
Point P4, representing dispensing of sample, is invalid and does not appear on
reaction curve. Point P33 represents the photometric data collected during
deceleration of the reaction carousel from rotating to stopping, and the data is
invalid.
2.5.2 Antigen Addition Procedure

The antigen addition function means not washing cuvettes in the end of the current
test cycle but adding more sample to cuvette in the next test cycle and then checking
for antigen excess according to the reaction curves drawn before and after sample
addition. The measuring points for antigen addition are shown below.
2-12
Table 2.2 Definition of measuring points for single-/double-reagent chemistry
2.5.3 Sample Dilution Procedure

Sample dilution ration is adjustable between 1:3 and 1:133. The test procedure for
sample dilution is described as follows:
The cuvette for sample dilution has no reaction curve.
Period N: Probe R11 aspirates water from position W and dispenses it as R1 to a
clean cuvette in reaction carousel inner ring. The cuvette is marked M.
Period N+16: The sample to be diluted is dispensed into cuvette M.
Period N+19: Cuvette M is carried to sample mixing position for stirring.
Period N+21: R1 for diluting sample is dispensed into cuvette M-37 (inner ring)
or cuvette M-39 (outer ring).
Period N+37: The sample probe aspirates diluted sample from the reaction
carousel and dispenses it to the sample dispense position.
2-13
Period N+40: Cuvette M-37 or M-39 is carried to reagent mixing position for
stirring. The reaction starts for single-reagent chemistry. In the case of
double-/triple-/quadruple-reagent chemistry, reagent is dispensed and mixed
successively in cuvette M-37 or M-39 in the following periods, which is same as
the normal test period.
Sample aspiration/dispensing is same for the sample dilution period and normal test
period, except that the sample probe rotates in the previous period to the diluting
position to aspirate diluted sample.
Sample dilution is finished on reaction carousel inner ring only by probe R11, and the
diluted sample can be analyzed on either the inner ring or outer ring.
2.5.4 Special Wash Procedure

The BS-2000M/BS-2200M supports special wash for the sample probe, reagent
probes, mixers and reaction cuvettes, with the aim of eliminating carryover and
preventing stains from accumulating on exterior and interior of the probes, mixers
and cuvettes. The special wash is available in three modes: comprehensive special
wash, special wash probes and mixers, and special wash sample probe.
Comprehensive special wash (for sample probe, reagent probes, mixers, and
reaction cuvettes):
The wash procedure is similar with the double-reagent test procedure. Probes
R11/R12 and the sample probe dispense specified amount of wash solution to all
cuvettes, the mixers stir the wash solution, and the cuvettes are washed. Unlike the
double-reagent test procedure, probes R21/R22 only dispenses part of the wash
solution to cuvettes, with the remaining part not dispensed till washed in wash well.
The double-reagent test procedure is performed continuously for 206 cuvettes
respectively on inner and outer rings. This special mode is often used for cleaning
reaction cuvettes.
Special wash probes and mixers (including sample probe, reagent probes and mixers):
The wash procedure is similar with the double-reagent test procedure. Probes
R11/R12 and the sample probe dispense specified amount of wash solution to all
cuvettes, the mixers stir the wash solution, and the cuvettes are washed. The wash
times can be defined by user. This wash mode is often used in the following
conditions:
1. Special wash is determined in carryover settings and inserted in test process to
prevent cross contamination.
2. Special wash is performed before and after testing. It is optional before testing,
and executed for three times by default after every batch of test.
3. Special wash is performed by user in non-testing status to clean the probes and
mixers.
Special wash sample probe:
The sample probe aspirates specified amount of wash solution and dispenses it to
the wash well, and then washed internally and externally with deionized water in the
wash well. The special wash is performed in test process for every certain number of
tests in order to prevent probe clogging. Each wash period is 3.6 seconds.
2-14
Note: During special wash, the reagent probes and sample probe aspirate the
maximum amount of wash solution that they support. The aspiration amount of
wash solution is: 200l for probes R11/R12, 25l for sample probe S1/S2, and 150l
for probes R21/R22. They are the one set for the probes, and the actual amount of
each probe should be the set one plus excessive amount.
2.5.5 Dilution Procedure of Concentrated Wash Solution

The BS-2000M/BS-2200M supports use of concentrated wash solution. The diluent
is the deionized water used for cleaning reagent probes interior.
The addition procedure of concentrated wash solution is described as follows:
During probe wash prior to the dilution, the syringe aspirates required amount of
diluent for diluting the concentrated wash solution. Before rotating to the reagent
carousel, the reagent probe aspirates 1l air to prevent swinging liquid from the tip.
After aspirating specified amount of concentrated wash solution from the reagent
carousel, it raises for a distance to aspirate 1l air and then dispenses the wash
solution plus 2l air plus specified amount of diluent. The diluent amount is
calculated based on the reagent dilution ratio defined in chemistry parameters and
should not exceed 200l. To be consistent with the reagent volume in normal test,
the total volume of concentrated wash solution and diluent should be within
80-200l.
Figure 2.7 Sketch of reagent probe aspirating air
1L air
Reagent
1L air
2.5.6 Start/End Points of Test

The following actions are executed before every batch of test begins:
1. Mechanical reset.
2. Establishing vacuum.
2-15
3. Turning on deionized water circulating pump P03, water preheating and diluted
wash solution pump P06.
4. System reset.
5. Scanning sample and reagent bar code (if bar code module is configured).
6. Cleaning and measuring reaction cuvettes.
After every batch of test:
1. Compulsively inserting three washes with wash solution after testing (different
from existing models).
The special wash after testing is considered as a double-reagent chemistry and run in
the same procedure.
2. After finishing the dispensing or mixing task (including special wash after testing)
in the last period, the sample probe and reagent probes are washed continuously for
three periods with deionized water in the wash well, and particularly, the sample
mixers and reagent mixers are washed for 6 periods.
3. After finishing all test actions, the system does not execute system reset but wash
the reaction cuvettes
with deionized water and dry them according to the fluidic timing.
4. After testing, the system releases vacuum, turns off the diluted wash solution
pump P06, deionized water circulating pump P03 and water preheating.
2-16
2.6 ISE Test
2.6.1 Workflow of ISE module

The BS-2000M/BS-2200M has employed the ISE module of A&T in Japan. It works
in the following procedure. As shown in the figure below, the common procedures
of the ISE module include two-point slope calibration, normal test and daily
maintenance.
Figure 2.8 Workflow of ISE module
Startup
Switch on power
procedure of
supply
ISE module
Initialization
System parameter configuration
Test parameter configuration
Calibration parameter
configuration
Two-point calibration
Routine ISE tests Daily maintenance of ISE module
2.6.2 Startup Procedure

The ISE module of A&T is used. It performs initialization, and configuration of
system parameters and test parameters during startup process. (Applied only when a
new ISE module is installed)
2-17
Figure 2.9 Startup procedure of ISE module
Startup
Switch on power
procedure of
supply
ISE module
Initialization
System parameter configuration
Test parameter configuration
Calibration parameter
configuration
Two-point calibration
Routine ISE tests Daily maintenance of ISE module
If configured, the ISE module completes the following actions during startup
procedure:
Initializing.
Priming and emptying.
Receiving and configuring system parameters sent from the operation unit.
Receiving and configuring test parameters sent from the operation unit.
2.6.3 Normal Test Procedure

In continuous testing, each period for ISE serum is 18 seconds (5 periods used with
4 biochemical periods interval), and that for ISE urine is 24 seconds (7 periods used
with 6 biochemical periods interval, first two periods of incubation same as those of
serum). An ISE test period starts from sending test request till returning results.
When receiving "test request" from the operation unit, the ISE module returns a
"response" immediately, which contains the required times of buffer prime.
After certain time since receiving the "test request", the module sends a message to
the operation unit indicating that buffer prime has been finished and sample should
be dispensed. The sample probe waiting over the ISE module lowers down to
dispense sample and then leaves the fluid level. Later, the operation unit returns
"sample dispensing finished" message to the ISE module.
After that, the module starts measuring the sample, and after certain time since
sending the "sample dispensing finished" message
returns test results to the operation unit.
The priming time required for different cycles are determined based on the test
interval and notified to the operation unit through the "response" of the ISE module.
2-18
The priming principles include:
If the ISE module has been idle for less than 5s, no prime is required during the
next batch of test.
If it has been idle for 5s to 3min, a prime is added prior to the next batch of
test.
If it has been idle for 3min to 10min, two primes are added prior to the next
batch of test.
If it has been idle for over 10min, three primes are added.
2.6.4 Two-Point Slope Calibration Procedure

Two-point calibration is one of the indispensable steps during ISE application, and it
is performed to calibrate the ISE module. During two-point calibration, calibrators
of high and low levels need to be tested in the order of: H->H->H->L->L->L->L
(in normal conditions). (H: high-level calibrator, L: low-level calibrator).
Calibration test: H is tested for the 1st time to activate the electrodes, and then tested
for the 2nd time to record the voltage value. For the 3rd time, H is tested again to
record another voltage value, which is compared with the previous one. If the
difference is less than 3(mV), the calibration succeeds, and test of L continues; if it
exceeds 3, H is tested again until the bias between two adjacent voltage values is less
than 3, and the H test is no more than 8 times.
If the H test is passed, L is tested in the same way as L. If L test fails after 8 times,
an alarm is given; if it succeeds, another L test is added to record another voltage
value, which is compared with the average of the previous two. The voltage bias
must be within -4-2; otherwise, an alarm is given.
No matter H test or L test, if it is performed for over 8 times and the bias of the last
two voltage still exceeds 3, an alarm is given indicating calibration failure.
2.6.5 Electrode Wash Procedure

Electrodes are washed with wash solution to remove the proteins left on them during
testing. They should be washed every day.
The following actions are executed during the electrode wash procedure:
1. The operation unit sends an electrode wash request to the ISE module.
2. The ISE pump dispenses 728l (22*33) diluent to the sample cup and then returns
a signal indicating ready for electrode wash.
3. The sample carousel rotates with the ISE wash solution at the aspiration port.
4. The sample probe rotates to the aspirate position and aspirates 22l ISE wash
solution.
5. The sample probe dispenses the wash solution to the ISE sample cup and sends a
signal indicating dispensing finished.
6. The ISE module washes the electrodes and then returns a report after finishing the
wash.
2-19
2.6.6 Tube Wash Procedure
ISE tubes are washed to clear the protein fibers left inside of them in order to
prevent blockage. (If more than 500 samples of dialysis patient are analyzed every
month, perform the procedure in every 3 days. ) (If more than 100 samples of
dialysis patient are analyzed every month, perform the procedure once a week. )
The following actions are executed during the tube wash procedure:
Replace the Na, K, Cl and reference electrodes with a spacer.
Remove the spacer's cap and pour in about 5ml deproteinized wash solution.
The operation unit sends a tube wash instruction.
After washing is finished, install back the Na, K, Cl and reference electrodes.
Run two-point calibration.
2-20
2.7 Resetting Procedure
The resetting includes failure restore, system reset and mechanical reset.
2.7.1 Failure Restore

When such errors, like probe/mixer collision, carousel positioning error or step
missing, data processing error, and communication failure that will not cause any
components to stop, happen, if the reaction carousel and cuvette wash station do not
miss steps or have no positioning error, the moving parts automatically restore their
failures to continue with the sampling and the test, and the reaction carousel still
rotates normally for photometric measurement, thus resuming the test and keeping it
going smoothly. Those tests that do not finish dispensing of sample or reagent due
to the failure restore are invalidated.
In order to reduce the tests invalidated due to failure restore, only the failed unit is
recovered while other modules continue with the normal test period.
What should be noted it that, the reagent probes of the two measuring systems
intersect, and both of the probes will restore if one of them fails. Failure restore is
completed in two test periods with the following procedure:
The reaction carousel, wash station and mixers work as in normal test period.
The reagent probes and sample probe return to the vertical home position in the
beginning.
When the probes raise to a safe position, the reagent carousels and sample
carousel start rotating to reset.
After raising to the vertical home position, the probes start resetting horizontally
and vertically.
After certain time since the probes' resetting, the syringes evacuate for washing
with same timing as normal period.
After resetting, the probes and mixers rotate to the relevant horizontal position
as required in the next period, that is, probes to the aspirate position and mixers
to the mixing position.
2.7.2 System Reset

System reset is similar with failure restore except for the following:
The reaction carousel is calibrated by passing the zero position and then stops at
the resetting position.
The wash station finds the zero position and then returns to the home position.
The probes' washing time is longer, because the syringes evacuate, aspirate full
and reset during the washing process.
No matter during horizontal or vertical resetting, the probes move successively
to the following positions during the washing process: vertical zero position (low
speed) ->
2-21
vertical home position (normal speed) -> horizontal zero position (low speed) ->
horizontal wash position (normal speed) -> vertical wash position (normal
speed).
2.7.3 Mechanical Reset

Mechanical reset is performed during the startup initialization process, with the
purpose of powering on all drive motors except for syringe motor to stop at the
preset position. It is similar with system reset only except that it does not include the
probe wash and syringe actions.
2-22
2.8 Sequential Actions of Startup and Shutdown
In startup procedure, the analyzer, controlled by the operating software, completes a
series of initialization actions to enter the Standby status. The operation procedure is
as follows:
The analyzer is powered on.
The operating software is run and starts checking the running environment.
Check of communication and status of middle-/lower-layer units: The
upper-layer unit sends a handshake instruction to all units of the analyzer,
in order to check if the communication and status of the middle-/lower-layer
units are normal.
Query of analyzer parameters and status: including the status of various moving
parts, and of components of the hydraulic unit and pyrology unit.
Dark current of the photometric system is measured.
The reaction carousel temperature control is turned on.
The lamp is turned on for 20 minutes to get steady and then checked.
The hydraulic unit starts initialization.
The deionized water circulating pump P03 is switched on.
The vacuum pump is turned on.
System reset is executed.
The preheating of deionized water and wash solution for washing cuvettes is
turned on.
The deionized water circulating pump P03 is switched off.
The sample carousel and reagent carousels are scanned for identifying bar code
(only when bar code readers are configured.)
The ISE module stats initialization (only if an ISE module is configured.)
If the conditions for system standby are met, the system enters into Standby
status.
If an error occurs in any of the steps 2 to 10, the system directly enters the Failure
status without executing the remaining actions. The lamp gets steady after turned on
for 20 minutes, and the reaction carousel is considered normal with temperature at
370.3. If the requirement is not met after temperature control is turned on for
30 minutes, the system gives a message indicating reaction carousel temperature
unsteady and enters Standby status.
The shutdown procedure is as follows:
When the system is in Failure, Sleep or Standby status, the shutdown procedure
can be performed.
The ISE module, if configured, is washed automatically.
The lamp power is turned off.
2-23
The reaction carousel temperature control, preheating of circulating water, and
the preheating of deionized water and wash solution for washing cuvettes are
turned off.
Fluidic components like deionized water circulating pump P03 and vacuum
pump are turned off. Vacuum pressure is released after the vacuum pump's
turning off.
The database is shut down. If the operation fails, the system gives a warning,
and continues the shutdown after confirmation.
The system exits.
When user selects Exit on the main screen, the shutdown procedure is executed
automatically. If it fails, user will be prompted to skip the shutdown procedure and
exit in emergency.
2-24
2.9 Sequential Actions of Pumps
2.9.1 Refrigeration Circulating Pump P02

Pump P02 starts working once the main power switch is turned on.
2.9.2 Deionized Water Circulating Pump P03

Before test begins, pump P03 is turned on, and needs 1 second to establish pressure.
It is kept on during the entire test process.
In Standby status, the pump is turned on at least 1 second before relevant wash
actions begin. The wash actions include:
Cuvette wash and auto dilution of cuvette wash unit.
Interior wash and exterior wash of sample probe unit.
Interior wash and exterior wash of reagent probe units.
Mixer wash of mixer unit.
The pump is turned off when the system is in Standby status and not running any
procedure needing the pump.
If the water tank empty alarm occurs, pump P03 is kept off, and cannot be turned
on until the alarm is removed.
2.9.3 Degassed Water Booster Pumps P04 and P13

Switching on/off of the degassed water booster pumps P04 and P13 are closed
related the probe interior wash procedure. Before probe interior wash begins, the two
pumps are turned on, and the corresponding return valves V09 and V08 are switched
on 1s ahead to facilitate the pumps.
Pump P04 controls three probe units: S1, R11 and R12. It is turned on before any of
the units starts interior wash and turned off when all the three units finish interior
wash.
Pump P13 controls three probe units: S2, R21 and R22. It is turned on before any of
the units starts interior wash and turned off when all the three units finish interior
wash.
2.9.4 Concentrated Wash Solution Pump P05

The pump ensures concentrated wash solution to be diluted at 1:50 and is controlled
in the follow mode:
Dilution conditions: Dilution can be started if one of the following conditions is
met.
2-25
Signal of low level floater FL06 of the diluted wash solution tank is detected and
means the floater does not rise.
No water tank empty alarm is triggered.
No concentrated wash solution tank empty alarm is triggered.
Dilution procedure:
Pump P03 is turned on and kept. If it is on, the next step continues.
When P03 is turned on for 1 second, (If it is on, dilution starts directly.) dilution
valve V20 is switched on, and after certain time pump P05 is switched on to
pump CD80 from the concentrated wash solution tank to the diluted wash
solution tank.
Conditions of ending dilution: Dilution is ended when one of the following
conditions is met.
Normal ending:
When signal of high level floater FL09 (rising) of the diluted wash solution tank is
detected, the dilution is ended after the period is over.
When one of the following conditions is met (abnormal ending):
i. Water tank empty alarm is triggered.
ii. Concentrated wash solution tank empty alarm is triggered.
Actions: No matter if the current dilution period is over or not, the concentrated
wash solution pump P05 and dilution valve V20 are switched off directly.
The dilution time exceeds 82min, and the low-level floater FL06 of the diluted wash
solution tank is ON (abnormal ending).
Actions: When the current dilution period is over, the dilution is terminated, and it is
performed again if conditions are met.
2.9.5 Wash Solution Circulating Pump P06

Before test begins, pump P06 is turned on, and needs 1 second to establish pressure.
It is kept on all through the test process.
When cuvette wash is to be performed in Standby status, it is turned on at least 1s
earlier; it is also turned on for auto dilution in Standby status.
If no cuvette wash and auto dilution is performed in Standby status, the pump is
turned off. If the wash solution tank empty alarm occurs, pump P06 is kept off, and
cannot be turned on until the alarm is removed.
2.9.6 Waste Pump P07

During testing
Pump P07 is turned on when test begins, kept on during the entire test process, and
turned off after certain time when all washes are finished.
2-26
During resetting
The pump is turned on when resetting begins (including startup reset), and turned
off after certain time when the resetting is finished.
During other alignment and maintenance procedures
The pump is turned on before either of sample probe wash, reagent probe wash,
mixer wash, or cuvette wash begins, and turned off after certain time when the wash
is finished. During continuous washing, it is turned on prior to the first wash and
turned off after certain time when the last wash is finished.
During the washing, if an error occurs that will terminate the wash process, pump
P07 is turned off after the wash is finished; if washing continues in the event of an
error, the pump still works and is turned off after certain time when the wash is
finished.
Abnormal conditions
Pump P07 is checked when either of the high- or low-concentration waste collector
floater is ON. If:
the pump is on, it is kept for certain time and then turned off.
the pump is off, it is turned on. If either of the high- or low-concentration waste
collector floater is OFF, the pump is kept for a few seconds and then turned off. If
an floater alarm remains, the pump is turned off.
While the analyzer is powered on, pump P07 is turned on for every 12 hours and
kept for certain time (normally about 10 seconds).
2.9.7 Primary Vacuum Pumps P08/P14 and External Vacuum

Pump P10(optional)
Pumps P08, P14 and P10 are switched on before testing begins. Testing will not start
until they are turned on to establish vacuum.
The three pumps are kept on all through the test process.
The three pumps are turned on before the wash unit starts executing any action (e.g.
cuvette wash, fluidic diagnosis, maintenance command, etc.) related to cuvette wash
in Standby status.
If the wash unit does not execute such actions in Standby status, the three pumps are
turned off.
The pumps are turned off in Sleep status, and turned on for fluidic initialization
when the system is woken up.
The external vacuum pump P10 is turned off together with the primary vacuum
pumps P08 and P14, when such errors like vacuum/waste container fluid level alarm,
pressure alarm, cuvette wash pausing and cuvette wash stopping happen.
Pump P10 is switched on prior to pumps P08 and P14. No matter pump P10 is
configured or not, the operating software deems it existing during vacuum
establishment.
2-27
2.9.8 Whole Unit Degassing Pump P09
P09 is a negative pressure pump, and the negative pressure can be detected as
absolute pressure by the pressure detection board.
During normal testing, when the pressure detection board detects the whole unit
degassing pressure greater than 18Kpa, P09 is turned on; when it detects the pressure
less than 15Kpa, P09 is turned off.
When the system status is Sleep, P09 is off without performing pressure check.
When the system status is Standby,
During startup process, P09 is turned on prior to fluidic initialization and turned off
after that.
During shutdown process, P09 is kept off.
2.9.9 ISE Degassing Pump

In normal conditions, the degassing pressure of the ISE module is kept within
-27kPa - -30kPa. If the pressure is detected beyond this range during testing, P12 is
turned on. P12 does not work in other statuses.
2-28
3 Software Introduction
This chapter provides instructions of installing, upgrading and uninstalling the

BS-2000M/BS-2200M operating software. The operating instructions are excluded
here and can be found in the Operator's Manual.
3-1
3.1 Software Installation
3.1.1 Introduction of Installation Package

The installation package of the operating software contains three folders: Setup,
SetupGuide, and Thirdparty.
Figure 3.1 Folders in operating software installation package
Setup folder: includes the operating software installation file setup.exe and the
KillBsLog tool that can end the Bslog service.
Figure 3.2 Setup folder
BsLog: a service run automatically when the operating software is started up, and
used to record the logs of the software. When started up, the software checks if the
service is started, and if it is not started, gives an alarm and fails in startup. When
logging on the software, you are allowed to end this process, and this action will not
be recorded in the logs.
SetupGuide folder: includes software installation guide and upgrading guide.
Thirdparty folder: includes dotnetfx and SQLExp installation packages. The former
contains the installation program of Microsoft .net Framework and is the running
environment assembly of SQL; while the latter is database software.
3.1.2 Folder Structure

The default installation path of the operating software is: D:\mindray\BS2000.
After installation, the folder structure is like the following:
3-2
Figure 3.3 Folder structure after installation
The OperationSoft folder is relatively important and expanded as follows:

Figure 3.4 OperationSoft folder
The following folders should be paid much attention to:

AbsData: stores reaction curve files.
AlarmFile: stores alarm log messages.
BS-800LOG: contains SDM logs.
Database: database file, which contains all parameters, test results, calibration
and QC data, etc.
ExceptionLog: records address segment for error analysis when the software
collapses abnormally. (Note: There are two ExceptLog files, and the other one is
in Instrument_1 folder.)
HELP: online help .chm file.
3-3
Instrument_1: log file of #1 analyzer.
Instrument_2: log file of #2 analyzer.
Item: Mindray's chemistry parameter file.
LOG: records software upgrading information. (last upgrading information
record)
Logs: RMS (Remote Management System) logs. Not used temporarily.
BS-800.exe: shortcut of BS2000 program.
3.1.3 Log Files

The BsLog process records in real-time mode the communication and action
information of the software and analyzer, which includes but not limited to the
following:
Keyboard input
Error log, operation log and maintenance log of the software
Communication instructions between the PC and analyzer
Action instructions of the analyzer
Floater and optical coupler statuses of the analyzer (real-time)
Pump and valve powering statuses of the analyzer (real-time)
Photoelectric data (real-time)

Separate log files are produced every day and stored in the following addresses:
BS800LOG folder in D:\mindray\BS2000\OperationSoft
InstrumentLOG folder in D:\mindray\BS2000\OperationSoft\Instrument_1
The folder structure is shown below:
3-4
Figure 3.5 Log files
The following folders should be paid much attention to:

InstrService: water blank data.
Lislog: LIS communication data.
3.1.4 Software Running
3.1.5 Auto Startup

Normally, the operating software runs automatically once the Windows system is
started up. If you need to disable this function for special purpose, you may change
the startup settings of the computer.
Switch to the desktop using the service user account, click the Windows button on
the lower-left corner, and enter "msconfig" in the Running field. The screen is shown
as follows:
3-5
Figure 3.6 Running "msconfig" command
Press Enter. The System Configuration Utility dialog box pops up. Select Startup.
Figure 3.7 System Configuration Utility dialog box
3-6
Deselect the checkbox to the left of "BS800" to disable auto startup of the operating
software.
Figure 3.8 Configure startup items
To restore auto startup, repeat steps 1 to 3 and select the "BS-800" checkbox.
3.1.6 Software Running Parameters

Select Start -> All Programs -> Mindray -> BS-800, and right click the BS-800 icon.
3-7
Figure 3.9 Change shortcut property
The Properties dialog box pops up. Change the properties in the Target field by
adding "space + running parameters" behind ".exe". See the figure below:
Figure 3.10 Configure software running parameters
The frequently-used parameters include:
3-8
-demo: running the software in demo mode. In this mode, the software can enter
Standby status without connecting the analyzer, and can finish all operations when
logged on with the R&D user account. The R&D user account is dynamic and can
be retrieved from TS when needed.
-option: whether to execute Home (initialization) command during startup process. It
is used to quickly skip the startup process and enter the Stopped status.
-force login: logging on compulsively. It can be used in event that the computer has
memory less than 1.5G.
-1280: canceling the screen resolution limit of 1280X1024. The software can be run
with the resolution of 1024X768.
-no shutdown: not performing the Windows shutdown procedure when exiting the
software.
3.1.7 Normal Startup Procedure

The normal startup procedure of the operating software is as follows:
The system checks if the Bslog process has been started automatically. If not, the
Bslog.exe program is run.
Sqlserver is started, and it will exit if an error indicating database initialization failed
occurs.
The software process is started.
User enters the username and password: "ServiceUser" and "#BS8A#SEU".
The software shakes hands with the middle-/lower-layer units. If handshake fails, an
alarm is given prompting the unit is abnormal.
The Home procedure is performed.
Note: A DOS dialog box shows when the software is started up. Do not close or exit
it to prevent software halted.
3-9
Figure 3.11 Software startup
3-10
3.2 Software Upgrading
Refer to the upgrading guide in SetupGuide folder or in the
D:\mindray\BS2000\UpgradeTool path.
Note: After upgrading the software, switch off the main power and switch it on
again to refresh the refrigeration unit.
3-11
3.3 Software Uninstallation
3.3.1 Uninstalling BS-2000M Software

End the BSlog process by using the KillBslog tool in the installation package.
Find the BS-2000 program in Control Panel and perform the uninstallation
procedure.
3.3.2 Uninstalling SQL Database

Uninstall SQL Server.
Delete the Microsoft SQL Server folder produced during installation, run the
"Regedit", and delete the
"HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Microsoft SQL Server" and
"HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Microsoft SQL Server"
folders.
Click Start -> Run, and enter "regedit". Find the "PendingFileRenameOperations"
folder in
"HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Session
Manager" and delete all data in the folder.
3-12
3.4 Comparison of User Permissions
There are four user groups, which are from low to high: operator, administrator,
service engineer, and R&D.
The permissions of each user group are listed in the table below:
Table 3.1 Comparison of user permissions

Sample analysis
Calibration, QC
Adjust permissions
Edit results
Edit chemistry parameters
Edit calibration factors
Import/Export data
procedure
Customize
Replace consumables
Delete logs
Instrument settings
Factory settings
Query parameters
Modify parameters
Permissions
maintenance
Account type
Operator
Administrator
Engineer
R&D
Please pay special attention to the following points:
Operator is not permitted to replace Online Filter, Filter Core, etc.

Figure 3.12 Comparison 1 of permissions for administrator (left) and egineer (right)
3-13
Administrator is not permitted to view coolers' current.
Figure 3.13 Comparison 2 of permissions for operator (left) and administrator
(right)
3-14
4 Hardware Circuits
4-1
4.1 Overview
This chapter describes the functions of the printed circuit board assemblies (PCBAs)
used on the BS-2000M/BS-2200M Chemistry Analyzer.
4-2
4.2 Summary of Hazards
While the instrument is working, do not touch the hardware circuit boards with your
hands or other objects.
To remove a circuit board, you should first disconnect the instrument from the (AC)
power supply. Please wear a pair of anti-static gloves or take other measures to
prevent static electricity prior to removing a circuit board.
4-3
4.3 Summary of PCBAs
Sequence number and function description of PCBAs
The table bellows provides a summary of the PCBAs used on the
BS-2000M/BS-2200M Chemistry Analyzer and briefly describes their functions.
Note: Those materials with FRU code should be applied by the corresponding FRU
code.
Table 4.1 PCBA list

PCBA (PCB) Functions Remark
Main control board The main control board is the control center The main
(analyzer) of the instrument. It is mainly used to fulfill control
051-001218-00 the following tasks: 1). communicating with board
a computer through the RS232 serial port to software
transmit data and instructions; 2) varies with
communicating with the smart modules, different
including the ISE module, through the numbers of
extended serial ports to transmit data and open
instructions; and 3) controlling digital channel.
potentiometer adjustment and
photoelectric data collection of the AD
collection board and receiving the
photoelectric data.
Main control board Control center of track control. It Borrowed
(SDM) communicates with a computer through the from
801-BA80-00098-00 RS232 serial port to transmit data and BS-800M
051-000203-00 instructions, and communicates with smart
modules of the rack feeder system to
transmit data and instructions.
Control drive board Drives and controls the sample carousel,
(Sample) sample probe, and sample mixer assemblies.
051-001016-00
Control drive board Drives and controls the reagent carousel R1, The reagent
(R1) probe R11, and probe R12 assemblies. mixer unit is
051-001017-00 not
controlled
by this
board.
Control drive board Drives and controls the reagent carousel R2, The reagent
(R2) probe R21, and probe R22 assemblies. mixer unit is
051-001018-00 not
controlled
by this
board.
Wash temperature Drives and controls the reagent mixers,
control board cuvette wash station, reaction carousel and
051-001004-00 temperature control assemblies.
4-4
Control drive board Drives and controls motors, optical couplers Borrowed
(SDM) and bar code scanning of the SDM. from
801-BA80-00238-00 BS-800M
051-000378-00
Track control drive Drives and controls the motors and optical
board couplers of the rack transfer unit.
051-001000-00
Reaction carousel Adjusts the signal of the reaction carousel Borrowed
temperature temperature sensor and converts it from from BS-800
collection board analog to digital, and provides a serial port
801-BA80-00055-01 to connect the wash temperature control
051-000817-00 board.
Wash temperature Adjusts the signals of three wash Borrowed
collection board temperature sensors and one environment from BS-800
801-BA80-00092-00 temperature sensor and convert them from
051-000449-00 analog to digital; provides an SPI interface
for connecting with the wash temperature
control board.
Reagent The reagent refrigeration board is used to:
refrigeration board refrigerate reagents via the coolers and
051-001019-00 circulating pump; indicate refrigerating
temperature; drive the fans and the
demisting circuit of the reagent bar code
reader; and power the ISE module.
AC drive board By receiving control signals from the control
051-001020-00 drive board and the wash temperature
control board, the AC drive board drives the
AC pump and AC heater and allocates power
supply to power the whole unit.
Mixer drive board Drives the 3 mixer motors and monitors their
051-001006-00 rotation speed. Each analyzer contains 2
such boards respectively for sample mixer
and reagent mixer.
Sample level sense Senses sample level and detects vertical
board obstruct of the sample probe.
051-000948-00
Reagent level sense Senses reagent level and detects vertical
board obstruct of the reagent probes. Each
051-001005-00 analyzer contains 4 such boards respectively
for probes R11, R12, R21, and R22.
Clog detection The clog detection board detects clogs Borrowed
board inside the sample probe by checking the from BS-800
801-BA80-00048-00 pressure of the fluidic tube when the sample
051-000218-00 probe aspirates samples. Each analyzer
contains 2 such boards respectively for
needles S1 and S2.
4-5
AD collection board The AD collection board adjusts the
051-000934-00 photoelectric signals output by the
preamplifier board and controls it for AD
conversion. It provides an SPI interface for
connecting with the main control board.
Preamplifier board The preamplifier board converts the signals
(13-channel) of the 13 discrete photodiode arrays from
051-000947-00 analog to digital and then amplifies them.
Each analyzer contains 2 such boards
respectively for photometers of inner ring
and outer ring.
Preamplifier board The preamplifier board converts the signals Borrowing
(reference light) of the photodiode array from analog to the 450nm
801-BA20-00023-01 digital and then amplifies them, and preamplifier
051-000398-00 monitors the lamp status. board.
Pressure detection The pressure detection board checks the Borrowed
board pressure of primary vacuum, primary from BS-800
801-BA80-00090-00 degassing and ISE degassing, and processes
051-000216-00 and converts the analog signals output by
the water quality detection board. It
provides a serial port for data transmission.
Water quality The water quality detection board converts
detection board the quality of the test water into changes of
801-BA80-00153-00 output analog voltage.
Network interface The bridge for connection between the Borrowed
conversion board analyzer and the computer. It provides an from BS-800
801-BA80-00236-00 RJ45 network interface and a DB25 interface
051-000376-00 as well as 5 serial ports.
Communication Used to extend the serial port and network Borrowed
conversion board port on the analyzer or on the SDM main from BS-800
801-BA40-00021-00 control board for cable connection.
BA40-30-61377 The SDM and each analyzer has 1 such board.
DC power supply The DC power supply conversion board
conversion board receives the A5V digital, C12V power and
051-000755-00 B24V power, and then shifts them to the
analog power supply conversion board,
control drive boards, and wash temperature
control board.
Analog power The analog power supply conversion board
supply conversion converts the C12V power into 2 analog
board +/-12V. One is photoelectric analog +/-12V,
051-001023-00 providing analog power for the AD collection
board and preamplifier board; and the other
powers the control drive boards and wash
temperature board through the DC power
supply conversion board. The digital A5V
passes by on this board.
4-6
Five-probe/mixer Provides connection of control drive boards Borrowed
conversion board and wash temperature control board with 5 from BS-800
801-BA80-00100-00 level sense boards and 2 mixer drive boards.
051-000210-00 Each analyzer contains 2 such boards.
Interconnection Converts power supply and communication
conversion signal (including TTL signal converted into
board(SDM) RS422) for the rack transfer unit.
051-000378-00
Interconnection It acts as a power supply conversion board on
conversion the SDM and converts the 24V into 5V.
board(rack transfer
unit)
051-000375-00
Wash probe The wash probe obstruct optical coupler Borrowed
obstruct optical conversion board is used to connect the from BS-800
coupler conversion cable of the wash probe obstruct optical
board coupler.
801-BA80-00040-00
12V power supply Three power supply boards are combined to Borrowing
board form the BA40-30-61943 power supply the BA40
801-BA40-00029-00 assembly. power
It is responsible for powering the whole unit, supply
24V power supply
outputting A12V, digital A5V, C12V power, module.
board
and B24V power.
801-BA40-00030-00
Power supply
conversion board
801-BA40-00031-00
12V/30A power Provides 12V power for coolers. Each Borrowed
supply board analyzer contains 2 such boards. from BS-800
801-BA80-00106-00
24V/6A power Provides the 24V power supply. A few such Borrowed
supply board boards are contained on the whole unit. from BS-800
801-BA80-00177-00 Each analyzer contains 1 such board, which
051-000530-00 is used to power the fans and circulating
pump of the reagent refrigeration board.
The SDM contains N+1 (N means number of
analyzers) such boards to power the SDM and
rack transfer unit.
The external water supply module contains 1
such board to power the inlet pump and
control circuit.
External vacuum The external vacuum pump drive board Inside the
pump drive board receives the vacuum pump control signal external
801-BA80-00128-00 from the wash temperature control board vacuum
051-000359-00 and controls the switch to turn on/off the pump
vacuum pump. It provides two interfaces for module
connection with the AC radiating fans.
4-7
4.4 Locations of PCBA
The figure below shows the locations of the PCBAs in the whole unit.
Figure 4.1 Front left view
Sample mixer Reagent mixer
drive board drive board
Wash temperature
Clog detection board
Sample control drive board control board
Figure 4.2 Front right view
Main control
board
R1 control drive
board
R2 control drive
board
Analog power supply DC power supply

Pressure detection board
conversion board conversion board
4-8
Figure 4.3 Rear view
Reagent level sense board
Sample level sense AD collection board
board Preamplifier
board Reaction carousel
temperature collection
board
Reagent
refrigeration board
24V6A power
supply board
AC drive board
Communication
conversion board
BA40 power
12V30A power supply module
supply board
Cleaning fluid temperature
collection board
Figure 4.4 Rack transfer unit
Track control drive board
4-9
Figure 4.5 Side view of SDM
SDM main
control board
24V6A power Network interface conversion board

supply board SDM control drive board
Interconnection
conversion board
4-10
4.5 Removing PCBA
To remove a PCBA, unplug the connectors on it and then loosen the retaining
screws.
The whole unit alignment parameters are stored on the main control board. Before
replacing the main control board, access the Parameters screen and back up all
parameters to the computer. After replacement, import the parameters to the new
main control board. Backing up parameters is not required before replacing other
boards.
4-11
4.6 Functions of PCBA
4.6.1 Main Control Board

Functions and principles
The main control board (051-001218-00) is used to fulfill the following functions:
Communicating with a computer through the serial port to transmit data and
instructions and to update the application programs of the PCBA.
Communicating with the smart modules, including the ISE module, through the
extended serial ports to transmit data and instructions.
Controlling digital potentiometer adjustment and photoelectric data collection
of the AD collection board and receiving the photoelectric data.
Providing a network interface for the auto startup function, by which the
computer can be woken up automatically.
Monitoring and indicating voltage of the 5V, 3.3V and 12V power supply
boards.
The figure below shows the relation between the main control board and other
PCBAs.
Figure 4.6 Relation between main control board and other PCBAs
Analog Sample R1 R2 Wash

power AD Reagent
control control control temperature ISE
supply
control
collection refrigeration
conversion drive drive drive board board module
board
board board board board
Main control board
PC
The functional diagram of the main control board is as shown below.
4-12
Figure 4.7 Functional diagram of main control board
BDM / JTAG
Power supply debugging PC
connectors
BDM UART
I2C
RTC
SPI
EEPROM
SDRAMC
CPU
(Reserved)
FEC
SDRAM
PHY
Flex Bus
FLASH
AD collection board
Sample control drive board

Voltage
monitoring
R1 control drive board
4# control drive board

FPGA (reserved)
Main control Wash temperature control
board board
board
ISE module
ISE bar code reader
(reserved)
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the main control board is as shown below.
4-13
Figure 4.8 PCB layout of main control board
D16
C64
C37
D
D17
D 4
C304 3
D7-11
C78
U65
D2
9
D2
5
D1
8
D1
5
D1
2
Connectors
The main control board includes the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input (J1): 6-pin, providing +/-12V analog and +5V digital for PCBAs.
4-14
Pin No. Signal Reference Value
1 +12V 11.4 12.6V
2 -12V -11.4 -12.6V
3 +5V 4.75 5.25V
4 12VGND /
5 12VGND /
6 GND /
Connectors for sending/receiving communication signals:

Connector (J2) for PC: 10-pin, RS232, used for communication with a computer.
1# connector (J3) for smart module: 40-pin, RS422, used for communication
with the wash temperature control board.
with the sample control drive board.
with the R1 control drive board.
with the R2 control drive board.
5# connector (J6) for smart module: 40-pin, RS422, used for reservation.
Connector (J5) for reagent refrigeration board: 8-pin, RS422, used for
communication with the reagent refrigeration board.
Connector (J7) for AD collection board: DB25, used for communication with
the AD collection board and providing power supply for it.
Connector (J8) for ISE module: 8-pin, used for communication with the ISE
module.
Connector (J9) for ISE bar code reader: 8-pin, used for reservation.
Ethernet connector (J12): 6-pin, used for waking up the computer.
Connectors for debugging (for manufacturing only):
BDM connector (J13): 26-pin, used for debugging the CPU software.
JTAG connector (J14): 14-pin, used for debugging the FPGA.
Switches and jumpers
The main control board contains the following switches and jumpers.
RST key (S1): used to reset the CPU of the PCBA. This key is often used for
debugging the PCBA and not used for field maintenance.
Indicators
The main control board contains the following indicators.
Power supply:
+12V power supply indicator (D4): green. It is lit when the analyzer power
switch is turned on, indicating that the +12V power supply has been connected.
4-15
-12V power supply indicator (D17): green. It is lit when the analyzer power
switch is turned on, indicating that the -12V power supply has been connected.
+5V power supply indicator (D16): green. It is lit when the analyzer power
switch is turned on, indicating that the +5V power supply has been connected.
+3.3V power supply indicator (D3): green. It is lit when the analyzer power
switch is turned on, indicating that the +3.3V power supply has been connected.
Indicators to indicate PCBA functions:
FPGA configuration indicator (D29): orange. It is lit in normal conditions,
which means that the FPGA has been configured successfully.
FPGA function indicator 1 (D25): green. It flashes continuously in normal
conditions, which means that the FPGA is working.
FPGA function indicator 2 (D18): green. It flashes in normal conditions when
the PCBA communicates with a smart module.
the PCBA collects AD signals.
FPGA function indicator 4 (D12): green. This indicator has not been defined.
CPU function indicator 1 (D27): green. This indicator has not been defined.
Indicators to indicate network interface:
Network interface Link indicator (D10): green. When it is lit, it indicates the
Ethernet has been connected; when it flashes, it means that the PCBA is
communicating with the Ethernet.
Network interface Full-duplex indicator (D7): green. When it is lit, it indicates
that the Ethernet is working in full-duplex mode.
Network interface 10-T indicator (D11): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the
connection rate of the Ethernet is 10Mbps.
Network interface Collision indicator (D8): green. When it is lit, it indicates that
a conflict is detected on Ethernet communication.
Test points
In the following positions of the main control board can signal tests be performed.
J1.1: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 11.4 - 12.6V.
J1.2: -12V power supply input. Normal range: -11.4 - -12.6V.
C304.1: +3.3V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the
major digital circuits of the PCBA. Normal range: 2.97 - 3.63V.
DDR memory. Normal range: 2.25 - 2.75V.
CPU core. Normal range: 1.35 - 1.65V.
4-16
U65.4: +1.2V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the
FPGA core. Normal range: 1.08 - 1.32V.
Installation methods and precautions

Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply
and wear a pair of anti-static gloves or wrist straps.
Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA.
Check the connectors with clamps and ensure that the clamps have been locked
properly.
Check other connectors and ensure that they are inserted into the end of the
slots.
It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J3, J4, J6, J10 and J11.
Hold the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging these connectors to
prevent it from being deformed or damaged.
After connecting J7 connector (DB25), tighten the retaining screws on two sides
of it.
4.6.2 Wash Temperature Control Board

The wash temperature control board (051-001004-00) receives commands from the
main control board and then analyzes them; detects execution signals of the cuvette
wash unit, reaction carousel unit and reagent mixer unit and drives these units;
detects the temperature of the temperature sensors and controls the heaters. The
major functions of the PCBA include:
Communicating with the main control unit via serial ports to receive/analyze
instructions, execute relevant operations and return the execution results.
Outputting control signals for relevant execution units.
Receiving position sensor signals of relevant execution units, auto wash obstruct
prevention signals, and other status signals.
Detecting the temperature of reaction carousel heating, whole unit cleaning fluid
preheating, deionized water heating, wash solution heating, and the environment,
and controlling the heaters.
Receiving fluid level sensor signals from the hydropneumatic system and
pressure signals from the pressure detection board, and controlling/driving
fluidic pumps and valves.
Turning on/off the lamp and detecting the voltage.
Checking the PCBAs voltage and giving an alarm in certain conditions.
The figure below shows the relation between the wash temperature control board
and other PCBAs.
4-17
Figure 4.9 Relation between wash temperature control board and other PCBAs
Power
Communication
PC supply
conversion board
assembly
24V/12V/5
V/+/-12V
Main control DC power supply

board conversion board
Wash temperature control board
Five-probe/mixer
conversion board
Reaction Cleaning fluid External

carousel Pressure Reagent
AC drive temperature vacuum
temperature detection mixer drive
board collection collection pump drive
board board
board board board
The functional diagram of the wash temperature control board is as shown below.
Figure 4.10 Functional diagram of wash temperature control board
Reaction carousel home position sensor,
inner/outer coder sensors
Cuvette information: serial port RS422 difference
Photoelectric collection start signal Reaction carousel rotation step motor
Vertical step motor of mixer
Horizontal step motor of mixer
Serial port: RS422 difference
Reaction Vertical step motor of wash station
carousel Bus Vertical/Horizontal home position and
unit obstruct detection sensors of mixer
Main control board
Vertical home position and obstruct

detection sensors of wash station
Pumps/Valves (wash pump 5, wash valve 27,
inlet valve 1)
AC control (3 vacuum pumps, 4 heaters and
Reagent 1 external vacuum pump)
Bus
mixer unit
FPGA Liquid level sensor (9)
Reaction carousel
temperature collection Sensor PT1000 (1)
board
Cleaning fluid
Cuvette temperature collection Sensor NTC (4)
wash Bus board
station AC drive AC pump (3)

board AC heater (4)
Serial port: RS422 difference Serial port for pressure detection
Temperatu Reagent mixer motor drive board

Voltage
monitoring
re control Bus Lamp power supply control
unit
4-18
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the wash temperature control board is as shown below.
Figure 4.11 PCB layout of wash temperature control board
J17 J18 J19 J21
TP73 TP70
J16
Temp Temp Reac J23

Clean
LED Unit Tray
Unit
D106 Unit
D108
TP74
J15 D107 D105 Unit
LED D61
J25
D3
6 12
FPGA Reag 5
4
11
10
LED D109 Mixer 3 9
2 8
1 7
Unit
J1
J31 TP72
J13 D5
D64 D59
Power D60
TP71 LED D62
J12 D63
D80-83 D58
J3
D84-87
D88-91
Pump J4
D104-101 &
Valve
D100-97 LED
D96-93
J11
D51-49,
D92
D48-46, J10 J8
D13 J6 J5
Connectors
The wash temperature control board includes the following connectors.
Power supply:
4-19
Power supply input (J1): 12-pin, providing +24V(B24V) power, +12V(C12V) power,
+5V(A5V) digital, +12V(D12V) analog, and -12V(E12V) analog for PCBAs.

Pin No. Signal Reference
Value
1 +24V 23.5 - 26V
2 +24V 23.5 - 26V
3 +12V 11.4 12.6V
4 +12V 11.4 12.6V
5 +5V 4.85 - 5.25V
6 D12V 11.4 - 12.6V
7 GND /
8 GND /
9 GND /
10 GND /
11 GND /
12 E12V -11.4 - -12.6V

Connector (J17) for main control board: 20*2-pin RS422, used for serial port
communication with the main control board.
Connector (J18) for reaction carousel temperature collection board: 6*2-pin,
TTL, used for collecting the reaction carousel temperature.
Connector (J19) for cleaning fluid temperature collection board: 10*2-pin, TTL,
used for collecting the cleaning fluid temperature.
Connector (J21) for pressure detection board: 8*1-pin, TTL, used for serial port
communication with the pressure detection board.
Connectors for detecting sensor signals:
Floater signal detection connector (J15): 13*2-pin, TTL, used for checking the
fluid level status.
Moving position signal detection connector (J16): 20*2-pin, TTL, used for
checking moving positions.
Control connectors:
Lamp control connector (J25): 6*1-pin, used for controlling and detecting the
lamp voltage and hibernation of the whole unit.
AC load control connector (J10): 10*2-pin, used to control the AC load relay.
Vacuum pump control connector (J8): 2*1-pin, used for controlling the external
vacuum pump.
Drive connectors:
Valve drive connector (J12): 25*2-pin, used for driving the wash valve.
Pump drive connector (J11): 7*2-pin, used for driving the DC pump.
4-20
Motor drive connectors (J2-J6): used for driving motors, J3 for the reaction
carousel step motor, J4 for the vertical motor of the reagent mixer assembly, J5
for the horizontal motor of the reagent mixer assembly, and J6 for the vertical
motor of the wash heads.
Control and communication connectors for the reagent mixer drive board:
Power connector (J31): 1*5-pin, used for powering the reagent mixers.
Communication connector (J23): 1*10-pin, used for serial port communication
with the reagent mixers.
The wash temperature control board contains the following switches and jumpers.
RST key (S1): used to reset the CPUs of the four units of the PCBA.
Jumper cap j32: used for four units of the PCBA to switch between the JTAG mode
and DEBUG mode.
Indicators
The wash temperature control board contains the following indicators.
Power supply indicators:
It is normal that all of the power supply indicators are lit when the analyzer
power switch is turned on,
and they should indicate correctly when the system is hibernating.
When the operating software is shut down, indicators +24V(B24V),
+12V(C12V), +12V(D12V) analog, -12V(-12V) analog, and 5V analog are
extinguished, and indicators +5V(A5V) and +3.3V are lit.
+24V(B24V) indicator (D58): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that the
+24V power supply works normally.
+12V(C12V) indicator (D62): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that the
+12V power supply works normally.
+5V(A5V) indicator (D63): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +5V
power supply works normally.
+3.3V indicator (D64): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +3.3V
power supply works normally.
+12V(D12V) analog indicator (D59): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates
that the +12V analog power supply works normally.
-12V(E12V) analog indicator (D60): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that
the -12V analog power supply works normally.
+5V(D12V) analog indicator (D61): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that
the +5V analog power supply works normally.
Working indicators:
FPGA configuration indicator (D105): yellow-green. It is lit when FPGA
configuration is complete.
FPGA working indicator (D3): yellow-green. When it is lit and distinguished
once every second, it indicates that the FPGA is working normally.
4-21
Temperature control unit working indicator (D107): yellow-green. When it is lit
and distinguished once every second, it indicates that the temperature control
unit is working normally.
Wash unit working indicator (D108): yellow-green. It is not used and lit all the
time.
Reaction carousel unit working indicator (D106): yellow-green. It is not used and
lit all the time.
Reagent mixer unit working indicator (D109): yellow-green. It is not used and lit
all the time.
Reaction carousel temperature range indicator (D78): red. It is neither used nor
defined, and it is extinguished all the time.
Reaction carousel temperature range indicator (D79): yellow. It is neither used
nor defined, and it is extinguished all the time.
Reaction carousel temperature range indicator (D77): green. It is neither used
nor defined, and it is extinguished all the time.
Inlet valve (V01) working indicator (D5): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means
that the inlet valve is turned on; and vice versa.
Outer ring phase-1 wash V22 working indicator (D83): yellow-green. When it is
lit, it means that the valve is turned on; and vice versa.
Inner ring phase-1 wash V28 working indicator (D85): yellow-green. When it is
Dilution valve V20 working indicator (D101): yellow-green. When it is lit, it
means that the dilution valve is turned on; and vice versa.
4-22
Degassing valve V19 working indicator (D102): yellow-green. When it is lit, it
means that the valve is turned on; and vice versa.
High-concentration waste suction valve V37 working indicator (D103):
yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the high-concentration waste suction
valve is turned on; and vice versa.
High-concentration waste drain valve V34 working indicator (D104):
yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the high-concentration waste drain
High-concentration waste vacuum release valve V40 working indicator (D97):
yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the high-concentration waste vacuum
release valve is turned on; and vice versa.
Low-concentration 1 waste suction valve V38 working indicator (D98):
yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the low-concentration 1 waste suction
Low-concentration 1 waste drain valve V35 working indicator (D99):
yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the low-concentration 1 waste drain
Low-concentration 1 waste vacuum release valve V41 working indicator (D100):
yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the low-concentration 1 waste vacuum
Low-concentration 2 waste suction valve V39 working indicator (D93):
yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the low-concentration 2 waste suction
Low-concentration 2 waste drain valve V36 working indicator (D94):
yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the low-concentration 2 waste drain
Low-concentration 2 waste vacuum release valve V42 working indicator (D95):
yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the low-concentration 2 waste vacuum
Primary vacuum container waste discharge valve V43 working indicator (D96):
yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the primary vacuum container waste
discharge valve is turned on; and vice versa.
ISE degassing valve V21 working indicator (D92): yellow-green. When it is lit, it
means that the valve is turned on; and vice versa.
ISE degassing pump P12 working indicator (D49): yellow-green. When it is lit, it
means that the pump is turned on; and vice versa.
Reagent mixer deionized water valve V15 working indicator (D50): yellow-green.
When it is lit, it means that the valve is turned on; and vice versa.
Reagent mixer wash solution valve V17 working indicator (D51): yellow-green.
When it is lit, it means that the valve is turned on; and vice versa.
Diluted wash solution pump P06 working indicator (D13): yellow-green. When it
is lit, it means that the pump is turned on; and vice versa.
Concentrated wash solution pump P05 working indicator (D46): yellow-green.
When it is lit, it means that the concentrated wash solution pump is turned on;
and vice versa.
4-23
Deionized water circulating pump P03 working indicator (D47): yellow-green.
When it is lit, it means that the deionized water circulating pump is turned on;
and vice versa.
Cleaning fluid circulating pump P15 working indicator (D48): yellow-green.
When it is lit, it means that the cleaning fluid circulating pump is turned on; and
vice versa.
Test points
In the following positions of the wash temperature control board can signal tests be
performed.
+24V test point (TP72): input from J1.1 and J1.2. Normal range: 23.5 26V.
+12V test point (TP71): input from J1.3 and J1.4. Normal range: 11.4 12.6V.
+5V test point (TP70): input from J1.5. Normal range: 4.85 5.25V.
+12V analog test point (TP73): input from J1.6. Normal range: 11.4 12.6V.
-12V analog test point (TP74): input from J1.12. Normal range: -11.4 -12.6V.
+3.3V test point (TP69): secondary power supply. Normal range: 2.97 3.63V.
A2.5V test point (TP83): secondary power supply. Normal range: 2.37 2.63V.
+1.2V test point (TP68): secondary power supply. Normal range: 1.08 1.32V.
+5V analog test point (TP75): secondary power supply. Normal range: 4.85
5.25V.
Ground test points TP29, TP39, TP48, TP58, TP76- TP82.

and wear a pair of antistatic gloves or wrist straps.
properly.
slots.
There are gaps beside connectors J10, J11, J12 and J16.
It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J12, J15, J16, and J17.
Motor connectors J3, J4, J5 and J6 have no mistake-proof measures. Make sure
that the cable number corresponds to the connector number.
4.6.3 Control Drive Board (Sample)

The BA2K sample control drive board (051-001016-00) drives and controls the
sample carousel, sample probe, and sample mixers.
4-24
Receiving position sensor signals and obstruct signals from various execution
mechanisms.
Connecting with the sample mixer drive board to drive the mixer motors and
detect mixer rotation speed.
Connecting with the sample level sense board to detect the fluid level.
Connecting with the S1/S2 clog detection board to detect clogs in the sample
probe and give an alarm in certain conditions.
Controlling the interior/exterior wash valves of the sample probe unit and
sample mixer unit.
Connecting with the reagent control drive board (R1) through the main control
board and sending control signals to it (R1), and turning on/off the interior
wash pump P04 and return valve V08.
Connecting with the reagent control drive board (R2) through the main control
board and sending control signals to it (R2), and turning on/off the interior
wash pump P13 and return valve V09.
The figure below shows the relation between the sample control drive board and
other PCBAs and control objects.
4-25
Figure 4.12 Relation between sample control drive board and other PCBAs and
control objects
Outer sample carousel home
position optical coupler
Outer sample carousel coder
optical coupler
Sample carousel
Outer sample carousel motor
Sample bar code reader
Panel keys
Inner sample carousel home

Inner sample carousel coder
optical coupler
Main control board
Inner sample carousel motor
Sample probe horizontal home

position optical coupler 1
Sample probe horizontal home
position optical coupler 2
Sample probe horizontal obstruct
detection optical coupler
Sample probe vertical optical
coupler 1
Sample probe vertical optical
R1/R2 control
drive board
coupler 2
Sample syringe 1 optical coupler
Sample syringe 2 optical coupler
Sample probe horizontal motor

Sample probe
Sample probe vertical motor
Sample syringe 1 motor
Sample syringe 2 motor

DC power supply
conversion board
Sample level detection
Sample probe 1 clog detection
Sample probe 2 clog detection

Sample probe 1 interior wash
valve V02
Sample probe 1 interior wash
valve V03
Sample probe exterior wash valve
V10
Sample mixer horizontal home

Sample mixer vertical optical
coupler 1
Sample mixer
Sample mixer vertical optical

coupler 2
Sample mixer horizontal motor
Sample mixer vertical motor
Sample mixer cleaning fluid valve

V16
Sample mixer cleaning fluid valve
V18
Sample mixer drive board
4-26
The functional diagram of the control drive board is as shown below.
Figure 4.13 Function diagram of control drive board
Cuvette information: serial port RS422 difference 6 extended serial

Photoelectric collection start signal ports
Serial port: RS422

difference Lamp control
Bus
Unit 1
2 panel keys and

Voltage indicators
monitoring
Serial port: RS422 2 electromagnetic
Main control board
difference Bus locks

Unit 2 F
P 2 proximity
G sensors
Serial port: RS422 A

difference Bus
Unit 3 8 motor drives
34 position
sensors
Serial port: RS422
difference Unit 4 Bus
(reserved) 8 pumps/valves
2 DC motors
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the sample control drive board is as shown below.
4-27
Figure 4.14 PCB layout of sample control drive board
J12 J13 J14 J15 J16 J17

J11
J29 J28
J10
FPGA LED
D66-70
J18
MVREF1~5
J9
Unit LED J19
MVREF6~8
J8
Power Key J20
Lid Press
LED Sensor
J7 Clot LED
Liquid LED Pump & Valve
LED
LED LED
1 2 3 4 5
J6
J5 J4 J3 J2
6 7 8 9 10
J26 J25 J24
J1 J21
J23 D16-17
J22 D44-
D29-31 D26-28 D34-45 D32-33 D1-D6 D24-25 D22-23
51
Connectors
The sample control drive board contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
DC power supply input connector (J1)
Table 4.4 Voltage of various pins

1 A+12V 11.4 12.6V
2 +5V 4.855.25V
3 +12V 11.4 12.6V
4 +24V 23.526V
5 +24V 23.526V
6 A-12V -11.4 - -12.6V
7 GND /
8 GND /
9 GND /
10 GND /

Main control board connector (J10): 40-pin, used for three MCUs (sample
carousel unit, sample probe unit and sample mixer unit) to communicate with
the middle-layer unit.
Sample bar code reader connector (J7): 10-pin, used for the two sample carousel
units to communicate with the sample bar code reader.
4-28
Sample probe 1 clog detection board connector (J4): 14-pin, used for
communication between the sample probe unit and the S1 clog detection board.
Sample probe 2 clog detection board connector (J5): 14-pin, used for
communication between the sample probe unit and the S2 clog detection board.
Level sense board connector (J2): 10-pin, used for communication between the
sample probe and the sample probe level sense board.
Mixer drive board connector (J3): 10-pin, used for communication between the
sample mixer unit and the mixer drive board.
Detection and control connectors:
Optical coupler detection connector (J12): 50-pin, used to detect the position,
coder and mixer rotation speed signals of the 3 units (sample carousel unit,
sample probe unit and sample mixer unit).
Motor drive connectors (J13-J20): 4-pin, used for driving eight step motors, J13
for the outer sample carousel motor, J14 for the inner sample carousel motor,
J15 for the sample probe horizontal motor, J16 for the sample probe vertical
motor, J17 for the sample probe 1 syringe motor, J18 for the sample probe 2
syringe motor, J19 for the sample mixer horizontal motor, and J20 for the
sample mixer vertical motor.
Probe wash valve drive connector (J21): 8-pin, used for controlling the
interior/exterior wash valves of the sample probe.
Mixer wash valve drive connector (J22): 8-pin, used for controlling the wash
valve of the sample mixers.
Sample load button and indicator connector (J23): 8-pin, used for detecting the
two sample load buttons and driving/controlling the two indicators.
Sample mixer drive board power connector (J25): 6-pin, used to provide 24V
power supply for the sample mixer drive board.
The sample control drive board contains the following switches and jumpers.
Key S7: used to reset the smart modules during debugging of the PCBA. When the
instrument is powered on, parameters need to be configured and key S7 cannot be
used.
Indicators
The sample control drive board contains the following indicators.
They are lit when the analyzer power switch is turned off, which indicates that
the analyzer power switch works normally;
When the instrument is hibernating, all of the indicators are lit.
5V (A5V) power supply indicator (D3): green. It is lit when the instrument is
powered on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off.
3.3V power supply indicator (D1): green. It is lit when the instrument is powered
on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off.
4-29
A+12V (D12V) power supply indicator (D5): green. It is lit when the instrument
is powered on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off or
hibernating.
A-12V (E12V) power supply indicator (D6): green. It is lit when the instrument
hibernating.
+12V (C12V) power supply indicator (D4): green. It is lit when the instrument is
powered on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off or
hibernating.
+24V (B24V) power supply indicator (D2): green. It is lit when the instrument is
hibernating.
Function indicators:
Sample probe vertical obstruct indicator (D33): green. It is lit when the sample
probe is collided with an obstacle or disconnected from the level sense board;
and it is extinguished when the instrument is powered off, hibernating or
working normally.
Sample probe level sense indicator (D32): green. It is lit when the instrument
works normally and the sample probe detects the fluid level; and it is
extinguished when the instrument is powered off or hibernating, or when the
sample probe fails to detect the fluid level, or the level sense board is not
installed.
Sample probe 1 interior wash valve V02 indicator (D51): green. It is lit when
V02 is turned on, and vice versa.
Sample probe 2 interior wash valve V03 indicator (D50): green. It is lit when
Sample probe exterior wash valve V10 indicator (D49): green. It is lit when V10
is turned on, and vice versa.
Sample mixer cleaning fluid wash valve V16 indicator (D45): green. It is lit when
Sample mixer wash solution wash valve V18 indicator (D44): green. It is lit when
Outer sample carousel control button indicator (D22): green. It is lit when the
outer sample carousel control button is pressed and extinguished when the
button is released.
Inner sample carousel control button indicator (D23): green. It is lit when the
outer sample carousel control button is pressed and extinguished when the
button is released.
Outer sample carousel running indicator (D16): green. It is lit when the outer
sample carousel is rotating and extinguished when the carousel stops rotating.
Inner sample carousel running indicator (D17): green. It is lit when the outer
sample carousel is rotating and extinguished when the carousel stops rotating.
Test points
In the following positions of the control drive board can signal tests be performed.
4-30
+24V(B24V) power supply: test point of +24V. Normal voltage range: 21.6
26.4V DC.
+12V(C12V) power supply: test point of +12V. Normal voltage range: 11.4
12.6V DC.
A+12V(D12V) power supply: test point of A+12V. Normal voltage range: 11.4
12.6V DC.
A-12V(E12V) power supply: test point of A-12V. Normal voltage range: -11.4
-12.6V DC.
3.3V power supply (secondary power supply): test point of +3V3. Normal
voltage range: 3.24V 3.47V DC.
1.2V power supply (secondary power supply): test point of +1V2. Normal
voltage range: 1.17V 1.23V DC.
Table 4.5 Running voltage and sustaining voltage of the test points
Test points Running Voltage Sustaining Voltage Remark
MVREF1 1.9 2.10V 0.9 1.1V Outer sample
carousel motor
MVREF2 1.9 2.10V 0.9 1.1V Inner sample
carousel motor
MVREF3 1.44 1.76V 0.72 0.88V Sample probe
horizontal motor
MVREF4 1.8 2.2V 0.9 1.1V Sample probe
vertical motor
MVREF5 1.53 1.87V 0.9 1.1V S1 syringe motor
MVREF6 1.53 1.87V 0.9 1.1V S2 syringe motor
MVREF7 1.44 1.76V 0.72 0.88V Sample mixer
horizontal motor
MVREF8 1.8 2.2V 0.9 1.1V Sample mixer
vertical motor
To measure the motor voltage, use a digital multimeter by connecting the red probe
with the measuring point and the black probe with the GND. For the measuring
points, refer to the PCB layout of the sample control drive board.

to prevent arcing and component damage due to hot swapping.
Before removing the PCBA, wear a pair of antistatic gloves or wrist straps to
prevent antistatic damage on it.
Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA, especially
when the PCBAs bracket is restored.
properly.
slots.
4-31
It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J10 and J12. Hold
the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging these connectors to prevent it
from being deformed or damaged.
When plugging/unplugging motor cables, exercise caution to prevent damaging
the aluminum electrolytic capacitor near the connectors.
4.6.4 Control Drive Board (R1)

The reagent control drive board (R1, 051-001017-00) drives and controls the R1
reagent carousel, and probes R11/R12.
Receiving position sensor signals and obstruct detection signals of relevant
execution units, and detecting the rotation speed of the sample mixer unit.
Connecting with the two reagent probe level sense boards to detect the fluid
level and control the fluid level detection methods.
Controlling the interior/exterior wash valves, interior wash pump P04, and
return valve V08 of the two reagent probe units.
Connecting with the sample control drive board through the main control board
and receiving sample probe control signals from it, and turning on/off the
interior wash pump P04 and return valve V08.
The figure below shows the relation between the reagent control drive board (R1)
and other PCBAs and control objects.
4-32
Figure 4.15 Relation between reagent control drive board (R1) and other PCBAs and
control objects
R1 outer carousel home position
optical coupler
R1 outer carousel coder optical
coupler
R1 outer carousel motor
R1 reagent carousel
R1 carousel bar code reader
R1 carousel panel key

R1 inner carousel home position
optical coupler
R1 inner carousel coder optical
coupler
R1 inner carousel motor
Main control board
Probe R11 horizontal home position

optical coupler 1
optical coupler 2
Probe R11 horizontal obstruct
Probe R11 vertical optical coupler 1
Probe R11
R11 syringe 1 optical coupler
Probe R11 horizontal motor
Probe R11 vertical motor
R11 syringe motor

R11 level detection
R11 interior wash valve V04
R11 exterior wash valve V11
Booster pump P04
Return valve V08

optical coupler 1
optical coupler 2

Probe R12
R12 syringe motor
R12 level detection
4-33

Serial port: RS422

Bus
Unit 1
2 panel keys and

Voltage indicators
monitoring
Main control board

Unit 2 F
P 2 proximity
G sensors

difference Bus
34 position
sensors
Serial port: RS422
2 DC motors
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the R1 control drive board is as shown below.
4-34
Figure 4.17 PCB layout of R1 control drive board
J12 J13 J14 J15 J16 J17

J11
J29 J28
J10
FPGA LED
D66-70
J18
MVREF1~5
J9
Unit LED J19
MVREF6~8
J8
Power Key J20
Lid Press
LED Sensor
J7 LED
LED LED
1 2 3 4 5
J6
J5 J4 J3 J2
6 7 8 9 10
J26 J25 J24
J1 J21
J23 D16-17
J22 D44-
D34-45 D32-33 D1-D6 D24-25 D22-23
51
Connectors
The R1 control drive board contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
Main control board connector (J10): 40-pin, used for three MCUs (R1 reagent
carousel unit, probe R11 unit, and probe R12 unit) to communicate with the
middle-layer unit.
R1 bar code reader connector (J7): 10-pin, used for the R1 reagent carousel unit
to communicate with the reagent bar code reader.
400l reagent probe level sense board connectors (J2, J3): 10-pin. J2 is used for
communication between the probe R11 unit and the probe R11 level sense
board; and J3 is used for communication between the probe R12 unit and the
probe R12 level sense board. The communication signals include: serial port
signal, level sense signal, and probe vertical obstruct signal.
Optical coupler detection connector (J12): 50-pin, used to detect the position
and coder signals of the three units (R1 reagent carousel, probe R11 and probe
R12).
Motor drive connectors (J13-J20): 4-pin, used for driving step motors, J13 for R1
reagent carousel outer ring motor, J14 for R1 reagent carousel inner ring motor,
J15 for the probe R11 horizontal motor, J16 for the probe R11 vertical motor,
J17 for the R11 syringe motor, J18 for the probe R12 horizontal motor, J19 for
the probe R12 vertical motor, and J20 for the R12 syringe motor.
4-35
Return valve drive connector (J21): 8-pin, used for controlling the interior wash
return valves of probes R11/R12 and the return valves of probes S2/R11/R12.
Probe wash valve drive connector (J22): 8-pin, used for controlling the exterior
wash valves of probes R11/R12.
DC pump control connector (J25): 6-pin, used for controlling the interior wash
pumps of probes S1/R11/R12.
Reagent load button and indicator connector (J23): 8-pin, used for detecting the
reagent load button, driving/controlling the indicator, and detecting the
proximity sensor of R1 reagent carousel.
Connectors for debugging:
MCU JTAG debugging connector (J9): used for debugging of the three MCUs.
FPGA JTAG debugging and downloading connector (J27): used for debugging
and downloading of the FPGA.
Pump/Valve fixture test connector (J30): 18-pin, used for connecting an external
LED board and testing the pumps and valves.
The R1 control drive board contains the following switches and jumpers.
used.
Indicators
The R1 control drive board contains the following indicators.
5V power supply indicator (D3): green. It is lit when the instrument is powered
hibernating.
A-12V (-12V) power supply indicator (D6): green. It is lit when the instrument is
hibernating.
hibernating.
hibernating.
4-36
Probe R11 vertical obstruct indicator (D33): green. It is lit when the probe R11
is collided with an obstacle or disconnected from the level sense board; and it is
extinguished when the instrument is powered off, hibernating or working
normally.
Probe R11 level sense indicator (D32): green. It is lit when the instrument works
normally and the probe R11 detects the fluid level; and it is extinguished when
the instrument is powered off or hibernating, or when the probe R11 fails to
detect the fluid level, or the level sense board is not installed.
normally.
Interior wash pump P04 indicator (D21): green. It is lit when P04 is turned on,
and vice versa.
Interior wash return valve V08 indicator (D49): green. It is lit when V08 is
turned on, and vice versa.
Probe R11 interior wash valve V04 indicator (D51): green. It is lit when V04 is
Probe R11 exterior wash valve V11 indicator (D45): green. It is lit when V11 is
R1 reagent carousel control button indicator (D22): green. It is lit when the R1
reagent carousel control button is pressed and extinguished when the button is
released.
R1 reagent carousel running indicator (D16): green. It is lit when the R1 reagent
carousel is rotating and extinguished when the carousel stops rotating.
R1 reagent carousel cover indicator (D23): green. It is lit when the R1 reagent
carousel cover is closed; and it is extinguished when the reagent carousel cover is
closed or the carousel cover sensor is disconnected.
Test points
In the following positions of the R1 control drive board can signal tests be
performed.
26.4V DC.
12.6V DC.
4-37
12.6V DC.
-12.6V DC.
3.3V power supply: test point of +3V3. Normal voltage range: 3.24V 3.47V
DC.
DC.
Test points Running Voltage Sustaining Voltage Remark
MVREF1 1.8 2.2V 0.9 1.1V R1 reagent
carousel outer
ring motor
carousel inner
ring motor
MVREF3 1.44 1.76V 0.72 0.88V R11 horizontal
motor
MVREF4 1.8 2.2V 0.9 1.1V R11 vertical
motor
MVREF5 1.73 2.11V 0.9 1.1V R11 syringe
motor
motor
motor
motor
points, refer to the PCB layout of the R1 control drive board.

properly.
slots.
4-38
4.6.5 Control Drive Board (R2)

The reagent control drive board (R2, 051-001018-00) drives and controls the R2
reagent carousel, and probes R21/R22.
Receiving position sensor signals and obstruct detection signals of relevant
execution units, and detecting the rotation speed of the sample mixer unit.
Connecting with the two reagent probe level sense boards to detect the fluid
level and control the fluid level detection methods.
Controlling the interior/exterior wash valves, interior wash pump P13, and
return valve V09 of the two reagent probe units.
Connecting with the sample control drive board and receiving sample probe
control signals from it, and turning on/off the interior wash pump P04 and
return valve V05.
The figure below shows the relation between the reagent control drive board (R2)
and other PCBAs and control objects.
4-39
Figure 4.18 Relation between R2 control drive board and other PCBAs and control
objects
R2 outer carousel home position
optical coupler
R2 outer carousel coder optical
coupler
R2 outer carousel motor
R2 reagent carousel
R2 carousel bar code reader
R2 carousel panel key

R2 inner carousel home position
optical coupler
R2 inner carousel coder optical
coupler
R2 inner carousel motor
Main control board

optical coupler 1
optical coupler 2
Probe R21
R21 syringe motor

R21 level detection
Booster pump P13
Return valve V09

optical coupler 1
optical coupler 2

Probe R22
R22 syringe motor
R22 level detection
4-40

Serial port: RS422

Bus
Unit 1
2 panel keys and

Voltage indicators
monitoring
Main control board

Unit 2 F
P 2 proximity
G sensors

difference Bus
34 position
sensors
Serial port: RS422
2 DC motors
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the R2 control drive board is as shown below.
4-41
Figure 4.20 PCB layout of R2 control drive board
J12 J13 J14 J15 J16 J17

J11
J29 J28
J10
FPGA LED
D66-70
J18
MVREF1~5
J9
Unit LED J19
MVREF6~8
J8
Power Key J20
Lid Press
LED Sensor
J7 LED
LED LED
1 2 3 4 5
J6
J5 J4 J3 J2
6 7 8 9 10
J26 J25 J24
J1 J21
J23 D16-17
J22 D44-
D34-45 D32-33 D1-D6 D24-25 D22-23
51
Connectors
The R2 control drive board contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
Main control board connector (J10): 40-pin, used for three MCUs (R2 reagent
carousel unit, probe R21 unit, and probe R22 unit) to communicate with the
middle-layer unit.
R2 bar code reader connector (J7): 10-pin, used for the R2 reagent carousel unit
to communicate with the reagent bar code reader.
400l reagent probe level sense board connectors (J2, J3): 10-pin. J2 is used for
communication between the probe R21 unit and the probe R21 level sense
board; and J3 is used for communication between the probe R22 unit and the
probe R22 level sense board. The communication signals include: serial port
signal, level sense signal, and probe vertical obstruct signal.
Optical coupler detection connector (J12): 50-pin, used to detect the position
and coder signals of the three units (R2 reagent carousel, probe R21 and probe
R22).
Motor drive connectors (J13-J20): 4-pin, used for driving step motors, J13 for R2
reagent carousel outer ring motor, J14 for R2 reagent carousel inner ring motor,
J15 for the probe R21 horizontal motor, J16 for the probe R21 vertical motor,
J17 for the R21 syringe motor, J18 for the probe R22 horizontal motor, J19 for
the probe R22 vertical motor, and J20 for the R22 syringe motor.
4-42
Return valve drive connector (J21): 8-pin, used for controlling the interior wash
return valves of probes R21/R22 and the return valves of probes S2/R21/R22.
Probe wash valve drive connector (J22): 8-pin, used for controlling the exterior
wash valves of probes R21/R22.
DC pump control connector (J25): 6-pin, used for controlling the interior wash
pumps of probes S1/R21/R22.
Reagent load button and indicator connector (J23): 8-pin, used for detecting the
reagent load button, driving/controlling the indicator, and detecting the
proximity sensor of R2 reagent carousel.
MCU JTAG debugging connector (J9): used for debugging of the three MCUs.
FPGA JTAG debugging and downloading connector (J27): used for debugging
and downloading of the FPGA.
Pump/Valve fixture test connector (J30): 18-pin, used for connecting an external
LED board and testing the pumps and valves.
The R2 control drive board contains the following switches and jumpers.
used.
Indicators
The R2 control drive board contains the following indicators.
hibernating.
A-12V (-12V) power supply indicator (D6): green. It is lit when the instrument is
hibernating.
hibernating.
hibernating.
4-43
normally.
normally.
Interior wash pump P13 indicator (D21): green. It is lit when P13 is turned on,
and vice versa.
Interior wash return valve V09 indicator (D49): green. It is lit when V09 is
R2 reagent carousel control button indicator (D22): green. It is lit when the R2
reagent carousel control button is pressed and extinguished when the button is
released.
R2 reagent carousel running indicator (D16): green. It is lit when the R2 reagent
carousel is rotating and extinguished when the carousel stops rotating.
R2 reagent carousel cover indicator (D23): green. It is lit when the R2 reagent
carousel cover is closed; and it is extinguished when the reagent carousel cover is
closed or the carousel cover sensor is disconnected.
Test points
In the following positions of the R2 control drive board can signal tests be
performed.
26.4V DC.
12.6V DC.
4-44
12.6V DC.
-12.6V DC.
DC.
DC.
Test points Running Voltage Sustaining Remark
Voltage
carousel outer
ring motor
carousel inner
ring motor
motor
motor
motor
motor
motor
motor
points, refer to the PCB layout of the R2 control drive board.

properly.
slots.
4-45
4.6.6 AC drive board

The major functions of the PCBA include:
Receiving AC input from the main power supply, and then shifting it to the
BA40 power supply assembly, 12V/30A power supply board and 24V/6A power
supply board.
Receiving control signals from the wash temperature control board to drive four
AC pumps (waste pump P07, cuvette wash vacuum pumps P08 and P14, and
degassing vacuum pump P09) and five AC heaters (whole unit deionized water
heaters HEA01 and HEA05, wash solution heater HEA02, cleaning fluid heater
HEA03, and reaction carousel heater HEA04).
Receiving signals and 24V power supply from the R1 control drive board to
output an adjustable voltage between 16V-23V and drive the interior wash pump
P04. Receiving signals and 24V power supply from the R2 control drive board to
output an adjustable voltage between 16V-23V and drive the interior wash pump
P13.
Converting the 110V AC into 220V AC, which is used to power AC pumps.
The figure below shows the relation between the AC drive board and other PCBAs
and control objects.
4-46
4-47
Figure 4.21 Relation between AC drive board and other PCBAs and control objects
transformer
AC
220V AC
110V AC
24V DC P04 and P13. gear pumps
The PCB layout of the AC drive board is as shown below.

220VAC P14.2# cuvette wash vacuum pump
220VAC P07. waste pump
refrigeration board
220VAC P08.1# cuvette wash vacuum pump

220V AC
Reagent
P09. degassing vacuum pump

AC drive board
F12V 220V/110V HEA01 whole unit cleaning fluid

AC heater 1
220V/110V HEA02 cuvette wash solution heater
AC
220V/110V
P07 AC
HEA03 cuvette cleaning fluid heater
P08 220V/110V
Wash temperature
HEA04 reaction carousel heater

AC
control board
P09
220V/110V HEA05 whole unit cleaning fluid
HEA01 AC heater 2
HEA02 220V/110
Description
F12V power supply board x2
HEA03 V AC
PCB layout
220V/110
HEA04 V AC
BA40 power supply assembly
220V/110
24V/6A power supply board
V AC
220V/110
V AC
switch
power
Main
Figure 4.22 PCB layout of AC drive board
D8
D17
D15 D16 D7 D14 D13

D10 D9 D18 D19
Connectors
The AC drive board contains the following connectors. Refer to the whole unit
wiring diagram for definition of the connector pins.
Power supply:
AC input (J1): alternating current input to J1.
AC output (J2): alternating current output from J2 to power supply assembly.
AC output (J3): alternating current output from J3 to 24V/6A power supply
board.
board 1.
board 2.
AC output (J10): alternating current output from J10 to three heaters.
AC output (J9): alternating current output from J9 to three heaters.
AC output (J8): alternating current output from J8 to four AC pumps.
AC output (J7): AC 110V output from J7 to a linear transformer on instruments
powered by 110V AC. This function is not applicable to instruments powered by
220V AC.
4-48
AC input (J6): AC 220V input through J6 to a linear transformer on instruments
powered by 110V AC. This function is not applicable to instruments powered by
220V AC.
Adjustable DC voltage output (J16): DC voltage output from J16 to interior
wash pump P04.
Adjustable DC voltage output (J13): DC voltage output from J13 to interior
wash pump P13.
Soft-start 12V power connector (J11): 3-pin, 12V DC, used for current-limiting
delay control.
Wash temperature control board connector (J12): 14-pin, 12V DC, used for
controlling the switches of the AC heaters and AC pumps.
R1 control drive board connector (J15): 6-pin, 24V DC and 6V DC, used for
controlling the P04s switch and input of the 24V power supply.
R2 control drive board connector (J14): 6-pin, 24V DC and 6V DC, used for
controlling the P13s switch and input of the 24V power supply.
The AC drive board contains the following switches.
Voltage selection switch (S1): A transformer is used on instruments powered by
110V AC, and the S1 switch is placed to the 110V AC position; no transformer
is used on instruments powered by 220V AC, and the S1 switch is placed to the
220V AC position.
Indicators
The AC drive board contains the following indicators.
Interior wash pump P04 (D8): green. It is lit during cleaning of probe interiors
and weak in other statuses.
Interior wash pump P13 (D17): green. It is lit during cleaning of probe interiors
and weak in other statuses.
Whole unit deionized water heater HEA01 (D14 and D7): green. It is lit during
heating, and it is extinguished in other statuses.
Wash solution heater HEA02 (D16): green. It is lit during heating, and it is
extinguished in other statuses.
Cleaning fluid heater HEA03 (D15): green. It is lit during heating, and it is
Reaction carousel heater HEA04 (D13): green. It is lit during heating, and it is
Cuvette wash vacuum pumps P08 and P14 (D9): green. It is lit when cuvette
wash vacuum is turned on, and it is extinguished when cuvette wash vacuum is
turned off.
Waste pump P07 (D10): green. It is lit when the waste pump is turned on, and it
is extinguished when the waste pump is turned off.
4-49
Degassing vacuum pump P09 (D18): green. It is lit when the degassing vacuum
pump is turned on, and it is extinguished when the degassing vacuum pump is
turned off.
Current-limiting indicator (D19): green. It is lit when instruments powered by
110V AC are powered on, and it is extinguished when instruments powered by
220V AC are powered off.
Test points
N/A.

Please note that most parts of the PCBA are connected to an AC power supply.
Do not operate on the PCBA until disconnecting it from the power supply.
When fixing the AC input connector J1 with a screw, make sure that the
connector is tightened properly in order to prevent it from dropping off during
operation, which may cause electric shock.
properly.
slots.
Pay attention to the position of switch S1. Do not move the switch randomly to
ensure that the AC pump can work normally. (For 220V model, toggle the
switch to the "220V AC" position marked by the board silkscreen and "230V" is
printed on the switch itself; for 110V model, toggle the switch to the "110V AC"
position marked by the board silkscreen and "115V" is printed on the switch
itself.)
When adjusting the fluidic flow of P04 and P13 on the AC drive board, exercise
caution to avoid touching the high-voltage wires or the protection tube.
4.6.7 Reagent Refrigeration Board

The reagent refrigeration board is relatively independent in the entire hardware
system and has the following major functions:
Refrigeration control and drive: controlling the switch of the radiators and
refrigerating the reagent compartment and inner sample carousel to keep the
temperature within certain range.
Control of the refrigeration temperature indicator.
Control of cooling fans and demisting.
Monitoring working voltage of the PCBA.
Controlling and driving the refrigeration circulating pump.
Providing power supply for the ISE module.
4-50
The functional diagram of the reagent refrigeration board is as shown below.
Figure 4.23 Functional diagram of reagent refrigeration board
Temperature protection
Temperature protection
Temperature sensor 1,2
Temperature sensor 3
switch 1
switch 2
Reagent Refrigeration Refrigeration
Refrigeration chamber board
temperature PC
drive temperature temperature
monitoring monitoring indication
Serial port
12 coolers Main
control
board
Cooler
Reagent refrigeration Reagent AC drive
current
MCU refrigeration board
monitoring
circulating
pump control
Lamp fan 5V ISE module

Fan feedback
monitoring
Vacuum pump fan Voltage 24V

Voltage
Fan interfaces
conversi ISE power

Reagent refrigeration monitoring
on supply
fan
Whole unit radiating
fan Demisting
2 bar code
circuit
Power supply demisting
PCB radiating fan interface
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the reagent refrigeration board is as shown below.
4-51
Figure 4.24 PCB layout of reagent refrigeration board
J19 J20 J21 J22 J23 J24 J25 J26 J27

J18 D90D89
J17 D91D92
J16 S1
Power indicator
D52
J15 J14 D53 J1
D51
J13
J12 D88
D87
J2
J11 D79
J10
D75 D74 D54 D55 D56 D98
J9
J8 J7 J6 J5 J4 J3
Connectors
The reagent refrigeration board includes the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input connectors (J1, J2, J26): providing F12V refrigeration, G12V
refrigeration, C24V fan, and 24V ISE for PCBAs.
Connector Pin No. Signal Reference Value Function
J1 1, 2 F12V 11.4 12.6V Refrigeration power
3, 4 GND 0 supply input:
used for loading the
corresponding coolers
J6/J7/J8.
J2 1, 2 G12V 11.4 12.6V Refrigeration power
3, 4 GND 0 supply input: used for
loading the corresponding
coolers J3/J4/J5 and the
PCBA.
J26 1 ISE24V 23.8 25.2V The A24V provided by the
5 ISE24V GND 0 power supply assembly is
converted by the
refrigeration board into 5V
and 24V, which are then
used to power the ISE
module.
4 C24V 23.8 25.2V 24V power supply input for
8 GND 0 cooling fans.
4-52
Power supply output connector (J27): providing ISE24V and ISE5V for the ISE
module, among which ISE5V is converted from ISE24V by the refrigeration
board.
Connector Pin No. Signal Reference Value
J27 1 ISE5V 4.75 5.25V
4 GND 0
3 ISE24V 22.8 25.2V
6 GND 0
Cooler connectors (J3-J8): providing power supply for the coolers.
Connector Pin Signal Reference
No. Value
J3-J8 1 1 cooler 0V for ON and
12V for OFF.
3 12V
2 1 cooler 0V for ON and
12V for OFF.
4 12V
Demisting circuit connector (J10): providing power supply for the demisting
heater.
No. Value
J10 1 2 demisting 12V
2 heaters 0
3 12V
4 0
Temperature protection switch connector (J11): receiving signals of the
temperature protection switch.
No. Value
J11 1 1 temperature 0V
2 protection switch 0V
3 1 temperature 0V
4 protection switch 0V
Fan connector (J12): providing power supply for the 12V fan and checking the
fan status.
No. Value
J12 1 F12V 12V
2 ISE fans feedback Below 0.5V
signal
3 Gnd 0V
4 Reserved
4-53
No. Value
5
6
7 Reserved
8
9
Temperature sensor connectors (J16, J17 and J18): checking temperature of the
refrigeration compartment and refrigeration board.
No. Value
J16 1 Shielding ground 0V
2 GND 0V
3 Temperature sensor /
signal of the
refrigeration board
2 GND 0V
signal 1 of
refrigeration
compartment
2 GND 0V
signal 2 of
refrigeration
compartment
Fan connector (J20): providing power supply for the lamp fan and checking the
fan status.
No. Value
J20 1 C24V 24V
2 Feedback signal Below 0.5V
of light source
radiating fan
3 Gnd 0V
4 Reserved
5
6
Fan connector (J23): providing 24V power supply for the vacuum pump fan and
checking the fan status.
4-54
No. Value
J23 1 C24V 24V
2 Vacuum pump Below 0.5V
radiating
feedback signal
1
3 Gnd 0V
4 C24V 24V
5 Vacuum pump Below 0.5V
radiating
feedback signal
2
6 Gnd 0V
Fan connector (J24): providing power supply for the 24V cooling fan and
checking the fan status.
No. Value
J24 1 C24V 24V
2 Feedback signal of Below 0.5V
cooling fan 1
3 Gnd 0V
4 C24V 24V
5 Feedback signal of Below 0.5V
cooling fan 2
6 Gnd 0V
Refrigeration circulating pump connector (J25): providing power supply for the
refrigeration circulating pump and turning it on/off.
No. Value
J25 1 C24V 24V
2 GND Off: 24V
On: 0V

Main control board serial port (J19): 8-pin, used for communicating with the
main control board.
Switches
The reagent refrigeration board contains the following switches.
RST key (S1): used to reset the CPU of the PCBA.
Indicators
Power supply:
4-55
Indicator Function Color Description
No.
D41 ISE5V Green When it is lit, it indicates that the power
supply works normally.
D50 ISE24V Green When it is lit, it indicates that the power
D45 C24V Green When it is lit, it indicates that the power
D48 VCC Green When it is lit, it indicates that the power
D47 G12V Green When it is lit, it indicates that the power
D49 VDD Green When it is lit, it indicates that the power
D46 F12V Green When it is lit, it indicates that the power

No.
D58 Indicating status of Green When it is lit, it indicates that the
the refrigeration refrigeration circulating pump is
circulating pump working.
the cooler cooler is working.
D79 Indicating status of Red When it is lit, it indicates that the
the lamp fan fan goes wrong.
the lamp fan fan goes wrong.
the ISE fan fan goes wrong.
the vacuum pump fan fan goes wrong.
the vacuum pump fan fan goes wrong.
cooling fan 1 fan goes wrong.
4-56
No.
cooling fan 2 fan goes wrong.

properly.
slots.
4.6.8 Reaction Carousel Temperature Collection Board

The BS-2000M/BS-2200M has a reaction carousel temperature collection board,
which collects the reaction carouse temperature sensor signals and outputs them to
the wash temperature control board.
The functional diagram of the reaction carousel temperature collection board is as
shown below.
Figure 4.25 Functional diagram of reaction carousel temperature collection board
Reaction
Wash carousel
temperature Temperature
control
temperature sensor
board collection
board
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the reaction carousel temperature collection board is as shown
below.
4-57
Figure 4.26 PCB layout of reaction carousel temperature collection board
Connectors
The reaction carousel temperature collection board contains the following
connectors.
Connectors 1-3 (J1-J3) for reaction carousel temperature sensor: 3-pin. Used to
connect the reaction carousel temperature sensor with the temperature detection
circuit. Connectors J2 and J3 are not used temporarily.
Pin No. Signal I/O Description Valid Level and
Name Type
1 SHIELD / Shielded wire of /
sensor
2 REF I Signal cable of /
sensor
3 PT1000 I Signal cable of /
sensor
Power supply and communication connector for reaction carousel temperature

collection board (J9): 20-pin. Used to connect the reaction carousel temperature
collection board and the wash temperature control board.
Pin No. Signal Name I/O Description Valid Level and
Type
1 +24V (reserved) / Positive pole of /
heater
heater
heater
heater
5 HEATER (reserved) / Negative pole of /
heater
4-58
Type
heater
heater
heater
9 RST I Reset control 5V TTL
10 RXD I Received through 5V TTL
serial port
11 ISP I Download 5V TTL
control
12 TXD O Sent through 5V TTL
serial port
13 AGND O Analog ground /
14 NC / / /
15 NC / / /
16 NC / / /
17 NC / / /
18 VPP / 12V power /
supply input
19 AGND / Analog ground /
20 SHIELD / Shielding ground /
Indicators
The reaction carousel temperature collection board contains the following indicators.
+12V power supply indicator (D1): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the
+12V power supply has been connected.
+5V power supply indicator (D2): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +5V
power supply has been connected.
+3.3V power supply indicator (D3): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the
+3.3V power supply has been connected.
PCB status (D5): orange. When the PCB is normal, the indicator will flash
shortly for 4 times and then go out for a relatively long time, with the flashing
and going out repeated.
Test points
In the following positions of the reaction carousel temperature collection board can
signal tests be performed.
TP1: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 12V5%, that is, 11.4 - 12.6V.
TP2: +5V power supply, secondary power supply. Normal range: 5V5%, that is,
4.75 - 5.25V.
TP4: +3.3V power supply, secondary power supply. Normal range: 3.3V5%,
that is, 3.14 - 3.47V.
4-59
TP5: reaction carousel temperature collection board ground.

Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the end of the slots on
the PCBA. Check if the PCBA has been locked tightly.
It requires great force to plug/unplug the connectors. Hold the PCBA by its
edge while plugging/unplugging the connectors to prevent it from being
deformed or damaged.
4.6.9 Cleaning fluid temperature collection board

Function
The instrument has one cleaning fluid temperature collection board, which is mainly
used to:
Process, collect and AD-convert signals of three wash temperature sensors and of
one environment temperature sensor, and provide an SPI access interface. The
cleaning fluid temperature collection board is connected with the wash temperature
control board.
The functional diagram of the cleaning fluid temperature collection board is as
shown below.
Functional diagram of cleaning fluid temperature collection board
Cleaning Temp sensor 1

Wash fluid
temperature Temp sensor 2
control
temperature
collection Temp sensor 3
board
board Temp sensor 4
Description
The PCB layout of the cleaning fluid temperature collection board is as shown
below.
PCB layout of cleaning fluid temperature collection board
4-60
Connectors
The cleaning fluid temperature collection board contains the following connectors:
Temperature sensor connectors 1-4 (J1-J4): 3-pin, used to connect the temperature
sensor with the temperature detection circuit.
J1: connecting cuvette wash solution temperature sensor.
J2: connecting cuvette cleaning fluid temperature sensor.
J3: connecting environment temperature sensor.
J4: connecting whole unit cleaning fluid temperature sensor.
Name Type
1 SHIELD / Shielded wire of sensor /
2 AGND / Signal cable of sensor /
(analog ground)
3 NTC I Signal cable of sensor Analog
Connector J5 for wash temperature control board: 20-pin, used to power the PCBA
and transmit/control the signals.
Name Type
1 SGND / Enclosure ground /
2 SGND / Enclosure ground /
3 CS I AD chip selection input TTL, valid in the
case of low level.
4 NC / NC /
5 SDO O AD chip data output TTL
6 SCLK I AD chip clock input TTL
7 NC / NC /
8 NC / NC /
9 NC / NC /
10 MUX_A I Channel A TTL
4-61
Name Type
11 VPP / 12V power supply input /
12 MUX_B I Channel B TTL
13 GND / Ground /
14 GND / Ground /
15 GND / Ground /
16 NC / NC /
17 NC / NC /
18 NC / NC /
19 NC / NC /
20 NC / NC /
Indicators
The cleaning fluid temperature collection board contains the following indicators.
+5V power supply indicator (D1): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +5V
power supply has been connected.
Test points
In the following positions of the cleaning fluid temperature collection board can
signal tests be performed.
VPP: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 12V5%, that is, 11.4 - 12.6V.
AVCC: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the
analog parts of the PCBA. Normal range: 5V5%, that is, 4.75 - 5.25V.
VCC: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the digital
parts of the PCBA. Normal range: 5V5%, that is, 4.75 - 5.25V.
GND1 and GND2: grounding terminals of the cleaning fluid temperature
collection board.
AIN: AD collection signal test point.
REF: reference voltage.

the PCBA.
4-62
4.6.10 AD collection board
The AD collection board is intended to implement the following functions:
Adjusting gains of 27 photoelectric signals via a digital potentiometer.
Controlling the channel selection switch to switch among 27 channel signals at
different time.
Converting photoelectric analog signals into digital signals via an AD converter
and then outputting the signals.
The figure below shows the relation between the AD collection board and other
PCBAs.
Figure 4.27 Relation between AD collection board and other PCBAs
Preamplifier Preamplifier
board 1 board 2
PD AD collection
board board
Main control
board
The functional diagram of the AD collection board is as shown below.
4-63
Figure 4.28 Functional diagram of AD collection board
Preamplifier board 1
13 analog signal gain adjustment
Preamplifier
Gain
selection
Channel
switch
board (light
adjust ADC Main control board
source
ment
monitoring)
AD collection board
13 analog signal gain adjustment
Preamplifier board 2
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the AD collection board is as shown below.
4-64
Figure 4.29 PCB layout of AD collection board
J3 J2 J1
+12V
-12V
J8
5V
J4
J5 J6 J7
Connectors
The AD collection board contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply output connector (J1): 4-pin, used to provide +12V and -12V power
supplies for the preamplifier board of the inner ring photometer.
1 +12V 11.4 12.6V
2 AGND /
3 -12V -11.4 -12.6V
4 SGND /
Power supply output connector (J7): 4-pin, used to provide +12V and -12V power
supplies for the preamplifier board of the outer ring photometer.
1 +12V 11.4 12.6V
2 AGND /
3 -12V -11.4 -12.6V
4 SGND /
4-65
Connector (J2) for preamplifier board signal input of inner ring photometer: 10-pin,
used to receive photoelectric analog signals of 7 channels.
1 AGND /
2 Signal2 0.25V-2.5V (water blank condition)
4 Signa6 0.25V-2.5V (water blank condition)
9 / /
10 AGND_SHELD /
Connector (J3) for preamplifier board signal input of inner ring photometer: 8-pin,
1 AGND /
8 AGND_SHELD /
Connector (J6) for preamplifier board signal input of outer ring photometer: 10-pin,
1 AGND /
9 / /
10 AGND_SHELD /
Connector (J5) for preamplifier board signal input of outer ring photometer: 8-pin,
4-66
1 AGND /
8 AGND_SHELD /
Main control board connector (J8): 25-pin, used for communication with the main
control board.
Light source monitoring preamplifier board connector (J4): 6-pin, used for
communication with the light source monitoring preamplifier board.
1 Signal 0V-2.5V (light source condition)
2 +12V 11.4 12.6V
3 AGND /
4 AGND /
5 SGND /
6 -12V -11.4 -12.6V

The AD collection board has no switches or jumpers.
Indicators
The AD collection board contains the following indicators.
Power supply:
-12V power supply indicator (D26): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the
-12V power supply has been connected.
Test points
In the following positions of the AD collection board can signal tests be performed.
340: signal output of channel 340nm. Normal range: varies with the signal
strength and lies between 0-5V.
4-67
LIGHT: signal output of light source monitoring channel. Normal range: varies
with the signal strength and lies between 0-5V.
VPP: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 12V5%, that is, 11.4 - 12.6V.
VSS: -12V power supply input. Normal range: -12V5%, that is, -11.4 - -12.6V.
VCC: +5V power supply input. Normal range: 5V5%, that is, 4.75 - 5.25V.

properly.
slots.
It requires great force to plug/unplug the connectors J2-J6. Hold the PCBA by
its edge while plugging/unplugging the connectors to prevent it from being
After connecting J8 connector (DB25), tighten the retaining screws on two sides
of it.
4-68
4.6.11 Preamplifier Board
The preamplifier board is intended to implement the following functions:
Converting optical signals into electric signals via a photodiode array.
With the help of the back circuit, filtering signals and transmitting them to the
AD collection board after amplification.
The figure below shows the relation between the preamplifier board and other
PCBAs.
Figure 4.30 Relation between preamplifier board and other PCBAs
Light signal
Preamplifier board AD collection board
The functional diagram of the preamplifier board is as shown below.

Figure 4.31 Functional diagram of preamplifier board
Light signal
PDA
Signal filtering and amplification
AD collection board
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the preamplifier board is as shown below.
4-69
Figure 4.32 PCB layout of preamplifier board
Connectors
The preamplifier board includes the following connectors.
4-70
Power supply:
Power supply input connector (J1): 4-pin, used to provide +12V and -12V power
supplies for the preamplifier board.
1 +12V 11.4 12.6V
2 AGND /
3 -12V -11.4 -12.6V
4 SGND /

Connector (J2) for preamplifier board signal output: 10-pin, used to receive
photoelectric analog signals of 7 channels.
1 AGND /
9 / /
10 AGND_SHELD /
Connector (J3) for preamplifier board signal output: 8-pin, used to receive
photoelectric analog signals of six channels.
1 AGND /
8 AGND_SHELD /

The preamplifier board has no switches or jumpers.
Indicators
The preamplifier board is encapsulated inside the photometer module and has no
indicators.
4-71
Test points
The preamplifier board is encapsulated inside the photometer module and does not
need maintenance, and it therefore, has no test points.

Since encapsulated inside the photometer module, the preamplifier board should be
maintained together with the photometer module rather than maintained
independently.
4.6.12 Light Source Monitoring Preamplifier Board

The light source monitoring preamplifier board is intended to implement the
following functions:
Converting optical signals into electric signals via a photodiode.
With the help of the back circuit, filtering signals and transmitting them to the
AD collection board after amplification.
Collecting photoelectric signal of the 340nm channel and using it as the
reference light.
The figure below shows the relation between the light source monitoring
preamplifier board and other PCBAs.
Figure 4.33 Relation between light source monitoring preamplifier board and other
PCBAs
Light signal
Preamplifier board AD collection board
The functional diagram of the light source monitoring preamplifier board is as

shown below.
4-72
Figure 4.34 Functional diagram of light source monitoring preamplifier board
Light signal
PD
Signal filtering
and amplifying
Light source
detection
preamplifier board
AD collection board
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the light source monitoring preamplifier board is as shown below.
Figure 4.35 PCB layout of light source monitoring preamplifier board
Connectors
The light source monitoring preamplifier board only contains one connector (welded
on the PCBA), which is used to provide +12V and -12V power supplies for the
preamplifier board and transmits signal to the AD collection board.
4-73
Value
1 Signal 0V-5V
2 +12V 11.4 12.6V
3 AGND /
4 AGND /
5 SGND /
6 -12V -11.4 -12.6V

The light source monitoring preamplifier board has no switches or jumpers.
Indicators
The light source monitoring preamplifier board is encapsulated inside the
photometer module and has no indicators.
Test points
The light source monitoring preamplifier board is encapsulated inside the
photometer module and does not need maintenance, and it therefore, has no test
points.

the PCBA.
4.6.13 Reagent probe level sense board

The instrument has 4 reagent probe level sense boards, used for:
Detecting reagent level. The 4 boards are identical in circuit structure and
interface and can detect fluid level steadily and reliably.
Outputting level sense signals to the control drive board through the
five-probe/mixer conversion board when the probe contacts the fluid level. The
probe is controlled to insert into the fluid for about 2mm depth.
Providing vertical obstruct detection and outputting the detection signals to the
control drive board through the five-probe/mixer conversion board.
The functional diagram of the level sense board is as shown below.
4-74
Figure 4.36 Functional diagram of level sense board
Vertical obstruct
detection circuit
Oscillation
frequency Level sense board
division circuit
Obstruct signal
Amplification
filter circuit
Dual- Phase- 5-probe/mixer Control
Interface
circuit
Fluid level signal
needle locked A/D CPU conversion drive
probe loop Serial communication board board
signal
Description
PCB layout
The top view of the level sense board is as shown below.
Figure 4.37 PCB layout (TOP layer) of level sense board
D5 S1
J2 J3 J4 J1
D2
D4
The bottom view of the level sense board is as shown below.

Figure 4.38 PCB layout (BOTTOM layer) of level sense board
TP5 TP2 TP7 TP1
TP11
TP6
TP4
TP10
TP3
TP9 TP8
S2
Connectors
The level sense board contains the following connectors.
Probe connector (J1): 2-pin, used for connecting the reagent probes with related
circuit.
4-75
Pin No. Signal
1 GND
2 Probe capacitor signal input
Power supply and signal output connector (J2): 4-pin, used to provide power supply
for the level sense board and output the level sense signal and vertical obstruct signal.
1 GND /
2 Vertical High level (about 4V) is output when no vertical
obstruction obstruction occurs, and low level (about 0V) is output
signal when vertical obstruction happens.
output
3 Level sense Low level (about 0V) is output when the probe fails to
signal detect the fluid level, and high level (about 4V) is
output output when the probe detects the fluid level.
4 +12V 11.4 12.6V
Communication cable connector (J3): 3-pin, used for communication between the
level sense board and the control drive board. When receiving calibration instruction
from the control drive board through this connector during every resetting and
reagent aspiration, the level sense board executes self calibration and chooses a fluid
level sensibility judgment criteria.
Pin No. Signal
1 RXD
2 RST
3 TXD
Vertical obstruct detection optical coupler connector (J4): 4-pin, used for connection
between the level sense board and the obstruct detection optical coupler.
1 GND /
2 Signal Blocked: 4V-5V; unblocked: 0V-1V
3 GND /
4 AVDD_R /

The level sense board contains the following switches and jumpers.
PSEN enable jumper (S1): used for downloading application programs.
Calibrate key (S2): used for manual self-calibration of fluid level detection.
Jumper S1 must be disconnected in normal conditions.
Indicators
The level sense board contains the following indicators.
Level sense system calibration indicator (D2): yellow. It is extinguished when the
self-calibration of the level sense system is failed, and vice versa. If it is lit, it
indicates that the calibration is complete and the level sense system is ready for
4-76
measurement. When the calibration is complete, the indicator will be lit all the
time.
Sensitivity switch indicator (D4): red. It is extinguished when the default
sensitivity is being used, and vice versa, which means level sensing is performed
in special positions.
Level sense indicator (D5): green. It is extinguished when the probe fails to
detect the fluid level, and vice versa.
Vertical obstruction indicator (D6): green. It is extinguished when no vertical
obstruction occurs, and vice versa.
Test points
In the following positions of the level sense board can signal tests be performed.
TP1 (LEVEL): level sense signal output. Normal condition: Low level (about 0V)
is output when the probe fails to detect the fluid level, and high level (about 4V)
is output when the probe detects the fluid level.
TP2 (PLL): working point voltage of the level sense system. Normal range:
3.80.5V.
TP3ALEVELanalog fluid level Analog level sense signal, based on which
whether the fluid level is detected or not is determined.
TP4 (GND): grounding terminal of the level sense board.
TP5 (VCO): reserved.
TP6 (RAM): vertical obstruction signal output. Normal condition: High level
(about 4V) is output when no vertical obstruction occurs, and low level (about
0V) is output when vertical obstruction happens.
TP7 (PLL1): reserved.
TP8: voltage monitoring signal for self-calibration of the level sense system.
TP9 (CLK): reserved.
TP10: +9V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the
internal phase-locked loop and some operational amplifiers of the PCBA.
Normal range: 9V5%, that is, 8.55 - 9.45V.
TP11: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power most
components inside the PCBA, such as micro control unit (MCU). Normal range:
5V5%, that is, 4.75 - 5.25V.

the PCBA.
4-77
4.6.14 Sample Probe Level Sense Board
The instrument has 1 sample probe level sense boards, used for:
Detecting sample level. The board can detect sample level steadily and reliably.
Outputting level sense signals to the control drive board through the
five-probe/mixer conversion board when the probe contacts the fluid level. The
probe is controlled to insert into the fluid for about 2mm depth.
Providing vertical obstruct detection and outputting the detection signals to the
control drive board through the five-probe/mixer conversion board.
The functional diagram of the sample probe level sense board is as shown below.
Figure 4.39 Functional diagram of sample probe level sense board
5V Obstruct
Vref
V2 detection
optical coupler
Dual-needle Five-probe/mixer Control drive
V1 Comparator
probe conversion board board
One needle of the probe is grounded through a resistor, and the other needle is
connected to one end (V1) of the comparator and by a proper pull-up resistor (R1)
connected to the power supply (5V). On the other end of the comparator a proper
reference voltage V2 is chosen. Before the two needles contact the fluid level,
V1>V2; when the needles contact the fluid level, V1 will be decreased by resistor R1;
when V1<V2, the comparator outputs a fluid level signal.
Description
PCB layout
The top view of the level sense board is as shown below.
Figure 4.40 PCB layout (TOP layer) of sample probe level sense board
J1 5V D2 J2
D1
The BOTTOM layer has few elements.

Connectors
The level sense board contains the following connectors.
4-78
Communication cable connector (J1): 4-pin, used for communication between the
level sense board and the control drive board.
1 GND /
2 Vertical High level (about 4V) is output when no vertical
obstruct obstruction occurs, and low level (about 0V) is output
signal when vertical obstruction happens.
output
3 Level sense Low level (about 0V) is output when the probe fails to
signal detect the fluid level, and high level (about 4V) is
output output when the probe detects the fluid level.
4 +12V 11.4 12.6V
Probe connector (J2): 2-pin, used for connecting the reagent probes with related
circuit.
Pin No. Signal
1 Probe signal
input
2 Probe signal
input

The sample probe level sense board is simple in principle, having no switches or
jumpers.
Indicators
The level sense board contains the following indicators.
Level sense indicator (D1): green. It is extinguished when the probe fails to
detect the fluid level, and vice versa.
Vertical obstruct indicator (D2): green. It is extinguished when no vertical
obstruction occurs, and vice versa.
Test points
In the following positions of the level sense board can signal tests be performed.
LEVEL: level sense signal output. Normal condition: Low level (about 0V) is
output when the probe fails to detect the fluid level, and high level (about 4V) is
output when the probe detects the fluid level.
RAM: vertical obstruct signal output. Normal condition: High level (about 4V) is
output when no vertical obstruction occurs, and low level (about 0V) is output
when vertical obstruction happens.
5V: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the chip
inside the PCBA. Normal range: 5V5%, that is, 4.75 - 5.25V.

4-79
the PCBA.
4.6.15 Mixer Motor Drive Board

The BS-2000M/BS-2200M has 2 mixer motor drive boards, which control the
mixing of sample and reagent and transmit the motor status to the control drive
board or wash temperature control board.
The functional diagram of the mixer motor drive board is as shown below.
Figure 4.41 Function diagram of mixer motor drive board
Motor drive board
A3979
MCU A3979
Control
drive board
or wash
temperature A3979
control
board
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout (TOP layer) of the mixer motor drive board is as shown below.
4-80
Figure 4.42 PCB layout (TOP layer) of mixer motor drive board
J7 J6 J5
J4
24V
D3
3.3V
5V
D5 D4
J3
J1 J2
The PCB layout (BOTTOM layer) of the mixer motor drive board is as shown
below.
4-81
Figure 4.43 PCB layout (BOTTOM layer) of mixer motor drive board
Connectors
The mixer motor drive board contains the following connectors.
Motor connectors (J1-J3): 4-pin, used for driving the mixer motors.
Pin No. Signal
1 Motor drive signal A+
2 Motor drive signal A-
3 Motor drive signal B+
4 Motor drive signal B-
Power supply and signal output connector (J4): 8-pin, used to provide power supply
for the mixer motor drive board and communicate through serial port with the
control drive board.
1 RXD Signal received through serial port
2 RST Reset signal
3 TXD Signal sent through serial port
4 ISP Relevant signal downloaded online
5 GND /
6 GND /
7 24V 22.8V-25.2V
8 24V 22.8V-25.2V
4-82
Optical coupler connector (J5): 12-pin, used to control and receive optical coupler
signal of the mixer motor drive board.
1 VCC 4.75V-5.25V
2 PHO1 Blocked: 4V-5V; unblocked: 0V-1V
3 GND_R /
4 GND /
5 VCC 4.75V-5.25V
7 GND_R /
8 GND /
9 VCC 4.75V-5.25V
11 GND_R /
12 GND /

The mixer motor drive board has no switches or jumpers.
Indicators
The mixer motor drive board contains the following indicators.
24V power supply indicator (D4): green. When the board is connected to power
supply, this indicator is always lit; going out means the 24V power supply is
abnormal.
5V power supply indicator (D5): green. When the board is connected to power
supply, this indicator is always lit; going out means the 5V power supply is
abnormal.
3.3V power supply indicator (D6): green. When the board is connected to power
supply, this indicator is always lit; going out means the 3.3V power supply is
abnormal.
Test points
In the following positions of the mixer motor drive board can signal tests be
performed.
24V: 24V power supply signal. Normal condition: 22.8V-25.2V.
5V: 5V power supply signal. Normal condition: 4.75V-5.25V.
3.3V (secondary power supply): 3.3V power supply signal. Normal condition:
3.13V-3.47V.

the PCBA.
4-83
4.6.16 Pressure detection board

The pressure detection board is intended to implement the following functions:
Detecting pressure of three gas circuits, converting the detection results into
digital signals, and then sending them to the cuvette wash unit via the serial port.
Providing 12V power supply for the water quality sensor, receiving the water
quality detection signal, converting it into digital signal, and then sending it to
the cuvette wash station via the serial port.
The figure below shows the location of the pressure detection board in the hardware
system.
Figure 4.44 Location of pressure detection board in hardware system
Pressure Wash
Pressure
sensor
Pressure
channel
detection temperature
board control board
Water quality
sensor
The functional diagram of the pressure detection board is as shown below.

Figure 4.45 Functional diagram of pressure detection board
processing
Pressure
sensor
Signal
MCU
conversion
Serial port Auto wash

circuit
AD
MCU
Water quality
processing
sensor
Signal
Description
PCB layout
4-84
Figure 4.46 PCB layout of pressure detection board
Reserved
channels
Cuvette wash pressure

detection sensor
P
R
Whole unit degassing

pressure detection ISE degassing pressure
sensor detection sensor
Connectors
Power supply and communication connector (J1): DB9 connector, used for
connecting the wash temperature control board, providing +12V and -12V power
supplies for the PCBA, and serial port communication with the upper-level PCBA.
Pin Description Applicable Test Methods
No.
1 +12V power supply The voltage at this point lies between 11.4
- 12.6V when the PCBA is working
normally.
2 Serial port input The voltage at this point is greater than
signal 2.4V when the system status is Standby.
3 Serial port output The voltage at this point is greater than
signal 2.4V when the system status is Standby.
4 Online-downloaded The voltage at this point is greater than
enabling signal 2.4V when the system status is Standby.
5 Ground /
4-85
Pin Description Applicable Test Methods
No.
6 -12V power supply The voltage at this point lies between
-12.6 - -11.4V when the PCBA is working
normally.
7 Reset signal The voltage at this point is greater than
2.4V when the system status is Standby.
8 Ground /
9 Ground /
Water quality sensor connector (J2): 6-pin, providing power supply for the water
quality detection board and receiving water quality signal.
Pin Description Test Methods
No.
1 +12V power The voltage at this point lies between
supply 11.4 - 12.6V when the PCBA is working
normally.
2 -12V power The voltage at this point lies between
supply -11.6 - -11.4V when the PCBA is
working normally.
3 Water quality The voltage at this point lies between
sensor input 10-12.6V when there is no water inside
signal the water quality sensor base, and lies
between 0-5V when the water quality
sensor base is filled with deionized
water.
4 Power supply /
ground
5 Power supply /
ground
6 Shielded layer of /
cable, connected
with the
grounding
terminal of the
PCBA
Reserved pressure sensor connector (J3): reserved connector.

MCU downloading enable jumper (S2): When it is short-circuited, it indicates that
the MCU is downloading something. The jumper must be disconnected when the
PCBA is working normally. The jumper is only used by the manufacture line to
download program and will not be used after the instrument's delivery.
Indicators and test points
Indicators:
+12V power supply indicator (VPP): green. It is lit when the +12V power
supply is working normally.
4-86
-12V power supply indicator (VEE): green. It is lit when the -12V power supply
is working normally.
+5V digital power supply indicator (VDD): green. It is lit when the +5V digital
power supply is working normally.
+5V analog power supply indicator (AVDD): green. It is lit when the +5V
analog power supply is working normally.
Test points:
+12V power supply (VPP): with normal range of 11.4 - 12.6V.
-12V power supply (VEE): with normal range of -12.6 - -11.4V.
+5V digital power supply (VDD): with normal range of 4.8 - 5.2V.
+5V analog power supply (AVDD): with normal range of 4.8 - 5.2V.
Whole unit degassing negative pressure test point (PRESSURE01): The voltage
at this point lies between 3.9-4.4V when the pressure sensor is connected to the
air.
ISE degassing negative pressure test point (PRESSURE02): The voltage at this
point lies between 0.05-0.4V when the pressure sensor is connected to the air.
Whole unit cleaning negative pressure test point (PRESSURE03): The voltage at
this point lies between 0.1-0.3V when the pressure sensor is connected to the air.
Reserved pressure detection channel test point (PRESSURE04): reserved
channel.
Water quality detection channel test point (WATER): When the water quality
sensor cable (J2) is disconnected, the voltage at this point lies between 4.8-5.2V;
when the J2 cable is connected, the voltage varies with the status of the water
quality.

Tighten the two retaining screws on two sides of connector J1, and insert
connector J2 properly into the PCBA.
When connecting the pressure sensors (U1, U2 and U4) to the gas circuit, press
them slightly and connect them with proper force to avoid breaking the
connectors.
Install the shielded cover after installing or repairing the PCBA.
4.6.17 Clog detection board

The BS-2000M/BS-2200M has two clog detection boards, which are exactly the same
in functions and respectively used for needle S1 and S2 of the same probe.
The clog detection board possesses the following functions:
Collecting pressure by connecting with the pressure sensor.
Checking for clogs under the control of the sample control drive board.
4-87
Sending debugging information to the debugging computer.
The figure below shows the location of the clog detection board in the hardware
system.
Figure 4.47 Location of clog detection board in hardware system
Sample
Clog detection
Sensor control drive
board
board
PC
(for debugging
only)
The functional diagram of the clog detection board is as shown below.
Figure 4.48 Functional diagram of clog detection board
Constant current drive Clog detection board Power supply Sample

control
Compen IO drive
Differential and Differential Secondary ADC Serial port
Single-end board
Sensor Analog
signal
primary Analog
signal
amplificati
analog signal
and
amplificat -on
MCU Debugging
-ion Serial port
PC
Description
PCB layout
Figure 4.49 PCB layout of clog detection board
4-88
Connectors
Pressure sensor connector (J1): connected with the pressure sensor.
Pin No. Description Test Methods
1 Positive end input of /
pressure sensor
2 Positive end of power /
supply
3 Negative end of /
power supply
4 Negative end input of /
pressure sensor
5 Gain adjustment /
resistance
6 Gain adjustment
resistance
Clog detection board control connector (J2): connected with the sample control drive
board and used for communicating control signals during clog detection process.
1 +12V power supply The voltage lies between 11.4-12.6V
when the PCBA is working normally.
2 -12V power supply /
(reserved)
3 Confirmed clog The voltage at this point is less than 0.4V
signal when no clog signal is detected.
4 Possible clog signal /
(reserved)
5 Empty aspirate /
signal (reserved)
6 Interruption control /
signal
7 Interruption enable /
signal
8 Ground /
9 Reserved input /
10 Reserved output /
Clog detection board communication connector (J3): connected with the sample
control drive board and used for serial port communication between the clog
detection board and the sample probe unit.
1 +12V power supply The voltage lies between
11.4-12.6V when the PCBA is
working normally.
2 -12V power supply /
(reserved)
4-89
3 Serial port input signal The voltage at this point is
greater than 2.4V when the
system status is Standby.
4 Serial port output The voltage at this point is
signal greater than 2.4V when the
5 Online-downloading The voltage at this point is less
enable signal than 0.4V when the system
status is Standby.
6 Reset signal The voltage at this point is
greater than 2.4V when the
7 Ground /
8 Ground /
Clog detection board debugging connector (J4): connected with the serial port of a
computer and used for debugging the clog detection system. This connector is
temporarily not used.
Pin No. Description Test
Methods
1 +12V power supply /
2 -12V power supply (reserved) /
3 Serial port input signal /
4 Serial port output signal /
5 Ground /

MCU downloading enable jumper (S2): When it is short-circuited, it indicates that
the MCU is downloading something. The jumper must be disconnected when the
PCBA is working normally.
Indicators and test points
Indicators
Clog signal indicator (D3): red. It is lit when the PCBA outputs a clog signal.
Empty aspirate signal indicator (D4): It is lit when the PCBA outputs an empty
aspirate signal.
Possible clog signal indicator (D5): It is lit when the PCBA outputs a possible
clog signal.
+5V power supply indicator (D6): green. It is lit when the +5V power supply is
working normally.
+12V power supply indicator (D7): green. It is lit when the +12V power supply
is working normally.
Test points
+12V power supply (VPP): The voltage at this point lies between 11.4-12.6V
when the PCBA is working normally.
4-90
-12V power supply (VEE): reserved test point.
Ground (GND): This test point is connected with the grounding terminal of the
PCBA.
Pressure sensor output signal (ANALOG): It is an analog signal amplified by the
pressure sensor. When the pressure sensor is connected to the air, the voltage at
this point lies between 0.8-1.3V.
Clog signal (CLOG_Y): It is a test point of clog signal output. When the PCBA
outputs a clog signal, indicator D3 will be lit and the voltage at this point greater
than 2.4V; when the PCBA outputs no clog signal, indicator D3 will be
extinguished and the voltage at this point less than 0.4V.
Empty aspirate signal (NO_SAM):When the PCBA outputs an empty aspirate
signal, indicator D4 will be lit and the voltage at this point greater than 2.4V;
when the PCBA outputs no empty aspirate signal, indicator D4 will be
extinguished and the voltage at this point less than 0.4V.
Possible clog signal (CLOG_M): reserved test point.
Debugging test point (TEST): used for test during debugging.

Insert connectors J2 and J3 tightly into the PCBA. When inserting connector J1,
you will hear a click, which means that the connector is inserted in place into its
slot.
4.6.18 Water quality detection board

The water quality detection board converts the status of water quality into changes
of output analog voltage.
The water quality sensor is like two electrodes. When the base is full of water, the
specific resistance of water links the electrodes to form a circuit. Different voltage
can be obtained based on the specific resistance. When the water contains a lot of
foreign matters, the resistance is low and the voltage is low; and vice versa. The
voltage at J1-1 is within 0-5V when the base is full of water. It can be understood
that the lower the voltage, the worse the water quality. The circuit has been designed
with a comparison threshold, and an alarm indicating water quality error is given
when the voltage at J1-1 is lower than this threshold.
The figure below shows the location of the water quality detection board in the
hardware system.
4-91
Figure 4.50 Location of water quality detection board in hardware system
Wash
temperatur
Water
Pressure e control Main
quality
detection board control
detection
board (cuvette board
board
wash
station)
Description
PCB layout
Figure 4.51 PCB layout of water quality detection board
Connectors
Power supply and output signal connector (J1): used for providing the 12V power
supply for the PCBA and outputting water quality signals.
Pin Description Test Methods
No.
1 Sensor output signal The voltage at this point lies
between 10-12.6V when there is
no water inside the water quality
sensor base, and lies between
0-5V when the water quality
sensor base is filled with
deionized water.
2 Power supply ground /
3 -12V power supply The voltage at this point lies

between 11.4 - 12.6V when the
4 Power supply ground /
5 +12V power supply The voltage at this point lies

between -11.6 -11.4V when the
6 Corresponding to the shielded /
layer, which is connected with
the pressure detection board.

The water quality detection board exists in the form of water quality sensor
assembly, and needs not to be removed once installed.
4-92
The water quality sensor can be removed from its base. The electrode wire of
the water quality sensor is a type of precious metal and should not be touched
when you remove the sensor.
4.6.19 External Vacuum Pump Drive Board

Function
The external vacuum pump drive board is located inside the external vacuum pump
module and intended to:
Receive the vacuum pump control signals and drive/control the external AC
vacuum pump.
Provide drive connectors for two AC fans.
Description
The functional diagram of the external vacuum pump drive board is as shown below.
Functional diagram of external vacuum pump drive board
Switch (with LED)

Vacuum pump drive board
Analyzer
Fuse +12V
AC Wash
input Fuse Control
temperature
Relay
control board
Fan 1 Fan 1 Vacuum pump
The PCB layout of the vacuum pump drive board is as shown below.
Figure 4.52 PCB layout of external vacuum pump drive board
Connectors
J1: connector for external AC 220V/110V input.
4-93
No. Description
1 220V/110V AC N
2 NC
3 220V/110V AC L
J2/J3: connectors for AC fan power supply output.

No. Description
1 220V/110V AC N
2 NC
3 220V/110V AC L
J4: connectors for AC vacuum pump power supply output.

No. Description
1 220V/110V AC N
2 NC
3 220V/110V AC L
J5: connector for AC vacuum pump control signal input.

No. Description
1 OUT_PUMP_CTRL
2 NC
3 +12V
Indicators
Indicators for sending/receiving communication signals:
AC vacuum pump control signal indicator (D2): red. When it is lit, it indicates that
the AC vacuum pump control signal is valid and the vacuum pump is working
normally.
4.6.20 Five-Probe/Mixer Conversion Board

There are two five-probe/mixer conversion boards, which are exactly the same and
compatible with each other. The two five-probe/mixer conversion boards are
intended for the following functions:
#1 five-probe/mixer conversion board:
Shifting signals between the R1 control drive board and the probe R11 level
sense board.
sense board.
Shifting signals between the sample control drive board and the sample probe
level sense board.
4-94
Shifting signals between the sample control drive board and the sample mixer
drive board.
#2 five-probe/mixer conversion board:
sense board.
sense board.
Shifting signals between the wash temperature control board and the reagent
mixer drive board.
Description
The PCB layout of the five probe/mixer conversion board is as shown below.
PCB layout of five probe/mixer conversion board
Connectors
J1, J2 and J3: fluid level detection connectors for the control drive board. Refer to
the following table for signal description.
Type
2 RAMn O Vertical obstruct signal TTL
3 LLSn O Level sense signal TTL
4 DVPP / Power supply D12V /
5 EVPP / Power supply E12V /
6 TXD-Ln I Serial port sending signal TTL
7 RST-Ln I Reset signal (reserved) TTL
8 RXD-Ln O Serial port received signal TTL
9 PSEN-Ln I Downloading enable signal TTL
(reserved)
10 / Shielding ground /
J10, J11 and J12: fluid level detection connectors for the level sense board. Refer to
the following table for signal description.
Type
2 RAMn O Vertical obstruct signal TTL
4-95
Type
3 LLSn O Level sense signal TTL
4 DVPP / Power supply D12V /
5 EVPP / Power supply E12V /
6 TXD-Ln I Serial port sending signal TTL
7 RXD-Ln O Serial port received signal TTL
8 NC NC NC NC
J4 and J6: mixer drive board communication connectors for control drive board or
wash temperature control board. J6 is not used temporarily. Refer to the following
table for signal description.
Type
1 TXD O Sent through serial port TTL
2 RST O Reset control TTL
3 RXD I Received through serial port TTL
4 ISP O Download control TTL
J5 and J7: mixer drive board power supply connectors for control drive board or
wash temperature control board. J7 is not used temporarily. Refer to the following
table for signal description.
Type
1 GND / Power supply ground /
3 24V / 24V power supply /
J8 and J9: mixer drive board connectors for mixer drive board. J9 is not used
temporarily. Refer to the following table for signal description.
Type
1 TXD O Sent through serial port TTL
2 RST O Reset control TTL
3 RXD I Received through serial port TTL
4 ISP O Download control TTL
4-96
The PCBA is narrow and fragile. Hold the PCBA by its edge while
plugging/unplugging the connectors to prevent it from being deformed or
damaged.
4.6.21 Communication Conversion Board

Function
The communication conversion board is intended for the following functions:
Providing connectors for the main control board: serial port, network interface,
and USB interface.
Providing connectors for the control console (computer): standard DB9 serial
port, RJ45 network interface, and standard USB interface.
Shifting, isolating and protecting the signals received at the connectors
connecting the main control board and the control console.
Description
The PCB layout of the communication conversion board is as shown below.
Top view:
Figure 4.53 PCB layout (TOP layer) of communication conversion board
Bottom view:
Figure 4.54 PCB layout (BOTTOM layer) of communication conversion board
Connectors
J1: USB interface to connect a computer. (Reserved)
4-97
J2: DB9 serial port to connect a computer.
J3: serial port communication interface to connect the main control board.
J4: USB interface to connect the main control board.
J5: standard RJ45 network interface to connect a computer.
J6: Ethernet interface to connect the main control board.
Indicators
N/A
4.6.22 Network Interface Conversion Board

Function
The network interface conversion board is intended for the following functions:
Providing serial port connection (at most 5 ports) between the computer and
analyzers or SDM main control board.
Providing conversion of PC and internal network interface of the whole unit or
the RJ45 of a switch.
Description
The PCB layout of the network interface conversion board is as shown below.
Top view:
Figure 4.55 PCB layout (TOP layer) of network interface conversion board
Bottom view:
Figure 4.56 PCB layout (BOTTOM layer) of network interface conversion board
4-98
Connectors
P1: DB25 serial port for connecting a computer, including 5 serial ports.
J1-J5: serial ports for connecting analyzer or SDM main control board.
J6: RJ45 network interface for connecting a computer.
J7: used to connect the internal network interface of the whole unit or the RJ45 of a
switch.
Indicators
N/A
4.6.23 Main Control Board (SDM)

The main control board of the SDM is basically the same with that of the analyzer
(refer to 4.6.1 ), except that:
The main control board of the SDM is connected with low-layer units of the
rack feeder system and redefined for its interfaces.
The main control board of the SDM does not use the AD collection interface.
Description
PCB layout
The main control board of the SDM uses the same PCB with that of the analyzer.
Refer to 4.6.1 for details.
Connectors
The main control board includes the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input (J1): 6-pin, providing +/-12V analog (reserved) and +5V digital
for the PCBA.
Value
1 +12V /
(reserved)
2 -12V /
(reserved)
3 +5V 4.75 5.25V
4 12VGND /
5 12VGND /
6 GND /

Connector (J2) for PC: 10-pin, RS232, used for communication with a computer.
with the No.1 and No.2 track control drive board.
4-99
with the No.3 and No.4 track control drive board.
with the SDM control drive board.
Reagent refrigeration board connector(J5) : 8-pin, RS422, used for reservation.
AD collection board connector(J7):DB25 reserved
ISE connector (J8): 8-pin, reserved
Connector (J9) for ISE bar code reader: 8-pin, used for reservation.
Ethernet connector (J12): 6-pin, used for reservation.
BDM connector (J13): 26-pin, used for debugging the CPU software.
JTAG connector (J14): 14-pin, used for debugging the FPGA.
The main control board contains the following switches and jumpers.
RST key (S1): used for resetting the CPU of the board. It is only used for debugging
the board before the instrument's delivery.
Indicators
Power supply:
+12V power supply indicator (D4): green. It is the reserved indicator.
-12V power supply indicator (D17): green. It is the reserved indicator.
+5V power supply indicator (D16): green. It is lit when the rack feeder system
power switch is turned on, indicating that the +5V power supply has been
connected.
+3.3V power supply indicator (D3): green. It is lit when the rack feeder system
power switch is turned on, indicating that the +3.3V power supply has been
connected.
FPGA configuration indicator (D29): orange. It is lit in normal conditions,
which means that the FPGA has been configured successfully.
FPGA function indicator 1 (D25): green. It flashes continuously in normal
conditions, which means that the FPGA is working.
the PCBA communicates with a smart module.
4-100
Indicators to indicate network interface:
Network interface Link indicator (D10): green. When it is lit, it indicates the
Ethernet has been connected; when it flashes, it means that the PCBA is
communicating with the Ethernet.
Network interface Full-duplex indicator (D7): green. When it is lit, it indicates
that the Ethernet is working in full-duplex mode.
Network interface Collision indicator (D8): green. When it is lit, it indicates that
a conflict is detected on Ethernet communication.
Test points
In the following positions of the main control board can signal tests be performed.
J1.1: +12V power supply input. It is the reserved input. No voltage is input in
normal conditions.
J1.2: -12V power supply input. It is the reserved input. No voltage is input in
normal conditions.
major digital circuits of the PCBA. Normal range: 2.97 - 3.63V.
CPU core. Normal range: 1.35 - 1.65V.
U65.4: +1.2V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the
FPGA core. Normal range: 1.08 - 1.32V.

properly.
slots.
It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J3, J4, J6, J10 and J11.
4-101
4.6.24 Control Drive Board (SDM)
The SDM control drive board is used to:
communicate with the main control board through 422 serial port;
communicate with FPGA through bus and transmit the data and instructions.
receive the signal from the main board to control the supply, scanning, advance
and retrieval of the sample rack;
provide ISP control connectors for CPUs to update the application software.
The following figure shows the control signal of the SDM control drive board.
Figure 4.57 Control signal of SDM control drive board
Supply push-in motor
34 optical coupler STAT push-back

signals motor
Scanning push-out
Serial port RS422 Bus motor
CPU1
SDM Scanning push-in
main motor
control FPGA
board Serial port RS422 Bus Rerun buffer advance
CPU2 motor
Rerun buffer retraction

motor
Retrieval push-in
motor
Return push-in motor
Description
PCB layout
4-102
Figure 4.58 PCB layout of SDM control drive board
J12 J13 J14 J15 J16 J17

J11
J29 J28
J10
FPGA LED
D66-70
J18
MVREF1~5
J9
Unit LED J19
MVREF6~8
J8
Power Key J20
LED Press
J7 LED
1 2 3 4 5
J6
J5 J4 J3 J2
6 7 8 9 10
J26 J25 J24
J1 J21
J23 J22
D29-31 D26-28 D1-D6 D22-23
Connectors
The SDM control drive board contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
Value
1 A+12V Reserved and
unused
2 +5V 4.855.25V
3 +12V Reserved and
unused
4 +24V 23.526V
5 +24V 23.526V
6 A-12V Reserved and
unused
7 GND /
8 GND /
9 GND /
10 GND /

SDM control drive board connector (J10): 40-PIN, used for the 2 MCUs to
communicate with the middle-layer unit and to download parameters online.
Sample bar code reader connector (J7): 10-pin, used for communication with the
bar code reader.
4-103
Optical coupler detection connector 1 (J12): 50-PIN, used to detect the optical
coupler signals of the sample rack scanning push-in part, scanning push-out part,
scanning unit and rack supply unit.
optical coupler detection connector (J11): 40-PIN, used to detect the optical
coupler signals of the sample rack passing lane, return lane, retrieval channel,
normal lane and rerun channel.
optical coupler detection connector 3 (J28): 20-PIN used to detect the optical
coupler signals of the return push-in part and retrieval push-in part.
optical coupler detection connector 4 (J29): 30-PIN used to detect the signal of
retrieval sample rack sensor and the optical coupler signals of push-in part of
the rack supply unit and STAT push-back part.
Motor connectors (J13-J20): 4-PIN, used to drive the 8 motors. J13 connects
push-in part of the rack supply unit, J14 STAT push-back motor, J15 scanning
push-in motor, J16 scanning push-out motor, J17 rerun buffer advance motor
and J18 rerun buffer retraction motor, J19 retrieval push-in motor and J20
return push-in motor.
Probe wash valve drive connector (J24): 8-PIN, used to control the stroke switch
signal.
SDM panel key and indicator connector (J23): 8-pin, used for detecting the two
panel keys and driving/controlling the two indicators.
Rack type sensor connector(J4): 14-PIN, used to detect the signal of the rack
type sensor.
The control drive board (SDM) contains the following switches and jumpers.
used.
Indicators
The control drive board (SDM) contains the following indicators.
5V (A5V) power supply indicator (D3): green. It is lit when the instrument is
A+12V (D12V) power supply indicator (D5): green, reserved.
A-12V (E12V) power supply indicator(D6): green, reserved.
+12V (C12V) power supply indicator (D4): green, reserved.
Panel lamp indicator 1 (D16): green. It is lit when the panel lamp is lit, and
extinguished in other conditions.
4-104
Panel lamp indicator 2 (D17): green. It is lit when the panel lamp is lit, and
extinguished in other conditions.
Panel key indicator 1 (D22): green. It is lit when the key is pressed, and
extinguished when the key is released.
Panel key indicator 2 (D23): green. It is lit when the key is pressed, and
extinguished when the key is released.
Stroke switch indicator (D25): green. It is lit when the stroke switch is turned on,
and extinguished when the stroke switch is turned off.
FPGA indicator(D66): yellow. When FPGA works normally, it is lit. When the
FPGA program is being burnt or initialized, it is extinguished.
Test points
In the following positions of the SDM control drive board can signal tests be
performed.
+24V (B24V) power supply: test point of +24V. Normal voltage range: 21.6
26.4V DC.
+12V (C12V)power supply: test point of +12V, reserved.
A+12V (D12V)power supply: test point of A+12V, reserved.
A-12V (E12V)power supply: test point of A-12V, reserved.
DC.
DC.
Test points Running Sustaining Remark
Voltage Voltage
MVREF1 1.67V 0.45V Rack supply
push-in motor
MVREF2 1.67V 1.67V STAT push-back
motor
MVREF3 1.14V 0.28V Scanning push-in
motor
MVREF4 1.14V 0.28V Scanning
push-out motor
MVREF5 2.00V 0.50V Rerun buffer
motor 1
MVREF6 2.00V 0.50V Rerun buffer
motor 2
MVREF7 1.14V 0.28V Rack retrieval
push-in motor
MVREF8 1.67V 0.45V Rack return
push-in motor
4-105
points, refer to the PCB layout of the SDM control drive board.

properly.
slots.
4.6.25 Track Control Drive Board

The track control drive board is used to:
communicate with the main control board through 422 serial port;
communicate with FPGA through bus and transmit the data and instructions.
receive instructions from the main control board to transfer sample racks on the
normal lane and non-normal lanes.
provide ISP control connectors for the 2 CPUs to update the application
software.
The functional diagram of the track control drive board is as shown below.
4-106
Figure 4.59 Function diagram of track control drive board
Right caterpillar motor

of normal lane
Aspirate positioning
motor of normal lane
Buffer 2 stopper motor

of normal lane
Buffer 1 stopper motor

of normal lane
Post-aspiration stopper
30 optical coupler motor of normal lane
signals
Left caterpillar motor

of normal lane
Serial port RS422 Bus
CPU1
SDM of passing lane
main FPGA
control Aspirate positioning
board Serial port RS422 Bus motor of passing lane
CPU2

of return lane
Lane change motor
Return push-out motor

of passing lane

of return lane
Lane change stopper

motor
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the track control drive board is as shown below.
4-107
Figure 4.60 PCB layout of track control drive board
MVREF9 MVREF7 MVREF8 MVREF10 MVREF11 MVREF12 MVREF13 MVREF14
J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 J10 J12
J21
J22 J23
J20 J26 J27
J28
J11
J19 D3
J25 D6 J3
D5
J24 S1
J1
J4
J18 J17 J16 J15 J14 J13 J2
MVREF6 MVREF5 MVREF4 MVREF3 MVREF2 MVREF1
Connectors
The track control drive board contains the following connectors.
Mixed connector:
On-line connector(J1):22PIN used to switch to 24V power supply and the
RS422 signal.
Optical coupler detection connectors 1, 2, 3 and 4 (J11: 40-PIN; J12: 50-PIN;
J21: 20-PIN; J22: 30-PIN): used for the input of the optical couplers of the
normal lane.
Motor connectors (J13-J20, J5-J10): 4-PIN used to drive the 6 step motors of
the normal lane, among which J13 is intended for the right caterpillar motor, J14
for the aspirate positioning motor, J15 for the buffer 2 stopper motor, J16 for
the buffer 1 stopper motor, J17 for the post-aspiration stopper motor, and J18
for the caterpillar belt motor. J19 is intended for the right caterpillar motor of
the passing lane, J20 for the aspirate positioning motor of the passing lane, J5
for the right belt motor of the return lane, J6 for the lane change motor, J7 for
the return push-out motor, J8 for the left belt motor of the passing lane, J9 for
the left caterpillar motor of the return lane, and J10 for the lane change stopper
motor.
The track control drive board contains the following switches and jumpers.
Key S1: used to reset the smart modules during debugging of the PCBA.
Parameters need to be configured when the instrument is powered on. No
debugging is needed after the instrument's delivery.
4-108
Indicators
The track control drive board contains the following indicators.
24V power supply indicator (D3): yellow. It is lit when the instrument is powered
5V power supply indicator (D6): yellow. It is lit when the instrument is powered
3.3V power supply indicator (D5): yellow. It is lit when the instrument is
Test points
In the following positions of the track control drive board can signal tests be
performed.
+24V (VBB) power supply: test point of TP13. Normal voltage range: 21.6
26.4V DC.
5V (VCC) power supply: test point of VCC. Normal voltage range: 4.95V
5.05V DC.
3.3V (VDD) power supply: test point of VDD. Normal voltage range: 3.24V
3.47V DC.
1.2V (VDD12) power supply: test point of VDD12. Normal voltage range: 1.17
V 1.23V DC.
Test Running Sustaining Remark
points Voltage Voltage
MVREF1 1.14V 0.28V MCG1
Right caterpillar motor of normal
lane
Aspirate positioning motor of
normal lane
Buffer 2 stopper motor of normal
lane
Buffer 1 stopper motor of normal
lane
Post-aspiration stopper motor of
normal lane
Left caterpillar motor of normal
lane
MVREF7 1.14V 0.28V MCS1
Right caterpillar motor of passing
lane
4-109
Test Running Sustaining Remark
points Voltage Voltage
Aspirate positioning motor of
passing lane
MVREF9 1.14V 0.28V MFH1
Right caterpillar motor of return
lane
MVREF10 0.82V 0.53V MBG1
Lane change motor
Return push-out motor
Left caterpillar motor of passing
lane
Left caterpillar motor of return
lane
MVREF14 2.37V 1.55V MBG2
Lane change stopper motor
points, refer to the PCB layout of the track control drive board.

properly.
slots.
4.6.26 Interconnection Conversion Board (SDM)

The interconnection conversion board (SDM) is used to switch to 24V power supply
and convert the communication electric level from TTL to RS422.
The following figure shows the control signal of the interconnection conversion
board.
24V power 24V Interconnection
Interconnection 24V
supply board conversion
conversion
Main control board (front
TTL board (SDM)
board RS422 track)
4-110
Description
PCB layout
Figure 4.61 PCB layout of interconnection conversion board
Connectors
Interconnection conversion board(SDM) contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
DC 5V input connector (J2)
Value
1 24V 23.526V
3 GND /
DC 5V input connector (J6)

Value
1 5V 4.85 - 5.25V
2 GND /
DC power supply output connector (J3)

Value
1 24V 23.5 - 26V
2 5V 4.85 - 5.25V
3 GND /
4 GND /
4-111
TLL electric level input connectors (J4-J5): 8-PIN, used to input the TTL electric
level signal for the main control unit.
Connectors for sending/receiving mixed signal
On-line connector (J1): 22-PIN, used to switch to 24V power supply and the
RS422 signal.
Indicators
Interconnection conversion board(SDM) contains the following indicators.

Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA. Check the
connectors with clamps and ensure that the clamps have been locked properly.
slots.
4.6.27 Interconnection Conversion Board (Rack Transfer Unit)

The interconnection conversion board (rack transfer unit) converts 24V into 5V on
the SDM.
Description
PCB layout
4-112
Figure 4.62 PCB layout of interconnection conversion board (rack transfer unit)
Connectors
Interconnection conversion board (rack transfer unit) contains the following
connectors.
Power supply:
DC power supply connector (J2): converts 24V into 5V and outputs it to the SDM
interconnection conversion board.
Value
1 24V 23.526V
2 5V 4.855.25V
3 GND /
4 GND /
DC 5V connector (J6): outputs 5V to the main control board.

Value
1 5V 4.855.25V
2 GND /
DC power supply connector (J3): outputs 24V and 5V to the SDM control drive
board.
Value
1 24V 23.526V
2 5V 4.855.25V
3 GND /
4 GND /
4-113
Indicators
The interconnection conversion board (rack transfer unit) contains the following
indicators.

Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA. Check the
connectors with clamps and ensure that the clamps have been locked properly.
slots.
4-114
4.7 Power Supply System
4.7.1 Power Supply System of Whole Unit

The power supply system of the whole unit is shown in the figure below. L/N phase
is represented by the same line.
Figure 4.63 AC power supply diagram of the whole unit
Wiring
Wiring terminal terminal
24V6A board 0
Switch 24V6A board 1
(reserved)
Air 24V6A board 2
switch Wiring Main power 24V6A board 3
on wall terminal switch Rack feeder system
power switch 24V6A board 4
Analyzer power
switch x4 Analyzer 1
Analyzer 2
Analyzer 3
Analyzer 4
Wiring terminal
The figure below shows the DC power supply of the rack feeder system.
Figure 4.64 DC power supply of rack feeder system
J1 Main control board

5V
Control drive board
J1
(SDM)
24/5V
Including 24V-to-5V
Interconnection circuit
J3
24V6A conversion board
J2 J6
board 0# 24V (rack transfer unit)
J2
0#
5V
J6 Interconnection
24V6A 24V
J2 24V J2 conversion board J1 J1 Track control drive board 1#
board 1#
J3 (SDM) 1#
5V
J6 Interconnection
24V6A 24V
board 2#
J3 (SDM) 2#
5V
J6 Interconnection
24V6A 24V
board 3#
J3 (SDM) 3#
5V
J6 Interconnection
24V6A 24V
board 4#
J3 (SDM) 4#
The internal power supply of the each analyzer is independent as described below.
4-115
4.7.2 Power Supply System of Analyzer
As shown in the figure below, AC power supply passes through the main power
switch and then comes to the AC drive board, which then divides the power supply
into three parts and provides them for the BA40 power supply assembly, 24V/6A
power supply board and 12V/30A power supply boards (2 sets). The 110V/220V
transformer circuit is only used on instruments powered by 110V power supply. In
this circuit, the 110V AC power supply is transformed to 220V and then used to
power the AC pumps on the instrument.
Figure 4.65 Power supply system diagram
To enclosure Analyzer
E yellow green Main power switch power switch
L brown AC drive board
L brown L
Power BA40 power
socket N light blue N light blue N supply
assembly
24V/6A
power supply
L N L N board (2 sets)
Note: The 110V/220V
transformer circuit is only
used on the 110V model to 110V/220V 12V/30A
convert 110V AC into 220V transformer power supply
AC, powering the AC pumps. board

The BA40 power supply assembly, as the major part of the entire power supply
system, consists of three boards, which are 24V power supply board, 12V power
supply board and power supply conversion board. It provides power supply for the
lamp, DC power supply for major control boards, and power supply for refrigeration
modules. After passing through the analog power supply conversion board, the C12V
power is converted into +/-12V and then provided for the AD collection circuit and
other analog circuits. The A5V, C12V, B24V, D12V and +/-12V analog power goes
through a DC power supply conversion board and is then provided for the wash
temperature control board, sample control drive board and reagent control drive
board. The A24V power is input to the reagent refrigeration board to power the ISE
module. Other boards, such as reaction carousel temperature collection board,
cleaning fluid temperature collection board, pressure detection board, clog detection
board and level sense board, are powered by those boards connected to them. See
the figure below.
The 24V power supply board converts the AC input into A24V, B24V and 24VFAN
(not used temporarily).
The 12V power supply board converts the AC input into B12V (not used
temporarily), A5V, 14V, and 24VLAMP. The 24VLAMP power supply is
transformed to A12V through the power supply conversion board and used for
powering the lamp.
The power supply conversion board is used to shift the AC voltage, control the
vacuum pump AC voltage, convert the 14V power into 12V (not used
temporarily), control the C12V power, and shift various output voltages.
4-116
Figure 4.66 BA40 power supply assembly diagram
A12V/1.7A Lamp
5V/Photoelectric 5V/Photoelectric Photoelectric

12V 12V 12V
Analog power
A5V/8A 5V/C12V supply Main control AD collection Preamplifier
conversion board board board
board
DC power supply conversion board

Reaction carousel temperature
C12V/7A collection board
Analog 12V Analog +12V Cleaning fluid temperature
Wash temperature Analog 12V collection board Analog 12V
Pressure Water quality
control board detection board detection board
B24V B24V
Reagent mixer drive board
5V/C12V/B24V
Analog +12V
/Analog 12V Sample probe level sense board
D12V/0.3A Sample control Analog +12V Sample probe clog detection
drive board board *2
B24V
Sample mixer drive board
E12V/0.3A R1 control drive Analog +12V
Probe R11 level sense board
board
B12V/28A R2 control drive Analog +12V

board
Reagent A24V/5V
A24V/1.3A refrigeration ISE module
board

The 12V/30A power supply board transforms the AC input into F12V and G12V,
which are used to power the coolers. Each board can provide current drive for 6
coolers, and needs to drive 5 of the 10 coolers with 1 channel left unused.
12V/30A F12V
power supply
board 1 Reagent
refrigeration
12V/30A board
G12V
power supply
board 2

The 24V/6A power supply board transforms the AC input into DC C24V, which is
used to power the cooling fans and refrigeration circulating pump P02.
24V/6A C24V Reagent
power supply refrigeration
board board
4-117
4.7.3 Performance Indices
Power supply input
220V model: 220V-240V 50Hz, 220V-230V 60Hz, voltage fluctuation 10%, and
frequency fluctuation 1Hz.
110V model: 110V-115V 60Hz, voltage fluctuation 10%, and frequency fluctuation
1Hz.
Power consumption: no more than 4.5KVA.
Power supply output
Table 4.10 Power supply output

No. Name Rated Usage Control Description
Output
1 A5V 5V/8A 5V digital Controlled by analyzer
power switch
2 A12V 12V/4.2A Light source Controlled by operating
software
3 B12V 12V/28A Unused Controlled by main
power switch
4 C12V 12V/7A Drives 12V and Controlled by analyzer
gets two 12V power switch
through DC-DC
5 D12V 12V/0.3A Unused
6 E12V -12V/0.3A Unused
7 Photoelectric 12V/0.6A Photoelectric
+12V signal collection
8 Photoelectric -12V/0.6A Photoelectric
-12V signal collection
9 +12V analog 12V/0.6A Analog circuit
other than
photoelectric
10 -12V analog -12V/0.6A Analog circuit
other than
photoelectric
11 F12V 12V/30A Reagent Controlled by main
refrigeration power switch
12 G12V 12V/30A Reagent Controlled by main
13 A24V 24V/1.3A ISE module Controlled by main
power switch
14 B24V 24V/21A 24V drive Controlled by analyzer
power switch
15 24VFAN 24V/1A Unused Controlled by main
power switch
4-118
No. Name Rated Usage Control Description
Output
16 C24V 24V/6A Fans and Controlled by main
circulating pump
Notes:
Control by operating software means that the lamp voltage is controlled by the
operating software while the main power switch and analyzer power switch are
turned on.
Control by analyzer power switch means that the power supply is controlled by
the analyzer power switch with the prerequisite that the main power switch is
turned on.
Control by main power switch means that the power supply works normally
when the analyzer power switch is turned on, and vice versa.
4.7.4 Functional Diagram

The functional diagram of the power supply system is as shown below.
Figure 4.67 Function diagram of power supply system
12V board 24V board

B12V Control Control
DC/
DC
24VLMP +14V -14V A24V 24VFAN
AC A5V 5VCRL AC B24V 24VCRL
Main switch Analyzing

AC unit switch
Timing
control
CTL-VMP B12V
A5V Lamp CTL-LMP
C12V C12V voltage AC 1
(Control) AC1
(Control) DC/DC
+12V -12V CTL-WTP
CTL-SLP AC 2
Power supply conversion board 24VFAN
C12V A5V D12V -12V A12V A24V B24V AC2
Note:
12V/30A power supply board CTL-SLP: Hibernate signal
F12V
CTL-LMP: Lamp control signal
CTL-WTP: AC1 control signal
CTL-VMP: AC2 control signal
5VCRL: 5V control signal
C24V 24VCRL: B24V control signal
4.7.5 BA40 power supply assembly

The BA40 power supply assembly is composed of the 12V board, 24V board and
4-119
conversion board. Refer to the functional diagram of the power supply system for
the internal structure of the assembly. The functions and principles of the three
boards are described on the following pages.
12V power supply board

The functional diagram of the board is as shown below.
Figure 4.68 Functional diagram of 12V power supply board
Isolated two-
transistor B12V
forward
conversion
DC/DC
EMC Rectifying PFC A5V
AC conversion
filtering Boost 390V
conversion
5VCRL
Isolated single- 24VLMP

transistor
+14V
flyback -14V
conversion
The 12V power supply board converts the AC input into the following outputs:
B12V: reserved and unused
A5V: used for powering the PCBA and controlled by the analyzer power switch.
24VLMP: outputs constant 24V, which is then converted into lamp voltage
A12V in the way of DC/DC through the power supply conversion board.
14V: The two outputs are converted into 12V (D12V and -12V) through the
voltage stabilizer on the power supply conversion board. They are reserved and
not used temporarily.
The PCB layout of the 12V power supply board is as shown below.
4-120
The 12V power supply board is located inside the power supply box. Indicators D20,
D21 and D34 indicate voltage output during debugging and repairing of the PCBA
and cannot be seen from the outside of the instrument.
Indication of voltage outputs:
LED Output Indication Status Controlled By
Voltage
D20 A5V When it is lit, it indicates Controlled by analyzer
that the PCBA outputs an power switch
A5V power.
D21 B12V When it is lit, it indicates Controlled by main power
that the PCBA outputs a switch
B12V power.
D34 A24V When it is lit, it indicates Controlled by main power
that the PCBA outputs an switch
A24V power.
Notes:
turned on.
turned on.
4-121
24V power supply board

Figure 4.69 Functional diagram of 24V power supply board
Isolated two-
transistor B24V
forward
conversion
24VCRL
EMC PFC
AC Rectifying boost
filtering 390V
conversion
Isolated single- A24V

transistor
flyback 24VFAN
conversion
The 24V board converts the AC input into the following outputs:
A24V: used for powering the ISE module.
24VFAN: reserved and unused.
B24V: used for powering the moving parts, motors and heaters, and controlled
by the analyzer power switch.
The PCB layout of the 24V power supply board is as shown below.
4-122
Figure 4.70 PCB layout of 24V power supply board
LED1, LED2 and LED3 in the figure above are indicators of the A24V, 24VFAN
and B24V outputs. Since located inside the power supply box, the three indicators
cannot be seen from the outside of the instrument. They are used to indicate the
voltage output during debugging and repairing of the PCBA. There are three
indicators on the power supply conversion board, and they are used for indicating the
voltage outputs of the 24V board.
Indication of voltage outputs on the 24V board:
Voltage
LED1 A24V When it is lit, it indicates Controlled by main power
A24V power.
LED2 24VFAN When it is lit, it indicates Controlled by main power
24VFAN power.
LED3 B24V When it is lit, it indicates Controlled by analyzer
that the PCBA outputs a power switch
B24V power.
4-123
Notes:
turned on.
turned on.
Power supply conversion board

Figure 4.71 Function diagram of power supply conversion board
AC
AC1(12V board) A5V A24V 24VFAN B24V
CTL-WTP
AC1
A5V
AC (Control)
B12V 14V -14V 24VLMP
CTL-VMP Voltage DC/ CTL-

AC2 C12V adjustment DC LMP
(Control)
AC2 AC B12V C12V D12V -12V A12V

(24V board)
This board is used for:

Providing AC input for the 12V board and 24V board, and dividing it into AC1
and AC2, which are reserved now and not used for the instrument.
Stabilizing the 14V output by the 12V board into D12V and -12V.
Converting the 24VLMP output by the 12V board into controlled lamp voltage
A12V.
Dividing and shifting other DC inputs, and providing power supply interfaces
for other PCBAs.
The PCB layout of the power supply conversion board is as shown below.
4-124
Figure 4.72 PCB layout of power supply conversion board
Indicators
There are 9 voltage indicators on the power supply conversion board indicated by a
dotted frame. They are from left to right: D20, D11, D14, D10, D15, D12, D13, D9,
and D21, which are used to indicate the following voltage outputs.
Voltage
D20 D12V When it is lit, it indicates Controlled by analyzer
D12V power.
D11 B12V When it is lit, it indicates Controlled by main power
B12V power.
D14 -12V When it is lit, it indicates Controlled by analyzer
-12V power.
A12V power.
D15 A24V When it is lit, it indicates Controlled by main power
A24V power.
D12 C12V When it is lit, it indicates Controlled by analyzer
C12V power.
A5V power.
4-125
Voltage
D9 B24V When it is lit, it indicates Controlled by analyzer
B24V power.
D21 24VFAN When it is lit, it indicates Controlled by main power
24VFAN power.
Notes:
turned on.
turned on.
The table below shows the status of the indicators when the main power switch and
analyzer power switch are turned on or off.
Table 4.11 LED status on power supply conversion board for powering on and off
LED Output Control Description Main Main Main
Voltage Power Power ON Power
ON Analyzer OFF
Analyzer Power ON
Power
OFF
D11 B12V When the main power
D15 A24V switch is ON,
indicators D11, D15
D21 24VFAN and D21 are lit and
only controlled by the
main power switch
rather than the
analyzer power
switch.
D12 C12V The corresponding
D13 A5V indicator is
extinguished only
D14 -12V when the main power
D20 D12V switch is ON. When
the analyzer power
D9 B24V
switch is ON, the
corresponding
indicator is lit and
controlled by both
switches.
4-126
LED Output Control Description Main Main Main
Voltage Power Power ON Power
ON Analyzer OFF
Analyzer Power ON
Power
OFF
D10 A12V Controlled by the
main power switch
and the operating
software
Turning on/off the lamp can be controlled through the
operating software.
Output connectors:
Jack Pins Symbol Output Description
No.
J3 Pin1 ISE A24V+
Pin2 A24V-
J4 Pin1, 3, 5, 7 VALVE DRV C12V positive output
Pin9, 11, 12 B24V positive output
Pin2, 4, 6, 8, 10 B24V and C12V output GND
J7 / N AC input N
J8 / L AC input L
J9 Pin1 24VFAN+ 24VFAN positive output
Pin2 24VFAN- 24VFAN negative output
Pin3 C12VOUT C12V positive output
Pin4 / C12V output GND

J12 Pin1 D12V D12V output
Pin2 -12V -12V output
Pin4, 5 / D12V and -12V output GND
Pin3 5VOUT A5V positive output
Pin6 / A5V output GND
J13 Pin1 AC PUMP AC1 output, not used for BA80

Pin3 AC2 output, not used for BA80
Pin6, 8 AC input
J14 Pin1 5VOUT A5V output
Pin2, 3 B24VOUT B24V output
Pin4 C12VOUT C12V output
Pin9 D12V D12V output
Pin6, 7, 8 / A5V, B24V and C12V output GND
Pin10 / D12V and -12V output GND
4-127
Jack Pins Symbol Output Description
No.
J15 Pin1, 2, 3 B24VOUT B24V output
Pin4 5VOUT A5V output
Pin5 D12V D12V output
Pin7, 8, 9, 10 GND2 A5V and B24V output GND
Pin11, 12 DGND D12V and -12V output GND
J16 Pin1 LAMP A12V output for lamp
Pin2 A12V output GND for lamp
Troubleshooting BA40 power supply assembly

Check the indicators on the power supply conversion board while the main power
switch is turned on and the analyzer power switch is off. In normal conditions,
indicators D11, D15 and D21 should be lit respectively indicating B12V, A24V and
24VFAN. If D11 is not lit, it indicates that B12V output is abnormal and the 12V
power board may go wrong; if D15 and D21 are not lit, it indicates that 24VFAN
output is abnormal and the 24V power board may go wrong; If the three indicators
are not lit, please check whether the AC voltage of the board is normal or it is
possible that both the 12V and 24V power board have gone wrong.
While the main power switch is turned on and the voltage input is normal, turn on
the analyzer power switch. In normal conditions, all indicators on the conversion
board except for the A12V indicator should be lit. If the B24V indicator is not lit,
replug the load line; if the error remains, replace the 24V board and then check if the
B24V indicator is lit. If the A5V indicator is not lit, perhaps it is short-circuited or
the 12V board goes wrong. If the A5V indicator is lit but C12V or D12V/-12V
indicator is extinguished, replug the load line; if the error remains, check the
conversion board or replace the power supply board; if the error disappears when a
new power supply board is installed, it indicates that the original power supply board
needs to be repaired.
If the lamp A12V cannot be enabled through the operating software while the main
power switch and analyzer power switch are turned on and working normally, replug
the power cord of the lamp; if the error remains, troubleshoot the power supply
conversion board by replacing it with a new one.
4.7.6 12V/30A power supply board

Descriptions
The 12V/30A power supply board is intended to implement the following functions:
Converting the AC input within the entire voltage range into DC 12V output.
Providing power supply for the reagent refrigeration board.
Performance Indices
Power supply input:
AC input voltage: 90-264V AC
4-128
AC voltage frequency: 50/603Hz
Power supply output:
Rated output voltage: 11.4-12.6V.
Rated output current: 30A.
Description of PCBA
Connectors:
The 12V/30A power supply board contains four connectors, which are described in
the table below.
Jack No. PIN Symbol Description
J1 1 L Live wire of AC input
2 / NC
3 N Neutral wire of AC input
J2 1 12VDC+ AC 12V positive output
2 12VDC- DC 12V output GND
J3 1 FAN + 12V positive output for
cooling fans
2 FAN- 12V GND for cooling fan of the
PCBA
J4 1 FAN + 12V positive output for
cooling fans
2 FAN- 12V GND for cooling fan of the
PCBA
PCB layout:
Figure 4.73 PCB layout of 12V/30A power supply board
4-129
The 12V/30A power supply board only has a green indicator labeled with D24 as
shown in the figure above. When D24 is lit, it indicates that the PCBA has been
connected to the power supply and connector J2 has voltage output; when D24 is
extinguished, it means that there is no voltage output at connector J2.
Troubleshooting the PCBA

Check the indicator D24 when the PCBA is connected to the power supply. If it is lit,
it means that there is voltage output on the PCBA. Use a multimeter to measure the
voltage between the two pins of connector J2, and then check if the voltage is within
the normal range of 12V5%.
If indicator D24 is lit but the output voltage is beyond the normal range, check if the
measuring methods are correct, the testing equipment is normal, and the PCBA has
been installed correctly, and then replug the load line and measure the voltage again.
If the voltage is normal, check the load end; if the voltage fails again, check if the
fuse on the power supply board is broken or if there are any other causes, and then
replace the power supply board. If the error disappears when a new power supply
board is installed, it indicates that the original power supply board needs to be
repaired.
If indicator D24 is extinguished, replug the load line of connector J2 and then use a
multimeter to measure the output voltage at J2. If the voltage is normal but D24 is
extinguished, it indicates that the D24 LED goes wrong; otherwise, open the power
supply box, replug the fan cables from connectors J3 and J4, and then try again. If
the error still remains, the power supply board may go wrong and need to be repaired.
If the error disappears when a new power supply board is installed, it indicates that
the original power supply board is failed.
4.7.7 24V/6A power supply board

The 24V/6A power supply board is intended to implement the following functions:
Converting the AC input within the entire voltage range into DC 24V output.
Powering fans on the analyzer and driving the refrigeration circulating pump
P02.
Powering the SDM or rack transfer unit.
Driving the water pump of the external water supply module.
Performance Indices
Power supply input:
AC input voltage: 90-264V AC
AC voltage frequency: 50/603Hz
Power supply output:
Rated output voltage: 24V.
Rated output current: 6A.
4-130
Description of PCBA
Connectors:
The 24V/6A power supply board contains two connectors, which are described in
the table below.
Jack No. PIN Symbol Description
J1 1 L Live wire of AC input
2 / NC
3 N Neutral wire of AC input
J2 1 / DC 24V positive output
2 / DC 24V output GND
PCB layout:
Figure 4.74 PCB layout of 24V/6A power supply board
Measuring output voltage

The 24V/6A power supply board has no indicators to indicate output voltage and
requires measurement of the output voltage to check if it is normal or not. Use a
multimeter to measure the voltage between the two pins of connector J2, and then
check if the voltage is within 24V5%.
Troubleshooting the PCBA

If the 24V/6A power supply is abnormal, measure the output voltage at connector
J2 and check if it is within the normal range. If the voltage is normal, check the
connection cables and load end.
If the voltage is abnormal, check if the wire of connector J1 and the PCBA have
been installed correctly, replug the load line of connector J2, and then measure the
voltage again. If the error still remains, check if the fuse on the power supply board
is broken or if there are any other causes, and if necessary, replace the power supply
board.
If the output voltage is normal while the board is connected to power supply
without any loads, but it becomes abnormal once a load line is inserted into J2, check
4-131
if the cable is correct and the load end is normal. If the load end is correct, replace
the 24V/6A power supply board. If the error disappears after a new power supply
board is used, it indicates that the original board goes wrong and needs to be
repaired; otherwise, check carefully each load connected to the output end of the
power supply board.
4.7.8 Analog power supply conversion board

Function
The instrument has one analog power supply conversion board (051-001023-00),
which is mainly used to:
Convert the C12V digital into two +/-12V analog. One is provided for the main
control board to power the AD collection board and preamplifier board; and the
other powers the control drive boards through the DC power supply conversion
board. The digital +5V only passes by on this board.
Description
The PCB layout of the analog power supply conversion board is as shown below.
Figure 4.75 PCB layout of analog power supply conversion board
Connectors
The analog power supply conversion board contains the following connectors:
J3: digital power supply input connector for the DC power supply conversion board.
Pin No. Signal
1 C12V
2 A5V
3 GND
4 GND
4-132
J1: analog power supply output connector 1.
Pin No. Label Signal
1 VPP +12V analog
2 VSS -12V analog
3 A5V +5V digital
4, 5 AGND Analog GND
6 GND Digital GND
J2: analog power supply output connector 2.

Pin No. Label Signal
1 VPP1 +12V analog
2 VSS1 -12V analog
3 A5V +5V digital
4, 5 AGND1 Analog GND
6 GND Digital GND
Indicators
The analog power supply conversion board contains the following indicators:
C12V power supply indicator (D1): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the
C12V power supply has been connected.
Test points
In the following positions of the analog power supply conversion board can signal
tests be performed.
TP9--VPP1: +12V. Normal range: 12V5%, that is, 11.4 - 12.6V.
TP8--VSS1: -12V. Normal range: -12V5%, that is, -11.4 - -12.6V.
TP1--VPP: +12V. Normal range: 12V5%, that is, 11.4 - 12.6V.
TP2--VSS: -12V. Normal range: -12V5%, that is, -11.4 - -12.6V.
TP3--C12V: 12V digital. Normal range: 12V5%, that is, 11.4 - 12.6V.
TP7--A5V: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the
digital parts of the PCBA. Normal range: 5V5%, that is, 4.75 - 5.25V.
TP6--GND: digital ground of the board.
TP5--AGND, TP4--AGND1: analog ground of the board.

the PCBA.
4-133
4.7.9 DC power supply conversion board
The DC power supply conversion board (051-000755-00) is intended for the
following functions:
Inputting A5V digital, C12V power, and B24V power from the BA40 power
supply assembly.
Outputting A5V/C12V digital to the analog power supply conversion board.
Inputting +/-12V (D12V/E12V) analog from the analog power supply
conversion board.
Outputting A5V digital, +/-12V (D12V/E12V) analog, C12V power, and B24V
power to the sample/R1/R2 control drive boards.
Outputting A5V digital, +/-12V (D12V/E12V) analog, C12V power, and B24V
power for the wash temperature control board.
Description
PCB layout
Figure 4.76 PCB layout of DC power supply conversion board
Connectors
J1: power supply input/output connector for the analog power supply conversion
board.
No. Signal Signal Direction Description
3 A5V Output +5V digital
4 C12V Output +12V digital
7 D12V Input +12V analog
14 E12V Input -12V analog
5, 12 GND Output Digital ground
6, 13 AGND Input Analog ground
J3, J6, J7: power supply input connectors.
4-134
J3:
No. Signal Description
1, 2 B24V +24V power
3 A5V +5V digital
4 D12V +12V power
6, 7, 10 GND Digital ground
J7:
8 A5V +5V digital
5, 6, 7 B24V +24V power
1, 2, 3 GND Digital ground
J6:
1, 2, 5, and 6 C12V +12V power
3, 4, 7, and 8 GND Digital ground
J4, J8, J9, and J10 are output connectors.

J4: power supply output connector for R1 control drive board.
3, 10 A5V +5V digital
4, 11 C12V +12V digital
7 D12V +12V analog
14 E12V -12V analog
6, 13 AGND Analog ground
J9: power supply output connector for R2 control drive board.

7 D12V +12V analog
14 E12V -12V analog
4-135
J10: power supply output connector for sample control drive board.
7 D12V +12V analog
14 E12V -12V analog
J8: power supply output connector for wash temperature control board.
11 A5V +5V digital
12 D12V +12V analog
16 E12V -12V analog
5 AGND Analog ground
4.7.10 Maintenance of Power Supply System

Archive parameters before replacing the main control board, and import them to the
new board after replacement.
Upgrade the control software after replacing the following boards:
Main control board (of analyzer and SDM)
Control drive board (including: sample control drive board, R1 control drive
board, R2 control drive board, SDM control drive board, and track control drive
board)
Reagent refrigeration board (The refrigeration status mark should be changed
except upgrading the control software.)
Mixer motor drive board (only the 2 reagent mixer drive boards)
4-136
For correspondence between the main power switch/analyzer power
switch/hibernating status and the power supply working status, refer to relevant
sections on the previous pages.
Voltage timing control:
When the analyzer power switch is turned on, the A5V, C12V (D12V/E12V)
and B24V are controlled successively in the order of A5V C12V (D12V/-12V)
B24V. That is, only when the A5V is connected will the C12V (D12V/-12V)
be provided, and this is the same for C12V and B24V; if the A5V is not output,
the C12V (D12V/-12V) and B24V will not be provided.
4-137
4.8 Wiring Diagram of Analyzer
Note: The yellow parts in the wiring diagrams are differences between the BS-2000M and the BS-800M.
4-138
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RE APPR
ECN DESCRIPTION DRAW CHECHK
V DATE
PDA preamplifier PDA preamplifier Reference light

D board 1 board 2 preamplifier board PC D
PECB-PDA1 PECB-PDA2 PECB-REF Legend
Analog power / weak
signal
Power supply / strong
AD collection Communication
Rack feeder signal
Analog power system
ADCB CCB
supply conversion
board
APCB
Main control board

MCB
DC power supply
conversion board
DPCB
C C
Reagent refrigeration board Wash temperature control board R2 control drive board Sample control drive board R1 control drive board
Power supply
RRB WATCB CADB-R2 CADB-S CADB-R1
conversion
board
PSCB
24VPSB
12VPSB
ISE module
Five-probe/mixer conversion board 2 Five-probe/mixer conversion board 1

B PMCB2 PMCB1 B
AC drive 24V/6A 12V/30A 12V/30A Reagent Sample

Reaction Cleaning fluid Pressure S1 clog S2 clog Sample R11 level
board power supply power supply power supply carousel temperature mixer R22 level R21 level mixer R12 level
detection detection detection level sense sense
ACDB board board 1 board 2 temperature collection
board
drive sense board sense board drive
board
sense board
24V6A 12V30A 12V30A collection board board board board board board board
RTCB WTCB PDB LLDB-R22 LLDB-R21 LLDB-S LLDB-R12
PSB PSB1 PSB2 MDB-R CDB-S1 CDB-S2 MDB-S LLDB-R11
Water quality
detection
APPROVALS DATE
MINDRAY
AC input board
WQDB
DESIGN
CHECK
A TITLE BS-2000 hardware system A
CHECK
File Bytes CONFIDENTIAL DISCLOSURE: This set of drawing(s) and all it's intellectual property rights (including copyright) subsisting CHECK
herein are property of Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co.,Ltd. No use, copies or reproductions should be made of this DWG NO. BS-2000 REV 2.0
drawing or any part(s) thereof for whatever purpose nor shall any information, data, calculations, or other contents contained in
Date Time
this drawing be disseminated without prior written permission of Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co.,Ltd.
R&D
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 CHIEF ENG. SHEET 1 OF 18 SIZE A3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-139
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AC power supply input wire J1

Power supply input wire 1 009-002314-00
D J14 1 3 1 D
009-002329-00 J8 1 L 1 Brown
J3 1 B24V Red 2 2 4 AC drive board
1 6 2
1 6 2 B24V Red 3 051-001020-00
3 A5V Blue 1 2 7 J7 1 3 1 N 3 Blue
2 7 3
4 C12V Yellow 4 2 4
3 8 3 8
6 GND Black 6
4 9 7 GND Black 7 4 9
Analyzer power switch wire
5 10 10 GND Black 8 009-002311-00
5 10
1 12Vout NO
Power supply input wire 2 J15
009-002330-00 1
J7
DC power supply
conversion board
3 Blue C
8 A5V Blue 4 1 7
051-000755-00
1 5 5 B24V Red 1 J2
2 8
2
+
Analyzer power switch
6 B24V Red 2
2 6 7 B24V Red 3 3 9 3
3 7 1 GND Black 7 2 Black GND
4 10
2 GND Black 8
4 8
3 GND Black 9 5 11
C
6 12 BA40 power supply assembly Lamp power cord C
J16 009-002312-00
BA40-30-61943
Power supply input wire 3 J4
J6 009-002331-00 1 Red A12VOUT
1 C12V Yellow 1 1 2 1
2 C12V Yellow 3 Lamp
PSCB
1 5 3
3 GND Black 2
4
2 2 Black GND
2 6 4 GND Black 4 5 6
5 C12V Yellow 5
3 7 6 C12V Yellow 7 7 8
4 8 7 GND Black 6 9 10
Power supply conversion board PCBA ( 051-000511-00)
8 GND Black 8
11 12
Power supply conversion board PCB (050-000388-00)
J12
12V power supply board PCBA (051-000509-00)
12V power supply board PCB (050-000386-00) 3 6
24V power supply board PCBA (051-000510-00) 2 5
Lamp wire of wash temperature control 24V power supply board PCB (050-000387-00) 1 4
board J1
J25 009-002418-00
1 DA_Lamp 1 1
Wash temperature
1 B
B
control board
051-001004-00
2 2 GND 2 2 24V power cord

3 009-002430-00 J22
3 AD_Lamp 3 3
4 J3
1 A24V Red 1
4 5 1 Reagent
5 4 SLP_Lamp 4 1
6 6 2 refrigeration
5 GND 5 5 2 24VGND Black 5
2 board
7 7 3
8 6 Shield 6 6 051-001019-00
8 4
P1
A
P2 MINDRAY A
TITLE: Power supply board

File Bytes
DWG NO. BS-2000 REV 2.0
Date Time
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 2 OF 18 SIZE A3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-140
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Main power switch input wire Power supply AC power input wire
009-002310-00 To enclosureAC drive board main J2 009-002314-00
3 1
E Yellow green power input wire 1 1 L 1 Brown J8
Main power switch 4 2 BA40 power
009-002313-00 2
Power supply 1(Y) L Brown 1 1 L Brown 1 3 3 N 1 Blue 3 1 J7 supply assembly
terminals 1 BA40-30-61943
2(X) N Light blue 2 2 N Light blue 2 J1 4 2
D 2
D
24V6A power supply module J8 220V AC pump power cord
AC input wire 009-002320-00
1 2 2 L Brown
009-002315-00 Air
24V/6A J1 1 1 connection Degassing vacuum pump P09
1 L Brown 1 3 4 6 N Light blue
2 2 4 L Brown
Power supply board 3
3 N Light blue 3
3
J3 5 6 Air
connection
Primary vacuum pump 2 P14
7 N Light blue
051-000530-00 F12V power supply board AC 7 8
8 L Brown
input wire 9 10
Air
Primary vacuum pump 1 P08
13 N Light blue connection
009-002316-00
1# 12V/30A J1 1 1 L Brown 1 1 11 12 10 L Brown
Air
Power supply board 2 3 N Light blue 3 2 J4 13 14
14 N Light blue connection Waste pump P07
3 G12V power supply board AC 3
051-000212-00 input wire
009-002316-00 Gear booster pump power cord
1 L Brown 1 1 J16
2# 12V/30A J1 1 009-002325-00
2 1
Power supply board 2 3 N Light blue 3 J5 1 24V RED
Air
3 3 2 2 GND BLACK connection
Gear booster pump 1 P04
051-000212-00 Transformer 110V AC input wire J13
009-002319-00
1 1 24V RED
1 L Brown 1 Air
Gear booster pump 2 P13
connection
2 2 GND BLACK
C 2 N Light blue 2 connection C
1 3
Air
3 L Brown 3 J7
2 4
For 110V
model only
Transformer
4
1
N Light blue 4
L Brown 2
AC drive board Heater AC power cord
009-002322-00
2109-20-76214
connection
3 N Light blue 4 1 4
J6 ACDB J10 2 N Light blue
Cuvette wash solution heater
Air
Air connection
2 Light blue 3 2 5
4 Brown 6 1 2
Transformer 220V AC input wire

3 6
PCBA: 051-001020-00 3 4
7
4
L Brown
N Light blue
Air connection Temperature protection switch
009-002318-00 5 6 Air connection Cuvette cleaning fluid heater

Connection wire between wash temperature
control board and AC drive board
PCB: 050-000834-00 7 8
9 L Brown Air connection Temperature protection switch
9 10
009-002324-00
J10 1 2
1 P07 1 J12 11 12
6 N Light blue
Whole unit cleaning fluid
2 12V Red 2 Air connection
3 P08 3 heater 1
3 4 1 2
4 12V Red 4 11 L Brown
5 6 5 P09 5 3 4 Air connection Temperature protection switch
Wash 7 8 6 12V Red 6
5 6
temperature 9 10
7 HEA04 7
7 8
Heater AC power cord 2
B control board 11 12
8 12V Red
9
8
HEA01 9
J9 009-002321-00
B
9 10 2 N Light blue
Air connection
Whole unit cleaning fluid
13 14 10 12V Red 10 1 5
051-001004-00 11 HEA02 11 11 12 heater 2
15 16 2 6
12 12V Red 12
13 14 5 L Brown Air connection Temperature protection switch
17 18 13 HEA03 13 3 7 4 N Light blue
19 20 14 12V Red 14
4
Air connection Reaction carousel heater
8
7 L Brown Air connection Temperature protection switch
Probe interior wash gear
pump drive cable
009-002327-00
J25 1 VDC Red 1 J15 AC drive board patch cord
1 2 2 CTRL Black 2 1 2
J11 009-002323-00
R1 control
drive board 3 4
3 24V Red 3
3 4 1 1 F12V Red 1 1 J9 Reagent
4 24V Red 4
051-001017-00 5 6 5 GND Black 5 5 6 2 2 refrigeration board
3 GND Black 3
6 GND Black 6
3
051-001019-00
3
J14
J25 1 VDC Red 1
R2 control 2 CTRL Black 2 1 2
MINDRAY
1 2 3 24V Red 3
drive board 4 24V Red 4
3 4
3 4
051-001018-00 5 GND Black 5 5 6
A
A 5 6 6 GND Black 6
TITLE: AC drive board

File Bytes
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-141
A
B
C
D
Communication cable
File
4-142
Date
009-002341-00
1
2
1 TXD1- 1
1
2
Communication cable 2 TXD1+ 2
3
4
3 RXD1+ 3
009-002342-00
3
4
4 RXD1- 4
1
1
5
6
5 RST1 5
5
6
1 +12V 1 6 GND 6
13
7
8
P1
7 CTL1 7
2 -12V 2
1
7
8
8 GND 8
25
9
10
3 VCC 3 9 TXD2- 9
14
12
9
10
4 12GND 4 10 TXD2+ 10
2
11
12
24
11 RXD2+ 11
5 GND 5
11
12
12 RXD2- 12
15
11
13
14
6 AD_DIN 6 13 RST2 13
3
23
13
14
14 GND 14
16
15
7 NC NC 7 15 CTL2 15
16
10
16
15
8 GND 8 16 GND 16
4
18
17
22
17 TXD3- 17
9 DCP_EN 9
18
17
9
18 TXD3+ 18
17
20
10 DCP_CLK 10 19 RXD3+ 19
19
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003

21
Time
20
19
Bytes
20 RXD3- 20
J17
11 DCP_DIN 11
22
21
8
21 RST3 21
18
22
21
12 CH_A4 12 22 GND 22
6
24
23
20
13 GND 13 23 CTL3 23
J3
24
7
23
24 GND 24
051-001004-00
19
26
14 +12V 14 25 TXD4- 25
7
J7
19
26
15 -12V 15 26 TXD4+ 26
25 27
28
20
27 RXD4+ 27
25 27
28
16 VCC 16 28 RXD4- 28
2
2
30
29
18
17 12GND 17 29 RST4 29
5
30
29
30 GND 30
21
051-000934-00
32
31
18 AD_BUSY 18
31 CTL4 31
9
17
32
31
19 AD_CLK 19 32 GND 32
34
33
AD collection board
22
20 AD_RC 20 33 TXD5- 33
34
33
34 TXD5+ 34
10
16
35
36
21 CH_A3 21 35 RXD5+ 35
23
35
36
22 CH_A2 22 36 RXD5- 36
37
38
37 IN1 37
11
15
37
38
23 CH_A1 23 38 GND 38
2
39
40
24
24 CH_A0 24 39 39 IN12 39
40
40 GND 40
12
14
25 GND 25
25
13
Communication cable
009-002338-00
1 TXD1- 1
1
2
1
2
2 TXD1+ 2
3 RXD1+ 3
3
4
3
4
4 RXD1- 4
5 RST1 5
5
6
5
6
6 GND 6
Network cable 7 CTL1 7
3
3
7
8
7
8
009-002334-00 8 GND 8
9 TXD2- 9
9
10
9
10
2 RXD 2 10 TXD2+ 10
11 RXD2+ 11
11
12
J3
11
12
12 RXD2- 12
1
3 TXD 3 13 RST2 13
13
14
1
13
14
6
14 GND 14
6
1
2
5 GND 5 15 CTL2 15
16
1
2
15
2
16
15
2
16 GND 16
7
Serial port cable
3
4
18
17
7 RST 7 17 TXD3- 17
3
4
7
18
17
3
BA34-20-63652 18 TXD3+ 18
3
20
5
6
19
8 RTS 8 19 RXD3+ 19
J2
5
6
8
20
19
20 RXD3- 20
8
4
22
21
21 RST3 21
7
9 RI 9
4
7
22
21
22 GND 22
9
J10
9
24
23
23 CTL3 23
J4
9
8 10
1,4,6,10 1,4,6,10
5
24
9
23
8 10
24 GND 24
5
NC NC 25 TXD4- 25
26
26 TXD4+ 26
25 27
26 28
27 RXD4+ 27
051-001016-00
25 27
28
28 RXD4- 28
30
29
29 RST4 29
30
29
PC
30 GND 30
4
4
32
31
Ethernet cable
J5
31 CTL4 31
32
31
3 TX+ Orange white
BA40-30-61377
32 GND 32
34
009-002336-00
33
1 33 TXD5- 33
34
33
1
2
6 TX- Orange 2 34 TXD5+ 34
35
36
1 TX+ Orange white 1 35 RXD5+ 35

1 RX+ Green white 3
35
2
36
1
2
3
4
2 TX- Orange 2 36 RXD5- 36
37
38
4 NC Blue 4 37 IN1 37
37
38
4
3 RX+ Green white 3
3
4
38 GND 38
5
6
J12
39
40
1 3 5
2 4 6
5 NC Blue white 5
4 RX- Green 4 39 IN12 39
39
40
J6 1 3 5
6
5
6
Communication conversion board

40 GND 40
7
8
2 RX- Green 6
7
8
5 GND Blue white 5
7 NC Brown white 7
Network interface
8 NC Brown 8 6 PWFB Blue 6
Communication cable
Cross network cable 009-002339-00
1 TXD1- 1
1
2
1
2
2 TXD1+ 2
3 RXD1+ 3
3
4
3
4
4 RXD1- 4
5 RST1 5
5
6
5
6
6 GND 6
7 CTL1 7
7
8
7
8
8 GND 8
5
5
9
10
Main control board 9 TXD2- 9

9
10
10 TXD2+ 10
power cord 11 RXD2+ 11
11
12
11
12
J1
009-002337-00 12 RXD2- 12
13 RST2 13
13
14
Main control board

13
14
14 GND 14
6 GND Black 6
4 1 1
16
PCBA: 051-000742-00
15
4
15 CTL2 15
PCB: 050-000164-01
16
5 12VGND Blue 5
15
16 GND 16
18
17
17 TXD3- 17
5 2 4 12VGND Blue 4 5 2
18
17
18 TXD3+ 18
J1
3 +5V Red 3
20
19
19 RXD3+ 19
6 3 3
20
6
19
20 RXD3- 20
2 -12V White 2
051-001023-00
22
21
21 RST3 21
22
21
1 +12V Yellow 1
22 GND 22
conversion board
J10
J10
24
23
23 CTL3 23
Analog power supply
24
23
24 GND 24
25 TXD4- 25
26
26 TXD4+ 26
25 27
26 28
27 RXD4+ 27
051-001017-00
25 27
28
28 RXD4- 28
30
29
29 RST4 29
30
29
30 GND 30
32
31
31 CTL4 31
32
31
32 GND 32
6
6
34
33
33 TXD5- 33
34
33
34 TXD5+ 34
35
36
35 RXD5+ 35
35
36
Communication cable 36 RXD5- 36

37
38
37 IN1 37
37
38
009-002344-00 38 GND 38
39
40
39 IN12 39
39
40
EAM3
40 GND 40
1
1 ISE_RXD+ 1
1
6
2
2 ISE_RXD - 2 Communication cable

009-002340-00
3
3 +5V 3 1 TXD1- 1
1
2
1
2
2 TXD1+ 2
4
4 TXD 4 3 RXD1+ 3
3
4
8
3
4
4 RXD1- 4
J8
5 5V 5 5 RST1 5
5
5
6
5
6
ISE module
6 GND 6
4
6 CTL 6 7 CTL1 7
7
8
6
7
8
7 +5V 7 8 GND 8
10
5
9
9 TXD2- 9
10
9
10
8 RESET 8 10 TXD2+ 10
TITLE:
11 RXD2+ 11
7
7
11
12
11
12
12 RXD2- 12
DWG NO.
13 RST2 13
13
14
13
14
14 GND 14
15 CTL2 15
16
15
16
15
16 GND 16
SHEET 4 OF
17 TXD3- 17
18
17
18
17
18 TXD3+ 18
19 RXD3+ 19
20
19
20
19
20 RXD3- 20
22
21 RST3 21
21
Communication cable
22
21
J10
22 GND 22
J11
009-002343-00
24
23
23 CTL3 23
18
24
23
24 GND 24
1 TXD- 1 25 TXD4- 25
26
BS-2000
26 TXD4+ 26
25 27
26 28
2 TXD + 2 27 RXD4+ 27
051-001018-00
25 27
28
28 RXD4- 28
1
2
2
1
30
29
3 RXD+ 3 29 RST4 29
30
29
30 GND 30
32
31
3
4
31 CTL4 31
4
32
31
4 RXD- 4
32 GND 32
J5
34
33
5
6
33 TXD5- 33
6
34
33
5 RST 5 34 TXD5+ 34
8
Main control board

35
36
6 GND 6 35 RXD5+ 35
7
Reagent
7
8
MINDRAY
35
36
36 RXD5- 36
37
38
7 CTL 7 37 IN1 37
051-001019-00
37
38
38 GND 38
39
40
J17
8 GND 8 39 IN12 39
39
40
refrigeration board
40 GND 40
SIZE A3
REV 2.0
A
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
File
Date
1
1

Time
Bytes
1# preamplifier board
signal cable 1
009-002437-00
1 AGND 1
1
2 SIG1 2
2
1 2
2
2
3 SIG2 3
3
4 SIG3 4
5 SIG4 5
J3
4 5
J2
6 SIG5 6
6
7 SIG6 7
7
8 SIG7 8
8
10 SGND 10
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
AD collection board
J7
J7
communication cable
10
9 10
009-002342-00
1 +12V 1
1
1
2 -12V 2 signal cable 2
3
3
3 VCC 3 009-002438-00
2
2
4 12GND 4 1 AGND Black 1
5 GND 5 2 SIG1 White 2
3
3
1 2
6 AD_DIN 6
7 NC NC 7 3 SIG2 Yellow 3
4
4
8 GND 8 4 SIG3 Green 4
PCBA: 051-000947-00
PCB: 050-000795-00
9 DCP_EN 9
J4
J3
5
5
10 DCP_CLK 10 5 SIG4 Grey 5
11 DCP_DIN 11 6 SIG5 Blue 6
6
6
12 CH_A4 12 7 SIG6 Orange 7
13 GND 13
7
7
8 SGND Black 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
14 +12V 14
3 4 5 6 7 8
15 -12V 15
8
8
16 VCC 16 1# preamplifier
051-000742-00
4
4
17 12GND 17 board power cord

PDA preamplifier board 1 (inner ring photometer)
Main control board

18 AD_BUSY 18 009-002436-00
19 AD_CLK 19
1
1
1 VPP Red 1
20 AD_RC 20
2 AGND Black 2
21 CH_A3 21
2
22 CH_A2 22 3 VEE Green 3

J1
J1
23 CH_A1 23
3
4 Shielding layer White

24 CH_A0 24
2 3 4
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
25 GND 25
9 10 11 12 13
9 10 11 12 13
signal cable 1
5
5
009-002440-00
1 AGND 1
1
2 SIG1 2
2
1 2
3 SIG2 3
3
AD collection board
PCBA: 051-000934-00
PCB: 050-000780-00
4 SIG3 4
J8
5 SIG4 5
J5
4 5
1 SIG 1
J2
6 SIG5 6
1
2
6
2 +12V 2
7 SIG6 7
7
3 AGND 3
8 SIG7 8
3
4
4 AGND 4
8
5 SHIELD 5 10 SGND 10
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BA10-30-77760
6 -12V 6
5
6
6
6
Reference light
10
9 10
1 2 3 4 5 6
preamplifier board
signal cable 2
009-002441-00
1 AGND Black 1
2 SIG1 White 2
1 2
3 SIG2 Yellow 3
4 SIG3 Green 4
PCBA: 051-000947-00
PCB: 050-000795-00
J6
J3
5 SIG4 Grey 5
6 SIG5 Blue 6
7 SIG6 Orange 7
TITLE:
8 SGND Black 8
7
7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3 4 5 6 7 8
SHEET 5
DWG NO.
2# preamplifier
board power cord
PDA preamplifier board 2 (outer ring photometer)
OF
009-002439-00
1
1
1 VPP Red 1
2 AGND Black 2
2
18
3 VEE Green 3
J1
BS-2000
J2
3
4 Shielding layer White

2 3 4
collection board
8
MINDRAY
Preamplifier board and AD
SIZE A3
REV 2.0
A
B
C
D
4-143
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Main control board
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39
D
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 36 38 40
J3 D
26
10
19
11
27
20
12
18
28
25
21
13
23
15
2
29
17
31
9
3
4
1
39
Communication cable
22
24
34
37
40
32
35
36
33
14
16
30
38
6
8
009-002341-00
REAC_TXD3+
WASH_TXD2+
WASH_CTL2
TEMP_RXD1-
REAC_RXD3-
TEMP_TXD1+
WASH_RXD2-
RMIX_RXD4-
WASH_RST2
RMIX_TXD4+
RMIX_CTL4
TEMP_CTL1
WASH_TXD2-
TEMP_RXD1+
REAC_CTL3
REAC_RXD3+
TEMP_TXD1-
WASH_RXD2+
RMIX_RST4
RMIX_RXD4+
REAC_TXD3-
TEMP_RST1
RMIX_TXD4-
REAC_RST3
RXD5-
TXD5+
GND
RXD5+
TXD5-
GND
GND
IN12
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
IN1
40
8
6
14
16
30
38
33
36
35
37
32
34
39
22
24
Position sensor patch cord
31
29
17
15
23
13
7
21
18
5
25
28
12
10
20
27
1
11
4
19
3
26
9
2
009-002411-00
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
Motor cable 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
30 32 34
29 31 33
35 37 39
36 38 40
J17 2
1 VCC Red 1
REAC_PHO White 4 +
009-002406-00 3 GND Black 2
C Reaction carousel home
- position sensor
1 A+ Red 1 4 GND Green 3 E
1
1
Reaction carousel 2 A- Yellow 2
2
J3
3 2
rotation motor 4 B+ Orange 3 5 VCC Red 1
4 +
6 REAC_OC_PHO White 4
86 motor 5 B- Brown 4 C Reaction carousel outer
5 1 2 7 GND Black 2
4
- coder sensor
8 GND Green 3 E
3 4
C Motor cable C
009-002404-00 5 6 9 VCC Red 1
+
10 REAC_IC_PHO White 4
1 A+ Red 1 7 8 C Reaction carousel inner
1 11 GND Black 2
1
- coder sensor
Reagent mixer vertical 2 A- Yellow 2 9 10 12 GND Green 3 E
2 3 2
motor
4
4 B+ Orange 3 J4 11 12 13 VCC Red 1
59 motor 5 B- Brown 4 +
5 14 RMR_PHO White 4
Reagent mixer rotation
4
13 14 C
15 GND Black 2 -
15 16 16 GND Green 3 E
sensor
Motor cable
009-002403-00 17 18 17 VCC Red 1
1 A+ Red 1 18 RMU_PHO White 4
+
1 19 20
1
C Reagent mixer vertical

3 A- Yellow 2 19 GND Black 2 -
Reagent mixer 3 sensor 1
3 2
J5 21 22 20 GND Green 3

horizontal motor 4 B+ Orange 3 E
4
59 motor 6 B- Brown 4 23 24 21 VCC Red 1
6 +
4
22 RMU_PHO2 White 4
25 26 C Reagent mixer vertical
PCBA: 051-001004-00
23 GND Black 2 -
27 28 E
sensor 2
Motor cable 24 GND Green 3
009-002405-00 29 30 25 VCC Red 1
PCB: 050-000828-00
+
1 1 A+ Red 1 31 32 26 AWH_PHO White 4
1
C
Cuvette wash 2 A- Yellow 2 27 GND Black 2 - Wash head vertical sensor
2 J6
3 2
vertical motor 33 34 28 GND Green 3 E

B 4 B+ Orange 3 B
42 motor 4 35 36
5 B- Brown 4 29 VCC Red 1
5 +
4
37 38 30 AWH_RAM_PHO White 4 C Wash head obstruct

31 GND Black 2 -
39 40 E
detection sensor 1
32 GND Green 3
Reagent mixer drive board power cord 33 VCC Red 1

009-002415-00 1 J16 34 AWH_RAM_PHO2 White 4
+
C Wash head obstruct
3 24V Red 1 2 35 GND Black 2 -
detection sensor 2
1
E
J5
4 24V Red 5
3 J31 36 GND Green 3
3 2
1 GND Black 2
2# five- 2 GND Black 4
4
5
probe/mixer J7
4
conversion Reagent mixer drive board signal cable
1
009-002414-00
board 1 2
3 2
1 TXD 6
1
051-000210-00 2 RST 7 3 4 J23

3 2
J4
4
3 RXD 8 5 6
4 ISP 9 7 8
MINDRAY
4
9 10
A A
Wash temperature control
TITLE:
board_1/3
File Bytes
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-144
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DC pump/valve cable 1
009-002409-00
Floater sensor cable
009-002410-00 1 Red
Outer ring cuvette wash phase-1
2 Black dispense valve V22
1 GND 1
High-concentration waste 3 Red
2 FL 2 Outer ring cuvette wash phase-2
tank full (BNC) FL13 4 Black
D dispense valve V23
1 GND 3 D
Water tank empty 5 Red
FL01 2 FL 4 Outer ring cuvette wash phase-3
1 GND 5
Water tank full 2 1 7 Red
2 FL 6 Outer ring cuvette wash phase-4
FL04 4 3 8 Black
dispense valve V25
9 Red
1 GND 7 6 5 Outer ring cuvette wash phase-5
Concentrated wash 10 Black
solution tank empty FL05 2 FL 8 8 7 dispense valve V26
11 Red
1 GND 9 10 9 Outer ring cuvette wash phase-6
Diluted wash solution tank 12 Black
dispense valve V27
empty FL06 2 FL 10 12 11 1 2 13 Red
Inner ring cuvette wash phase-1
14 13 3 4 14 Black
4 GND 11 dispense valve V28
Diluted wash solution tank 16 15 15 Red
full FL09 2 FL 12 5 6 Inner ring cuvette wash phase-2
18 17 16 Black
dispense valve V29
7 8
1 GND 13 17 Red
High-concentration waste 20 19 Inner ring cuvette wash phase-3
2 FL 14 9 10
collector full FL10 22 21
18 Black
dispense valve V30
11 12 19 Red
1 GND 15 24 23 Inner ring cuvette wash phase-4
Low-concentration waste 13 14 20 Black
2 FL 16 dispense valve V31
collector full FL11 26 25
15 16 21 Red
1 GND 17
Primary vacuum container 22 Black dispense valve V32
17 18
C
full FL12
2 FL 18 J15 23 Red
C
19 20
Connection wire between wash temperature 21 22
control board and AC drive board J10 25 Red
009-002407-00 23 24 26 Black Dilution valve V20
1 12V 1 1 2 25 26
J6 27 Red
1
3
2
4
2
4
3
P07
12V
P08
3
4
2
3
5
4
6
Wash temperature control board 27 28
29 30
28
29
Black
Red
Degassing valve V19
High-concentration waste suction

5 6 5 12V 5
AC drive board 7
9 10
8
6
7
8
P09
12V
HEA04
6
7
8
7
9 10
8
PCBA: 051-001004-00 31 32
33 34
30
31
32
Black
Red
Black
valve V37
High-concentration waste drain
051-001020-00 valve V34
PCB: 050-000828-00
9 12V 9 11 12 35 36
11 12 33 Red
10 HEA01 10 13 14 High-concentration waste vacuum
37 38 34 Black
13 14 11 12V 11 release valve V40
12 HEA02 12 15 16 39 40 35 Red
Low-concentration waste suction
13 12V 13 17 18 41 42 36 Black valve 1 V38
14 HEA03 14
19 20 43 44 37 Red
Low-concentration waste drain
38 Black valve 1 V35
DC pump cable 2 45 46
39 Red
009-002408-00 47 48 Low-concentration waste vacuum
40 Black release valve 1 V41
Red 1
B 49 50 41 Red
B
ISE degassing pump P12 Black 2 Low-concentration waste suction
Red 3
J11 J12
42 Black
valve 2 V39
Reagent mixer cleaning fluid valve 43 Red
V15 Black 4 1 2 Low-concentration waste drain
44 Black
Red 5 valve 2 V36
Reagent mixer wash solution valve 3 4 45 Red
V17 Black 6 Low-concentration waste vacuum
5 6 46 Black
24V Red 7 release valve 2 V42
Diluted wash solution pump P06 7 8 47 Red
Primary vacuum container waste
Black 8
48 Black
24V Red 9 9 10 drain valve V43
Concentrated wash solution pump 49 Red
P05 Black 10 11 12
50 Black ISE degassing valve V21
24V Red 11
Deionized water circulating pump 13 14
Black 12
P03 J8 External vacuum pump patch cord
Cleaning fluid circulating pump
24V Red 13 009-002417-00
Black 14 1 1 Red SIGN
P15 External vacuum pump connector
2 Black GND (BNC)
2
Inlet valve cable
A
Inlet valve V01
009-002390-00
Red
Black
1
2
1
2
3
J13
MINDRAY A
4 Wash temperature control
TITLE:
5 board_2/3
File Bytes 6
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-145
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D D
Cleaning fluid temperature Connection wire for cleaning fluid

Cleaning fluid temperature collection board
temperature sensor cable collection board 009-002412-00
009-002444-00 PCBA: 051-000449-00 Shield 9
1 Shield Black 1 1 Connection wire for pressure detection
Cuvette wash solution 2 AGND Black 2 PCB: BA38-20-88227 5 SDO 3 2 1
board Cleaning fluid
2 J1 2 1
temperature sensor 3 NTC Red 3 1 GND 2 4 3 009-002413-00 Pressure detection board quality detection sensor
3 4 3 11 +12V 7 PCBA: 051-001022-00 009-000444-00
6 5
6 5 1 +12V Red 1 PCB: 050-000835-00
1
1 8 7
Water quality detection board

1 Shield Black 1 1 VPP Red 5
2 AGND Black 2 8 7 2 RXD Purple 3
1
Cuvette cleaning fluid 2 J2 3 CS# 1 10 9
1
temperature sensor 3 NTC Red 3 10 9 3 TXD White 2 2 VEE Green 3
3
2
6 SCLK 4 12 11
051-000211-00
1
12 11 4 PSEN Green 4 3 SIG Yellow 1
6 7 8 9
1 Shield Black 1 8 CH2 5
3
1 14 13 J21
3
2 3 4 5
2 AGND Black 2 5 GND Black 5 4 GND Black 2
Whole unit cleaning 14 13 10 CH0 6
4
3 NTC Red 3 2 J4 16 15
4
fluid temperature sensor 12 CH1 8 6 -12V Yellow 6 5 GND Black 4
3 16 15
5
18 17 7 RST Blue 7
5
13 GND 10
18 17 6 GND Black 6
7
8 Shield
6
1 Shield Black 1 Shield 19 20 19
6
1
20 19
2 AGND Black 2 J1
8
Ambient
temperature sensor 3 NTC Red 3
2 J3
J19 J2 J1
C 3 C
J5
Lamp control cable
009-002418-00
Connection wire for reaction carousel
temperature collection board
1 DA_Lamp 1 J1
1
Sensor signal 3 J25
BA40 power supply

Reaction 3 19 20 2 GND 2
009-002416-00
BA40-30-61943
carousel Sensor signal 2 J1 Wash temperature control board
1
2 17 18
2
11..Shiled 3 AD_Lamp 3
assembly
temperature
3
sensor Shield 1 1 1 2
3
15 16 18..VPP 9..VPP
4
4 SLP_Lamp 4
4
Reaction carousel 13 14 13..AGND 10..AGND 3 4 5 GND 5
6
5
PCBA: 051-001004-00
5
temperature sensor cable 3
11 12 19..AGND 6..AGND 5 6 6 Shield 6
7
8
009-002443-00 2 J2
1
J9
9 10 11..PSEN 5..PSEN 7 8 PCB: 050-000828-00
9..RST 3..RST
7 8 9 10
12..TXD 7..TXD
3 11 12
5 6
J3 10..RXD 4..RXD
2 Wash temperature control board power cord
3 4
1
J18 009-002402-00
DC power supply conversion

1 2 1 B24V Yellow 7
Reaction carousel temperature B
1
7
B 2 B24V Yellow 8
1
7
collection board 3 C12V Yellow 9
2
8
2
PCBA: 051-000817-00
8
4 C12V Blue 10
051-000755-00
9
3
PCB: 050-000659-00 J2 J1 5 A5V Red 11
9
3
board
10
4
6 D12V Green 12
10
4
1 2 7 GND Black 1
11
5
3 4 8 GND Black 2 11
5
12
6
9 GND Black 3
5 6 12
6
10 GND Black 4
7 8 11 GND Black 5
12 -12V(E) White 6
J8
9 10
A
MINDRAY A
Wash temperature control
TITLE: board_3/3
File Bytes
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-146
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Main control board

051-000742-00
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 36 38 40
J10
29 31 33
D D
10
26
11
19
12
20
25
18
21
27
28
13
23
2
17
15
29
3
Communication cable
31
4
9
5
1
39
22
24
34
37
40
32
35
36
33
14
16
30
38
6
8
009-002339-00
RP1_TXD3+
RT2_TXD2+
RT1_RXD1-
RT2_RXD2-
RP1_RXD3-
RT1_TXD1+
RT2_CTL2
RP2_RXD4-
RT1_CTL1
RT2_RST2
RP1_CTL3
RP2_TXD4+
RP2_CTL4
RT1_RXD1+
RT2_RXD2+
RP1_RXD3+
RT2_TXD2-
RP1_TXD3-
RP2_TXD4-
RT1_RST1
RP1_RST3
RP2_RST4
RP2_RXD4+
RT1_TXD1-
RXD5-
TXD5+
GND
RXD5+
TXD5-
GND
GND
IN12
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
IN1
Position sensor patch cord 1
40
8
6
14
16
30
38
33
36
35
37
32
34
39
22
24
Motor cable 009-002348-00
31
29
15
17
13
23
7
21
28
18
1
27
25
20
26
9
4
12
10
19
3
11
2
009-002356-00 1 VCC Red 1
1 A+ Red 1 2 PHO White 4
+
1
1
C R1 outer carousel home
R1 outer carousel 2 A- Yellow 2 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39
3 GND Black 2
-
2 1 2 position sensor
3 2
4 GND Green 3
rotation motor 4
4 B+ Orange 3 J13 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 36 38 40 J10 3 4 5 VCC Red 1
E
5 5 6 6 PHO White 4
4
C
Motor cable 7 GND Black 2 - R1 outer coder sensor
7 8 8 GND Green 3 E
009-002357-00 9 10 9 VCC Red 1
1 A+ Red 1 +
1
1
11 12 10 PHO White 4 R1 inner carousel home
R1 inner carousel 2 A- Yellow 2 11 GND Black 2
C
2 J14 -
3 2
rotation motor 13 14 12 GND Green 3 position sensor
4 B+ Orange 3 E
59 motor 4 15 16 13 VCC Red 1
5 B- Brown 4 +
5 14 PHO White 4
4
C
17 18 15 GND Black 2 R1 inner coder sensor
C Motor cable
- C
19 20 16 GND Green 3
009-002358-00 J12 17 VCC Red 1
E
21 22 +
1 R11 rotational home
1
23 24 C
3 A- Yellow 2 19 GND Black 2 - position sensor
3 J15
3 2
R11 rotation motor 4 B+ Orange 3 21 VCC Red 1
59 motor 4 27 28 +
6 B- Brown 4 22 PHO White 4
R11 rotational obstruct
6 C
4
29 30 23 GND Black 2
-
Motor cable 24 GND Green 3 detection sensor
31 32 E
009-002359-00 25 VCC Red 1
1 A+ Red 1 33 34 26 PHO White 4
+
1 C
2 A- Yellow 2 35 36 27 GND Black 2 R11 vertical sensor 1
1
-
2 28 GND Green 3

R11 vertical motor 37 38 E
4 B+ Orange 3 J16
3 2
59 motor 4 5 B- Brown 4 39 40
29 VCC Red 1
+
30 PHO White 4
5 C
41 42 31 GND Black 2 - R11 vertical sensor 2
4
1
Motor cable
009-002360-00
1 A+ Red 1
PCBA: 051-001017-00 43
45
44
46
32
34
33
GND Green
VCC Red
PHO White
1
3
4
E
+
C
47 48 35 GND Black 2 R11 syringe sensor
1
PCB: 050-000831-00
-
2 A- Yellow 2 36 GND Green 3
2 49 50 E
3 2
R11 syringe motor 4 B+ Orange 3

42 motor 4 J17 Position sensor patch cord 2
5 B- Brown 4
5 009-002349-00
4
1 2
B 1 VCC Red 1 + B
Motor cable 3 4 2 PHO White 4 C R12 rotational home
009-002361-00 3 GND Black 2 -
5 6 4 GND Green 3
position sensor
E
1 A+ Red 1 7 8
1
1
5 VCC Red 1 +
R12 rotation motor 3 A- Yellow 2 10
3 J18 9 6 PHO White 4 R12 rotational obstruct
3 2
C
59 motor 4 B+ Orange 3 11 12 7 GND Black 2 - detection sensor
4 8 GND Green 3 E
6 B- Brown 4
6 13 14
4
9 VCC Red 1 +
15 16 10 PHO White 4 C
Motor cable 11 GND Black 2 - R12 vertical sensor 1
009-002362-00 17 18 12 GND Green 3 E
1 A+ Red 1 19 20
1 J11 13 VCC Red 1
+
1
R12 vertical motor 14 PHO White 4

2 A- Yellow 2 21 22 C
2 15 GND Black 2 R12 vertical sensor 2
3 2
59 motor -
4
4 B+ Orange 3 J19 23 24 16 GND Green 3 E
5 B- Brown 4 25 26 17 VCC Red 1
5 18 PHO White 4
+
4
27 28 C
Motor cable 19 GND Black 2 - R12 syringe sensor
009-002363-00
31 32
1 A+ Red 1
MINDRAY
1
1
2 A- Yellow 2 33 34
R12 syringe motor
2
J20
3 2
42 motor 35 36
4 B+ Orange 3
A 4 37 38 A
5 B- Brown 4
5 39 40
4
TITLE: R1 control drive board_1/2

File Bytes
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-147
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
R11 level sense cable

009-002350-00
1 GND Black 1
2 RAM Blue 2
1 2 3 LLS Green 3 1 2
4 12V Red 4
3 4 5 NC 5 3 4
D D
J2 5 6 6 RXD White 6 5 6
7 NC 7
7 8 8 TXD Brown 8 7 8
9 10 9 NC 9 9 10
10 SGND Black 10
J1 1# five-
probe/mixer
009-002351-00
conversion board
1 GND Black 1
051-000210-00
R1 control drive board power cord 2 RAM Blue 2
J2
009-002346-00 3 LLS Green 3
1 2 4 12V Red 4 1 2
J4 7 D12V Yellow 1 3 4 5 NC 5 3 4
6 RXD White 6
5 6 7 NC 7 5 6
3 A5V Red 2
DC power supply
conversion board
4 C+12V Blue 3 J3 7 8 8 TXD Brown 8 7 8
1
9 NC 9
9
2
051-000755-00
1 B+24V Orange 4 9 10 9 10
10 SGND Black 10
7
2
10
2 B+24V Orange 5
3
C 14 -12V(E) White 6 C
8
3 J1
11
5 GND Black 7
9
Bar code reader cable

12
6 GND Black 8
009-002352-00
10
13
8 GND Black 9
6
1 VCC 1
9 GND Black 10 J7 2 RXD 3
Reagent bar code module

14
3 TXD 2
1
2
BA40-30-61986
4 NC NC 5
3
4
5 GND 4
5
6
PCBA: 051-001017-00
6 CTS 10
7
8 10
7 RTS 6
8 TRIG 9
9
PCB: 050-000831-00 9
10 Shield
NC NC 7
1
2
Probe interior wash pump

drive cable
3
J25 009-002327-00
J24
4
1 2
1 VDC Red 1
J15
5
B
2 P04_CTRL Black 2
1 2
AC drive B
3 4 3 24V Red 3
6 7
4 24V Red 4 3 4
board
5 6 5
6
GND Black
GND Black
5
6 5 6
051-001020-00
8
R1 panel key indicator cable

009-002347-00 R1 control drive board interior wash valve drive cable
1
R-PRESS Red 1 009-002354-00

2
R1 carousel key GND Black 2 J21 1 VALVE Black 1

R11 interior wash
3
2 +12V Red 2
1 2 valve V04
R-NEAR Red 3
4
R1 carousel cover J23 3 4 3 VALVE Black 1

R12 interior wash
5
sensor GND Black 4

5 6 4 +12V Red 2 valve V05
6 7
R-LED Black 5
R1 carousel 7 8 5 VALVE Black 1
Interior wash return
+24V Red 6 6 +12V Red 2
indicator valve 1 V08
8
R1 control drive board exterior wash valve drive cable
A
J22
1 2
1
2
009-002355-00
VALVE Black
+12V Red
1
2
R11 exterior wash
valve V11
MINDRAY A
3 4
3 VALVE Black 1
5 6 R12 exterior wash
File Bytes 4 +12V Red 2
valve V12
7 8
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-148
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Main control board

051-000742-00
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 36 38 40
J11
29 31 33
D D
Communication cable
10
26
11
19
12
20
25
18
21
27
28
13
23
2
17
15
29
3
31
4
9
5
1
39
22
24
34
37
40
32
35
36
33
14
16
30
38
6
8
009-002340-00
RP1_TXD3+
RT2_TXD2+
RT1_RXD1-
RT2_RXD2-
RP1_RXD3-
RT1_TXD1+
RT2_CTL2
RP2_RXD4-
RT1_CTL1
RT2_RST2
RP1_CTL3
RP2_TXD4+
RP2_CTL4
RT1_RXD1+
RT2_RXD2+
RP1_RXD3+
RT2_TXD2-
RP1_TXD3-
RP2_TXD4-
RT1_RST1
RP1_RST3
RP2_RST4
RP2_RXD4+
RT1_TXD1-
RXD5-
TXD5+
GND
RXD5+
TXD5-
GND
GND
IN12
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
IN1
40
8
6
14
16
30
38
33
36
35
37
32
34
39
22
24
Motor cable 009-002366-00
31
29
15
17
13
23
7
21
28
18
1
27
25
20
26
9
4
12
10
19
3
11
2
009-002374-00 1 VCC Red 1
+
1
1
C R2 outer carousel home
R2 outer carousel 2 A- Yellow 2 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39
3 GND Black 2
-
2 1 2 position sensor
3 2
4 GND Green 3
rotation motor 4
4 B+ Orange 3 J13 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 36 38 40 J10 3 4 5 VCC Red 1
E
5 5 6 6 PHO White 4
4
C
Motor cable 7 GND Black 2 - R2 outer coder sensor
7 8 8 GND Green 3 E
009-002375-00
1 A+ Red 1 9 10 9 VCC Red 1
+
1
1
11 12 10 PHO White 4 R2 inner carousel home
R2 inner carousel 2 A- Yellow 2 11 GND Black 2
C
2 J14 -
3 2
rotation motor 13 14 12 GND Green 3 position sensor
4 B+ Orange 3 E
59 motor 4 15 16 13 VCC Red 1
5 B- Brown 4 +
5 14 PHO White 4
4
C
17 18 15 GND Black 2 R2 inner coder sensor
C Motor cable
- C
009-002376-00 J12 17 VCC Red 1
E
21 22 +
1 R21 rotational home
1
23 24 C
3 A- Yellow 2 19 GND Black 2 - position sensor
3 J15
3 2
R21 rotation motor 4 B+ Orange 3 21 VCC Red 1
59 motor 4 27 28 +
6 B- Brown 4 22 PHO White 4
R21 rotational obstruct
6 C
4
-
Motor cable 24 GND Green 3 detection sensor
31 32 E
009-002377-00 25 VCC Red 1
1 A+ Red 1 33 34 26 PHO White 4
+
1
C
2 A- Yellow 2 35 36 27 GND Black 2 R21 vertical sensor 1
1
-
R21 vertical motor 2 28 GND Green 3 E
37 38
4 B+ Orange 3 J16
3 2
59 motor 4 5 B- Brown 4 39 40
29 VCC Red 1
+
PCBA: 051-001018-00
30 PHO White 4
5 C
41 42 31 GND Black 2 - R21 vertical sensor 2
4
Motor cable 43 44 32 GND Green 3 E

009-002378-00 33 VCC Red 1
PCB: 050-000831-00 45 46 +
1 A+ Red 1 34 PHO White 4 C
1 47 48 35 GND Black 2 R21 syringe sensor
1
-
2 A- Yellow 2 36 GND Green 3
2 49 50 E
3 2
R21 syringe motor 4 B+ Orange 3

42 motor 4 J17 Position sensor patch cord 2
5 B- Brown 4
5 009-002367-00
4
1 2
B 1 VCC Red 1 + B
Motor cable 3 4 2 PHO White 4 C R22 rotational home
009-002379-00 3 GND Black 2 -
5 6 4 GND Green 3
position sensor
E
1 A+ Red 1 7 8
1
1
5 VCC Red 1 +
R22 rotation motor 3 A- Yellow 2 10
3 J18 9 6 PHO White 4 R22 rotational obstruct
3 2
C
59 motor 4 B+ Orange 3 11 12 7 GND Black 2 - detection sensor
4 8 GND Green 3 E
6 B- Brown 4
6 13 14
4
9 VCC Red 1 +
Motor cable 11 GND Black 2 - R22 vertical sensor 1
009-002380-00 17 18 12 GND Green 3 E
1 A+ Red 1 19 20
1 J11 13 VCC Red 1
+
1
R22 vertical motor 14 PHO White 4

2 A- Yellow 2 21 22 C
2 15 GND Black 2 R22 vertical sensor 2
3 2
59 motor -
4
4 B+ Orange 3 J19 23 24 16 GND Green 3 E
5 B- Brown 4 25 26 17 VCC Red 1
5 18 PHO White 4
+
4
27 28 C
Motor cable 19 GND Black 2 - R22 syringe sensor
009-002381-00
31 32
1 A+ Red 1
MINDRAY
1
1
R22 syringe motor 2 A- Yellow 2 33 34

2
J20
3 2
42 motor 35 36
4 B+ Orange 3
A 4 37 38 A
5 B- Brown 4
5 39 40
4

File Bytes
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-149
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

009-002368-00
1 GND Black 1
2 RAM Blue 2
1 2 3 LLS Green 3 1 2
4 12V Red 4
3 4 5 NC 5 3 4
D D
J2 5 6 6 RXD White 6 5 6
7 NC 7
7 8 8 TXD Brown 8 7 8
9 10 9 NC 9 9 10
10 SGND Black 10
J1 2# five-
probe/mixer
R22 level sense cable conversion board
009-002369-00
051-000210-00
1 GND Black 1
2 RAM Blue 2
J2
R2 control drive board power cord
3 LLS Green 3
009-002364-00 1 2 1 2
4 12V Red 4
J9 7 D12V Yellow 1 3 4 5 NC 5 3 4
6 RXD White 6
5 6 7 NC 7 5 6
3 A5V Red 2
DC power supply
conversion board
4 C+12V Blue 3 J3 7 8 8 TXD Brown 8 7 8
1
9 NC 9
9
2
051-000755-00
1 B+24V Orange 4 9 10 9 10
10 SGND Black 10
7
2
10
2 B+24V Orange 5
3
8
3 J1
11
5 GND Black 7 Bar code reader cable

9
4
12
6 GND Black 8 009-002352-00

10
13
8 GND Black 9
6
1 VCC 1
9 GND Black 10 J7 2 RXD 3
Reagent bar code module

14
3 TXD 2
1
2
BA40-30-61986
4 NC NC 5
3
4
5 GND 4
5
6
PCBA: 051-001018-00
6 CTS 10
7
8 10
7 RTS 6
8 TRIG 9
9
PCB: 050-000831-00 9 NC
10 Shield
NC 7
1
2
Probe interior wash pump

3
drive cable
J25 009-002327-00
J24
4
1 2
1 VDC Red 1
J14
5
B
2 P04_CTRL Black 2
1 2
AC drive B
3 4 3 24V Red 3
6 7
4 24V Red 4 3 4
board
5 6 5
6
GND Black
GND Black
5
6 5 6
051-001020-00
8
R2 pane key indicator cable

009-002365-00 R2 control drive board interior wash valve drive cable
1
R-PRESS Red 1 009-002372-00

2
R2 carousel key GND Black 2 J21 1 VALVE Black 1

R21 interior wash
3
2 +12V Red 2
1 2 valve V06
R-NEAR Red 3
4
R2 carousel cover J23 3 4 3 VALVE Black 1

R22 interior wash
5
sensor GND Black 4

5 6 4 +12V Red 2 valve V07
6 7
R-LED Black 5
R2 carousel 7 8 5 VALVE Black 1
Interior wash return
+24V Red 6 6 +12V Red 2
indicator valve 2 V09
8
R2 control drive board exterior wash valve drive cable
A
J22
1 2
1
2
009-002373-00
VALVE Black
+12V Red
1
2
R21 exterior wash
valve V13
MINDRAY A
3 4
3 VALVE Black 1
5 6 R22 exterior wash
File Bytes 4 +12V Red 2
valve V14
7 8
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-150
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Main control board

051-000742-00
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 36 38 40
J3
29 31 33
D D
10
26
11
12
27
28
25
13
19
2
20
15
18
29
21
3
31
23
Communication cable
4
1
39
17
5
22
24
34
37
40
32
35
36
33
14
16
30
38
6
8
009-002338-00
ST2_TXD2+
ST1_RXD1-
ST2_RXD2-
ST1_TXD1+
ST2_CTL2
SP_TXD3+
SM_RXD4-
ST1_CTL1
SM_TXD4+
SM_CTL4
ST2_RST2
ST1_RXD1+
ST2_RXD2+
ST1_TXD1-
ST2_TXD2-
SP_RXD3-
ST1_RST1
SM_RST4
SM_RXD4+
SM_TXD4-
SP_CTL3
SP_RXD3+
SP_TXD3-
SP_RST3
RXD5-
TXD5+
GND
RXD5+
TXD5-
GND
GND
IN12
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
IN1
40
8
6
14
16
30
38
33
36
35
37
32
34
39
22
24
009-002382-00
17
23
31
21
29
18
15
20
13
19
7
5
25
28
27
1
9
4
12
10
26
3
11
2
Motor cable
1 VCC Red 1
009-002393-00 2 PHO White 4
+
1 A+ Red 1 3 GND Black 2
C Outer sample carousel
1
1
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39 - home position sensor
Outer sample carousel 2 A- Yellow 2 4 GND Green 3
2 J10 E
3 2
rotation motor 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 36 38 40
59 motor 4
4 B+ Orange 3 J13 29 31 33
6
5 VCC Red
PHO White
1
4
+
5 B- Brown 4 1 2 C Outer sample carousel
5 7 GND Black 2 -
4
3 4 8 GND Green 3 coder sensor
E
Motor cable
5 6 9 VCC Red 1
009-002394-00 10 PHO White 4
+
1 A+ Red 1 7 8 C Inner sample carousel
1
1
11 GND Black 2 -
Inner sample carousel 2 A- Yellow 2 9 10 12 GND Green 3 home position sensor
E
2 J14
3 2
rotation motor 4 B+ Orange 3 11 12 13 VCC Red 1
+
59 motor 4 14 PHO White 4
5 B- Brown 4 13 14 C Inner sample carousel
5 15 GND Black 2 -
4
C 15 16 16 GND Green 3 coder sensor C

Motor cable E
17 18 17 VCC Red 1
009-002395-00
1 A+ Red 1 J12 18 PHO White 4
+
C Sample probe rotational
1 19 20
1
19 GND Black 2 -
Sample probe rotation motor 3 A- Yellow 2 home position sensor 1
3 J15 21 22 20 GND Green 3
3 2
E
59 motor 4 B+ Orange 3 21 VCC Red 1
4 23 24 22 PHO White 4
+
6 B- Brown 4 C Sample probe rotational
6 25 26 23 GND Black 2
4
- home position sensor 2

24 GND Green 3
Motor cable 27 28 E
25 VCC Red 1
009-002396-00 29 30 26 PHO White 4
+
C Sample probe rotational
1 1 A+ Red 1
31 32 27 GND Black 2 - obstruct detection sensor
1
Sample probe vertical motor 2 A- Yellow 2 28 GND Green 3

33 34 E
59 motor 2
J16
3 2
4 B+ Orange 3 29 VCC Red 1

4 35 36 30 PHO White 4
+
Sample probe vertical
PCBA: 051-001016-00
C
5 B- Brown 4 37 38 31 GND Black 2 -
5 sensor 1
4
Motor cable 32 GND Green 3 E

39 40
009-002397-00 33 VCC Red 1
+
41 42
PCB: 050-000831-00
1
C Sample probe vertical
1
43 44 35 GND Black 2 -
3 A- Yellow 2 36 GND Green 3 sensor 2
2 45 46 E
3 2
S1 syringe motor 4 B+ Orange 3

42 motor 4 J17 47 48
37
38
VCC Red
PHO White
1
4
+
6 B- Brown 4 C
5 49 50 39 GND Black 2 - S1 syringe sensor
4
Motor cable 40 GND Green 3 E

B B
009-002398-00 41 VCC Red 1
+
1 A+ Red 1 42 PHO White 4 C
1
1
3 A- Yellow 2 43 GND Black 2 - S2 syringe sensor

S2 syringe motor 2 J18 44 GND Green 3
3 2
E
42 motor 4 B+ Orange 3
4
6 B- Brown 4 Position sensor patch cord 2
5 1 2
4
009-002383-00
Motor cable 3 4 1 VCC Red 1
+
009-002399-00 5 6 2 PHO White 4
C Sample mixer horizontal
1 A+ Red 1 3 GND Black 2 -
1 7 8 sensor
1
4 GND Green 3
Sample mixer rotation motor 3 A- Yellow 2 E
3 9 10
3 2
59 motor
4
4 B+ Orange 3 J19 11 12 6
5 VCC Red
PHO White
1
4
+
6 B- Brown 4 C Sample mixer vertical
7 GND Black 2
6 13 14 - sensor 1
4
8 GND Green 3 E
Motor cable 15 16 9 VCC Red 1
+
009-002400-00 17 18
1 A+ Red 1
J11 19 20
10
11
PHO White
GND Black 2
4
C Sample mixer vertical
- sensor 2
1
1 12 GND Green 3 E
Sample mixer vertical motor 2 A- Yellow 2 21 22
3 2
2
59 motor 4 B+ Orange 3 J20 23 24
MINDRAY
4
5 B- Brown 4 25 26
5
4
27 28
A 29 30 A
31 32
33 34 TITLE: Sample control drive board_1/2
File Bytes 35 36
37 38
39 40
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-151
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Connection wire Sample level sense cable

009-002384-00 009-002387-00
1 VPP Red 1
J3 2 VEE Blue 3
1 GND Black 1 J3
2
2 RAM Blue 3
1
3 CLOT_YES White 2 3 LLS Green 2 1 2
3
D 4 CLOT_MAY Grey 4 4 12V Red 4 D
2
1 2
1
5 NC 5 3 4
5 CLOT_NOSAM Yellow 5
5
3 4 6 RXD White 6 5 6
3
8 GND Black 6
J2
051-000218-00
7 NC 7
7
6 INT Green 7 J4 5 6
8 TXD Brown 8 7 8
5
10
9
7 INTEN Purple 8 7 8 9 NC 9 9 10
7
9 10 10 SGND Black 10
1# five-probe/mixer
10 12 14
7 GND Black 9
9
2
1
3 RXD Orange 10 Sample mixer drive board signal cable conversion board
11 13
4 4 TXD Brown 11 009-002388-00
3 6 RST Brown 12 1 2 6 TXD White 1 051-000210-00
6
5
5 NC 13
J4
1
3 4 7 RST 2
J2 Shielding layer 14
8
J3
7
3 2
5 6 8 RXD Brown 3
Connection wire 9 ISP 4
7 8
009-002385-00
4
1 VPP Red 1 9 10
J3 2 VEE Blue 3
2
3 CLOT_YES White 2 Sample mixer drive board power cord

4
009-002389-00
3
4 CLOT_MAY Grey 4 1 2 1 2
1
3 24V Red 3
5 CLOT_NOSAM Yellow 5
6
3 4 J25 4 24V Red 4

J5
3 2
8 GND Black 6 3 4
051-000218-00
8
C C
7
5 GND Black 1
6 INT Green 7 5 6 5 6
J5 6 GND Black 2
10
7 INTEN Purple 8 7 8
4
9 10
7 GND Black 9 11 12

2
3 RXD Orange 10
13 14 Bar code reader cable
4 TXD Brown 11
4
6 RST Brown 12 009-002352-00
PCBA: 051-001016-00
6
5 NC 13 1 VCC 1
J2 Shielding layer 14 J7
8
2 RXD 3
7
Sample bar code module

3 TXD 2
PCB: 050-000831-00
1
2
Sample control drive board power cord
BA40-30-61994
4 NC NC 5
009-002401-00
3
4
5 GND 4
J10 7 D12V Yellow 1
5
6
6 CTS 10
DC power supply
conversion board
3 A5V Red 2
7
8 10
7 RTS 6
8
4 C+12V Blue 3
8 TRIG 9
051-000755-00
9
6
1
9
1 B+24V Orange 4
9 NC NC 7
10
2 B+24V Orange 5
2
3
14 -12V(E) White 6 10 Shield

11
3
4
5 GND Black 7
B
9
12 13
B 6 GND Black 8
5
8 GND Black 9 J1 Sample probe wash valve cable

10
6
009-002391-00
9 GND Black 10
J21
14
1 VALVE Black 1
S1 interior wash
2 +12V Red 2 valve V02
1 2
Sample carousel panel key indicator cable 3 4 3 VALVE Black 1
009-002386-00 S2 interior wash
S-OUT-PRESS Red 1 5 6 4 +12V Red 2 valve V03
Outer sample 7 8 5 VALVE Black 1
GND Black 2 S exterior wash
carousel key
1
6 +12V Red 2
valve V10
S-IN-PRESS Red 3
2
Inner sample Sample mixer wash valve cable

3
carousel key GND Black 4

J22 009-002392-00
Sample mixer
4
S-OUT-LED Black 5 J23 1 VALVE Black 1

cleaning fluid
1 2
5
Outer sample 2 +12V Red 2 valve V16

+24V Red 6 3 4
6 7
carousel indicator 3 VALVE Black 1

5 6
MINDRAY
S-IN-LED Black 7 4 +12V Red 2
Sample mixer
Inner sample wash solution
8
7 8
carousel indicator +24V Red 8 valve V18
A A
TITLE: Sample control drive board_2/2

File Bytes
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-152
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Air connection Air connection Air connection Air connection Air connection Air connection
Cooler Cooler Cooler Cooler Cooler Cooler Cooler Cooler Cooler Cooler Cooler Cooler
Thermistor Thermistor Thermistor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
3001-21-07100 3001-21-07100 3001-21-07100
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
Shield
2
1
Shield
Shield
2
2
1
Refrigeration temperature
D D
cooler group cable

009-002421-00
GND White
GND White
GND White
009-002425-00
SEN_RT Red
Black
Black
SEN_RT Red
SEN_RT Red
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
sensor cable
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Black
Black
Black
2
3
3
1
3
1
4
1
4
2
3
1
2
3
3
1
1
4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3
24V power cord 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
J3 009-002430-00
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1
BA40 power 1 A24V Red 1 J16 J17 J18 2 1 2 1
1
supply assembly J8 J7 J6 J5 J4 J3
BA40-30-61943 2 2 A24VGND Black 5 5 1
Refrigeration circulating
6 2 pump cable
009-002429-00
1 C24V Red 4 7 3
J26 1 24V 1
24V6A power supply Refrigeration
1
1 2 Contr 2 circulating
C board 2 GND Black 8 8 4 J25 C
2
051-000530-00 2 pump P02
J2
G12V power cord
2# 12V30A power
J2
1
009-002420-00
12V Red 1 1
Reagent refrigeration board AC drive board cable
1
PCBA: 051-001019-00 J9
AC drive board
009-002323-00 J11
051-001020-00
supply board
051-000212-00
2 2 GND Black 2 J2 1 F12V Red 1 1
2 1
PCB: 050-000833-00 2
3 3 GND Black 3
2
3
F12V power cord

J2 009-002419-00
1 Refrigeration board
1# 12V30A power 1 12V Red 1 communication cable
1 009-002343-00
supply board
051-000212-00 2 2 GND Black 2
2
J1 1 TXD- 1
2 TXD + 2
2
1
B
051-000742-00
1
2
B
Main control
3 RXD+ 3
3
4
4 RXD- 4
3
4
board
5 RST 5
5
6
5
6
Refrigeration temperature 6 GND 6
7
8
protection switch cable 7 CTL 7
7
8
1
009-002423-00
1 1
J11 J19
8 GND 8
J5
Temperature 2
2 2
protection switch 1 3
J24 J23 J20 J12 J27 J10
1 3
Temperature 4 4 6 8 10 1 2 3
2
protection switch 2 2 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4
5 1 3 5 7 9 4 5 6
GND Black 2
4
1
3
Demisting heater cable
ISE module power cord
2
3
3
2
4
3
2
6
3
3
3
2
2
1
1
1
GND Black
3
1
009-002428-00
009-002427-00
009-003115-00
To
12V Red
12V Red
009-002422-00
009-002424-00
Fan cable
DATA Yellow
DATA Yellow
009-002431-00
Fan cable
Fan cable
FAN24V Red
FAN24V Red
DATA Yellow
DATA Yellow
DATA Yellow
FAN24V Red
FAN24V Red
FAN24V Red
Fan cable
DATA Yellow
GND Black
GND Black
enclosure
GND Black
GND Black
GND Black
GND Black
GND Black
GND Black
ISE24V Red
F12V Red
ISE5V Red
MINDRAY
2
1
2
1
Shiled
1
2
2
A
1
A
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
2
Air Air Air Air

2
3
2
2
3
3
3
2
conne conne conne conne

TITLE: Reagent refrigeration board
3
ction ction ction ction
File Bytes Refrige Refrig

Vacuum Vacuum Lamp ISE 3 2 1 2 1
ration eration
fan fan
pump fan pump fan fan fan
Bar
code
Tempe
Bar
code
Tempe DWG NO. BS-2000 REV 2.0
Date Time EMA1 EMA2 demis
rature
demis
rature
protec protect
ting ting
ISE module tion ion
heater
1
switch
heater
2
switch SHEET 15 OF 18 SIZE A3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-153
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Power input wire 1

009-002329-00
Power cord J14
009-002401-00 J3 1 B24V Red 2
J1 1 6
2 B24V Red 3 1 6
D 1 D12V Yellow 7 3 A5V Blue 1 D
2 7 2 7
1
2 A5V Red 3 4 C12V Yellow 4
1
3 C12V Blue 4 3 8 6 GND Black 6
2
3 8
Sample control 7
2
4 B24V Orange 1 4 9 7 GND Black 7
J10
10
3
10 GND Black 8
drive board 5 B24V Orange 2 4 9
8
3
5 10
11
6 -12V (E) White 14
051-001016-00
4
5 10
9
7 GND Black 5
Power input wire 2
12
5
8 GND Black 6 J15
10
009-002330-00
J7
13
6
9 GND Black 8 8 A5V Blue 4 1 7
10 GND Black 9 5 B24V Red 1
14
1
7
5
2 8
6 B24V Red 2
Power cord
2 6 7 B24V Red 3
BA40 power supply
3 9
J1 009-002346-00 3 7 1 GND Black 7 assembly
4 10
1 D12V Yellow 7
4 8
2 GND Black 8 BA40-30-61943
3 GND Black 9 5 11
1
2 A5V Red 3
6
3 C12V Blue 4 6 12
2
R1 control drive
7
4 B24V Orange 1
Power input wire 3
J4
10
3
J4
board 5 B24V Orange 2
8
009-002331-00
3
J6
11
051-001017-00
4
1 2
1 C12V Yellow 1
9
7 GND Black 5
1 5 2 C12V Yellow 3
12
5
3 4
8 GND Black 6
10
3 GND Black 2
13
2
6
9 GND Black 8 6 4 GND Black 4 5 6
10 GND Black 9 5 C12V Yellow 5

14
3 7
7
7 8
DC power supply 4 8
6
7
C12V Yellow
GND Black
7
6
9 10
Power cord
J1 009-002364-00 conversion board 8 GND Black 8 11 12
1 D12V Yellow 7
PCBA: 051-000755-00
8
2 A5V Red 3
6
3 C12V Blue 4
PCB: 050-000598-00
9
R2 control drive
7
4 B24V Orange 1
J9
10
board 5 B24V Orange 2

8
Power cord
11
6 -12V(E) White 14
051-001018-00
4
9
7 GND Black 5 009-002332-00

12
8 GND Black 6 J2
10
7 12V Green 1
13
1
Power cord
6
9 GND Black 8 14 -12V White 2
4
1
009-002337-00 J1
2
10 GND Black 9 6 AGND Black 4
14
J1 1 +12V Yellow 1
2
5
B B
13 AGND Black 5
10
2 -12V White 2
3
3 6 Main control
6
3
J1
1
4
1 B24V Yellow 7 3 5V Red 3
board
11
2 5
4
J1 4 12VGND Yellow 4
5
2
2 B24V Yellow 8 051-000742-00
4 C12V Yellow 1 5 12VGND Yellow 5 1 4
12
J3
3
6
3 C12V Blue 9
3 A5V Red 2 6 GND Black 6
1
7
13
7
4 C12V Blue 10 1
6 5 GND Black 3
3
Analog power supply
Wash
2
8
5 A5V Red 11 2 4
2
8
12 GND Black 4
14
temperature 6 D12V Green 12 conversion board

9
3
9
3
7 GND Black 1 J8 PCBA: 051-001023-00

control board 10
4
10
4
8 GND Black 2
051-001004-00 PCB: 050-000836-00
11 9 GND Black 3 11
5
10 GND Black 4
12
6
12
6
11 GND Black 5
12 -12V(E) White 6
Power cord
009-002402-00
A
MINDRAY A
TITLE: DC power supply conversion board

File Bytes
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-154
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Sample level sense cable

009-002447-00 J1
1
Sample level sense cable 1 GND Black 1
2
1
009-002387-00 2 RAM_V_PHO Blue 2
D 3 Sample level sense board D
J3
2
J2 1 GND Black 1
4
3
4
LEVEL Green
+12V Red 4
3
PCBA: 051-000948-00
3
2 RAM Blue 3 PCB: 050-000796-00
3 LLS Green 2 5 9 Shield
1 2 1 2
4
4 12V Red 4 6
3 4 5 NC 5 3 4
7
5 6 6 RXD White 6 5 6 8 Mixer motor cable * 3
7 NC 7
7 8 7 8 9 009-002433-00
8 TXD Brown 8
9 10 9 NC 9 9 10 1 A+ Red 1
J10 1
4 3 2 1
2 A- Yellow 2 2 Sample mixer
10 SGND Black 10 3 B+ Orange 4
J1 4 B- Brown 5 4 motor 1
5
Sample mixer drive board cable
Sample
J3 Sample mixer drive board 009-002448-00 J4 1 A+ Red 1 1
control drive
4 3 2 1
signal cable 2 A- Yellow 2 2 Sample mixer
board 1 2 009-002388-00 1 1 TXD 1 1 J2 3 B+ Orange 4
4 B- Brown 5 4 motor 2
6 TXD White 1 2 RST 2 2
3 4 2 5
051-001016-00
1
7 RST 2 3 3 RXD 3 3
3 2
5 6 8 RXD Brown 3 J4 4 4 ISP 4 4 Sample mixer drive board J3 1 A+ Red 1 1
4 3 2 1
7 8 9 ISP 4 2 A- Yellow 2 2 Sample mixer
5 5
PCBA: 051-001006-00 3 B+ Orange 4
4
9 10 6 6 GND 5 6 4 B- Brown 5 4 motor 3
C
Sample mixer drive board 7 7 GND 6 7 PCB: 050-000830-00 5 C
power cord 8 8 24V 7 8
J25 009-002389-00 9 9 24V 8 9 2
1 VCC Red
PHO White
1
4
+ Sample mixer
C
1# five-probe/mixer
5 GND Black 1
-rotation speed sensor
3 GND Black 2
1
1 2
6 GND Black 2
3 2 J9 1 2 4 GND Green 3
E 1
3 4 3 24V Red 3 J5 3 4 5 VCC Red 1
5 6 4 24V Red 4 conversion board J5
5 6
6
7
PHO White
GND Black
4
2
+
C
Sample mixer
4
PCBA: 051-000210-00 7
9 10
8 8
9
10
GND Green
VCC Red
PHO White
1
3
4
E
+
2
Sample mixer
PCB: 050-000170-00
C
11 12 11 GND Black 2 -rotation speed sensor
12 GND Green 3 E 3
Mixer optical coupler cable
009-002434-00
R11 level sense cable 009-002445-00
009-002350-00
1 GND Black 1
1
1
1 GND Black 1 2 RAM_V_PHO Blue 2
2
J2
2
2 RAM Blue 3
1 2 3 LLS Green 2 1 2 3 3 LEVEL Green 3
3
B 4 12V Red 4 4 4 +12V Red 4 Reagent level sense board B
3 4 3 4
4
5 NC 5 5 PCBA: 051-001005-00
J2 5 6 6 RXD White 6 5 6 PCB: 050-000829-00
7 NC 7 6
7 8 8 TXD Brown 8 7 8 7 6 Txd White 1
1
9 NC 9 7 Rxd Brown 3
9 10 9 10 8
2
J3
10 SGND Black 10 9 9 Shield
3
R1 control J1
J12
drive board R12 level sense cable
009-002351-00
051-001017-00 009-002446-00
1 GND Black 1
2 RAM Blue 3
J2 1 1 GND Black 1
2
1
2 RAM_V_PHO Blue 2
3 LLS Green 2
3
J2
1 2 1 2
2
4 12V Red 4 3 LEVEL Green 3
3 4 5 NC 5 3 4 4
3
J3 5 6
6 RXD White 6
5 6
5 4 +12V Red 4 Reagent level sense board
4
7 NC 7 6 PCBA: 051-001005-00
7 8 8 TXD Brown 8 7 8 7 PCB: 050-000829-00
9 10 9 NC 9 9 10 8
6 Txd White 1
MINDRAY
1
7 Rxd Brown 3
10 SGND Black 10 9
2
J3
A 9 Shield A
3
J11 TITLE: Five-probe/mixer conversion board
File Bytes
Date Time
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET17 OF 18 SIZE A3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-155
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D D
Mixer motor cable * 3
009-002433-00
1 A+ Red 1 1
4 3 2 1
2 A- Yellow 2 2 Reagent mixer
3 B+ Orange 4
J1 4 B- Brown 5 4 motor 1
Reagent mixer drive board Reagent mixer drive 5
signal cable board cable
009-002414-00 J4 009-002451-00 J4 1 A+ Red 1 1
4 3 2 1
1 2 6 TXD White 1 2 A- Yellow 2 2 Reagent mixer
1 TXD 1
1 1 J2 3 B+ Orange 4
1
3 4 7 RST 2 4 B- Brown 5 4 motor 2
2 2 RST 2 2
J23
3 2
8 RXD Brown 3 5
5 6 3 3 RXD 3 3
9 ISP 4
7 8 4 4 ISP 4 4 1 A+ Red 1 1
Reagent mixer drive board J3
4 3 2 1
5 2 A- Yellow 2 2 Reagent mixer
9 10 5
3 B+ Orange 4
Wash 6 6 GND 5 6 PCBA: 051-001006-00 4 B- Brown 5 4 motor 3
5
temperature Reagent mixer drive board
7 7 GND 6 7
PCB: 050-000830-00
8 8 24V 7 8
control board power cord J5 9 9 24V 8 9
1 VCC Red 1
+ Reagent mixer
009-002415-00 2 PHO White 4
051-001004-00 1
2 GND Black 1 3 GND Black 2
C
1
2 4 GND Black 2
J9 1 2 4 GND Green 3
E 1
C C
3 2
3 3 4
J31 1 24V Red 3
6
5 VCC Red
PHO White
1
4
+ Reagent mixer
4 5 24V Red 4
J5 5 6 7 GND Black 2
C
4
5 7 8 8 GND Green 3 E 2
2# five-probe/mixer
9 VCC Red 1
+ Reagent mixer
11 12 11 GND Black 2 -rotation speed sensor
conversion board 12 GND Green 3
Mixer optical coupler cable

E 3
PCBA: 051-000210-00 R21 level sense cable

009-002434-00

PCB: 050-000170-00 009-002449-00
1 GND Black 1
009-002368-00
1
1
2 RAM_V_PHO Blue 2
1 GND Black 1 2
J2
2
2 RAM Blue 3 3 3 LEVEL Green 3
3
1 2 3 LLS Green 2 1 2 4 Reagent level sense board
4 +12V Red 4
4 12V Red 4
4
3 4 3 4 5 PCBA: 051-001005-00
5 NC 5
J2 5 6 6 RXD White 6 5 6 6 PCB: 050-000829-00
7 NC 7 7 6 Txd White 1
B
1
B 7 8 8 TXD Brown 8 7 8 7 Rxd Brown 3
8
2
J3
9 10 9 NC 9 9 10
9 9 Shield
3
10 SGND Black 10
R2 control J1 J12
drive board R22 level sense cable R22 level sense cable
009-002369-00
051-001018-00 1
009-002450-00
1 GND Black 1 1 GND Black 1
J2 2
1
2 RAM Blue 3 2 RAM_V_PHO Blue 2
J2
3 LLS Green 2 3
2
1 2 4 12V Red 4 1 2 4 3 LEVEL Green 3
3
3 4 5 NC 5 3 4 5 4 +12V Red 4 Reagent level sense board
J3 6 RXD White 6
4
5 6 5 6 6 PCBA: 051-001005-00
7 NC 7
8 TXD Brown 8 7 PCB: 050-000829-00
7 8 7 8 6 Txd White 1
9 NC 9 8
1
9 10 9 10 7 Rxd Brown 3
10 SGND Black 10 9
2
J3
9 Shield
3
A
J11
MINDRAY A
TITLE: Five-probe/mixer conversion board

File Bytes
Date Time
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET18 OF 18 SIZE A3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-156
4.9 Wiring Diagram of Rack Feeder System
4-157
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RE APPR
ECN DESCRIPTION DRAW CHECHK
V DATE
(AC input) (SDM)
D 0# 0#
(24V) D
Interconnection (5V)
24V6A board conversion board
24V6A PSB CADB-LCB
1#
1# 1# Track control drive board (Front track 1)
(AC) 24V6A (24V) Interconnection 22pin
CADB-TRACK
24V6A PSB MCB-LCB
2#
24V6A 2#
2#
board Interconnection 22pin Track control drive board (Front track 2)
24V6A PSB conversion board
Rack feeder CADB-TRACK
16pin MCB-LCB
Main control
system control 16pin
C board 16pin C
drive board
MCB 16pin
3#
SDM-CADB
3# Interconnection 22pin 3#
24V6A
conversion board Track control drive board (Front track 3)
16pin MCB-LCB
board CADB-TRACK
24V6A PSB
Rack feeder system 4# 4#
communication conversion board 24V6A Interconnection 22pin
CCB board conversion board
24V6A PSB MCB-LCB 4#
Track control drive board (Front track 4)
CADB-TRACK
(AC) Ethernet switch Analyzer 1
B B
(reserved)
Network interface Analyzer 2
PC conversion board
ETH-CCB Signal cable
Analyzer 3 Power cord
Power supply & signal
Analyzer 4 cable
APPROVALS DATE
(AC)
DESIGN MINDRAY
CHECK
A TITLE A
Rack feeder system
CHECK
File Bytes CHECK
DWG NO. BS2000 rack feeder
CONFIDENTIAL DISCLOSURE: This set of drawing(s) and all it's intellectual property rights (including copyright) subsisting
herein are property of Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co.,Ltd. No use, copies or reproductions should be made of this REV 1.0
Date Time drawing or any part(s) thereof for whatever purpose nor shall any information, data, calculations, or other contents contained in R&D system
this drawing be disseminated without prior written permission of Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co.,Ltd.
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 CHIEF ENG. SHEET 1 OF 10 SIZE A3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-158
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L phase wiring terminal

D
DK16H DK16H D
Framework Switch power supply
Terminal earthing wire 0 Main power switch 24V6A board
Main power supply input output wire input wire Power supply input wire 0
Framework of rack 1 1'
wire (yellow green) L Brown 1 L Brown
feeder system L Brown 1 J1
E Yellow green Yellow green Enclosure
2 2' N Blue 2 Switch 0#
1 1'
Air grounded 3 3' Enclosure E Yellow green 0000-10-10931 2 24V6A
L Brown 3
switch grounded N Blue
3 board
N Blue Main power switch
on wall
1(LINE) 1(LOAD) 24V6A board
1 1'
Power supply input wire 1
2 2'
2(LINE) 2(LOAD) Wiring terminal L Brown J1
Main power switch N phase wiring terminal UT4-TWIN
1 1#
Wiring terminal input wire DK16H 2 24V6A
N Blue
DK16H 1 1' 1" 3 board
1 1'
N Blue 24V6A board
2 2' 2"
2 2' Sub power switch 0 Power supply
(Rack feeder system) Sub power switch output input wire 2
3 3'
L Brown
wire 0
L Brown L Brown 1 J1
C 1(LINE) 1(LOAD) 2# C
N Blue 2(LINE) 2(LOAD) N Blue 2 24V6A
N Blue
Sub power switch input 3 board
wire 0
1 1' 1" 24V6A board
Power supply
2 2' 2" input wire 3
L Brown
1 J1
3#
Wiring terminal 2 24V6A
Framework earthing wire 1 Sub power switch input Sub power switch 1
Framework of rack Enclosure Yellow green Enclosure Framework of wire 1 (Analyzer 1) Sub power switch output DK16H N Blue
3 board
feeder system grounded grounded analyzer 1 L Brown 1(LINE) 1(LOAD) wire 1 L Brown
1 1' 24V6A board
N Blue 2(LINE) 2(LOAD) N Blue Power supply
2 2'
Framework earthing wire 2 input wire 4
L Brown 1 J1
Framework of Enclosure Yellow green Enclosure Framework of Sub power switch input Sub power switch 2 4#
analyzer 1 grounded grounded analyzer 2 wire 2 (Analyzer 2) Sub power switch output 2 24V6A
To analyzers
L Brown 1(LINE) 1(LOAD) wire 2 L Brown
1 1' N Blue 3 board
B Framework earthing wire 3 N Blue 2(LINE) 2(LOAD) N Blue B
2 2'
Framework of Enclosure Yellow green Enclosure Framework of
analyzer 2 grounded grounded analyzer 3
Sub power switch input Sub power switch 3
wire 3 (Analyzer 3) Sub power switch output
Framework earthing wire 4
1 1'
Framework of Enclosure Yellow green Enclosure Framework of N Blue 2(LINE) 2(LOAD) N Blue
grounded grounded analyzer 4 2 2'
analyzer 3
Sub power switch input Sub power switch 4

wire 4 (Analyzer 4) Sub power switch output
1 1'
N Blue 2(LINE) 2(LOAD) N Blue
2 2'
A
MINDRAY A
TITLE: Power supply wiring diagram

File Bytes
BS2000 rack feeder
DWG NO. REV 1.0
Date Time system

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-159
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J1
Main control board power cord 1 4
24V6A board 1 Yellow 5V 3 2 5 Main control
Power supply input wire 0 J1 1 Red 24V 1
D
1 2 Black GND 3
1 3
J2
J6 1 2 2 Black GND 6 3 6 board
L Brown 1 1 2 D
0# 2 24V6A board
4
2 4
2 Power supply 0#
24V6A board J2 output wire 0
J3
1 Red 24V 4
N Blue 2
3 Control drive board 1 3 2 Yellow 5V 2 1 6
Interconnection 2 4
3 Black GND 8
2 7
conversion board 4 Black GND 9
3
SDM control
SDM control drive 8
board power cord drive board
4 9
Black GND
5 10
Yellow 5V
J1
24V6A board
2
1
Power supply input wire 1
J1 1 1 Red 24V 1 1 3 J6 1 2
L Brown 1 2 Black GND 3 J2
1
1# 2 24V6A board 2 4
2
24V6A board J2 Power supply 1# J3
Wiring terminal N Blue 2
3
output wire 1
Main control board 1 3
C C
UT4-TWIN Interconnection 2 4
conversion board
1 Yellow 2
2 Black 4
1 1' 1"
5V wire 1
2 2' 2"
24V6A board
L Brown
Power supply input wire 2 J1 1 1 Red 24V 1
L Brown 1 2 Black GND 3 1 3 J6 1 2
1 J2
N Blue 2# 2 24V6A board
2 4
2 Power supply
N Blue 2
24V6A board J2 output wire 2 2# J3
3
1 1' 1" Main control board 1 3
2 2' 2"
Interconnection 2 4
conversion board
1 Yellow 2
2 Black 4
5V wire 2
B 24V6A board B
L Brown 1 2 Black GND 3 1 3 J6 1 2
1 J2
3# 2 24V6A board 2 4
2 Power supply
24V6A board J2
output wire 3 3# J3
N Blue 2
3
Main control board 1 3
Interconnection 2 4
conversion board
1 Yellow 2
2 Black 4
5V wire 3
24V6A board
L Brown 1 1 3 J6 1 2
1 2 Black GND 3 J2
4# 2
MINDRAY
24V6A board 2 4
2
N Blue 2
24V6A board J2 Power supply
4# J3
output wire 4
3
A Main control board 1 3 A
Interconnection 2 4 TITLE: Power supply board
File Bytes
conversion board
BS2000 rack feeder
DWG NO. REV 1.0
Date Time system

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-160
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1# Main control board 2# Main control board 3# Main control board 4# Main control board
SDM control drive board interconnection conversion board interconnection conversion board interconnection conversion board interconnection conversion board
J4 J5 J4 J5 J4 J5 J4 J5
D 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10 D
30 32 34 35 37 39 12 14 16 12 14 16 12 14 16 12 14 16
J10 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 36 38 40 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
34# analyzer front track

12# analyzer front track
Communication cable for

Communication cable for
Communication cable
10
11
12
2
8
2
14
16
8
6
2
2
3
13
3
3
4
1
4
4
1
4
4
6
2
2
6
2
5
6
5
15
1
1
7
7
5
5
5
3
4
1
4
1
1
6
6
5
5
7
7
8
8
7
7
TXD3+
TXD3+
TXD2+
TXD2+
RXD3-
RXD4-
RXD3-
RXD4-
RXD2-
RXD2-
TXD4+
TXD4+
CTL2
CTL2
TXD2+
CTL3
CTL4
CTL3
CTL4
RST4
RST4
RST2
RXD3+
RXD4+
RST2
RXD3+
RXD4+
RXD2+
RXD2+
RXD1-
RXD1-
RXD2-
RXD1-
TXD3-
TXD4-
TXD3-
TXD4-
TXD1+
TXD1+
TXD1+
CTL2
RST3
RST3
TXD2-
TXD2-
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
CTL1
GND
GND
CTL1
CTL1
RST2
RXD1+
RXD1+
RXD2+
RXD1+
TXD1-
TXD1-
TXD2-
TXD1-
GND
GND
GND
GND
RST1
GND
GND
RST1
RST1
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
15
15
29
17
29
17
13
13
23
31
23
31
21
21
18
18
15
30
30
14
16
13
25
14
16
20
28
25
20
28
12
10
12
10
19
27
19
27
11
11
7
7
22
32
8
22
32
5
5
26
26
24
6
14
16
24
4
1
1
4
12
4
10
3
3
11
9
2
9
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39
J11 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
J3 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
J4
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 36 38 40 1 3 5 7 9 29 31 33 36 38 40 29 31 33 36 38 40
C C
Main control board

J2 J12 J1
2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6
4
5
6
1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5
1
2
3
Yellow 3
6
TX+ Orange white 1
RX+ Green white 3
5 GND Blue white 5

2
Black
6 PWFB Blue 6
Main control
Serial port cable 1
TX- Orange
Rack feeder Rack feeder system
4 RX- Green
board power
Red
system serial Ethernet cable cord
2 GND
Serial port cable 2
To analyzers
2 PC_RXD
3 PC_TXD
1 +5V
port cable
Serial port cable 3
5 GND
serial ports
1 NC
4 NC
Serial port cable 4
B B
2
3
1
1 2 J6
Ethernet cable 1
2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6
To analyzers
Ethernet cable 2 0#
J6
1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 7 9
J1 1 3 5 7 9 1 3 5 network
Ethernet cable 3 Control drive
board
J5 J4 J3 J2 Ethernet cable 4
P1 Network interface conversion board J6 J7
Rack feeder system
communication conversion board (Standard network cable)
interfaces conversion
interconnection
board
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 1 3 5 7 J5
Rack feeder
Whole unit Whole unit system
Whole unit
Ethernet cable Ethernet cable Ethernet cable
serial port
(standard network (standard (standard
cable
MINDRAY
cable) network cable) network cable)
A A
Switch
TITLE: Main control board
File Bytes Serial ports 1-5 Network interface BS2000 rack feeder
PC DWG NO. REV 1.0
Date Time system

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-161
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0#
Yellow 5V 1 1 TXD1- 1
Control drive 12 TXD1+ 12
Black GND 2 1 2 J6 2 RXD1+ 2
24V6A board power board 1 12 13 RXD1- 13
1 12
J2 supply input wire 0 interconnection 3 RST1+ 3

2 13
2 13
0# conversion board
14
4
RST1-
CTL1+
14
4
1 1 Red 24V 1 3 14
D 24V6A 2 Black GND 3
1 3
J2
1 2 3 14 15 CTL1- 15
D
2 3 4 4 15
board 2 2 4 4 15
5 24V 5 1#
4 5 6 J4
5 16 GND 16 5 16
7 8
16 6 24V 6 Track control drive
17 GND 17 6 17
6 17 7 24V 7 board
7 18 18 GND 18 7 18
1 2 8
8 19 19
3 4 8 TXD2- 8
J5 9 19 TXD2+ 19 9 20
20
5 6 9 RXD2+ 9
10 21 20 RXD2- 20 10 21
7 8 10 RST2+ 10
1-2# analyzer front track 11 22 21 RST2- 21 11 22
communication cable 11 CTL2+ 11
J1
J3 1 TXD1- 1
1 3 J2 J1 22 CTL2- 22
2 TXD1+ 2 1 Front track interconnection

3 RXD1+ 3 3 2 4 1# Main cable 1
1
4 RXD1- 4
5 RST1 5 control board
3
6 GND 6
1 3 interconnectio
5
7 CTL1 7 J3
8 GND 8
n conversion
7
2 4
10
9
C 9 TXD2- 1 board C
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
10 TXD2+ 2
11 RXD2+ 3
2 Black GND 4
2
12 RXD2- 4
13 RST2 5
Main
1 Yellow 5V
14 GND 6
15 CTL2 7
control 16 GND 8
5V wire 1
board 17 TXD3- 1 Front track interconnection

18 TXD3+ 2
19 RXD3+ 3 cable 2
20 RXD3- 4 1 2 J6
21 RST3 5 1 TXD1- 1
22 GND 6 12 TXD1+ 12
30 32 34
29 31 33
23 CTL3 7 2 RXD1+ 2
24 GND 8 1 12 13 RXD1- 13
1 12
1 1 3 J2 3 RST1+ 3
3 2 13 14 RST1- 14 2 13
2 4
35 37 39
36 38 40
25 TXD4- 1 4 CTL1+ 4
26 TXD4+ 2
3 15 CTL1- 15 3 14
27 RXD4+ 3
14
28 RXD4- 4
4 15 4 15
29
30
RST4
GND
5
6
5
16
24V
GND
5
16 5 16
2#
1 2 5 16
31
32
CTL4
GND
7
8
6
17
24V
GND
6
17 6 17
Track control drive
3 4 6 17
B
J4
7 24V 7
7 18
board B
5 6 7 18 18 GND 18
7 8 8 19 8 19
8 TXD2- 8
9 19 TXD2+ 19 9 20
20
9 RXD2+ 9
1 2 10 21 20 RXD2- 20 10 21
Power cord 1 for main control board 10 RST2+ 10
interconnection conversion board 3 4 11 22
J2 J5 11 22 21 RST2- 21
1 1 +24V Red 11 CTL2+ 11
1# 2 GND Black
5 6
J1 22 CTL2- 22 J1
7 8
24V6A board 2 2# Main
Power cord 2 for main control board control board
J3 interconnection
interconnection conversion board 1 3
J2 1 +24V Red
1
2# 2 GND Black 2 4 conversion
24V6A board
2 board
2 Black GND 4
2
MINDRAY
1 Yellow 5V
5V wire 2
A A
Interconnection conversion board
TITLE: 1/2
File Bytes 3# Main control board
1 2 J6 BS2000 rack feeder
interconnection DWG NO. system REV 1.0
Date Time
conversion board
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-162
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 TXD1- 1
2# Main control 1 3 2 +5V Yellow 1 1 2 J6 12 TXD1+ 12
1 12
board 4
4 GND Black 2
1 12
2
13
RXD1+
RXD1-
2
13
2
interconnection 5V wire 2 3 RST1+ 3 2 13
2 13 14 RST1- 14
conversion board J3 4 CTL1+ 4 3 14
D 1 2 3 14 15 CTL1- 15 D
4 15
3 4 4 15
5 6 J4 5
16
24V
GND
5
16
5 16 3# Track control
5 16
7 8
6
17
24V
GND
6
17
6 17 drive board
6 17 7 24V 7 7 18
7 18 18 GND 18
3-4# analyzer front track 1 2 8 19
communication cable 8 19
3 4 8 TXD2- 8 9 20
J5 9 20 19 TXD2+ 19
J4 1 TXD1- 1
5 6 9 RXD2+ 9 10 21
10 21 20 RXD2- 20
2 TXD1+ 2 7 8 10 RST2+ 10 11 22
3 RXD1+ 3
11 22 21 RST2- 21
1
4 RXD1- 4 11 CTL2+ 11
5 RST1 5 J1
3
J1 22 CTL2- 22
6 GND 6
5
7 CTL1 7 1 3
1 J2 Front track interconnection
8 GND 8
3# Main
7
3 cable 3
2 4
10
9
9 TXD2- 1 control board

11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
10 TXD2+ 2
11 RXD2+ 3
1 3
interconnection
12 RXD2- 4 J3 conversion
13 RST2 5
C Main 14 GND 6 2 4
board C
15 CTL2 7
control 16 GND 8
2 Black GND 4
board
1 Yellow 5V 2
17 TXD3- 1
18 TXD3+ 2
19 RXD3+ 3
20 RXD3- 4
5V wire 3
21 RST3 5
22 GND 6
30 32 34
29 31 33
23 CTL3 7 Front track interconnection

24 GND 8 cable 4
1 2 J6
1 TXD1- 1
35 37 39
36 38 40
25 TXD4- 1
26 TXD4+ 2 12 TXD1+ 12
27 RXD4+ 3 2 RXD1+ 2 1 12
28 RXD4- 4 1 12 13 RXD1- 13
29 RST4 5 1 1 3 J2 3 RST1+ 3 2 13
30 GND 6 3 2 13 14 RST1- 14
31 CTL4 7 2 4 4 CTL1+ 4 3 14
32 GND 8 3 14 15 CTL1- 15
4 15
4 15
5 24V 5
1 2 5 16 16 GND 16
5 16 4# Track control
6 24V 6
B 3 4 17 17 GND 17
6 17 drive board B
6 7 24V 7
J4 7 18
5 6 7 18 18 GND 18
8 19
7 8 8 19
8 TXD2- 8 9 20
9 20 19 TXD2+ 19
9 RXD2+ 9 10 21
1 2 10 21 20 RXD2- 20
Power cord 3 for main control board 10 RST2+ 10 11 22
interconnection conversion board 3 4
J2 J5 11 22 21 RST2- 21
1 +24V Red 5 6 11 CTL2+ 11 J1
1
3# 2 GND Black 7 8
J1 22 CTL2- 22
2
24V6A board 4# Main
Power cord 4 for main control board
interconnection conversion board control board
J2 Red
1 1 +24V 1 3
J3
interconnection
4# 2 GND Black conversion
2 2 4
24V6A board board
A
MINDRAY
Interconnection conversion board
A
TITLE: 2/2
File Bytes
BS2000 rack feeder
DWG NO. system REV 1.0
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-163
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bar code reader cable

D 1 VCC 1 D
MFR1 motor cable J7 2 RXD 3
1 A+ Red 1 3 TXD 2
MFR1 1
1
2
Supply push-in 2 A- Yellow 2 4 NC NC 5
2
3 2
3
4
motor 4
4 B+ Orange 3 J13 5 GND 4 Sample bar code
5
6
59D1300 5 B- Brown 4 6 CTS 10 module
5
7
8 10
7 RTS 6
MFR2 motor cable 8 TRIG 9
9
MFR2 1 A+ Red 1 9 NC NC 7
1
1
STAT push-back 2 A- Yellow 2 10 Shield
2 J14
3 2
motor 4 B+ Orange 3
4
59D1300 5 B- Brown 4
5
1
1 NO NO
MSM1 motor cable
2
1 A+ Red 1 2 C C Stroke switch
1
1
MSM1
3
3
3 A- Yellow 2
J15 J24
3 2
Scanning push-in motor
4
4 B+ Orange 3
PK244M-01B 4
6 B- Brown 4
5
6
6 7
C MSM2 motor cable C
MSM2 1 1 A+ Red 1
8
1
Scanning push-out 2 A- Yellow 2 Panel key indicator cable
motor
42D2120
2
4
5
4 B+ Orange 3
5 B- Brown 4 3 2
J16
SDM 1 Red NO
Key 1
control drive
4
2 Black C
1
MCC1 motor cable
3
2
1 A+ Red 1 Red NO
1 J23
1
Key 2
board
MCC1 2 A- Yellow 2
3
2 4 Black C
3 2
Rerun buffer 4 B+ Orange 3 J17
4
advance motor 4
5 B- Brown 4 5 Black -
5
59D5300 5
4
Indicator 1
6 7
MCC2 motor cable 6 Red +
MCC2 1 A+ Red 1 7 Black -

1
1
2 A- Yellow 2
8
Rerun buffer retraction 2 J18 Indicator 2
3 2
4 B+ Orange 3 8 Red +
motor
4
59D5300 5 B- Brown 4
5
4
MHC1 motor cable SDM control drive

board power cord 0# Control drive
B
MHC1 1
1 A+ Red 1 J1 B
board
1
Retrieval push-in motor 3 A- Yellow 2

2 1 6
J19 interconnection
3 2
PK244M-01B 4 B+ Orange 3
4 4 Red 24V 1
5
6 B- Brown 4 2 7 conversion board
2 Yellow 5V 2
4
1 3
3 8 8 Black GND 3 J3
MHS1 motor cable
9 Black GND 4 2 4
1 A+ Red 1 4 9
MHS1 1
1
Return push-in motor 2

2 A- Yellow 2 J4 5 10
3 2
59D5300 4
4 B+ Orange 3 J20
9 10
11 12
13 14
2
4
6
8
5 B- Brown 4
5
4
1
3
5
7
5
9
6
4
3
GND Green
GND White
Yellow
GND Black
Purple
Red
MINDRAY
S1
S2
S3
A A
SDM control drive board 1/2
1
TITLE:
2
1
2
File Bytes Type Type Type BS2000 rack feeder

sensor sensor sensor DWG NO. REV 1.0
Date Time system
1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-164
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Optical coupler cable 3 Optical coupler cable 1
1 VCC Red 1 1 VCC Red 1 +
DHS1 + 2 PHO White 4 DSM1.1
4 PHO White 2 C
Home position sensor of
Home position sensor of C
2 GND Black 3 3 GND Black 2 -
return push-in part
-
3 GND Green 4 1 2 4 GND Green 3 E scanning push-in part
E 1 2 5 VCC Red 1
1 VCC Red 5 3 4 + DSM1.2
DHS2 +
4 PHO White 6 6 PHO White 4 C
C 3 4 7 GND Black 2 End position sensor of
Returning position sensor - 2 GND Black 7 5 6 -
of return push-in part 3 GND Green 8 5 6 8 GND Green 3 E scanning push-in part
D E 7 8 9 VCC Red 1 D
1 VCC Red 9 + DSM1.3
7 8 10 PHO White 4
DHC1.1 +
4 PHO White 10 9 10 C
Jam detection sensor of
C 11 GND Black 2 -
Home position sensor of 9 10
retrieval push-in part
-
2
3
GND Black
GND Green
11
12
11 12 J28 12 GND Green 3 E scanning part
E 11 12 13 VCC Red 1
1 VCC Red 13 13 14 14 PHO White 4 + DSM2.1
DHC1.2 + C
C 4 PHO White 141 15 16 13 14 15 GND Black 2 Home position sensor of
Returning position sensor -
- 2 GND Black 5 16 GND Green 3 E scanning push-out part
of retrieval push-in part E 3 GND Green 16 17 18 15 16 17 VCC Red 1
+
1 VCC Red 17 18 PHO White 4 + DSM2.2
DHC1.3 4 PHO White 18 19 20 17 18 C
C 19 GND Black 2 -
End position sensor of
End position sensor of 2 GND Black 19 19 20 20 3
- GND Green E scanning push-out part
retrieval push-in part 3 GND Green 20
E
J12 21 22
21
22
VCC Red
PHO White
1 + FSM1
2 O
Optical coupler cable 4 23 GND Black 3 Entrance sensor of
23 24 -
1 VCC Red 1 scanning area
DFR1.1 +
4 PHO White 2 25 26 25 VCC Red 1
C + FSM2
Home position sensor of 2 GND Black 3 26 PHO White 2 O
- 1 2 27 28 27 GND Black 3 Exit sensor of scanning
supply push-in part E 3 GND Green 4 -
+
1 VCC Red 5 3 4 29 30 area
DFR1.2 4 PHO White 6 29 VCC Red 1
C
Jam detection position sensor- 2 GND Black 7 5 6 31 32 30 PHO White 2 + FSM3
31 O
of supply push-in part E 3 GND Green 8 33 34
GND Black 3 Sample tube detection
7 8 -
1 VCC Red 9 sensor
DFR1.3 + 9 10 35 36 33 VCC Red 1
4 PHO White 10 2 + FHC1
C End position sensor of C
2 GND Black 11 34 PHO White
O C
- 11 12 37 38 35 GND Black 3 Entrance sensor of supply
supply push-in part E 3 GND Green 12 -
1 VCC Red 13 39 40 unit
DFR2.1 + 13 14 37 VCC Red 1
4 PHO White 141 +
C
2 GND Black 5 15 16 41 42 38 PHO White 2 FHC2
STAT push-back part
-
E 3 GND Green 16
J29 43 44
39 GND Black 3
O
- Exit sensor of supply unit
1 VCC Red 17 17 18
DFR2.2 +
4 PHO White 18 45 46 41 VCC Red 1
C 19 20 42 PHO White 2 + FHS1
Jam detection position sensor- 2 GND Black 19 O
47 48 43 GND Black 3 To-be-full sensor of supply
SDM control drive
of STAT push-back part E 3 GND Green 20 21 22 -
1 VCC Red 21 49 50 unit
FFR1 + 23 24 45 VCC Red 1
O
2 PHO White 22 46 PHO White 2 +
Retrieval rack proximity 3 GND Black 23 25 26 O FHS2
board
- 47 GND Black 3
sensor - Full sensor of supply unit
1 VCC Red 25 27 28
FFR2 +
O 2 PHO White 26 Optical coupler cable 2
Proximity sensor of supply 3 29 30
- GND Black 27 1 VCC Red 1
+ FCC1
push-in part 2 PHO White 2 O
3 GND Black 3 -
Rack sensor of returning
position
1 2 5 VCC Red 1
1 2 1 TXD1- 1 1 2 6 PHO White 2 FCC2
3 4 2 TXD1+ 2 3 4 3 4 7 GND Black 3 Rack sensor of passing + 1
3 RXD1+ 3 position
5 6 4 RXD1- 4 5 6 5 6 9 VCC Red 1
B 7 8 5 RST1 5 2 + FCC3 B
7 8 7 8 10 PHO White
O
6 GND 6 11 GND Black 3 Rack sensor of passing + 2
9 10 7 CTL1 7 9 10 -
J11 11 12 8 GND 8 9 10
13 VCC Red 1
position
9 TXD2- 9 11 12 11 12 + FCC4
13 14 14 PHO White 2 O
10 TXD2+ 10 13 14 15 GND Black 3 Rack sensor of retrieval
-
15 16 11 RXD2+ 11 J10 J11 13 14
position
Main control
12 RXD2- 12 15 16 15 16 17 VCC Red 1
17 18 13 RST2 13 + FCC5
17 18 18 PHO White 2
19 20 14 GND 14 17 18 19 GND Black 3
O
Entrance sensor of passing
15 CTL2 15 -
board 21 22
23 24
16 GND 16
19 20
21 22
19 20
21 22
21
22
VCC Red
PHO White
1
2 +
O
FCC6
lane
25 26 Communication cable 23 24 23 GND Black 3 -

Entrance sensor of return
23 24 lane
27 28 25 26 25 VCC Red 1
25 26 26 PHO White 2 + FCC7
29 30 27 28 O
27 28 27 GND Black 3 -
Entrance sensor of normal
31 32 lane
29 30 29 30
33 34 29 VCC Red 1
+ DCC1
31 32 30 PHO White 4
31 32
MINDRAY
35 36 C
31 GND Black 2 - Rerun buffer sensor for
33 34 33 34 32 GND Green 3
37 38 E retrieval channel
35 36 33 VCC Red 1
A 39 40 35 36 34 PHO White 4 + DCC2 A
C
37 38 37 38 35 GND Black 2 Rerun buffer sensor for
39 40
36 GND Green 3
-
E passing lane TITLE: SDM control drive board 2/2
39 40 37 VCC Red 1
File Bytes 38 PHO White 4 + DCC3
39 GND Black 2 C
Rerun buffer sensor for BS2000 rack feeder
40
- DWG NO. REV 1.0
Date Time
GND Green 3 E return lane system

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-165
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D D
MCG1 motor cable
MCS1 motor cable
1 A+ Red 1
MCG1 1
1
3 A- Yellow 2 1 A+ Red 1 MCS1
1
1
Right caterpillar motor of 3
3 2
Right caterpillar motor of
normal lane 4 B+ Orange 3 J13 J19
2 A- Yellow 3
3
2 3
4 passing lane
59D1300 6 B- Brown 4 3 B+ Orange 4
6 4 59D1300
4
4 B- Brown 6 6
4
MCG5 motor cable
MCS3 motor cable
MCG5 1 A+ Red 1 MCS3
1
1 1 A+ Red 1
2 A- Yellow 2 1
1
Aspirate positioning motor of Aspirate positioning
J14
3 2
2 2 A- Yellow 2
normal lane 4 B+ Orange 3 2 motor of passing lane
2 3
4 3 B+ Orange 4
42D2120
5
5 B- Brown 4 J20 4 42D2120
4
4 B- Brown 5 5
4
MCG3 motor cable
1 A+ Red 1 MFH1 motor cable
MCG3 1
1
3 A- Yellow 2 1 A+ Red 1
Buffer 2 stopper motor of
1
3 J15 1 MFH1
3 2
normal lane 4 B+ Orange 3 2 A- Yellow 3
Right caterpillar motor of
2 3
4 3
42D1100
6
6 B- Brown 4 J5 3 B+ Orange 4
return lane
4
4
4 B- Brown 6 59D1300
6
4
C MCG4 motor cable C
MCG4 1 1
A+ Red 1 MBG1 motor cable
1
Buffer 1 stopper motor of 3 A- Yellow 2 1 A+ Red 2
2 MBG1
1
3
J16
3 2
normal lane 4 B+ Orange 3 2 A- Yellow 3 Lane change motor
4 J6 3
Track control
2 3
42D1100 6 B- Brown 4 3 B+ Orange 4 PK244M-01B
6 4
4
4 B- Brown 5 5
4
drive board
MCG6 motor cable
MFH3 motor cable
1
MCG6 1 A+ Red 1
1
1
3 A- Yellow 2 1 A+ Red 1 1 MFH3
3 2
Post-aspiration stopper 3 J17 J7 Return push-out motor
2 3
motor of normal lane 4 B+ Orange 3 2 A- Yellow 2 2
4 42D2120
42D1100 6 B- Brown 4 3 B+ Orange 4 4
4
6
4 B- Brown 5 5
4
MCG2 motor cable
1 A+ Red 1 MCS2 motor cable
1
MCG2 1
3 A- Yellow 2 1 A+ Red 1 1 MCS2
1
Left caterpillar motor of J18
3 2
3 2 A- Yellow 3 Left caterpillar motor of

normal lane 4 B+ Orange 3 3
2 3
59D1300
4
6 B- Brown 4
J8 3 B+ Orange 4 4
passing lane
6
4
59D1300
4 B- Brown 6 6
4
B MFH2 motor cable B
1 A+ Red 1
1
1 MFH2
2 A- Yellow 3
2 3
3 Left caterpillar motor of
3 B+ Orange 4
J9 4 return lane
4 B- Brown 6 59D1300
6
4
MBG2 motor cable
1 A+ Red 1
1
1
2 A- Yellow 3 MBG2
3
2 3
J10 3 B+ Orange 4
4
Lane change stopper motor
4 B- Brown 6 39D0009
6
4
A
MINDRAY A
Normal unit control drive board
TITLE: 1/2
File Bytes
BS2000 rack feeder
DWG NO. REV 1.0
Date Time system
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-166
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Optical coupler cable 2 of non-

Optical coupler cable 3 of
normal unit control drive board
normal unit control drive board 1 VCC Red 1 + DCS1.1
1 VCC Red 1 2 PHO White 4 C
FCG5 +
2 PHO White 2 1 2 3 GND Black 2 - Aspirate positioning home
O
Left entrance sensor of normal - 3 GND Black 3 1 2 4 GND Green 3 Eposition sensor of passing lane
3 4
lane 5 VCC Red 1
1 VCC Red 5 3 4 5 6 6 PHO White 4 + DCS1.2
D DCG4.1 + C
D
6 7 2 - Aspirate positioning yardstick
4 PHO White GND Black
C 5 6 7 8
Home position sensor of post- - 2 GND Black 7 8 GND Green 3 E sensor of passing lane
aspiration stopper station E 3 GND Green 8 7 8
9 10 9 VCC Red 1
1 VCC Red 9 9 10 10 PHO White 4
+ DFH1.1
DCG4.2 +
C
4 PHO White 10 J21 11 12 11 GND Black 2
C
End position sensor of post- 2 GND Black 11 11 12 -
-
13 14 12 GND Green 3 E return push-out part
aspiration stopper station E 3 GND Green 12 13 VCC Red 1
13 14 +
+ 1 VCC Red 13 15 16 14 PHO White 4 DFH1.2
FCG3 O 2 PHO White 14 15 16 15 GND Black 2
C
End position sensor of
-
Aspiration positioning sensor - 3 GND Black 15 17 18 16 GND Green 3 E return push-out part
17 18
of normal lane 19 20
1 VCC Red 17 19 20 17 VCC Red 1
FCG4 +
O 2 PHO White 18 J12 21 22 18 PHO White 4
+
C
DBG1
Exit sensor of post-aspiration - 3 GND Black 19 19 GND Black 2 - Lane change sensor for
stopper station 23 24 20 GND Green 3 E passing lane
25 26 21 VCC Red 1
+ DBG2
22 PHO White 4 C
27 28 23 GND Black 2 - Lane change sensor for
24 GND Green 3 E normal lane
1 2 29 30
25 VCC Red 1
1 VCC Red 1 3 4 31 32 26 PHO White 4
+ DBG3
+ C
FCS3 2 PHO White 2 27 GND Black 2 Lane change sensor for
Left exit sensor of passing
O 5 6 33 34 -
- 3 GND Black 3 28 GND Green 3 E return lane
lane 7 8 35 36 29 VCC Red 1
+ DBG4
C 1 VCC Red 5 30 PHO White 4 C C
FBG1 + 9 10 37 38 31 GND Black 2 Restoring sensor of return
O
Lane change area proximity -
2
3
PHO White 6 J22 32 GND Green 3
-
lane
GND Black 7 11 12 39 40 E
sensor 33 VCC Red 1 +
13 14 41 42 34 PHO White 2 FFH1
+ 1 VCC Red 9 O
FFH3 2 10 35 GND Black 3 Right exit sensor of return
O PHO White 15 16 43 44 -
Left exit sensor of return - 3 GND Black 11 lane
lane 17 18 45 46 37 VCC Red 1 + FFH2
1 VCC Red 13 38 PHO White 2 O
19 20 47 48 39 3 Right entrance sensor of
Track control drive
DBG5.1 + GND Black
C 4 PHO White 14 -
Home position sensor of - 2 GND Black 15 21 22 49 50 return lane
lane change stopper station E 3 GND Green 16 41 VCC Red
+ FCS1
1 VCC Red 17 23 24 42 PHO White
board
O
DBG5.2 +
4 PHO White 18 43 GND Black
-
Aspirate positioning sensor
C
End position sensor of lane - 2 GND Black 19 25 26 of passing lane
change stopper station E 3 GND Green 20 27 28 45 VCC Red 1
+ FCS2
46 PHO White 2 O
29 30 47 GND Black 3 -
Right exit sensor of passing
lane
Optical coupler cable 2 of

normal unit control drive board
1 TXD1- 1 1 VCC Red 1 +
12 TXD1+ 12 1 2 2 PHO White 2 O FCG2
2 RXD1+ 2 3 GND Black 3 - B
B 1 12 13 RXD1- 13 1 12 3 4 Buffer 2 exit sensor
3 RST1+ 3 5 VCC Red 1
2 13 14 RST1- 14 2 13 5 6 6 PHO White 2
+
O FCG1
4 CTL1+ 4
7 8 7 GND Black 3 -
3 14 15 CTL1- 15 3 14 Buffer 1 exit sensor
9 10
4 15 4 15 9 VCC Red 1 + DCG3.1
5 24V 5 11 12
Main control board 5 16 10 4
PHO White
16 GND 16 C Aspirate positioning home
5 16 13 14 11 GND Black 2 -
6 24V 6
J11 12 GND Green 3 E
position sensor of normal
17 GND 17 lane
interconnection conversion
6 17
7 18
7
18
24V
GND
7
18
6
7
17
18
15 16
17 18
13
14
VCC Red
PHO White
1
4
+
C
DCG3.2
15 GND Black 2
board
- yardstick sensor of normal
8 19 8 19 19 20 16 GND Green 3 E
8 TXD2- 8 lane
19 TXD2+ 19 17 VCC Red 1
9 20 9 20 21 22 18 PHO White 4
+ DCG2.1
9 RXD2+ 9 C
10 10 23 24 19 GND Black 2 Buffer 2 stopper home
21 20 RXD2- 20 21 -
10 RST2+ 10 20 GND Green 3 E position sensor
11 22 21 RST2- 21 11 22 25 26 21 VCC Red 1
+ DCG2.2
11 CTL2+ 11 22 PHO White 4
C
Buffer 2 stopper end
J1
MINDRAY
22 CTL2- 22
J1 29 30 24 GND Green 3
-
E position sensor
Front track interconnection
cable X 31 32 25 VCC Red 1
A 26 PHO White 4
+ DCG1.1 A
33 34
27 GND Black 2
C
Buffer 1 stopper home Normal unit control drive board
-
position sensor TITLE:
29 VCC Red 1
E
2/2
File Bytes 37 38 + DCG1.2
30 PHO White 4 C BS2000 rack feeder
39 40 31 GND Black 2 - Buffer 1 stopper end DWG NO. REV 1.0
Date Time
32 GND Green 3 E position sensor system

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4-167
4-168
5 Mechanics
5-1
5.1 Shells Assembly
5.1.1 Module Functions and Compositions

The shells assembly indicates the apparent structure of the whole analyzer designed
for protecting the internal assemblies. The shell is used as an interface of each
module which is also a representation of industrial design.
The BS-2000M1 shells assembly is composed of one chemistry analyzer shells
assembly and one SDM shells assembly.
Figure 5.1 Shells assembly
Analyzer shells assembly SDM shells assembly
5-2
5.1.2 Locations and FRU Details
Figure 5.2 FRU material layout 1
5-3
17
5-4
Table 5.1 FRU details

No. FRU code and Material name Remark
material code
115-013548-00 Shielding cover hinge assembly
5-5
material code
115-014024-00 Shielding cover assembly (M1)
115-005544-00 Lock catch assembly
115-014244-00 Small sample carousel cover
assembly
115-014245-00 Reaction carousel cover assembly
115-014284-00 Cuvette wash position protective
cover assembly
115-014243-00 Outer sample carousel cover
assembly
033-000210-00 Air spring, YQ8/18-60-206 B-B
350N
801-BA80-00218-00 Air spring (FRU)
043-002162-00 Left transparent cover
043-002205-00 Right transparent cover
801-BA80-00120-00 Buffer cushion (FRU)
042-006420-00 Right panel (M1)
042-006366-00 Left front door
042-006352-00 Right front door
042-006472-00 Front panel (BS-2000M)
042-007327-00 Front panel (BS-2200M)
115-014238-00 Reagent carousel 1 front cover
assembly
115-014239-00 Reagent carousel 1 back cover
assembly
115-014240-00 Reagent carousel 2 back cover
assembly
115-014282-00 Lower left panel assembly
115-014283-00 Lower right panel assembly
042-006370-00 Back shielding cover
042-006347-00 Upper right hinge
042-006351-00 Lower right hinge
042-006362-00 Upper left hinge
042-006364-00 Lower left hinge
042-006346-00 Right front column cover
042-006361-00 Left front column cover
042-006417-00 Left panel
042-006411-00 Right rear panel
043-002185-00 Upper left panel
043-002186-00 Middle left panel
5-6
material code
043-002189-00 Middle upper panel
043-002190-00 Upper right panel
042-006955-00 SDM front panel assembly
042-006958-00 SDM side panel
042-006951-00 SDM front panel
042-007159-00 SDM right panel weldment
042-006981-00 SDM rear panel assembly
042-006947-00 SDM rear panel
042-002124-01 SDM left panel
115-008782-00 Supply unit cover
043-000708-01 Buffer unit cover
043-000706-01 Storage unit cover
043-000707-00 Scanning area cover
115-014287-00 ISE module cover (when ISE
module is installed)
042-006358-00 Left front column
042-007137-00 Right front column
042-006412-00 Middle rear panel weldment
115-014281-00 Rear left panel weldment
assembly
5.1.3 Removing and Reinstalling Shielding Cover Assembly (M1)

and Back Shielding Cover
When to do
Replace the shielding cover assembly (M1) and back shielding cover when they are
damaged.
Tools
Cross screwdriver, flathead screwdriver, M8 solid wrench or adjustable wrench.
Steps
1 Switch off the main power of the analyzer to ensure all moving assemblies are
not in working status.
2 Open the shielding cover and use a flathead screw driver to push outward the
circlip on the air spring head to a position where it can not drop.
3 Hold the shielding cover and remove the two air springs. (Note: The shielding
cover is so big that two people are needed to cooperate. )
5-7
4 Remove the 3 M4*10 screws on the hinge of the shielding cover. Raise the
shielding cover to make the hinge loose from the supporter and then remove the
shielding cover.
5 To reinstall the shielding cover, follow the steps mentioned above in a reversed
order.
Alignment and confirmation

You need to adjust the hinges to ensure that the two covers have been reinstalled in a
proper position.
5.1.4 Removing and Reinstalling Left Panel

When to do
When the PCBs and the assemblies close to the two side panels require maintenance
or reparation, disassemble and reinstall the left panel.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
Steps
1 Unscrew the six M48 combination screws on the panel.
2 Hold the upper rim of the panel, pull it outwards and lift it slightly, and then
remove it.
3 To reinstall the left panel, follow the steps mentioned above in a reversed order.

N/A
5.1.5 Removing and Reinstalling Track Panel

When to do
When the PCBs of the front track or the rack transfer assembly requires
maintenance and reparation, remove and reinstall the track panel, which varies with
different instrument configurations but is basically the same for removing and
reinstalling methods.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
5-8
Removing and reinstallation illustration figure
Figure 5.8 Removing and reinstallation illustration figure 1 of track panel
M48 cross pan head screw (5)
Track panel
Track panel mounting

plate
Figure 5.9 Removing and reinstallation illustration figure 2 of track panel
M48 cross pan head screw
Steps
1 Remove the left and right transparent covers on the track panel, loosen the five
M4*8 screws on the track panel mounting plate, and then remove the mounting
plate.
2 Remove the four M4*8 screws on the track panel.
3 Hold the track panel and remove it right ahead of the instrument.
4 To reinstall the track panel, follow the steps mentioned above in a reversed
5-9
order.

When reinstalling the track panel, make sure it contacts the left panel tightly. If the
clearance is too large, hold the front lower rim of the track panel and lift it slightly
until the two contact tightly, and then screw tight the screws on the left side of the
track panel.
5.1.6 Removing and Reinstalling Reagent Carousel Back Cover

Assembly
When to do
The reagent carousel cover assembly should be removed if the reagent carousel is to
be replaced or the reagent carousel back cover assembly is damaged and needs
replacement.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
Steps
1 Rotate the handle of the small cover and then remove the reagent carousel front
cover assembly.
2 Remove the panels pressing the reagent carousel back cover assembly, and
loosen the 6 screws on it. (Pay attention to the screw positions.)
3 Remove the reagent carousel back cover assembly.

Since the screw holes between the reagent carousel back cover assembly and the
reagent chamber are long, note the screw positions during installation, and try to
install the screws to the original positions to ensure the accuracy of the aspiration
port. If needed, align the aspirate position of the reagent probes.
5.1.7 Replacement of Air Spring

When to do
The air spring should be replaced if it loses elasticity or fails.
Tools
Flathead screwdriver
Steps
1 Open the shielding cover and push outward the cir clips on both heads of the
air spring with a flathead screwdriver to the position that it cannot be dropped.
2 Hold the air spring and pull it out.
5-10
3 Install a new air spring.

N/A
5.1.8 Replacement of Left/Right Front Doors and Hinges

When to do
When seriously deformed by abnormal external force, the left and right front doors
and hinges should be replaced.
Tools
Hexagon wrench
Steps
1 Open the left and right front doors and loosen the 6 M516 hexagon socket cap
head screws on the upper and lower hinges. (Two people are needed, with one
holding the front doors.)
2 Remove the front door or hinge that needs replacement.
3 Install the new front door or hinge as well as the 6 hexagon socket cap head
screws.

After installation:
Check if the gap between the left and right front doors is between 2-5mm and
even vertically; otherwise, adjust the left and right columns till the gap meets
requirement.
Check if the gap between the left front door and the left panel is even; otherwise,
adjust the upper and left hinges of the left front door till the gap meets requirement.
5.1.9 Replacement of Left/Right Columns and Covers

When to do
When seriously deformed by abnormal external force, the left and right columns and
covers should be replaced.
Tools
Hexagon wrench and cross screwdriver
5-11
Removing and reinstallation illustration figure
Figure 5.10 Sketch 1 of front column
M48 cross pan head screw
Upper
M516 hexagon socket cap head screw (9X)
Front
door
Lower
hinge
Figure 5.11 Sketch 2 of front column
M36 cross pan head screw with washer
Front column
Front
column
Steps
1 Open the left and right front doors and loosen the 6 M516 hexagon socket cap
head screws on the upper and lower hinges. (Two people are needed, with one
holding the front doors.)
2 Remove the front doors and the upper and lower hinges.
5-12
3 Loosen the 3 M516 hexagon socket cap head screws and 1 M48 cross pan
head screw that fix the front columns on the instrument framework. (Refer to
sketch 1.)
4 Remove the front columns, and loosen the 3 M36 cross pan head screws on
the column cover. (Refer to sketch 2.)
5 Install the new front columns or column covers by following the steps
mentioned above in a reversed order.

After installation:
Check if the gap between the left and right front doors is between 2-5mm and
even vertically; otherwise, adjust the left and right columns till the gap meets
requirement.
Check if the gap between the left front door and the left panel is even; otherwise,
adjust the upper and left hinges of the left front door till the gap meets requirement.
5.1.10 Replacement of Lock Catch

When to do
The lock catch should be replaced if it is damaged.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
Steps
1 Unscrew the 2 M48 screws to remove the lock catch assembly.
2 Unscrew the M38 retaining screws on the lock catch to remove it.
3 Install a new lock catch.
4 Install the new lock catch assembly to the original position.

N/A
5.1.11 Removing and Reinstalling SDM Front and Rear Panels

When to do
When the internal assemblies in the SDM front and rear panel need to be repaired
and maintained, the front and rear panel should be removed.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
5-13
Steps
1 Remove the transparent cover of the bar code scanning area.
2 Remove the screws on the SDM front panel and the scanning push-in part
bracket.
3 Open the transparent cover to the maximum extent, loosen the 4 screws on the
SDM right panel (two on the side and two at the bottom), and then remove the
right panel of the SDM.
4 Remove the screw connecting the front panel and right panel bracket; remove
the four screws (at the bottom of the front panel) connecting the front panel
and the framework; hold the front panel and remove it right ahead of the SDM.
5 Remove the screw connecting the SDM rear panel and right panel bracket;
remove other screws on the rear panel (two at the bottom and three in the back);
hold the rear panel and remove it right behind of the SDM.
6 When reinstalling the panels, please follow the steps mentioned above in a
reversed order.

N/A
5.1.12 Removing and Reinstalling SDM Side Panel and Front

Panel Assembly
When to do
When internal components of the SDM need to be repaired, remove the side panel
and front panel assembly.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
Steps
1 Remove the 4 screws on the right panel of the SDM.
2 Hold the side panel and lift it slightly until the 2 auxiliary assembling hooks slide
out of the slot, and then remove the side panel by pulling it outwards.
3 Remove the 2 screws on front panel assembly of the SDM.
4 Hold the front panel assembly and lift it slightly until the 2 auxiliary assembling
hooks slide out of the slot, and then remove the front panel assembly by pulling
it outwards.
5-14
5 When reinstalling the panels, please follow the steps mentioned above in a
reversed order.

N/A
5-15
5.2 Reaction Carousel Assembly
5.2.1 Module Functions

The reaction carousel assembly is situated in the middle rear part of the analyzer, and
consists of the reaction carousel assembly, reaction carousel drive assembly, and
constant temperature bath. It completes various actions, such as holding reaction
cuvettes and carrying them to specified position, adding sample/reagent to cuvettes,
cooperating with probes and mixers to add/stir sample/reagent and wash cuvettes
for 8 phases, and providing constant temperature bath assembly for sample/reagent
reaction.

Figure 5.12 Location of reaction carousel assembly
2 (Glass cuvette)
3 (Reaction carousel temperature sensor)
No. FRU code and material Material name Remark

code
1 801-BA80-00054-00 Metal plate for
cuvette
2 081-000085-00 Glass cuvette
5-16
code
3 009-002443-00 Reaction carousel
temperature sensor
cable
4 009-000742-00 Reaction carousel
BA30-10-06632 temperature switch
patch cord +
Thermal Guard 60C
2 Lead 15.6mm
5 024-000379-00 Heater, silicone
220V 500W
6 024-000378-00 Heater, silicone
110V 500W
7 115-014256-00 High-speed motor
assembly
8 009-002204-00 Optical coupler (S)
9 009-002206-00 Optical coupler (L)
Note:
1. For the replacement methods of glass cuvette, please refer to the descriptions of
optical assembly in this manual.
5.2.3 Replacement of Constant Temperature Bath Cables

When to do
When failing, the temperature sensor cable, temperature protection switch and heater
of the reaction carousel should be replaced.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cross screwdriver / 1
Hexagon wrench / 1
Medical rubber / 1 pair
gloves
1. Exploded view of reaction carousel temperature sensor cable and

protection switch
5-17
Figure 5.13 Exploded view of reaction carousel temperature sensor cable and
protection switch
Reaction carousel
temperature sensor Temperature
009-002443-00 bath
Temperature sensor
plate
Cross combination
screw M3x8
Temperature
controller
protective cover
Reaction carousel
temperature switch
009-000742-00
Thermal Guard 60C
2Lead15.6mm Cross pan head screw
BA30-10-06632 M3x6
Replacement procedure of reaction carousel temperature sensor cable

1 Switch off the main power of the analyzer.
2 Loosen the 6 M48 cross pan head combination screws on the middle rear
panel, and then remove the middle rear panel.
3 Unplug the temperature sensor cable connector, use a cross screwdriver to

loosen the 2 M38 cross pan head screws on the sensor plate, and then remove
the sensor plate.
4 Daub some heat-conducting glue on the new temperature sensor cable

connector and the installation hole on the constant temperature bath, and insert
the temperature sensor into the installation hole. Write down the serial number
and corresponding parameters of the sensor for query during alignment.
5 Use 2 M38 cross pan head screws to fix the sensor plate and insert the other
end of the sensor cable.
6 For parameter configuration and heat insulation test after the replacement, refer
to Chapter 7 Pyrology in this manual.
Replacement procedure of reaction carousel temperature protection switch

2 Loosen the 6 M48 cross pan head combination screws on the middle rear
panel, and then remove the middle rear panel.
3 Loosen the 2 M38 cross pan head screws on the thermostat protective cover,
5-18
and remove the protective cover.
4 Unplug the temperature protection switch cable connector, use a cross

screwdriver to loosen the 2 M36 cross pan head screws on the switch, and then
remove the switch.
5 Daub some heat-conducting glue on the induction side of the new protection
switch (with patch cord) and the mounting surface, attach the induction side
closely to the mounting surface, and fix them with 2 M36 cross pan head
screws.
6 Use a cross screwdriver to tighten the 2 M38 cross pan head screws on the
thermostat protective cover. Insert the other end of the protection switch's
patch cord.
2. Exploded view of constant temperature bath heater

Figure 5.14 Exploded view of constant temperature bath heater
The 8 M410 screws have
Hexagon socket been coated with sealing glue
cap head screw and cannot be removed.
M5x16
Stainless steel Skylight cover
hexagon socket
Reaction carousel
cap head screw
assembly
M6x40
Temperature
Insulation bath
pad
Heater
Overflow (024-000379-00 220V heater,
drain tube 024-000378-00 110V heater)
connector
Insulation pad Heater plate

(B)
Hexagon socket
Supporting cap head screw
rod M3x12
Chassis
Replacement procedure of reaction carousel heater

5-19
2 Open the back shielding cover and unscrew the 2 M520 spring screws to
remove the wash station protective cover.
3 Open the front shielding cover, remove the mixers and cuvette wash station and
store them properly to prevent the mixers and wash probes from bending.
4 Rotate the reagent probes to the reagent aspirate position and the sample probe
to the sample aspirate position, and remove the reaction carousel cover and all
panels around the reaction carousel assembly.
5 Unscrew the 3 M48 cross pan head combination screws on the reaction
carousels skylight cover, and remove the skylight cover.
6 Unscrew the 4 M516 hexagon socket cap head screws with washer on the
reaction carousel assembly, remove the reaction carousel assembly and place it
carefully to avoid damaging the reaction cuvettes.
7 Unplug the temperature sensor cable, protection switch and heater from the
constant temperature bath, loosen the screw on the earthing wire, loosen the
two tube clamps near the overflow drain tube and unplug the drain tube.
8 Loosen the 3 M640 socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers on the
constant temperature bath assembly, and remove the insulation pad in it.
Remove the constant temperature bath assembly and put it bottom up. (Note to
store properly the insulation pad and adjusting washers on the supporting rods.)
9 Loosen the 18 M312 socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers on
the heater plate.
Remove the heater plate and the heater. (If the insulating sponge on the heater
plate and inside/outside the temperature bath assembly is adhesive, remove it
with a knife.)
10 Daub some heat-insulating glue in the dodging holes of the bath assembly,
install the new heater and align it with the dodging holes, install the heater plate
and tighten it, and then press the insulation foam at the bottom and
inside/outside the bath assembly.
11 Install the insulation pad and adjusting washers with their holes aligned with the
threaded holes on the supporting rods, place slowly and gently the constant
temperature bath assembly on the insulation pad to avoid contacting the optical
assembly, place the upper insulation pad in the bath assembly and pre-tighten
the pad with 3 M640 socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers.
5-20
12 Connect the overflow drain tube to the bottom of the temperature bath and
lock the tube clamps, insert the temperature sensor cable, temperature
protection switch and heater, and fix the earthing wire by locking the screws to
the temperature bath.
13 Install the reaction carousel assembly and fix it with 4 M516 socket cap head
screws with spring and flat washers. Rotate the reaction carousel with the three
dodging holes aligned with the 3 M640 screw holes on the temperature bath,
slightly move the temperature bath to make its radial clearance with the carousel
within 0.9mm-1.1mm, tighten the 3 M640 screws and manually rotate the
reaction carousel to ensure it can spin smoothly.
14 Install the skylight cover, panels and other components of the reaction carousel
according to the steps mentioned above in a reversed order.

After replacing the reaction carousel temperature sensor cable, reconfigure the
related sensor parameters on the software and perform the heat insulation
performance test.
NOTE
Remove the reaction carousel carefully to protect the cuvettes and the top of the
carousels rotary shaft.
The 8 M410 screws marked in the figure have been coated with sealing glue and
cannot be removed.
When removing and installing the temperature bath assembly, avoid touching the
optical assembly, especially the front and back convex lenses, and protect the coder
at the bottom of the temperature bath.
Do not pull the cables during the installation, especially pay much attention to
protect the temperature sensor.
The exploded view is based on the minimum decomposition of the reaction carousel
assembly, and further decomposition may invalidate its functions.
The 8 M410 hexagon socket cap head screws shown in the figure cannot be removed
due to application of sealing glue, force removing may invalidate the functions of
the reaction carousel.
5.2.4 Replacement of Cuvette Spring Plate

When to do
If the spring plates have no elasticity and cannot retain cuvettes, replace them
immediately.
5-21
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Sharp nose pliers / 1
Knife / 1
Medical rubber / 1
gloves
Exploded view for installation

Figure 5.15 Exploded view for installation of cuvette spring plate
Spring plate for cuvette

801-BA80000054-00
Cuvette slot
Steps
2 Remove the reaction carousel assembly according to the descriptions in section

4.2.3.
3 Remove the cuvette of which the spring plate needs to be replaced as well as the
4 cuvettes on its left and right sides (2 on each side), and store them properly.
4 Extract the spring plate about 3~5mm with a blade and grip it out with a pair of
sharp nose pliers.
5 Press a new spring plate into the cuvette slot in the correct direction.
6 Install the reaction carousel assembly according to the descriptions in section

4.2.3.

N/A
NOTE
The spring plate should be pressed to the bottom.
Please do not press the spring plate with a sudden force to avoid bending the spring
plate.
Edges of the spring plate may have some small burrs. Please be careful when
replacing it.
5-22
5.2.5 Replacement of Home Position Sensor and Coder Sensor of
Reaction Carousel
When to do
If the home position sensor and coder sensor or the reaction carousel become
invalid, replace them immediately.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

Figure 5.16 Exploded view of reaction carousel optical coupler
Sensor bracket
Hexagon
socket cap
head screw
M3X8
Cross pan
head screw
M3X6
Reflex optical
coupler cable (S)
009-002204-00 Reflective optical
coupler cable L
009-002206-00
Steps
2 Unscrew the 6 M48 cross pan head combination screws on the right rear panel
and remove the right rear panel.
3 Unscrew the 6 M38 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat
washers on the reaction carousel sensor assembly, remove the sensor assembly
and avoid dropping the screws into the analyzer.
4 Unscrew the 2 M36 cross pan head screws retaining the home position sensor
and coder sensor, and then remove the sensors.
5 Fix the new sensors on the sensor bracket using 2 M36 cross pan head screws.
6 Fix the sensor assembly on the chassis using 6 M38 hexagon socket cap head
5-23
screws with spring and flat washers.
7 After alignment and confirmation of the sensor assembly, fix the right rear panel
to the framework using 6 M48 cross pan head combination screws.

After replacing the sensor cables, align and verify the following positions according
to the alignment guide: positions of the sample probe, reagent probes, mixers and
wash probes on the reaction carousel; positions of the sample probe, reagent probes
and mixers in wash wells; position of the sample probe on the sample carousel;
position of the reagent probes on the reagent carousel; and the sample/reagent bar
code scanning positions.
NOTE
Please install the sensors according to the identifications on the cables.
Do not tighten the screws with a sudden force, in order to protect the sensors.
5.2.6 Replacement of High-Speed Motor Assembly

When to do
The high-speed motor should be replaced if it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
5-24
Figure 5.17 Exploded view of high-speed motor assembly
Middle
mounting plate
Chassis (right)
Hexagon socket
cap head screw
M6x16
High-speed motor
assembly
(115-014256-00)
WARNING
During removing and installation, avoid dropping screws and washers into the
analyzer.
Do not remove the middle mounting plate in order to avoid impairing the
transmission function.
Steps
2 Unscrew the 2 M48 cross pan head combination screws on the front panel of
the SDM and remove the front panel.
3 Disconnect the motor cable, unscrew the 4 M616 hexagon socket head screws
with spring washer on the high-speed motor assembly, remove the motor
assembly and avoid dropping screws into the analyzer.
4 Fix the new motor assembly on the middle mounting plate using 4 M616
hexagon socket head screws with spring washer, and keep the motor cable in the
direction shown on the figure. Use a fixture (BA2K-TF16) to check the tension
of the synchronous belt, and manually rotate the belt for 2 to 3 circles to ensure
it can spin smoothly.
5 Connect the motor cable.
5-25
6 Fix the front panel of the SDM.

N/A
5.2.7 Replacement of Reaction Cuvette

To replace the reaction cuvettes, please refer to the related descriptions in section
8.4.5.
5-26
5.3 Reagent Carousel Assembly

The reagent carousel assembly, situated on the left side of the instrument, consists
of two carousel assemblies that are structurally identical: reagent carousel 1 and
reagent carousel 2. Each carousel assembly is composed of the outer carousel
assembly, inner carousel assembly, reagent chamber assembly, drive assembly, and
reagent bar code reader. It holds and carries reagent bottle to the specified position,
and cooperates with the dispenser for reagent aspiration and dispensing. It provides a
refrigerating environment to keep reagents stable with little volatilization. The
functions of the reagent carousel assembly includes:
1 Holding reagent: Holding specified number of reagent bottles of certain
specification, and cooperating with the dispenser to aspirate reagent from the
bottles and dispense it into reaction cuvettes.
2 Refrigerating reagent: Providing 24-hour refrigeration and constant temperature

environment (2-8C) to keep reagents stable with little volatilization.
3 Sequential feeding: With the drive assembly, the reagent carousel carries the
specific reagent bottle to the aspirate position for aspiration in certain order. The
outer and inner rings can rotate independently.
4 Inputting reagent information automatically: Reagent information can be input

automatically by the reagent bar code reader.
5-27
Figure 5.18 Location of reagent carousel assembly on the instrument
R2 reagent carousel
assembly
R1 reagent carousel
assembly
Figure 5.19 FRU materials of reagent carousel assembly
8
11 3
9 1
10
4 6
2
12
5
13
7
Table 5.2 FRU material code of reagent carousel assembly

code
1 043-002201-00 R11 reagent carousel
5-28
code
5 801-BA30-00088-00 Sensor Temperature 5Kohm Note 1
B3470K with threads
6 024-000145-00 PROXIMITY SENSOR, 200VDC, Note 2
normally open, with terminal
(by order)
7 801-BA80-00066-00 Sample motor assembly
8 801-ba80-00069-00 Plug Note 3
9 041-005702-00 Air vent plug Note 3
10 082-000226-00 O ring, 3.51.5 Note 3
11 M6M-010006--- O ring, 8.52 Note 3
12 801-BA20-00001-00 Built-in bar code reader, laser,
with angle
13 115-014201-00 Reagent antifogging heating
assembly
14 801-BA40-00171-00 Antifogging heater
5.3.3 Replacement of R12/R22 Inner Reagent Carousel Assembly

When to do
The R12/R22 inner reagent carousel assembly should be replaced when the carousel
or reagent bottle base is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cross / 1
screwdriver
5-29
Figure 5.20 Exploded view of inner reagent carousel
Stainless steel cross
pan head combination
screw M4X8
M04-051134--- Rotating shaft
of reagent
carousel inner
Reagent ring
carousel
inner ring
Steps
2 Remove the reagent carousel cover, upper-left panel and other panels around the
reagent carousel. (Before replacing the R22 reagent carousel, remove the side
plate of the left supporting rod to prevent interference.)
3 Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the 2 stainless steel cross pan head screws
(M04-051134---) on the R12/R22 inner reagent carousel assembly.
4 Remove the R12/R22 inner reagent carousel assembly and fix the new one on
the rotating shaft with 2 stainless steel cross pan head screws.
5 Install the reagent carousel cover, upper-left panel and other panels around the
reagent carousel.

After replacement, align and verify the reagent bar code scanning position and
aspirate position according to the alignment guide.
5.3.4 Replacement of R11/R21 Outer Reagent Carousel

Assembly
When to do
The R11/R21 outer reagent carousel assembly should be replaced when the carousel
or reagent bottle base is damaged.
5-30
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cross / 1
screwdriver

Figure 5.21 Exploded view of outer reagent carousel
Stainless steel pan head

screw M3X6
M04-051038-00 Reagent
carousel
outer ring
Outer ring
transmission
plate
Reagent
chamber
assembly
Steps
2 Remove the reagent carousel cover, upper-left panel and other panels around the
reagent carousel. (Before replacing the R21 inner reagent carousel, remove the
side plate of the left supporting rod to prevent interference.)
3 Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the 11 M36 stainless steel cross pan head
screws on the R11/R21 outer reagent carousel assembly, and then remove the
reagent carousel assembly.
4 Install the new carousel by aligning its stop bolts with the holes on the
transmission plate, and fix the carousel with 11 M36 stainless steel cross pan
head screws.
5 Install the reagent carousel cover, upper-left panel and other panels around the
reagent carousel.
5-31
NOTE
Use stainless steel screws.
Exercise caution to prevent screws from dropping into the reagent chamber.
Do not tighten the screws with too great torque to avoiding breaking the reagent
carousel.

After replacement, align and verify the reagent bar code scanning position and
aspirate position according to the alignment guide.
5.3.5 Replacement of Built-In Bar Code Reader

When to do
Replace the built-in bar code reader when it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cross / 1
screwdriver
Hexagon wrench / 1

Figure 5.22 Exploded view for installation of bar code reader
Stainless steel pan head

screw M3X6
M04-051038-00 Reagent
carousel
outer ring
Outer ring
transmission
plate
Reagent
chamber
assembly
Steps
2 Remove the reagent carousel cover, upper-left panel, left panel, and other panels
around the reagent carousel.
5-32
3 Use a hexagon wrench to loosen the 2 M310 hexagon socket cap head screws
on the built-in bar code reader, install a new one and pre-tighten it on the small
bracket with the 2 M310 screws (with big washer and spring washer).
4 After alignment, tighten the screws, and install the reagent carousel cover,
upper-left panel, left panel, and other panels around the reagent carousel.

After replacement, align and verify the bar code scanning position according to the
alignment guide.
NOTE
Exercise caution to avoid dropping the screws, big washers and spring washers into
the analyzer.
Note not to contaminate the bar code scanning window.
5.3.6 Replacement of Reagent Antifogging Heating Assembly

When to do
Replace the reagent antifogging heating assembly when it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cross / 1
screwdriver
Flathead / 1
screwdriver
Hexagon wrench / 1
5-33
Figure 5.23 Exploded view of reagent antifogging heating assembly
Reagent antifogging
heating assembly
Stainless steel cross
115-014201-00
pan head
combination screw
M4X8
Sponge
cushion
Steps
2 Remove the reagent carousel cover, upper-left panel, front pressing plate and
other panels around the reagent carousel.
3 Loosen the 4 M310 stainless steel hexagon socket cap head screws on the bar
code reader bracket and small bracket, and then remove the small bracket and
bar code reader.
4 Remove the R11 or R21 reagent carousel assembly.
5 Loosen the 4 M48 cross pan head screws on the reagent antifogging heating
assembly, and remove the damaged heating assembly and adjusting sponge
cushion.
6 Attach the sponge cushion to the new heating assembly, install the heating
assembly on the reagent chamber and fix it with 4 M48 cross pan head screws.
7 Install the small bracket and bar code reader on the strengthening bracket, and
tighten the 4 M310 hexagon socket cap head screws after alignment.
8 Install the outer reagent carousel assembly, reagent carousel cover, upper-left
panel, front pressing plate and other panels around the reagent carousel.

5-34
alignment guide.
NOTE
Install the sponge cushion in the correct direction as shown in the exploded view.
Exercise caution to prevent screws from dropping into the reagent chamber.
Note not to contaminate the bar code scanning window and the antifogging glass
window.
5.3.7 Replacement of Antifogging Heater

When to do
Replace the antifogging heater when it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cross / 1
screwdriver
Flathead / 1
screwdriver
Hexagon wrench / 1

Figure 5.24 Exploded view of antifogging heater
Stainless steel
hexagon socket
cap head screw
M3X12
Small cross
pan head screw
M2.5X6
Demisting heater
801-BA40-00171-00
Overheat switch
plate
Antifogging
Dust shield of temperature switch
bar code reader
Steps
2 Remove the reagent carousel cover, upper-left panel, left panel, front pressing
plate and other panels around the reagent carousel.
3 Remove the reagent antifogging heating assembly.
5-35
4 Loosen the 4 M2.56 cross pan head screws on the dust shield of the bar code
reader, and then remove the dust shield.
5 Loosen the M312 hexagon socket cap head screw, and remove the overheat
switch plate, antifogging temperature switch and antifogging heater.
6 Place the new heater in the groove of the heat conductive aluminum plate, daub
little silicon (A01-000018---) on one side of the temperature switch and attach it
to the heater, and then fix the overheat switch plate with the M312 hexagon
socket cap head screw.
7 Use 4 M2.56 cross pan head screws to fix the dust shield of the bar code
reader to the antifogging mounting plate.
8 Install the antifogging heating assembly on the reagent chamber and restore
other components.
9 Install the outer reagent carousel assembly, reagent carousel cover, upper-left
panel, left panel, front pressing plate and other panels around the reagent
carousel.

alignment guide.
NOTE
Note not to contaminate the bar code scanning window and the antifogging glass
window.
5.3.8 Replacement of Reagent Refrigeration Temperature

Sensor
When to do
Replace the reagent refrigeration temperature sensor when it is impaired.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cross / 1
screwdriver
Sharp nose pliers / 1
Knife / 1
5-36
Figure 5.25 Exploded view for installation of reagent refrigeration temperature
sensor
Rip open with

a knife
Temperature sensor
801-BA30-00088-00
Insulating sponge
outside reagent
chamber
Steps
2 Remove the left panel and other panels around the reagent carousel assembly.
3 Use a blade to slash a breach on the insulating sponge to expose the

refrigeration temperature sensor.
4 Clamp the sensor with a pair of sharp nose pliers and unscrew it from the M5
mounting thread.
5 Daub heat-conducting glue (A01-000018---) on the surface of the reagent

refrigeration temperature sensor and the threaded part, screw the sensor into the
threaded hole and tighten it using the sharp nose pliers.
6 Coat some glue (095-000052-00) on the split of the foam and wrap it with
adhesive tapes to avoid leaks.
7 Install the left panel and other panels around the reagent carousel assembly.
NOTE
Please tighten the sensor carefully into place to avoid any damages.
Do not pull the sensor cable forcefully.

N/A
5-37
5.3.9 Replacement of Carousel Cover Sensor
When to do
If the carousel cover sensor does not work, replace it immediately.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cross / 1
screwdriver
Knife / 1

Figure 5.26 Exploded view for installation of carousel cover sensor
Sealing sponge
Mounting ring
Carousel cover
sensor
024-000145-00
Steps
2 Remove the reagent carousel cover, upper-left panel, left panel and other panels
3 Tear a small part of the carousel cover sealing sponge to expose the carousel
cover sensor.
4 Disconnect the sensor cable and remove the sensor.
5 Apply proper glue (095-000052-00) in the groove of the reagent chamber, lock
the new sensor into the groove by aligning their top ends, and then attach the
sealing sponge.
6 Connect the sensor cable.
7 Install the reagent carousel cover, upper-left panel, left panel and other panels
5-38
NOTE
Do not tear the sponge into pieces.
Do not pull the sensor cable forcefully after installation.

N/A
5.3.10 Replacement of Sample Motor Assembly

When to do
Replace the sample motor when it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cross / 1
screwdriver
Hexagon wrench / 1

Figure 5.27 Exploded view for installation of sample motor assembly
Outer ring
motor bracket
Sample motor
assembly
801-BA80-00066-00
Spring washer
Stainless steel hexagon GB93
socket screw M4x10
Steps
2 Remove the left panel and other related panels.
3 Unscrew the 2 M410 hexagon socket cap head screws on the sample motor
assembly and then remove the motor assembly.
4 Fix the new motor assembly on the bracket using 2 M410 hexagon socket cap
head screws with spring washer, and sleeve the transmission belt on the motor
shaft by spinning the big belt pulley.
5-39
5 Install the left panel and other related panels.
NOTE
Please note the direction of the motor connector during installation.
Prevent dropping screws into the analyzer during removing and installation
processes.
Do not remove the two screws on the damping cushion to avoid impairing the
transmission function.
Screws should be tightened.

N/A
5.3.11 Replacement of Air Vent Plug with O Ring and Plug with O
Ring
When to do
Replace the O rings, air vent plug or plug when they are damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Flathead / 1
screwdriver

Figure 5.28 Exploded view for installation of reagent carousel plugs
Sealing strip
Air vent plug
and O ring Plug and O
3.5X1.5 ring 8.5X2
Steps
2 Remove the reagent carousel cover, upper-left panel, and other related
components.
3 Unscrew the plug, install the new plug with O ring and tighten it.
4 Tear small part of the sealing strip to completely expose the air vent plug,
5-40
remove the air vent plug and install a new O ring 3.51.5, tighten the air vent
plug and restore the sealing ring.
5 Install the reagent carousel cover, upper-left panel, and other related
components.
NOTE
When replacing the O rings, plug and air vent plug, prevent dust and foreign
particles from entering the water inlet connector and air vent.
When installing the plug, screw the threaded part to the lowest end to ensure good
sealing between the plug and water inlet connector and without leaks.

N/A
5-41
5.4 Sample Carousel Assembly

The sample carousel assembly, situated in the right front of the analyzer, consists of
the outer and inner carousel assembly, refrigeration compartment assembly, drive
assembly, sample chamber assembly, outer/inner carousel sensor assembly, and bar
code reader. It holds and carries sample tube to the specified position, and
cooperates with the dispenser for sample aspiration and dispensing. The functions of
the sample carousel assembly includes:
Holding sample: Holding sample containers (tube or microtube) on the sample
carousel, and cooperating with the dispenser to aspirate sample from the tubes
and dispense it into reaction cuvettes.
Sequential feeding: With the drive assembly, the sample carousel carries the
specific sample tube to the aspirate position for aspiration in certain order. The
outer and inner carousels can rotate independently.
Auto identification of sample: Samples can be identified automatically by the
built-in bar code reader.
Refrigeration of the fourth ring: Providing 24-hour refrigeration and constant
temperature environment.

Figure 5.29 Location of sample carousel assembly (1)
1 3 6
5-42
Figure 5.30 Location of sample carousel assembly (2)
8 7
Table 5.3 FRU materials of sample carousel assembly

material code
1 801-BA80-00061-00 Outer sample
carousel assembly
2 801-BA80-00062-00 Cuvette holder base
2
3 801-BA80-00063-00 Inner sample
carousel assembly
4 801-BA80-00064-00 16 tube holder
5 801-BA80-00065-00 13 tube holder
adapter
6 801-BA80-00066-00 Sample motor
assembly
7 801-BA10-00096-00 Coder sensor
8 801-BA10-00097-00 Home position
sensor
9 801-BA80-00035-00 Sample bar code
reader assembly
(upgrading package)
10 801-BA20-00001-00 Built-in bar code
reader (spare part)
Note:
For the position of tube holder base (2), refer to the descriptions of replacing outer
sample carousel and tube holder base 2.
5-43
2. For the positions of 16 tube holder (4) and 13 tube holder adapter (5), refer to the
descriptions of replacing inner sample carousel, 16 tube holder and 13 tube holder
adapter.
5.4.3 Replacement of Outer Sample Carousel Assembly and

Tube Holder Base 2
When to do
If the outer sample carousel is damaged or rusted, or the tube holder base 2 is
damaged, replace them immediately.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Figure 5.31 Exploded view of outer sample carousel assembly
Outer sample Stainless steel
carousel handles cross countersunk
head screw M3X8
Outer sample carousel Tube holder base 2
assembly 801-BA80-00062-00
801-BA80-00061-00
Outer lower
carousel
Support plate of
Stop bolts
outer carousel
Steps
2 Remove the left and right sample carousel covers as well as the small carousel
cover.
3 Lift the handle of the outer sample carousel and remove the carousel assembly.
5-44
4 Unscrew the M38 stainless steel cross countersunk head screw on the tube
holder base 2, and remove the tube holder base 2.
5 Install the new tube holder base 2 and fix it on the outer sample carousel using
one 1 M38 stainless steel cross countersunk head screw.
6 Install the outer sample carousel by aligning the two positioning holes with the
stop bolts on the supporting plate.
7 Install the left and right sample carousel covers as well as the small carousel
cover.
Note: To replace the entire outer sample carousel assembly, perform step 1 and
4.
N/A
5.4.4 Replacement of Inner Sample Carousel Assembly, 16 Tube

Holder and 13 Tube Holder Adapter
When to do
If the inner sample carousel or related parts are damaged or rusted, or the 16 tube
holder and 13 tube holder adapter are damaged, replace them immediately.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
5-45
Figure 5.32 Exploded view of inner sample carousel assembly
Inner sample carousel Stainless steel cross
assembly countersunk head screw
801-BA80-00063-00 M3X8
Inner upper
carousel 16 tube holder
801-AB80-00064-00
Inner lower
carousel 13 tube holder
adapter
Stop bolts 801-AB80-00064-00
Conversion
board of inner
carousel
Steps
2 Remove the left and right sample carousel covers as well as the small carousel
cover.
3 Lift the handle of the inner sample carousel and remove the carousel assembly.
4 Gather the four fingers of the 13 tube holder adapter and pull the adapter
upwards to remove it.
5 Install correctly the new 13 tube holder adapter on the inner sample carousel till
you hear a click.
6 Unscrew the M38 stainless steel cross countersunk head screw on the 16 tube
holder, and remove the tube holder.
7 Install the new 16 tube holder and fix it on the inner sample carousel using one
1 M38 stainless steel cross countersunk head screw.
8 Install the inner sample carousel by aligning the two positioning holes with the
stop bolts on the supporting plate.
5-46
cover.
Note:
To replace the entire inner sample carousel assembly, perform step 1 and 6.
To replace only the 13 tube holder adapter, perform step 1, 2, 3, and 6.
To replace only the 16 tube holder, perform step 1, 4, 5, and 6.
N/A
5.4.5 Replacement of Sample Carousel Motor Assembly

When to do
The sample carousel motor should be replaced if it is damaged or it does not work
properly.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Synchronous belt BA30-K24 1
tension alignment
tool
tension alignment
tool
5-47
Figure 5.33 Exploded view for installation of sample carousel motor assembly
Chassis
Inner sample Outer sample

M4X20 hexagon M4X10 hexagon
carousel motor carousel motor
socket cap head screw socket cap head screw
assembly assembly
Mounting plate of Mounting plate of

inner ring motor outer ring motor
M4X10
hexagon socket
cap head screw
Sample carousel
motor assembly
801-BA80-00066-00
Steps
2 Loosen the 4 M48 stainless steel cross pan head screws on the right panel, and
remove the right panel.
3 Unscrew from above the chassis the 2 M420 hexagon socket cap head screws
5-48
with spring and flat washers on the inner (or outer) sample carousel motor
assembly, and unscrew from below the chassis the 2 M410 hexagon socket cap
head screws with spring and flat washers on it.
4 Loosen the synchronous belt and disconnect the inner or outer sample carousel
motor cable.
5 Remove the inner or outer sample carousel motor assembly.
6 Unscrew the 2 M410 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer on
the motor assembly and then remove the motor assembly.
7 Fix the new motor assembly to the inner or outer motors mounting plate using
2 M410 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer.
8 Fix the inner or outer sample carousel motor to the chassis with 2 M420
hexagon socket cap head screws with big flat washer and spring washer for the
far end and 2 M410 hexagon socket cap head screws with flat and spring
washers for the near end. Do not tighten the screws temporarily.
9 Sleeve the synchronous belt TBN340XL037 on the big and small pulleys of the
outer sample carousel motor and the synchronous belt 220XL037 on big and
small pulleys of the inner sample carousel motor, and then adjust the tension
with alignment tool BA30-K24 (for inner carousel motor) and BA40-K02 (for
outer carousel tension) to the specific value, and then tighten all screws.
10 Connect the inner or outer sample carousel motor cable.
11 Fix the right panel to the framework using 4 M48 stainless steel cross pan head
combination screws.
cover.
Note: The replacement methods are the same for both inner and outer sample
carousel motors.
N/A
5.4.6 Replacement of Coder Sensor and Carousel Home Position

Sensor
When to do
If the coder sensor or home position sensor of the sample carousel fails, replace
5-49
them immediately.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Figure 5.34 Exploded view of carousel coder sensor
Inner sample Outer sample

carousel sensor carousel sensor
assembly assembly
M4X12 cross pan head

combination screw
5-50
Inner carousel Outer carousel
Mounting plate of sensor bracket Mounting plate of sensor bracket
sensor sensor
M3X6 cross
pan head
combination M3X6 cross
screw pan head
combination
screw
Carousel coder sensor
M3X6 801-BA10-00096-00
cross M3X6
pan head cross
screw pan head
screw
Carousel home position

sensor
801-BA10-00096-00
Steps
2 Loosen the 4 M48 stainless steel cross pan head screws on the right panel, and
remove the right panel.
3 Disconnect the home position sensor and coder sensor.
4 Unscrew from below the chassis the 3 M412 cross pan head combination
screws on the inner or outer sample carousel sensor assembly.
5 Remove the inner (or outer) sample carousel sensor assembly from below the
chassis.
6 Unscrew the 2 M36 cross pan head combination screws on the sensors
mounting plate, and remove the mounting plate together with the coder sensor
from the inner or outer carousel sensor bracket.
7 Unscrew the 2 M36 cross pan head screws on the coder sensor, and remove the
coder sensor from the mounting plate.
8 Fix the new coder sensor on the mounting plate using 2 M36 cross pan head
screws.
5-51
9 Fix the mounting plate with coder sensor to the inner or outer carousel sensor
bracket using 2 M36 cross pan head screws.
10 Unscrew the 2 M36 cross pan head screws on the home position sensor, and
remove the sensor from the inner or outer carousel sensor bracket.
11 Fix the new home sensor to the bracket using 2 M36 cross pan head screws.
12 Fix the inner (or outer) sample carousel sensor assembly to the chassis using 3
M412 cross pan head combination screws (or 2 screws for the outer carousel
sensor) .
13 Connect the sensor cable.
14 Fix the right panel to the framework using 4 M48 stainless steel cross pan head
combination screws.
Note:
The replacement methods of coder sensor and home position sensor are
the same for both inner and outer sample carousels.
To replace only the coder sensor, neglect step 10 and 11.
To replace only the home position sensor, neglect step 6 to 9.
After replacing the coder sensor and home position sensor of the sample carousel,
align and verify according to the alignment guide.
5.4.7 Replacement of Sample Bar Code Reader Assembly

When to do
The sample bar code reader should be replaced if it cannot work properly.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cross screwdriver 1
Hexagon wrench 1
Bar code alignment BA80-J16-01 1
tool for outer sample
carousel
Bar code alignment BA80-J17-01 1
tool for inner sample
carousel
Removing built-in sample bar code reader
1 Remove the sample carousel cover, and then the desk panel, the panel with the
5-52
special wash solution position, and the front panel.
2 Disconnect the bar code reader cable, loosen the wire clamp, unscrew the 2
M38 hexagon socket cap head screws on the bar code reader, and then remove
the bar code reader.
Installing built-in sample bar code reader
Figure 5.35 Exploded view of sample bar code reader assembly
Sponge cushion
Dust shield of bar Glass window
code reader
Sponge cushion
Small bracket
Built-in bar code reader

801-BA20-00001-00 Sample conductive
Bar code reader brush
bracket Conductive brush Sample chamber
Sponge cushion bracket
Figure 5.36 Use of bar code reader alignment tool on outer sample carousel
Bar code alignment

tool of outer sample
carousel
Light of bar code reader
5-53
Figure 5.37 Use of bar code reader alignment tool on inner sample carousel
Bar code alignment

tool of inner sample
carousel
Light of bar code

reader
3 Please assemble the sample bar code reader assembly according to the figure
above. Fix the bar code reader assembly on the chassis using 3 M516 hexagon
socket cap head screws with flat and spring washers, and fix the bar code reader
on the small bracket with 2 M38 hexagon socket cap head screws. Connect the
bar code reader cable, and fix it on the big bracket with wire clamp. The built-in
bar code reader should be installed on the top of the bracket.
4 Fix the sample carousel assembly to its drive assembly; place the bar code
alignment tool for outer carousel (BA80-J16-01) in position #46 of outer sample
carousel and the bar code alignment tool for inner carousel (BA80-J17-01) in
position #91 of inner sample carousel.
5 Install the front panel and desk panel, and restore the cover of the sample
carousel.

alignment guide.
5-54
NOTE
Do not let the sponge cushion (4) shield the light radiation window of the bar code
reader (3).
5-55
5.5 Syringe Assembly

The syringe assembly, situated in the right front side of the analyzer, is composed of
the sample syringe drive module, reagent syringe drive module and clog detection
T-piece assembly. It provides motivity for aspirating and dispensing of
sample/reagent through precise pulling and pushing actions of the syringe plunger.

Figure 5.38 Location of syringe assembly
2 1
6 4 3 3
Table 5.4 FRU materials of syringe assembly

material code
1 801-BA80-00074-00 Sample syringe drive
module
2 801-BA80-00075-00 Reagent syringe drive
module
3 801-BA80-00076-00 Syringe 42 step
motor assembly
4 801-3101-00001-00 Syringe 250l
5 801-BA80-00047-00 Syringe 1ml
6 801-BX50-00088-00 Clog detection
T-piece assembly
5-56
5.5.3 Replacement of Sample Syringe 250l and Reagent Syringe
1ml
When to do
The sample or the reagent syringe should be replaced if they have leaks or cracks or
reach the scheduled maintenance time.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Figure 5.39 Exploded view of sample syringe assembly
Retaining
Anchor plates Syringe T-piece
screws
Sample syringe 250ul Reagent syringe 1ml

Plunger screw 801-BA80-00047-00
801-3101-00001-00
Steps
1 Open the right front door of the analyzer, unscrew the 6 M48 cross pan head
combination screws on the right front panel, and then remove the panel.
2 Loosen and keep the retaining screw on the sample (or reagent) syringe.
3 Loosen the screws on the anchor plate of the sample (or reagent) syringe tube,
remove the anchor plate and screws and store them properly.
4 Remove the sample (or reagent) syringe to be replaced. Do not drop the plastic
washer between the T piece and the syringe.
5-57
5 Insert the new sample (or reagent) syringe into the end of the T piece.
6 Install the sample (or reagent) syringe on the V-shape bracket and tighten it
using two anchor plates and four screws. During installation, make sure the scale
7.5 and scale 15 of the syringe is level to the top of the V-shape bracket.
7 Rotate the motor pulley of the syringe assembly to move the syringe plunger to
the uppermost end, and then rotate the motor pulley counterclockwise to move
the syringe plunger downwards for 1 to 2 scales. Gently tighten the syringe
plunger screw to fix the front end of the plunger on the driver. Exercise caution
to prevent the syringe plunger rod from deviating while tightening the retaining
screw.
8 Fix the right front panel on the framework using 6 M48 cross pan head
combination screws.
Note:
The replacement methods for the sample syringe and reagent syringe are the
same.
Tighten the four screws alternately. Do not tighten them forcefully.
N/A
5.5.4 Replacement of Sample/Reagent Syringe Drive Modules

When to do
The sample or the reagent syringe drive module should be replaced if errors occur or
it cannot work properly.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
5-58
Figure 5.40 Exploded view for installation of sample syringe drive module
Retaining
Anchor plates Syringe T-piece
screws
Syringe bracket
Hexagon socket
cap head screw
M4X10
Sample syringe drive module Reagent syringe drive module
Plunger screw 801-BA80-00075-00
801-BA80-00074-00
Steps
2 Loosen the retaining screw on the sample (or reagent) syringe.
4 Remove the sample (or reagent) syringe together with the T piece.
5 Disconnect the cable of the sample (or reagent) syringe drive module.
the sample (or reagent) syringe drive module.
7 Remove the sample (or reagent) syringe drive module.
8 Fix the new sample (or reagent) syringe drive module on the syringe bracket
using 4 M410 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer.
9 Connect the cable of the sample (or reagent) syringe drive module.
5-59
11 Rotate the motor pulley of the syringe assembly to move the syringe plunger to
the uppermost end, and then rotate the motor pulley counterclockwise to move
the syringe plunger downwards for 1 to 2 scales. Gently tighten the syringe
plunger screw to fix the front end of the plunger on the driver. Exercise caution
to prevent the syringe plunger rod from deviating while tightening the retaining
screw.
combination screws.
Note:
The replacement methods for the sample and reagent syringe drive modules
are the same.
N/A
5.5.5 Replacement of Syringe 42 Step Motor Assembly

When to do
The syringe 42 step motor should be replaced if it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
tension alignment
tool
5-60
Figure 5.41 Exploded view of syringe step motor
Synchronous
Hexagon socket cap Belt pulley
belt
head screw M3X8
42 step motor assembly of

syringe
801-BA80-00076-00
Steps
2 Loosen the retaining screw on the sample (or reagent) syringe.
4 Remove the sample (or reagent) syringe together with the T piece.
5 Disconnect the cable of the sample (or reagent) syringe drive module.
the sample (or reagent) syringe drive module.
7 Remove the sample (or reagent) syringe drive module.
8 Unscrew the 4 M38 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat
washers on the syringe 42 step motor assembly.
5-61
9 Remove the syringe 42 step motor assembly.
10 Fix the new syringe 42 step motor on the syringe base using 4 M38 hexagon
socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers, adjust the tension of the
synchronous belt to a proper value using the alignment tool BA31-K01, and
then tighten the screws.
11 Fix the sample (or reagent) syringe drive module on the syringe bracket using 4
M410 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer.
12 Connect the cable of the sample (or reagent) syringe drive module.
14 Rotate the syringe motor and tighten the screw on the far side of the syringe
plunger (15~20mm from the syringe tube).
combination screws.
Note:
Syringe 42 step motors are used in both sample and reagent syringe drive
modules, and the replacement methods for them are the same.
N/A
5.5.6 Replacement of Clog Detection T-Piece Assembly

When to do
The clog detection T-piece assembly should be replaced if has leaks or cracks or
cannot work properly.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
5-62
Figure 5.42 Exploded view for installation of clog detection T-piece assembly
Cross pan head

screw with washer
M3X8
Clog detection T-piece Syringe bracket

assembly
801-BX50-00088-00
Steps
1 Open the right front door of the analyzer, unscrew the M48 cross pan head
2 Disconnect the clog detection sensor.
3 Loosen the two connectors and unplug the tube.
4 Unscrew the 2 M38 cross pan head screws with washer on the clog detection
T-piece assembly, and remove the T-piece assembly.
5 Install the new clog detection T-piece assembly on the syringe bracket using 2
M38 cross pan head screws with washer.
6 Connect the sensor and tube.
7 Fix the right front panel on the framework using M48 cross pan head
combination screws.
Note: Do not splash water on the clog detection board.

N/A
5-63
5.6 Mixer Assembly

The mixer assembly, located in the middle back part of the whole unit, consists of
the drive assembly, arm assembly, mixers and cover, wash well, etc. It is designed to:
Stir the reaction liquid in each reaction cuvette.
Move to specified positions according to the timing of the whole unit.

Table 5.5 FRU materials of mixer assembly

material code
1 041-005688-00 Mixer (BA2K)
2 051-001006-00 BA2K mixer motor drive board
3 115-014280-00 Mixer module assembly
4 115-014248-00 Horizontal motor assembly
5 009-002206-00 Optical coupler (L)
6 115-013856-00 Mixer drive assembly
7 115-014247-00 Vertical motor assembly
8 051-000540-00 Rotation speed optical
coupler conversion board
9 BA40-20-61463 Wash well (mould MR61463)
10 043-001540-00 Wash well
5-64
Figure 5.43 Exploded view of mixer assembly
8
1
2 3
9 10
6 7
5.6.3 Replacement of Mixers

When to do
If the mixers are bending, or the mixer paddlers are scratched, or other damages
occur, replace the mixers.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Medical rubber / 1
gloves
Steps
2 Open the shielding cover.
3 Grab the upper part of the mixer and then pull the mixer upwards to remove it.
4 Grab the upper part of the new mixer, align the mixer with the installation hole,
5-65
and then press the mixer until you cannot proceed any more.
NOTE
Wear gloves while removing mixers.
When removing a mixer, keep it vertical and do not apply force from an inclining
direction to prevent the mixer from being scratched or deformed.
Put the removed mixer in a mixer package.
After removing the mixer, do not touch the paddler with your hands.
When installing the mixer, rotate it to align with the flat position of the gear,
and then press the mixer in place.

After replacing mixers, you need not adjust the horizontal or height parameters but
check them by pressing downwards. If the mixers cannot proceed any more, it means
they have been installed in place.
5.6.4 Replacement of Mixer Module Assembly

When to do
The mixer module assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning or
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Common cross / 1
screwdriver
Hexagon wrench / 1
High-temperature / 1 roll
gummed paper
Medical rubber / 1
gloves
5-66
Figure 5.44 Exploded view of mixer assembly
Mixer
M36
Upper
powder
cover
screw
M310
hexagon
socket screw
with flat
washer
Mixer Lower
module cover
assembly
Spline
shaft
Steps
Put the removed mixer in a mixer package or in other appropriate places.
4 Loosen the 3 M36 cross pan head screws to make the lower cover assembly fall
off along the spline shaft, and then place the lower cover assembly on the panel
or drive assembly.
5 Loosen the 3 M36 cross pan head screws fixing the upper cover assembly, and
5-67
then remove the upper cover assembly.
6 Disconnect the mixer motor and rotation speed optical coupler.
7 Loosen the 4 M310 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat
washers on the mixer module assembly, and remove the mixer module assembly.
8 Fix the new mixer module assembly on the mounting plate with 4 M310
hexagon socket cap head screws. Do not tighten the screws until finish position
alignment. Connect the mixer motor and rotation speed optical coupler.
9 Pull up the lower cover along the spline shaft to contact the supporting plate,
stick the lower cover to the three mixer arms with high-temperature gummed
paper for later position alignment.
10 While referring to the procedure of aligning horizontal mixing position, adjust

the mixer module assembly to meet the position requirements of mixer and
cuvette. If needed, complete the alignment by adjusting position parameters.
After finishing alignment, tighten the 4 M310 hexagon socket cap head screws.
11 Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the upper/lower

cover assemblies, mixers, and other parts.

After replacing the mixer module assembly, choose one of the following two
methods to check the replacement:
1 Execute the Stir/Wash instruction on the Macro Instruction window, and then
check for noise and alarms while the mixer transmission assembly is working.
2 Run a clinical chemistry (single-reagent or double-reagent chemistry for sample

mixer and reagent mixer), and then check for noise and alarms while the mixer
transmission assembly is working.
NOTE
While replacing the mixer module assembly, exercise caution to prevent the motor
gear teeth from being damaged.
Ensure the mixer gear has been applied with lubricant. When the mixer module
assembly initially runs after lubricant application, screen it to prevent excessive
lubricant from spraying out and contaminating other components.
If an alarm is given indicating abnormal rotation speed, check if the mixer motor and
mixer module assembly have been installed correctly.
5-68
5.6.5 Replacement of Mixer Rotation Speed Optical Coupler
Conversion Board
When to do
The mixer rotation speed optical coupler conversion board should be replaced if it is
impaired in functioning or damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Common cross / 1
screwdriver
Short cross / 1
screwdriver
Diagonal pliers / 1
Medical rubber / 1
gloves
Steps
4 Gently grab the spline shaft and pull up the arm assembly to the mechanical
extreme position. Loosen the 3 M36 powder screws on the lower cover to let it
drop on the desk panel. Loosen the 3 M36 powder screws on the upper cover,
remove the upper cover and place it in an appropriate position.
5 Disconnect the rotation speed optical coupler, and if needed, use a pair of
diagonal pliers to cut off the cable clamp.
6 Use a short cross screwdriver to loosen the M2.54 cross pan head screw on the
optical coupler conversion board, and the remove the conversion board.
8 Fix the new conversion board on the mounting plate with an M2.54 cross pan
head screw.
9 Install in a reversed order the optical coupler, cable clamp, upper/lower arm
covers, and mixers.

After replacing the rotation speed optical coupler, you need not to check the
horizontal and vertical positions, but check if the mixer gear plate interferes with the
optical coupler, and if it does, adjust it accordingly.
5-69
NOTE
After installing the optical coupler in the slot of the mounting plate, manually rotate
the gear to make the gear plate pass the optical coupler, and then check for
interference.
If an alarm is given indicating abnormal rotation speed, check whether the mixers
can rotate or not. If they can rotate, it indicates the sensor connection or sensor
itself fails; otherwise, check the mixer motor.
5.6.6 Replacement of Mixer Motor Drive Board

When to do
The mixer motor drive board should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning or
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Common cross / 1
screwdriver
Diagonal pliers / 1
Medical rubber / 1
gloves
Steps
off along the spline shaft to the desk panel.
6 Mark all cables on the mixer motor drive board and unplug them. If needed, cut
off the cable clamps.
7 Loosen the 4 M36 cross pan head screws with washer on the drive board.
Remember the board direction and remove the board.
8 Use 4 M36 cross pan head screws with washer to fix the new drive board on
the supporting rods in the original direction.
9 Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install all cables, cable
5-70
clamps, upper/lower mixer cover assemblies, mixers, and other parts.

After replacing the mixer motor drive board, choose one of the following two
methods to check the replacement:
1 Execute the Stir/Wash instruction on the Macro Instruction window, and then
check for alarms during the stirring/washing process.
2 Run a clinical chemistry (single-reagent or double-reagent chemistry for sample

mixer and reagent mixer), and then check the software for alarms.
NOTE
Note to install the board in the original direction.
Mark the cables and connect them correctly.
5.6.7 Replacement of Horizontal Motor Assembly

When to do
The horizontal motor assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning or
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Common cross / 1
screwdriver
BA2K tension BA2K-TF04 1
alignment tool for
horizontal
synchronous belt
Medical rubber gloves / 1
5-71
Figure 5.45 Exploded view of horizontal motor assembly
M412
hexagon socket
screw with Spline shaft
spring and flat
washers
Horizontal
synchronous belt
Horizontal
motor assembly
Steps
3 Remove the panels around the mixer assembly.
4 Disconnect the horizontal motor, grab the spline shaft and pull upwards the
assembly to the mechanical extreme position.
washers on the horizontal motor assembly, and then remove the motor
assembly.
6 Use 4 M412 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers to
fix the horizontal motor assembly on the bracket. Do not tighten the screws
until you use the alignment tool (BA2K-TF04) to adjust the synchronous belt to
the specified tension.
5-72
7 Connect the motor cable.
8 Install the desk panel, special wash position panel, and other parts.

After replacing the horizontal motor assembly, adjust and verify the horizontal and
vertical mixing positions according to the alignment guide.
NOTE
Ensure the motor is installed with correct cable direction.
5.6.8 Replacement of Vertical Motor Assembly

When to do
The mixer vertical motor assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning
or damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Common cross / 1
screwdriver
Hexagon wrench / 1
alignment tool for
vertical synchronous
belt
Steps
1 Remove the mixer drive assembly according to the mixer drive assembly
replacement procedure.
2 Loosen the 4 M36 cross pan head screws with washer on the shielding cover,
and then remove the shielding cover.
3 Loosen the 3 M416 hexagon socket cap head screws with washer on the
vertical motor assembly.
4 Fix the new vertical motor assembly on the bracket using 3 M416 hexagon
socket cap head screws with spring washer, and then sleeve the synchronous belt
on the small pulley. Do not tighten the screws until you use the tension
alignment tool (BA2K-TF08) to adjust the synchronous belt to the specified
tension.
5 Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the shielding
5-73
cover, mixer drive assembly, and other parts.

After replacing the vertical motor assembly, adjust and validate the horizontal and
NOTE
Ensure the motor is installed with correct cable direction.
5.6.9 Replacement of Mixer Drive Assembly

When to do
The mixer drive assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning or
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Common cross / 1
screwdriver
Short cross / 1
screwdriver
Hexagon wrench / 1
High-temperature / 1 roll
gummed paper
5-74
Figure 5.46 Exploded view of mixer drive assembly
M316
hexagon
socket screw
with spring
washer
Mixer drive Arm

assembly assembly
M625
hexagon
socket screw
with spring
washer
Steps
4 Unscrew the 6 M48 cross pan head combination screws on the right rear panel
and remove the right rear panel.
5 Unscrew the 6 M48 cross pan head combination screws on the middle rear
panel and remove the middle rear panel.
off along the spline shaft, and then place the lower cover assembly on the panel
or drive assembly.
5-75
8 Unplug all cables from the mixer drive board, loosen the 4 pan head screws with
washer, remove the drive board and put it in a safe position. Disconnect the
cables from terminals, mark them correctly, wrap the cables with
high-temperature gummed paper, and store the cable terminals properly. Loosen
the 2 M316 hexagon socket cap head screws on the supporting flange, and
then pull out the arm assembly and wrapped cables from the flange.
9 Unplug all motor cables and sensor cables from the drive assembly.
10 Loosen from below the chassis the 3 M625 hexagon socket cap head screws
with spring washer on the mixer drive assembly, remove the drive assembly, and
pull out the cables stated in step 7 from the spline shaft.
11 Fix the new mixer drive assembly on the chassis using 3 M625 hexagon socket
cap head screws with spring washer. Make sure to lead the disconnected cables
through the spline shaft prior to the installation.
12 While referring to the steps stated above, fix the clamps of the cables led
through the spline shaft, insert the cables into corresponding terminals, connect
the motor and sensor cables on the motor drive board, and install the arm
assembly, right rear panel, middle rear panel and desk panel.

After replacing the mixer drive assembly, adjust and validate the horizontal and
NOTE
Mark the cables correctly prior to disconnection. Protect the cables from being bent
and scratched when leading them through the spline shaft.
When installing the arm assembly, remember to sleeve the lower cover on the spline
shaft.
5.6.10 Replacement of Mixer Horizontal/Vertical Sensors

When to do
The mixer horizontal or vertical sensor should be replaced if it is impaired in
functioning or damaged.
5-76
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Common cross / 1
screwdriver
Short cross / 1
screwdriver
Hexagon wrench / 1
Steps
Replace the two vertical sensors in the following procedure:
3 Remove the mixer drive assembly according to the mixer drive assembly
4 Loosen the M36 cross pan head screw on the sensor and then remove the
sensor.
5 Fix the new sensor on the mixer drive assembly using 1 M36 cross pan head
screw.
6 Install the mixer drive assembly according to the mixer drive assembly
Replace the horizontal sensor in the following procedure:

4 Loosen the M36 cross pan head screw on the sensor bracket and unplug the
sensor cable. Loosen the M36 cross pan head screw on the sensor and then
remove the sensor.
5 Fix the new sensor on the mixer drive assembly using 1 M36 cross pan head
screw.
6 Install the sensor bracket and panels according to the steps stated above in a
reversed order.

After replacing the sensor, adjust and validate the horizontal and vertical mixing
5-77
positions according to the alignment guide.
NOTE
After replacing the sensor, drive the motor gear plates to pass through the induction
slot of the sensor in order to check for interference. If necessary, adjust the sensor.
5.6.11 Replacement of Mixer Wash Well

When to do
The wash wells BA40-20-61463 and 043-001540-00 should be replaced when
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Common cross / 1
screwdriver
Short cross / 1
screwdriver
Hexagon wrench / 1
Steps
3 Remove the desk panel, special wash solution panel, and other panels around the
wash well.
4 Rotate the arm assembly or raise it to the extreme position, loosen the 2 M48
hexagon socket cap head screws with big flat washer on the wash well, unplug
the two tubes, and remove the old wash well.
5 Connect tubes with the new wash well and pre-tighten it on the bracket with 2
M48 hexagon socket cap head screws.
6 Verify the wash well position according to the alignment guide and then tighten
the 2 M48 hexagon socket cap head screws.
7 Restore the panels removed before the replacement.
NOTE
Note to insert the tubes in place.
The wash wells for phase 1 and phase 2 must not be confused.
Old wash well is biohazardous and should be disposed of to a special recycle bin.
5-78
5.7 Cuvette Wash Station

The cuvette wash station, located in the right back of the analyzer, consists of the
wash probe drive assembly and wash probe assembly. It washes reaction cuvettes
according to the timing of the whole unit.

Figure 5.47 Exploded view of cuvette wash station
7 6 5
8
4
9
Table 5.6 FRU materials of cuvette wash station

No. FRU Code Material name Remark
1 801-BA20-00057-00 42 step motor 1 (shared with
the BS-200)
2 115-013232-00 Wash probe drive assembly
3 009-002204-00 Optical coupler cable (S)
4 115-011197-00 Wash phase probe assembly
5 051-000394-00 Wash probe obstruct optical
coupler conversion board
6 115-013931-00 Outer ring wipe phase probe
assembly
5-79
7 115-013929-00 Outer ring 7-phase probe
assembly
8 115-013928-00 Inner ring 7-phase probe
assembly
9 115-013930-00 Inner ring wipe phase probe
assembly
5.7.3 Replacement 7-Phase Probe Assemblies and Wipe Phase

Probe Assemblies
When to do
The 7-phase probe assemblies and wipe phase probe assemblies should be replaced
if they are bent or rusted, or the springs fail, or the wipe blocks are damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Wash station BA2K-J09 1
position alignment
tool
Figure 5.48 Exploded view for installation of cuvette wash station
Outer ring 7-
phase probe
assembly
Outer ring
Stainless steel wipe phase
hexagon socket cap probe
head screw M4X10 assembly
Inner ring
wipe phase
Inner ring 7- probe
phase probe assembly
assembly
Wash probe bracket
Steps
2 Open the back shielding cover.
3 Unplug the wash tubes.
4 To replace the wipe phase probe assembly of inner ring or outer ring, loosen the
5-80
stainless steel hexagon socket cap head screws M410, remove the probe
assembly and install a new one.
5 To replace the 7-phase probe assembly of inner ring or outer ring, remove the
relevant wipe phase probe assembly according to step 4, disconnect the obstruct
sensor, loosen the stainless steel hexagon socket cap head screws M410, and
remove the 7-phase probe assembly. Install a new one as well as the stainless
steel hexagon socket cap head screws M410 with flat and spring washers, and
then install the old wipe phase probe assembly on the corresponding 7-phase
probe assembly.
6 Do not tighten the screws until finish position alignment.
7 Connect the obstruct sensor with the correct cable.
8 Alignment and confirmation: Switch on the main power and run the operating
software. Adjust the horizontal and vertical positions of the 7-phase probe
assemblies and wipe phase probe assemblies according to the alignment guide.
9 Connect the wash tubes while referring to the tube label on the desk panel and
the wash probe silkscreen.
NOTE
Operate carefully to prevent liquid from dropping into the reaction carousel and
cuvettes.
Avoid bending the wash probes, and keep the wash probes and wipe blocks always
clean.
5.7.4 Replacement of Wash Probe Drive Assembly

When to do
The wash probe drive assembly should be replaced if it has abnormal noise or is
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
Wash station position BA2K-J09 1
alignment tool
Steps
5-81
3 Loosen the knurled screws on the cuvette wash station, remove the wash probe
assembly and hang it on the back shielding cover.
4 Remove the right rear panel and the right panel.
5 Disconnect the vertical home position optical coupler and 42 step motor from
the wash probe drive assembly.
6 Loosen the 4 M412 hexagon socket cap head screws connecting the drive
assembly with the supporting rods, and remove the drive assembly.
7 Install the new drive assembly and lock it on the four supporting rods with 4
M412 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer.
8 Connect the vertical home position optical coupler and 42 step motor to the
wash probe drive assembly.
9 Alignment and confirmation: After replacing the wash probe drive assembly,
adjust the horizontal and vertical positions of the wash probes according to the
alignment guide.
10 Install the right rear panel and the right panel.
NOTE
clean.
5.7.5 Replacement of 42 Step Motor

When to do
The 42 step motor assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning or
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
alignment tool
5-82
Figure 5.49 Exploded view for installation of 42 step motor
Hexagon socket
cap head screw
M3X20
Screw nut
Protection cover
of lead screw
Lead screw
Hexagon socket
countersunk
head screw
M3X5
Cross pan head
combination
screw M3X8
Damping cushion
of 42 step motor
42 step motor
Steps
1 Remove the wash probe drive assembly according to step 1-6 in section 5.7.4 .
2 Remove the protective cover of lead screw, and loosen the 2 hexagon socket cap
head screws M320 connecting the screw nut with the mounting plate.
3 Loosen the 2 M35 retaining screws connecting the motor shaft with the lead
screw, loosen the 2 M38 cross pan head screws connecting the damping
cushion of 42 step motor with the motor bracket, and then remove the motor
and damping cushion.
4 Loosen the 2 M38 cross pan head screws connecting the damping cushion
with the 42 step motor, and then remove the damping cushion.
5 Fix the damping cushion on the new 42 step motor using 2 M38 cross pan
head screws.
6 Fix on the motor bracket the motor installed with damping cushion using 2
M38 cross pan head screws, while aligning the two bulges of the damping
cushion to the corresponding holes at the bottom of the motor bracket.
5-83
7 Sleeve the lead screw on the motor shaft till the end of the central hole and fix
them with 2 M35 retaining screws daubed with little thread glue. Ensure one
of the retaining screws is fixed on the flat part of the motor shaft.
8 Tighten the 2 hexagon socket cap head screws M320 connecting the screw nut
with the mounting plate.
9 Install the protective cover of lead screw.
10 Install the wash probe drive assembly according to step 7-10 in section 5.7.4 .
NOTE
clean.
5.7.6 Replacement of Vertical Home Position Sensor

When to do
The vertical home position sensor should be replaced if it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cutting pliers / 1
Steps
3 Loosen the knurled screws on the cuvette wash station, remove the wash probe
assembly and hang it on the back shielding cover.
4 Remove the right rear panel.
5 Disconnect the vertical home position optical coupler from the wash probe
drive assembly.
6 Loosen the M36 cross pan head screws on the vertical home position sensor
and remove the sensor.
7 Install the new sensor and tighten it with M36 cross pan head screws.
8 Alignment and confirmation: After replacing the vertical home position sensor,
adjust the vertical position of the wash probes according to the alignment guide.
9 Install the right rear panel.
5-84
NOTE
clean.
5.7.7 Replacement of Obstruct Sensor

When to do
The obstruct sensor should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning or damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cutting pliers / 1
Figure 5.50 Exploded view of obstruct sensor
Sensor bracket
Mounting palte
Cross pan head Obstruct optical

screw M2.5X8 coupler
conversion board
Cross pan head Cross pan head

screw M2.5X4 screw M3X4
Steps
3 Disconnect the obstruct sensor of inner ring or outer ring.
4 Loosen the 2 M2.54 cross pan head screws connecting the sensor bracket with
the relevant wash probe bracket, and remove the sensor bracket.
5 Loosen the M2.58 screws on the sensor bracket and the M34 screw on the
obstruct optical coupler conversion board, and then remove the conversion
board.
6 Fix the new conversion board on the sensor bracket using 1 M34 cross pan
head screw, press the optical coupler cable into the slot of the mounting block,
and then use 2 M2.58 cross pan head screws with spring washer to fix the
mounting block on the sensor bracket.
5-85
7 Use 2 M2.54 cross pan head screws daubed with little thread glue to fix the
sensor bracket on the relevant wash probe bracket, and ensure the obstruct
sensor plate does not interfere with the sensor.
8 Connect the obstruct sensor with the correct cable.
5.7.8 Replacement of Wash Phase Probe Assembly

When to do
The wash phase probes should be replaced if they are bent or damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
Assembly fixture for inner BA2K-TF05 1
ring 7-phase probe assembly
Assembly fixture for outer BA2K-TF06 1
ring 7-phase probe assembly
alignment tool
Figure 5.51 Exploded view of wash phase probe assembly
Inner ring 7-
phase probe
assembly
Knurled screw
Wash phase
probe
assembly
Assembly fixture
for inner ring 7-
phase probe
assembly
Positioning plate
Limiting plate
Steps (Taking wash probes of inner ring as an example, which are similar
with those of outer ring)
3 Unplug the wash tubes and obstruct sensor of inner ring.
5-86
4 Loosen the M410 hexagon socket cap head screws on the wipe phase probe
assembly of inner ring, remove the probe assembly and store it properly.
5 Loosen the M410 hexagon socket cap head screws on the 7-phase probe
assembly of inner ring, and then remove the probe assembly.
6 Loosen the M34 hexagon socket cap head screws on the wash phase probe
assembly, remove the probe assembly and install a new one, without tightening
the screws.
7 Place the 7-phase probe assembly on the fixture BA2K-TF05.
8 Adjust the wash probe bracket to make most wash probes and wipe blocks lie in
the center of the holes on the fixture.
9 Tighten the knurled screws on the fixture.
10 Move up and down the wash probe assembly within the stroke range of the
fixture, adjust the probes to make them insert smoothly to the corresponding
square slots, preventing the wipe blocks from scratching the slot wall. Lower the
wash probes to the bottom and tighten the M34 retaining screws daubed with
thread glue. (Note: Ensure the wash probes contact closely with the limiting
plate of the fixture.)
11 Remove the 7-phase probe assembly of inner ring and store the fixture properly.
12 Install the 7-phase probe assembly and wipe phase probe assembly according to
step 5-9 in section 5.7.3 .
5.7.9 Alignment of Cuvette Wash Station

Alignment tool:
Code Name
BA2K-J09 Wash station position
alignment tool
Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Cuvette Wash Station. The screen
shows as follows:
5-87
Figure 5.52 Cuvette wash station alignment screen
The alignment tests of the cuvette wash station include:

Outer Cuvette Wash Station Home
Inner Cuvette Wash Station Home
Cuvette Wash Station Height
5-88
5.8 Sample Probe Assembly

The sample probe assembly, located in the right front of the analyzer, consists of the
probe drive assembly, arm assembly, and probe assembly. It completes sample
aspiration/dispensing and probe cleaning according to the timing of the whole unit.

Figure 5.53 Exploded view of sample probe assembly
7 8
9
10
11
12
13
5-89
Table 5.7 FRU materials of sample probe assembly
material code
1 115-013947-00 Sample probe arm
assembly
2 115-013948-00 Sample probe with
two needles
3 009-002204-00 Optical coupler
cable (S)
4 115-014248-00 Horizontal motor
assembly
5 115-013946-00 Sample probe drive
assembly
6 115-014247-00 Vertical motor
assembly
7 043-002601-00 Long arm cover
8 051-000948-00 Level sense board
9 0040-10-32307 Sample probe
washer
10 041-003368-00 Spring guide post
11 033-000108-00 Anti-collision
spring
12 044-000238-00 215 arm (S)
13 041-005666-00 Probe bracket (S)
5.8.3 Replacement of Sample Probe, Level Sense Board,

Anti-collision Spring, and Arm Assembly
When to do
Replace the sample probe, level sense board, anti-collision spring, or arm assembly,
when the sample probe is bent or rusted, or the anti-collision spring or level sense
board is impaired in functioning.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Flathead / 1
screwdriver
Hexagon wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
5-90
Figure 5.54 Exploded view for installation of sample probe
Pan head screw with washer

Long arm cover M3X6 Level sense board
Washer
Hexagon socket cap head Spring guide post

screw
M4X16
Anti-collision spring
215 arm (S)
Cross pan head screw

M3X12
Probe bracket (S)

Pan head power screw with washer
Sample probe with two
M3X6
needles
Steps
2 Open the front shielding cover.
3 Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the two powder screws on two sides of the
arm assembly, and then remove the arm cover.
4 To replace the level sense board, unplug all cables from it, loosen the M36 pan
head screws, and remove the board. Install the new level sense board in reversed
order.
5 To replace the spring guide post or spring, unscrew the guide post and install the
new spring guide post or spring.
6 To replace the sample probe, remove successively the wash tube, probe cable,
guide post, spring, and sample probe. Install the new sample probe as well as the
anti-collision spring and guide post.
7 To replace the arm assembly, disconnect the sensor cable from the terminal,
loosen the 2 M416 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer on the
arm assembly, and then remove the arm assembly. Fix the new arm assembly on
the spline shaft using 2 M416 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring
washer. Install the tube connector, sensor cable and mixer arm cover.
5-91
After replacing the level sense board, ensure the probe plate lies in the middle of the
obstruct detection optical coupler.
After replacing the sample probe arm assembly, align the sample probe to the
reaction carousel, sample carousel, wash well, ISE module and special wash solution
position according to the alignment guide.
After replacing the sample probe, verify its position on the reaction carousel, sample
carousel, wash well, ISE module and special wash solution position.
NOTE
When installing/removing the probe assembly and tube connector, exercise caution
to prevent dropping off the white washer at the connection joint.
Exercise caution to prevent dropping off the anti-collision spring into the instrument
during installation and removing.
Handle the sample probe assembly carefully and store it properly to avoid being bent
or damaged.
Prevent dropping off screws and spring washers into the instrument during
installation and removing.
Connect the wash tube of the sample probe to the correct connector.
To install the sample probe assembly, insert the sample probe into the bracket, and
then install the anti-collision spring and guide post. Exercise caution to prevent the
probe's riveted part from being pressed by the stage at the lower end of the guide
post. Move the sample probe up and down and check if it can move smoothly. If it
fails, readjust the spring guide post.
5.8.4 Replacement of 5-Probe Zero Position Sensor and

Obstruct Sensor
When to do
The 5-probe zero position sensor and obstruct sensor should be replaced if they are
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cutting pliers / 1
5-92
Figure 5.55 Exploded view for installation of 5-probe sensors
Five-probe/mixer
horizontal zero
position sensor
009-002204-00
Five-probe/mixer
horizontal obstruct
detection sensor
009-002204-00 Synchronous belt
HTBN363S3M-60
Sensor bracket Five-
(BA2K) probe/mixer
Sample probe vertical sensor
drive assembly 009-002204-00
115-013946-00
Cross pan head
screw M3x6
Belt plate Vertical motor
assembly
Shielding cover 115-014247-00
Hexagon socket
cap head screw
M4X16
Hexagon socket
cap head screw
M6x25
Steps
3 Remove the panels around the sample probe assembly.
4 Disconnect the 5-probe zero position sensor and obstruct sensor.
5 Loosen the M36 cross pan head screw on the sensor bracket (BA2K), and
remove the sensor bracket.
6 Loosen the M3X6 cross pan head screw on the zero position sensor and
obstruct detection sensor, and then remove the sensors.
7 Fix the new sensors on the sensor bracket (BA2K) using 1 M36 cross pan head
screw.
8 Fix the sensor bracket (BA2K) on the horizontal motor bracket.
9 Install the sensors, ISE module panel, special wash solution panel and other
panels according to the steps above in reversed order.
5-93
After replacing the zero sensor, align the probe to the reaction carousel, sample
carousel, wash well, ISE module and special wash solution position according to the
alignment guide.
5.8.5 Replacement of Sample Probe Drive Assembly

When to do
The sample probe drive assembly or its components should be replaced if they are
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
Steps
2 Open the shielding cover and left/right front doors, and then remove the ISE
module cover, special wash position panel and front panel.
3 Remove the sample probe arm assembly according to section 1.1.3.
4 Unplug the motor cable, sensor cable, and fluidic tube.
5 Loosen the 3 M625 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer on the
sample probe drive assembly, and then remove the sample probe drive assembly.
6 Fix the new drive assembly on the chassis using 3 M625 hexagon socket cap
head screws with spring washer. Make sure to lead the fluidic tube and sensor
cable through the spline shaft prior to the installation.
7 Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to connect the motor

cable, sensor cable and fluidic tube, and install the sample probe arm assembly,
ISE module cover, special wash position panel, front panel and other parts.

After replacing the sample probe drive assembly, align the sample probe to the
5-94
5.8.6 Replacement of 5-Probe Vertical Motor Assembly
When to do
The 5-probe vertical motor assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
alignment tool for
belt
Cutting pliers / 1
Steps
1 Remove the sample probe drive assembly according to section 1.1.5.
3 Loosen the 2 M38 cross pan head screws on the belt plate, and then remove
the belt plate.
5-probe vertical motor assembly.
5 Fix the new vertical motor assembly in correct direction on the bracket using 3
M416 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer, and then sleeve the
synchronous belt on the small pulley. Do not tighten the screws until you use the
tension alignment tool (BA2K-TF08) to adjust the synchronous belt to the
specified value.
6 Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the belt plate,
shielding cover and sample probe drive assembly.

After replacing the 5-probe vertical motor assembly, align the sample probe to the
5-95
5.8.7 Replacement of 5-Probe Horizontal Motor Assembly
When to do
The 5-probe horizontal motor assembly should be replaced if it is impaired in
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
alignment tool for
horizontal
synchronous belt
Cutting pliers / 1
Figure 5.56 Exploded view of 5-probe horizontal motor assembly
Synchronous belt
HTBN276S3M-60
Hexagon socket cap

head screw M4X12
BA2K horizontal motor
bracket (S)
042-006201-00
Horizontal motor assembly
115-013948-00
Steps
1 Remove the sample probe drive assembly.
2 Remove all brackets (BA2K) on which a zero sensor is installed.
washers on the 5-probe horizontal motor assembly, and then remove the motor
assembly and synchronous cog belt (HTBN276S3M-60).
5-96
4 Fix the new motor assembly in correct direction on the bracket using 4 M412
hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers, and then sleeve
the new cog belt (HTBN276S3M-60) on the synchronous pulley. Do not tighten
the screws until you use the tension alignment tool (BA2K-TF04) to adjust the
synchronous belt to the specified value.
5 Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to install the 5-probe

horizontal motor assembly, sensor brackets (BA2K), ISE module cover, and
special wash position panel.

After replacing the 5-probe horizontal motor assembly, align the sample probe to the
5.8.8 Replacement of 5-Probe Vertical Sensor

When to do
The 5-probe vertical sensor should be replaced if it is impaired in functioning or
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
Steps
1 Remove the sample probe drive assembly.
2 Loosen the M36 cross pan head screw on the vertical sensor and then remove
the sensor.
3 Fix the new sensor on the sample probe drive assembly using 1 M36 cross pan
head screw.
4 Install the sample probe drive assembly.

After replacing the sensor, align the probe to the reaction carousel, sample carousel,
wash well, ISE module and special wash solution position according to the alignment
guide.
5-97
5.9 Probe R11 Assembly

The probe R11 assembly, located in the lower left of the whole unit, consists of the
drive assembly, arm assembly, and reagent probe assembly. It is mainly used to
aspirate/dispense R1/R3 of reagent carousel 1 outer ring in reaction cuvettes and get
washed according to the scheduled timing of the whole unit.

Figure 5.57 Exploded view of probe R11 assembly
7 8 9 10
11
12
13
5-98
Table 5.8 FRU materials of probe R11 assembly
material code
1 115-013935-00 Probe R11 arm
assembly
2 115-007022-01 Reagent probe
assembly
cable (S)
assembly
5 115-013934-00 Probe R11 drive
assembly
assembly
7 044-000234-00 215 arm (R11)
8 043-002209-00 Short arm cover
washer
10 051-001005-00 Reagent probe level
sense board
12 033-000108-00 Anti-collision spring
13 041-005664-00 Probe bracket (L)
5.9.3 Replacement of Reagent Probe Assembly, Level Sense

Board, Anti-collision Spring, and Arm Assembly (R11)
When to do
Replace the reagent probe, level sense board, anti-collision spring, or arm assembly,
when the reagent probe is bent or rusted, or the anti-collision spring or level sense
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Flathead / 1
screwdriver
Hexagon wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
5-99
Short arm cover Reagent probe washer Level sense board Spring guide post
043-002209-00 0040-10-32303 051-001005-00 041-003368-00

M3X6
Hexagon socket cap head
screw M4X16
033-000108-00
215 arm (R11)

044-000234-00
Probe bracket (L)

Pan head powder screw with washer 041-005664-00
M3X6

M3X12 Reagent probe
115-007022-01
Steps
order.
6 To replace the reagent probe, remove successively the wash tube, spring guide
post, spring, and reagent probe. Install the new reagent probe as well as the
7 To replace the probe arm assembly, disconnect the sensor cable from the
terminal, loosen the 2 M416 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring
washer on the arm assembly, and then remove the arm assembly. Fix the new
arm assembly on the spline shaft using 2 M416 hexagon socket cap head
screws with spring washer. Install the tube connector, sensor cable and mixer
5-100
arm cover.

After replacing the probe R11 arm assembly, align the reagent probe to the reaction
carousel, reagent carousel, and wash well according to the alignment guide.
NOTE
When installing/removing the reagent probe assembly and tube connector, exercise
caution to prevent dropping off the white washer at connection joint.
during installation/removing.
Handle the reagent probe assembly carefully and store it properly to avoid being
bent or damaged.
installation/removing.
To install the reagent probe assembly, insert the reagent probe into the bracket, and
probe riveted part from being pressed by the stage at the lower end of the guide
post. Move the reagent probe up and down and check if it can move smoothly. If it
fails to move smoothly, readjust the spring guide post.

Obstruct Sensor
When to do
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cutting pliers / 1
5-101
Figure 5.59 Exploded view for installation of probe R11 sensors
Sensor bracket
Synchronous belt (BA2K) Five-probe/mixer
HTBN276S3M-60 obstruct detection
Hexagon socket cap sensor
head screw M4X12 009-002204-00
Five-probe/mixer
horizontal zero
BA2K horizontal position sensor
motor bracket (R11) 009-002204-00
042-006197-00
Five-probe/mixer
vertical sensor
Horizontal motor assembly 009-002204-00
115-013948-00 Belt plate
Cross pan head
screw M3x8
Probe R11 drive
assembly Hexagon socket
115-013934-00 cap head screw
M4X16
Shielding cover
Vertical motor
assembly
115-014247-00
Cross pan head
screw M3x6
Synchronous belt
Hexagon socket cap
HTBN363S3M-60
head screw M6x25
Steps
3 Remove the panels around the probe R11 assembly.
screw.
9 Install the sensors and panels around the probe R11 assembly according to the
steps above in reversed order.
5-102
After replacing the zero sensor, align the probe to the reaction carousel, reagent
carousel, and wash well according to the alignment guide.
5.9.5 Replacement of Probe R11 Drive Assembly

When to do
The probe R11 drive assembly or its components should be replaced if they are
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
Steps
2 Open the shielding cover, and panels and side panel around the probe R11 drive
assembly.
3 Remove the probe R11 arm assembly.
probe R11 drive assembly, and then remove the drive assembly.

cable, sensor cable and fluidic tube, and install the probe R11 arm assembly,
panels and side panel around the probe R11 drive assembly.

After replacing the probe R11 drive assembly, align the reagent probe to the reaction

When to do
5-103
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
alignment tool for
belt
Cutting pliers / 1
Steps
1 Remove the probe R11 drive assembly.
the belt plate.
specified value.
shielding cover and probe R11 drive assembly.

After replacing the 5-probe vertical motor assembly, align the reagent probe to the
reaction carousel, reagent carousel, and wash well according to the alignment guide.

When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
5-104
Name Code Quantity
alignment tool for
horizontal
synchronous belt
Cutting pliers / 1
Steps
2 Remove the sensor bracket (BA2K) on which the horizontal obstruct detection
sensor is installed.


After replacing the 5-probe horizontal motor assembly, align the probe R11 to the

When to do
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
5-105
Steps
the sensor.
3 Fix the new sensor on the probe R11 drive assembly using 1 M36 cross pan
head screw.
4 Install the probe R11 drive assembly.

After replacing the vertical sensor, align the probe to the reaction carousel, reagent
5-106

aspirate/dispense R1/R3 of reagent carousel 1 inner ring in reaction cuvettes and get

5-107
7 8 9 10
11
12
13

material code
1 115-013938-00 Probe R12 arm assembly
2 115-007022-01 Reagent probe assembly
3 009-002204-00 Optical coupler cable (S)
Horizontal motor
4 115-014248-00 assembly
Probe R12 drive
5 115-013937-00 assembly
6 115-014247-00 Vertical motor assembly
7 044-000236-00 215 arm (R12)
9 0040-10-32303 Reagent probe washer
Reagent probe level
10 051-001005-00 sense board
12 033-000108-00 Anti-collision spring
13 041-005665-00 Probe bracket (R)
5-108
When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Flathead / 1
screwdriver
Hexagon wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1

Long arm cover Reagent probe washer Level sense board Spring guide post
043-002601-00 0040-10-32303 051-001005-00 041-003368-00

M3X6
screw M4X16
033-000108-00
215 arm (R12)

044-000236-00
Pan head powder screw with Probe bracket (R)

washer M3X6 041-005665-00
Cross pan head screw Reagent probe

M3X12 115-007022-01
Steps
5-109
order.
arm cover.

NOTE
bent or damaged.

Obstruct Sensor
When to do
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
5-110
Name Code Quantity
Cutting pliers / 1
Sensor bracket
Five-probe/mixer
(BA2K)
horizontal obstruct
Synchronous belt
detection sensor
HTBN276S3M-60
009-002204-00
Five-probe/mixer
Hexagon socket cap horizontal zero
head screw M4X12 position sensor
009-002204-00
BA2K horizontal
motor bracket (R12)
042-006195-00
Five-probe/mixer
vertical sensor
009-002204-00
Horizontal motor assembly
115-013948-00
Belt plate
Cross pan head

screw M3x8
Probe R12 drive
assembly
115-013937-00 Hexagon socket
cap head screw
Shielding cover M4X16
Vertical motor
Cross pan head assembly
screw M3x6 115-014247-00
Hexagon socket
Synchronous belt
cap head screw
HTBN363S3M-60
M6x25
Steps
screw.
5-111


When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
Steps
assembly.


5-112
When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
alignment tool for
belt
Cutting pliers / 1
Steps
the belt plate.
specified value.


When to do
5-113
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
alignment tool for
horizontal
synchronous belt
Cutting pliers / 1
Steps


After replacing the 5-probe horizontal motor assembly, align the reagent probe to the

When to do
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
5-114
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
Steps
the sensor.
head screw.
4 Install the probe R12 drive assembly.

5-115

aspirate/dispense R2/R4 of reagent carousel 2 outer ring in reaction cuvettes and get

5-116
7 8 9 10
11
12
13

material code
1 115-013941-00 Probe R21 arm
assembly
assembly
cable (S)
assembly
5 115-013940-00 Probe R21 drive
assembly
assembly
7 044-000235-00 215 arm (R21)
8 043-002209-00 Short arm cover
washer
sense board
spring
13 041-005665-00 Probe bracket (R)
5-117
When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Flathead / 1
screwdriver
Hexagon wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
Short arm cover Level sense boardReagent probe washer Pan head screw with
043-002209-00 051-001005-00 0040-10-32303 washer M3X6
Spring guide post

041-003368-00
Hexagon socket cap 033-000108-00
head screw M4X16
215 arm (R21)
044-000235-00
Probe bracket (R)
041-005665-00
Reagent probe
115-007022-01
Pan head powder screw Cross pan head screw
with washer M3X6 M3X12
Steps
order.
5-118
arm cover.

NOTE
bent or damaged.

Obstruct Sensor
When to do
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cutting pliers / 1
5-119
Five-probe/mixer Five-probe/mixer
horizontal zero horizontal obstruct
position sensor detection sensor
009-002204-00 009-002204-00
Hexagon socket cap

head screw M4X12
Synchronous belt
HTBN276S3M-60
Sensor bracket Horizontal motor
(BA2K) assembly
115-013948-00
BA2K horizontal
motor bracket (R21)
042-006198-00 Five-probe/mixer
vertical sensor
009-002204-00
Belt plate
Cross pan head

Probe R21 drive
screw M3x8
assembly
115-013940-00
Hexagon socket
cap head screw
Shielding cover M4X16
Vertical motor
Cross pan head
assembly
screw M3x6
115-014247-00
Hexagon socket
Synchronous belt
cap head screw
HTBN363S3M-60
M6x25
Steps
screw.
5-120


When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
Steps
assembly.


5-121
When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
alignment tool for
belt
Cutting pliers / 1
Steps
the belt plate.
specified value.


When to do
5-122
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
alignment tool for
horizontal
synchronous belt
Cutting pliers / 1
Steps



When to do
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
5-123
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
Steps
1 Remove the probe R21 drive assembly according to the descriptions in previous
section.
the sensor.
head screw.
4 Install the probe R21 drive assembly according to the descriptions in previous
section.

5-124

aspirate/dispense R2/R4 of reagent carousel 2 inner ring in reaction cuvettes and get

4
5
7 8 9 10
11
12
13
5-125
material code
1 115-013944-00 Probe R22 arm
assembly
assembly
cable (S)
assembly
5 115-013943-00 Probe R22 drive
assembly
assembly
7 044-000237-00 215 arm (R22)
washer
sense board
spring
13 041-005664-00 Probe bracket (L)

When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Flathead / 1
screwdriver
Hexagon wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
5-126
Long arm cover Reagent probe washerLevel sense board

043-002601-00 0040-10-32303 051-001005-00

M3X6
Spring guide post

041-003368-00

screw M4X16 Anti-collision spring
033-000108-00
215 arm (R22)

044-000237-00
Probe bracket (L)

041-005664-00
Pan head powder screw with Reagent probe

washer M3X6 115-007022-01
M3X12
Steps
order.
arm cover.
5-127
NOTE
bent or damaged.

Obstruct Sensor
When to do
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cutting pliers / 1
5-128
Synchronous belt
Five-probe/mixer HTBN276S3M-60
horizontal obstruct
detection sensor
009-002204-00 Five-probe/mixer
Hexagon socket Sensor bracket horizontal zero
cap head screw (BA2K) position sensor
M4X12 009-002204-00
BA2K horizontal Five-probe/mixer

motor bracket (R22) vertical sensor
042-006196-00 009-002204-00
Horizontal motor assembly Belt plate

115-013948-00
Cross pan head
screw M3x8
Hexagon socket
cap head screw
Probe R22 drive assembly M4X16
115-013943-00
Vertical motor
assembly
Shielding cover 115-014247-00
Cross pan head

screw M3x6 Hexagon socket cap Synchronous belt
head screw M6x25 HTBN363S3M-60
Steps
screw.
5-129

When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
Steps
assembly.
3 Remove the probe R22 arm assembly according to the descriptions in previous
section.


5-130
When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
alignment tool for
belt
Cutting pliers / 1
Steps
section.
the belt plate.
specified value.

5-131
When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
alignment tool for
horizontal
synchronous belt
Cutting pliers / 1
Steps
section.
sensor is installed according to the descriptions in previous section.


5-132
When to do
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Cutting pliers / 1
Steps
section.
the sensor.
head screw.
4 Install the probe R22 drive assembly according to the descriptions in previous
section.

5-133
5.13 Sample Probe Wash Well

The sample probe wash well, situated between the reaction carousel and ISE module
and on the circular path of the sample probe, is intended to wash the two needles of
the sample probe.

Figure 5.69 Location of sample probe wash well
Sample probe Reaction carousel

wash well
043-002141-00
Cross pan head
screw with
washer M4x8 Sample probe
assembly
Wash well
support
ISE module
Table 5.12 FRU materials of sample probe wash well

material code
Sample probe wash
1 043-002141-00 well
5.13.3 Replace of Sample Probe Wash Well

When to do
Replace the wash well or repair the fluidic tube if the wash well is damaged or leaks
exist on fluidic tube.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
5-134
Steps
3 Use a cross screwdriver to remove the panels near the sample probe well.
4 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the 2 M48 cross pan head screws with
washer, and then remove the wash well.
5 Disconnect the tube from the wash well, install the new wash well and connect it
with the tube. If the tube goes wrong, repair or replace it.
6 Fix the wash well on the support with 2 M48 cross pan head screws with
washer, without tightening the screws.
7 Determine the wash position according to the alignment guide, and then tighten
the screws.
8 Install the panels near the sample probe wash well.

When installing the wash well, align and verify its position according to the alignment
guide before tightening the screws.
NOTE
Before install the panels near the wash well, ensure that the wash well position has
been aligned and the screws tightened.
5-135
5.14 Reagent Probe Wash Well

The reagent probe wash well, situated between the reaction carousel and reagent
carousel (1 or 2) and on the circular path of the reagent probe, is intended to wash
the relevant reagent probe.

Figure 5.70 Location of reagent probe wash wells
Probe R21 wash well
Probe R22 assembly Probe R21 assembly
043-000556-00
Probe R22 wash well
043-000556-00
Reaction carousel
R2 reagent carousel Probe R11

assembly
Probe R12
assembly
Probe R12 wash well
043-000556-00
Probe R11 wash well
043-000556-00
R1 reagent carousel
Wash well support Cross pan head screw
with washer M4x8
Table 5.13 FRU materials of reagent probe wash well

material code
1 043-000556-00 Reagent probe wash
well
5.14.3 Replace of Reagent Probe Wash Well

When to do
Replace the wash well or repair the fluidic tube if the wash well is damaged or leaks
exist on fluidic tube.
5-136
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Steps
3 Use a cross screwdriver to remove the panels near the reagent probe well.
4 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the 2 M48 cross pan head screws with
washer, and then remove the wash well.
5 Disconnect the tube from the wash well, install the new wash well and connect it
with the tube. If the tube goes wrong, repair or replace it.
6 Fix the wash well on the support with 2 M48 cross pan head screws with
washer, without tightening the screws.
7 Determine the wash position according to the alignment guide, and then tighten
the screws.
8 Install the panels near the reagent probe wash well.

When installing the wash well, align and verify its position according to the alignment
guide before tightening the screws.
NOTE
Before install the panels near the wash well, ensure that the wash well position has
been aligned and the screws tightened.
5-137
5.15 Rack Transfer Unit

The rack transfer unit, located in the front of the whole unit, consists of the left
track assembly, right track assembly, lane change part, return push-out part and
hardware circuit boards. It has the following functions:
Transferring correctly and orderly STAT sample and routine sample to the
specified sample aspirate position.
Realizing delivery of samples between analyzers and between analyzer and SDM.
5.15.2 Module Profile and FRU

Figure 5.71 Location of rack transfer unit
Rack transfer unit
Return push-out
part
5-138
Left track Lane change M4X8
assembly part combination screw
Right track
assembly
M4X10 hexagon socket screw
Table 5.14 FRU materials of rack transfer unit

material code
1 801-BA80-00229-00 Reset spring of
retraction
mechanism
2 801-BA80-00230-00 Spring of track
tensioning
mechanism
3 801-BA80-00231-00 Reset spring
4 801-BA80-00241-00 Short stroke
reflective optical
coupler
5 801-BA80-00244-00 Track motor
assembly
6 801-BA80-00245-00 Stopper motor
assembly
7 801-BA80-00246-00 42 motor assembly
8 801-BA80-00247-00 Oriental motor
PK244M-01B
assembly
9 801-BA80-00252-00 Patch cord of
aspirate positioning
reflective optical
coupler
10 801-BA38-00040-00 Wash syringe
sensor
11 801-BA30-00129-00 Left pusher spring
12 801-BA30-00128-00 Right pusher spring
5-139
material code
13 801-BA80-00258-00 Stopper motor
assembly 2
5.15.3 Replacement of Track Motor Assembly and Tensioning

Mechanism Spring
When to do
If the track motor assembly or the spring of the track tensioning mechanism is
damaged, then replace it.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Tension fixture for BA80-J100 1
circular flat belt
Track alignment BA80-J65 1
tool of rack
transfer unit
Figure 5.72 Exploded view of rack transfer unit
M4X10 hexagon
socket screw
Track motor assembly

801-BA80-00244-00
Tension nut
Track tensioning spring
801-BA80-00230-00 M4X8 retaining screw
Steps (Take the left track as an example, which is similar with the right track)
2 Remove the relevant shells. Loosen the 3 M410 hexagon socket cap head
screws at the bottom of the lane change part and the 4 M410 hexagon socket
cap head screws at the bottom of the left track assembly. Unplug the relevant
cables and remove the left track assembly.
3 Loosen the M48 retaining screw on the tension nut and loosen the nut to make
the flat belt remove from the driving pulley.
5-140
4 Loosen the 3 M410 hexagon socket cap head screws on the track motor
assembly, and remove the linear guide rail for track motor of the inner side.
Install the new motor assembly and tighten the screws.
5 Install the flat belt on the driving pulley and install the new tensioning spring.
Tighten the tension nut and retaining screws with the fixture BA80-J100.
Note: Do not lose the washer on the tension nut and note the direction
(D-shape hole) of the tension rod.
6 Install the left track assembly and lane change part, use the fixture BA80-J65 to
align and fix them, and then connect the cables that have been unplugged.
7 Install the removed shells.

N/A
5.15.4 Replacement of Reflective Optical Coupler

When to do
If the short stroke reflective optical coupler is damaged, then replace it.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Figure 5.73 Exploded view for installation of reflective optical coupler
Short stroke reflective optical coupler
801-BA80-00241-00
Optical coupler bracket

801-BA80-00241-00
Steps
2 Remove the relevant shells.
3 Loosen the 2 M36 pan head combination screws on the optical coupler bracket.
5-141
Unplug the optical coupler connector and remove the optical coupler assembly.
Loosen the M314 pan head screw (or M310) and install the new optical
coupler. Connect the cable and fix the optical coupler assembly to the original
position.
Note: Note to avoid mistaking the direction of the optical coupler.


N/A
5.15.5 Replacement of Lane Change Stopper Station

When to do
If the lane change stopper motor assembly or the wash syringe senor is damaged,
then replace it.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Alignment tool of BA80-J64 1
stop lever
stretching length
Figure 5.74 Exploded view for installation of lane change stopper motor
Stopper motor assembly M3X8 pan head combination screw

801-BA80-00245-00
Wash syringe sensor

801-BA38-00040-00
Steps
5-142
3 Loosen the 4 M38 pan head combination screws on the lane change stopper
station. Unplug the cable and remove the stopper station.
4 Loosen the M36 pan head screw on the wash syringe sensor, install the new
sensor and fix it.
5 Loosen the 2 M310 hexagon socket cap head screws between the stop lever
and stopper motor assembly. Loosen the 4 M36 pan head combination screws
on the stopper motor assembly, replace the stopper motor assembly with a new
one and fix it with the stop lever.
6 Fix the lane change stopper station onto the left track and connect the cables.

Readjust the stop lever movement parameters using the fixture BA80-J64. For
specific steps, please refer to the alignment guide.
5.15.6 Replacement of Lane Change Part

When to do
If the oriental motor PK244M-01B assembly, reset spring or wash syringe sensor is
damaged, then replace it.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
tool of rack
transfer unit
MXL tension BA2K-TF14 1
alignment tool for
transmission belt
of lane change
part
5-143
Figure 5.75 Exploded view of lane change stopper station
Fixing block weld 42 motor assembly 2
(Oriental motor)
801-BA80-00247-00
M3X6 pan head

screw
M3X8
combination screw
Wash syringe sensor Stop plate Reset spring

801-BA38-00040-00 801-BA80-00231-00
Steps
3 Loosen the 3 M48 hexagon socket cap head screws on the lane change part.
Unplug the cables and remove the lane change part.
4 Loosen the M36 pan head combination screw on the wash syringe sensor,
install the new sensor and fix it.
5 Loosen the 3 M310 hexagon socket cap head screws on the oriental motor
PK244M-01B assembly, replace it with a new one and adjust the synchronous
belt with the alignment tool BA2K-TF14.
6 Loosen the M38 hexagon socket cap head screws on the reset spring guide
post and loosen the 4 M36 hexagon socket cap head screws on the fixing block
weld. Remove the reset spring and fix the new spring and guide post with the
fixing block weld.
Note: Do not forget the stop plate and install the spring guide post at the center
of the guide hole without interfering with the stop plate.
7 Install the lane change part and use the fixture BA80-J65 to adjust its position.
Make sure the assembly aligns with the left track and right track. Then connect
the cables.
5-144

After replacing the sensor or spring, readjust the movement parameters of the lane
change part. For the specific steps, please refer to the alignment guide.
5.15.7 Replacement of Post-Aspiration Stopper Station

When to do
If the stopper motor assembly 2 or the cable of the wash syringe senor is damaged,
then replace it.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
tool of rack
transfer unit
circular flat belt
stop lever
stretching length
Figure 5.76 Exploded view of post-aspiration stopper station
Transition wheel assembly
Stopper motor
assembly 2
801-BA80-00258-00
M3X10 hexagon
socket screw
M3X6 pan head

screw
M3X6 pan head M4X20 hexagon
combination screw socket screw
Wash syringe sensor

801-BA38-00040-00
Steps
5-145
4 Loosen the 6 M410 hexagon socket cap head screws at the bottom of the right
track assembly and unplug the cables of relevant assemblies. Remove the right
track assembly.
5 Loosen the M4*8 retaining screw on the three flat belts and loosen the tension
nut. Remove the flat belts and loosen the 4 M420 hexagon socket cap head
screws.
6 Loosen the M3*6 pan head combination screw on the wash syringe sensor.
Unplug the cable and install the new sensor.
7 Loosen the 2 M310 hexagon socket cap head screws to remove the stop lever
from the stopper motor 2. Loosen the 4 M36 pan head combination screws on
the motor assembly 2. Unplug the cable, install the new motor assembly 2, and
fix the stop lever.
8 Connect and arrange the cables in the assembly, fix the transition wheel assembly,
and tighten the 3 flat belts (using the tension fixture BA80-J100).
9 Install the right track assembly and use the fixture BA80-J65 to adjust its
position. Connect and arrange the cables and install the shells.

The movement parameters of the post-aspiration stopper station and aspirate
positioning assembly need to be readjusted. For the specific steps, please refer to the
alignment guide.
5.15.8 Replacement of Aspirate Buffer Stopper Station

When to do
If the stopper motor assembly 2 or the wash syringe senor is damaged, then replace
it.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
stop lever
stretching length
5-146
Figure 5.77 Exploded view of aspirate buffer stopper station
Buffer stopper station
Stopper motor assembly 2 M3X10 hexagon socket screw (2x)

801-BA80-00258-00
Wash syringe sensor

801-BA38-00040-00
M3X6 pan head screw (2x)

M3X6 pan head combination
screw (2x)
Steps
3 Remove the 1 M38 and 2 M36 pan head combination screws on the aspirate
buffer stopper station, unplug cables and remove the stopper station.
4 Loosen the M36 pan head combination screw on the wash syringe sensor and
install the new sensor.
5 Loosen the 2 M310 hexagon socket cap head screws and remove the stop lever
from the stopper motor 2. Loosen the 4 M36 pan head combination screws on
the motor assembly 2. Install the new motor assembly 2 and fix the stop lever.
6 Install the aspirate buffer stopper station, connect and arrange the cables, and
install the removed shells.
5-147
Note: Do not mistake the screws on the aspirate buffer stopper station, 1 M38
on one side and 2 M36 on the other side.
The movement parameters of the aspirate buffer stopper assembly need to be
readjusted. For the specific steps, please refer to the alignment guide.
5.15.9 Replacement of STAT Aspirate Positioning Station

When to do
If the 42 motor assembly, left pusher spring, patch cord of aspirate positioning
reflective optical coupler, short stroke reflective optical coupler, or wash syringe
sensor is damaged, then change it.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Flathead / 1
screwdriver
tool of rack
transfer unit
circular flat belt
Tension fixture for BA80-TF28 1
aspirate
positioning
synchronous belt
Figure 5.78 Exploded view of STAT aspirate positioning station
STAT aspirate positioning station
5-148
M3X6 hexagon STAT stopper Short stroke reflective optical coupler Pusher screw
socket screw assembly 801-BA80-00241-00
Aspirate positioning reflective

42 motor assembly Caterpillar optical coupler Left pusher spring
801-BA80-00246-00 M3X6 pan head screw 801-BA80-00252-00 801-BA30-00129-00
Wash syringe sensor M3X6 pan head

801-BA38-00040-00 screw
Steps
4 Loosen the 6 M410 hexagon socket cap head screws at the bottom of right
track assembly.
5 Loosen the M48 screws on the tension nut of the STAT flat belt assembly.
Loosen the nut and release the flat belt. Loosen the 6 M36 countersunk screws
on the STAT lane track.
install the new sensor.
7 Loosen the screw on the left pusher, remove the left pusher spring and install a
5-149
new one. When replacing the left pusher spring, you need not to remove the
right track assembly.
Note: After installing the left pusher spring, check if the pusher assembly works
smoothly.
8 Remove the 2 M36 pan head combination screws on the short stroke reflective
optical coupler. Loosen the M3*10 pan head screw on the reflective optical
coupler, remove the optical coupler and install a new one, and then arrange the
cable. When replacing the short stroke reflective optical coupler, you need not to
remove the right track assembly.
9 Loosen the M36 pan head screw on the patch cord of the aspirate positioning
optical coupler, install the new sensor and fix it, and then arrange the cable. (The
caterpillar should be removed. )
10 Loosen the M48 screw on the aspirate positioning assembly, loosen the
conversion board and caterpillar retaining screw, and remove the aspirate
positioning station. Loosen the 2 M36 hexagon socket cap head screws on the
42 motor assembly, replace it with a new one and adjust it using the tension
fixture BA80-TF28. Install the aspirate positioning station on the right track and
arrange the cables inside the assembly.
11 Install the STAT lane track and adjust it using the tension fixture BA80-J100.
Install the right track and adjust it using the alignment tool BA80-J65. Connect
and arrange the cables and install the shells.

The movement parameters of the STAT aspirate positioning station need to be
5.15.10 Replacement of Routine Aspirate Positioning Station

When to do
If the 42 motor assembly, right pusher spring, patch cord of aspirate positioning
reflective optical coupler, short stroke reflective optical coupler, or the wash syringe
sensor is damaged, then change it.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
5-150
Name Code Quantity
Flathead / 1
screwdriver
tool of rack
transfer unit
circular flat belt
Tension fixture for BA80-TF28 1
aspirate
positioning
synchronous belt
Figure 5.79 Exploded view of routine aspirate positioning station
station of normal lane
Normal stopper assembly Short stroke reflective optical coupler Pusher screw
801-BA80-00241-00
M3X6 hexagon
socket screw
Caterpillar
M3X6 pan head screw

Aspirate positioning reflective
42 motor assembly Right pusher spring
optical coupler
801-BA80-00246-00 801-BA30-00128-00
801-BA80-00252-00
5-151
Wash syringe sensor M3X6 pan head
801-BA38-00040-00 screw
Steps
3 Loosen the 6 M410 hexagon socket cap head screws at the bottom of the right
track assembly.
install the new sensor. When replacing the wash syringe sensor, there is no need
to remove the right track assembly.
5 Loosen the screw on the left pusher, remove the left pusher spring and install a
new one. When replacing the left pusher spring, you need not to remove the
right track assembly.
Note: After installing the left pusher spring, check if the pusher assembly works
smoothly.
6 Remove the 4 M36 pan head combination screws on the short stroke reflective
optical coupler. Loosen the M3*10 pan head screw on the reflective optical
coupler, remove the optical coupler and install a new one, and then arrange the
cable. When the rack feeder short stroke reflex optical coupler is removed, there
5-152
is no need to remove the right track assembly, but the circuit board assembly
should be loosened.
7 Loosen the M36 pan head screw on the patch cord of the aspirate positioning
optical coupler, install the new sensor and fix it, and then arrange the cable. (The
caterpillar should be removed. )
8 Loosen the M48 screw on the aspirate positioning assembly, loosen the
conversion board and caterpillar retaining screw, and remove the aspirate
positioning station. Loosen the 2 M36 hexagon socket cap head screws on the
42 motor assembly, replace it with a new one and adjust it using the tension
fixture BA80-TF28. Install the aspirate positioning station on the right track and
arrange the cables inside the assembly.
9 Install the right track assembly and adjust it using the alignment tool BA80-J65.
Connect and arrange the cables and install the shells.

The movement parameters of the routine aspirate positioning station need to be
5.15.11 Replacement of Return Push-out Part

When to do
If the 42 motor assembly or the wash syringe senor is damaged, then replace it.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Sample rack side BA80-J98 1
clearance
alignment tool
Synchronous belt BA80-J50 1
tension fixture 2
5-153
Figure 5.80 Exploded view of return push-out part
42 motor assembly Pusher screw

801-BA80-00246-00
Right pusher spring

801-BA30-00128-00
M3X6 pan head screw Wash syringe sensor

M3X6 hexagon socket screw 801-BA38-00040-00
Steps
3 Loosen the M36 pan head combination screw on the wash syringe sensor,
install the new sensor and fix it.
4 Remove the entire return push-out part, loosen the 3 M36 hexagon socket cap
head screws on the 42 motor assembly, remove the motor assembly and install a
new one. Use the tension fixture BA80-J50 to adjust the motor and then install
the return push-out part.
5 Connect the cables and install the removed shells.

After replacing the sensor or motor assembly, readjust the movement parameters. For
the specific steps, please refer to the alignment guide.
5-154
5.16 Sample Delivery Module
The sample delivery module is located on the rightmost of the whole unit. It holds
sample racks to be analyzed and those to be retrieved, scans the bar code on racks
and sample containers, and delivers accurately racks to the rack transfer unit for later
processing.
The SDM consists of the shell assembly, chassis assembly, rack supply unit, rack
storage unit, rerun buffer unit, scanning push-in part, scanning push-out part, lane
bracket assembly, and retrieval push-in part.
Figure 5.81 Structure of sample delivery module
5.16.2 Rack Supply Unit

Module Functions
The rack supply unit, situated on the right of the SDM, consists of the support
assembly, rack supply push-in part and STAT push-back part. It holds sample racks
to be analyzed, pushes them successively to the entrance of the scanning channel,
and pushes back normal sample racks to make room for STAT sample racks.
5-155
Locations and FRU Details
Figure 5.82 Exploded view of rack supply unit
Transition plate at the
M3X4 stainless steel
exit of supply unit
countersunk head screw (7x)
Magnetic sensor assembly

Stroke switch
801-BA80-00232-00
801-BA80-00233-00
Support assembly of
supply unit
801-BA80-00241-00
STAT push- M4X8 pan head

back part combination screw (4x)

801-BA80-00241-00
Supply push-in part
M4X10 hexagon
Supply unit motor assembly socket screw with
801-BA80-00249-00 spring washer (2x)
M4X8 hexagon Pusher screw
M3X6 pan head screw socket screw (2x)
Damping cushion
Wash syringe sensor Left pusher
801-BA38-00040-00 Motor bracket
Pusher screw Left pusher spring

M3X6 pan head screw
801-BA30-00129-00
Support plate of
Wash syringe sensor push-in part
801-BA38-00040-00
M4X10 hexagon socket Right pusher spring

screw (3x) 801-BA30-00128-00 Right pusher
5-156
M3X6 pan head screw
M4X10 hexagon socket

screw with spring and flat
washers (3x)
Wash syringe sensor

801-BA38-00040-00
Motor bracket
M4X10 hexagon
socket screw with
spring washer (2x) Damping cushion
Supply unit motor assembly M4X8 hexagon

801-BA80-00249-00 socket screw (2x)
Table 5.15 FRU materials of rack supply unit

material code
1 801-BA80-00233-00 Stroke switch
reflective optical
coupler
3 801-BA38-00040-00 Wash syringe sensor
cable
4 801-BA80-00232-00 Magnetic sensor
assembly
5 801-BA80-00249-00 Rack supply motor
assembly
6 801-BA80-00128-00 Right pusher spring
7 801-BA80-00129-00 Left pusher spring
Replacement of Magnetic Sensor Assembly

When to do
If the magnetic sensor fails, replace the entire magnetic sensor assembly.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
5-157
Refer to the overall view and exploded view of the assembly.
Steps
2 Loosen the 5 M34 stainless steel screws on the transition plate at the entrance
of the rack supply unit.
3 Remove the transition plate vertically and carefully from the support plate of the
rack supply unit. Note: The magnetic sensor assembly is connected to the
transition plate. Pay attention not to pull the cable of the magnetic sensor.
4 Unplug the connector of the 3 magnetic sensors.
5 Place the transition plate as well as the magnetic sensor assembly in a safe place.
6 Loosen the 2 M34 stainless steel hexagon socket cap head screws connecting
the transition plate and the magnetic sensor assembly.
7 After replacing the magnetic sensor assembly, restore the instrument in reversed
order.

After replacing the magnetic sensor assembly, alignment and verify it to see if it
works normally.
NOTE
Please install the sensor according to the identifications of the cable.
When removing the assembly, you are forbidden to pull it violently to avoid breaking
the sensor cable.
Replacement of Rack Supply Motor Assembly

When to do
If the rack supply motor fails, replace the entire motor assembly of the rack supply
unit.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

Steps
5-158
2 Remove the relevant shell parts.
3 Loosen the 4 M48 pan head screws on the support assembly of the rack
supply unit.
4 Unplug the sensor connected to the support assembly of the rack supply unit.
5 Remove carefully the support assembly of the rack supply unit. Note: Do not
collide with the left and right pushers.
6 Remove the 9 M48 pan head combination screws used to connect the push-in
part and the chassis of the rack supply unit.
7 Disconnect the sensor and motor on the push-in part that is connected to the
chassis.
8 Remove carefully the push-in part of the rack supply unit from the chassis and
place it in a safe area.
9 Remove the 3 M410 hexagon socket head screws on the motor bracket to
make the motor assembly separate from the synchronous belt.
10 Remove the 2 M48 hexagon socket head screws on the motor assembly of the
rack supply unit, and then install a new motor assembly. Note: After replacing
the motor assembly, use the tension fixture BA80-J58 to recalibrate the tension
of the synchronous belt.
11 Restore the instrument in reversed order .

After replacing the motor assembly of the rack supply unit, use the tension fixture
BA80-J58 to adjust and confirm the tension of the synchronous belt.
NOTE
When removing the assemblies, you must unplug the relevant cable in case the cable
is damaged.
Adjust the tension of the synchronous belt by using the tool BA80-J56.
Replacement of Pusher Spring

When to do
If the pusher spring fails, then replace it.
5-159
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Flathead / 1
screwdriver

Steps
1 Use a cross screwdriver to remove the screw on the pusher. Pay attention not to
drop the pusher spring.
2 Remove the pusher and spring.
3 Install the new spring and restore the instrument.

After the pusher dog spring is replaced, it should be retested to see if it works.
NOTE
Note: Differentiate the left spring from the right one to avoid mishandling.
Replacement of Rack Feeder Stroke Switch

When to do
If the rack feeder stroke switch fails, then replace it.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Steps
3 Remove the cover of the rack supply unit.
4 Loosen the 2 M28 pan head screws on the stroke switch.
5 Remove the failed stroke switch and install a new one. Note: After replacement,
adjust and verify the position of the new stroke switch.
6 Restore the instrument.
5-160
After replacing the stroke switch, adjust and verify its position.
NOTE
When removing the shells and rack supply unit cover, handle them with care to avoid
scratching the paint.
Replacement of Wash Syringe Sensor

When to do
If the wash syringe sensor fails, replace it.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Steps
3 Loosen the 4 M48 pan head screws on the support assembly of the rack
supply unit.
4 Unplug the sensor connected to the support assembly of the rack supply unit.
5 Remove carefully the support assembly of the rack supply unit. Note: Do not
collide with the left and right pushers.
6 Loosen the M36 pan head screw on the sensor.
7 Remove the failed sensor and replace it with a new one.

After the sensor is replaced, its position should be readjusted and confirmed.
NOTE
When removing the shell, handle it with care in case the paint is scratched off.
When removing the assemblies, you must unplug the relevant cables in case the
cables are damaged.
5-161
Replacement of Short Stroke Reflective Optical Coupler
When to do
If the short stroke reflective optical coupler fails, then replace it.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Replacement of optical coupler close to retrieval push-in part
3 Remove the retrieval push-in part.
4 Loosen the 2 M36 pan head combination screws on the sensor bracket.
5 Remove the failed optical coupler together with the sensor bracket.
Replacement of optical coupler close to scanning push-in part


After the sensor is replaced, its position should be readjusted and confirmed.
NOTE
When removing the shell, handle it with care in case the paint is scratched off.
When removing the assemblies, you must unplug the relevant cables in case the
cables are damaged.
5-162
5.16.3 Rack Storage Unit
Module Functions
The rack storage unit, located in the middle of the SDM, consists of the support
assembly and push-in part. It holds sample racks that have finished analysis and are
waiting for retrieval, and pushes them into the support plate of the storage unit.

Figure 5.83 Exploded view of rack storage unit
Key box
M4X8 pan head screw (6x)
Short stroke reflective

optical coupler
801-BA80-00241-00
Push-in part of rack
storage unit
optical coupler
801-BA80-00241-00
optical coupler
801-BA80-00241-00
Supporting plate of
rack storage unit
optical coupler
801-BA80-00241-00
M4X8 pan head screw
(4x)
5-163
Table 5.16 FRU materials of rack storage unit
material code
1 801-BA80-00231-00 Reset spring
reflective optical
coupler
4 801-BA38-00250-00 Rack storage
push-in motor
assembly

When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Steps
4 Remove the 6 M48 pan head screws that connect the support plate and the
button box.
5 Lift vertically the support plate of the rack storage unit. Note: Do not pull the
sensor cable.
6 Unplug the failed reflective optical coupler.
7 Remove the M314 pan head screw on the failed reflective optical coupler and
install a new one.

After the short stroke reflective optical coupler is replaced, its position needs to be
readjusted and confirmed.
5-164
NOTE
When removing the shells, handle them with care to avoid scratching the paint.
When removing the support plate of the rack storage unit, handle it with care and do
not pull the sensor cable.
Replacement of Reset Spring

When to do
If the reset spring fails, replace it.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

Steps
1 Switch off the main power of the whole unit.
4 Loosen the 2 M36 pan head combination screws and 1 M38 hexagon socket
head screw on the guide plate 2. Remove the guide plate 2 and the failed reset
spring.
5 Install the new reset spring and restore the instrument.

After the reset spring is replaced, it should be readjusted and checked to see if it
works.
NOTE
The reset spring should be kept level after installation.

When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity
5-165
Steps
4 Remove the 4 M48 pan head screws that connect the push-in part and the
chassis.
5 Unplug the relevant motor and sensor, and move the push-in part to a safe
place.
6 Remove the M36 pan head screw on the failed sensor, replace the sensor with
a new one and restore the instrument.

After the wash syringe sensor is replaced, its position should be readjusted and
confirmed.
NOTE
When moving the push-in part, you must plug out the relevant cables to avoid
breaking them off.
The sensor should be installed in the upright position. Make sure the light shield
plate is in the middle of the sensor when the push plate moves.
Replacement of Rack Storage Push-in Motor Assembly

When to do
If the push-in motor fails, replace the entire push-in motor assembly of the rack
storage unit.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

Steps
5-166
4 Remove the 4 M48 pan head screws that connect the push-in part and the
chassis.
5 Unplug the relevant motor and sensor, and move the push-in part to a safe
place.
6 Loosen the 2 M410 hexagon socket head screws on the motor assembly, and
then remove the failed push-in motor assembly.
7 Install a new motor assembly and restore the instrument.

After the rack storage push-in motor is replaced, its position should be readjusted
and confirmed.
NOTE
The leading out direction of the motor should be the same with the original one.
5.16.4 Rack Buffer Unit

Module Functions
The rack buffer unit, located on the leftmost of the SDM, consists of the base
assembly and caterpillar assembly. It is mainly used to hold sample racks that have
finished bar code scanning, or have finished analysis and need repeated analysis.

Figure 5.84 Exploded view of rack buffer unit
5-167
Table 5.17 FRU materials of rack buffer unit
material code
1 801-BA80-00066-00 Sample motor
assembly
reflective optical
coupler
cable

When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Steps
3 Remove the 2 M36 pan head combination screws on the sensor bracket.
4 Remove the failed optical coupler together with the sensor bracket.
5 Unplug the failed reflective optical coupler.
6 Loosen the M314 (or M310 ) pan head screw on the failed optical coupler,
5-168
remove the failed optical coupler and install a new one.

After the short stroke reflective optical coupler is replaced, its position needs to be
readjusted and confirmed.
NOTE
When removing the shells, handle them with care to avoid scratching the paint. s
When removing the optical coupler, you must not pull the sensor cable.

When to do
If the wash syringe sensor cable fails, replace it.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Steps
3 Disconnect the closed caterpillar carefully and do not damage it.
4 Remove the 4 M48 pan head combination screws on the upper bracket of the
caterpillar.
5 Remove the upper bracket carefully, and unplug the sensor cable.
6 Put the upper bracket upside down and remove the 2 M36 pan head screws on
the failed sensor.
7 Remove the failed sensor, install a new one and restore the instrument.

After the wash syringe sensor cable is replaced, its position should be readjusted and
confirmed.
5-169
NOTE
When disconnecting the caterpillar, handle it with care to avoid damage.
When removing the upper bracket of the caterpillar, do not pull the sensor cable.
Replacement of Sample Motor Assembly

When to do
If the sample motor fails, change the whole sample motor assembly.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

Steps
3 Loosen the 4 M512 hexagon socket head screws around the lower bracket of
the caterpillar. Remove carefully the whole rack buffer unit and place it in a safe
area. Please unplug the relevant sensor and motor when removing the rack
buffer unit.
4 Disconnect the closed caterpillar carefully and do not damage it.
5 Remove the 4 M48 pan head combination screws on the upper bracket of the
caterpillar.
6 Remove the upper bracket carefully, and unplug the sensor cable.
7 Loosen the 2 M410 hexagon socket head screws on the damping cushion, and
then remove the motor assembly together with the damping cushion.
8 Loosen the 2 M410 hexagon socket head screws on the sample motor
assembly, and then remove the failed sample motor assembly.
9 Install new sample motor assembly. Note: After the motor assembly is replaced,
use the tension mixture BA80-TF19 to recalibrate the tension of the
synchronous belt.
5-170
After the sample motor assembly is replaced, the tension of the synchronous belt
should be readjusted and confirmed.
NOTE
When disconnecting the caterpillar, handle it with care to avoid damage.
When removing the upper bracket of the caterpillar, do not pull the sensor cable.
After the motor assembly is replaced, the tension of the synchronous belt should be
re-calibrated by using the tool.
5.16.5 Retrieval Push-In Part

Module Functions
The retrieval push-in part is in the back of the SDM and driven by a single stage
synchronous belt pulley. It pushes sample racks from the buffer unit to the storage
unit for retrieval or to the supply unit for repeated analysis.

Figure 5.85 Exploded view of retrieval push-in part
Table 5.18 FRU materials of retrieval push-in part

material code
1 801-BA80-00251-00 Retrieval push-in
motor assembly
cable
5-171
Replacement of Retrieval Push-in Motor Assembly
When to do
If the retrieval push-in motor fails, replace the entire retrieval push-in motor
assembly.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

Refer to the overall view.
Steps
3 Unplug the cable from the motor.
4 Loosen the 3 M310 hexagon socket head screws on the motor assembly.
5 Remove the failed motor and install a new one, and then restore the instrument.
After replacement, the tension of the synchronous belt should be recalibrated by
using the fixture BA80-J49.

After the retrieval push-in motor assembly is replaced, the tension of the
synchronous belt should be adjusted by using a fixture.
NOTE
When removing the M310 hexagon socket head screws, hold the motor assembly to
prevent it from falling off.

When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity

5-172
Steps
3 Unplug the cable from the failed sensor.
4 Loosen the M36 pan head screw on the failed sensor, and then remove the
failed sensor.
5 Install a new sensor and restore the instrument.

confirmed.
NOTE
The new sensor should be installed upright to ensure that the light shield plate is in
the middle of the sensor while moving.
5.16.6 Scanning Push-In Part

Module Functions
The scanning push-in part is in the upper front side of the SDM and driven by a
single stage synchronous belt pulley. It pushes sample racks from the supply unit to
the scanning channel, and then to the buffer unit.
5-173
Figure 5.86 Exploded view of scanning push-in part
Table 5.19 FRU materials of scanning push-in part

material code
1 801-BA80-00251-00 Retrieval push-in
motor assembly
cable
Replacement of Retrieval Push-in Motor Assembly

When to do
If the retrieval push-in motor fails, replace the entire retrieval push-in motor
assembly.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

Steps
5-174
3 Unplug the cable from the motor.
4 Loosen the 2 M310 hexagon socket head screws and 1 M36 pan head screw
with washer on the motor assembly.
After the motor is reinstalled, the tension of the synchronous belt should be
recalibrated by using the fixture BA80-J49.

After the retrieval push-in motor assembly is replaced, the tension of the
synchronous belt should be adjusted by using a fixture.
NOTE
When removing the M310 hexagon socket head screws, hold the motor assembly to
prevent it from falling off.

When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Steps
failed sensor.

confirmed.
5-175
NOTE
5.16.7 Scanning Push-Out Part

Module Functions
The scanning push-out part is in front of the SDM and below the scanning push-in
part. It pushes sample racks from the buffer unit to the normal lane or passing lane.

Figure 5.87 Exploded view of scanning push-out part
Table 5.20 FRU materials of scanning push-out part

material code
1 801-BA80-00246-00 42 motor assembly
3 801-BA38-00229-00 Reset spring of
retraction part
Replacement of 42 Motor Assembly

When to do
If the 42 motor fails, change the entire 42 motor assembly.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
5-176
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

Refer to the overall exploded view.
Steps
3 Remove the scanning push-in part. Do not pull the motor cable and the sensor
cable.
4 Unplug the cable from the 42 motor.
5 Loosen the 2 M38 hexagon socket head screws on the motor assembly.
After the motor assembly is reinstalled, the tension of the synchronous belt
should be readjusted and confirmed by using the fixture BA80-J50.

After the 42 motor assembly is replaced, the tension of the synchronous belt should
be readjusted and confirmed.
NOTE
When removing the screws, hold the motor assembly to prevent it from falling off.

When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Steps
5-177
failed sensor.

confirmed.
NOTE
Replacement of Reset Spring

When to do
If the reset spring of the retraction part fails, replace it.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Steps
3 Remove the scanning push-in part. Do not pull the motor cable and the sensor
cable.
4 Loosen the 4 M36 pan head combination screws on the slide block, and
remove the failed reset spring and relevant parts. Keep in mind the correct
position of each part to prevent mis-installation.
5 Install a new reset spring and restore the instrument.

After the reset spring is replaced, it should be readjusted and checked to see if it
works.
5-178
NOTE
When removing the parts, pay attention to the corresponding positions to prevent
mis-installation.
5.16.8 Lane Bracket Assembly

Module Functions
The lane bracket assembly is in front of the SDM and in the lower front of the
scanning push-in part. It scans the sample racks delivered from the supply unit.

Figure 5.88 Exploded view of lane bracket assembly
Table 5.21 FRU materials of lane bracket assembly

material code
reflective optical
coupler
2 801-BA38-00242-00 Long stroke
reflective optical
coupler
5-179
Replacement of Long Stroke Reflective Optical Coupler
When to do
If the long stroke reflective optical coupler fails, then replace it.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Steps
3 Remove the cover of the bar code scanning unit.
4 Remove the M3X14 pan head screw on the long stroke reflective optical coupler.
5 Remove the failed optical coupler and install a new one. Do not pull the sensor
cable.

After the long stroke reflective optical coupler is replaced, its position and
effectiveness should to be readjusted and verified.
NOTE
Do not pull the optical coupler cable.

When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Replacement of Short Stroke Optical Coupler Close to the Long Stroke
Optical Coupler
5-180
4 Remove the 2 M38 pan head combination screws on the sensor bracket.
5 Remove vertically the sensor bracket together with the optical coupler. Do not
pull the optical coupler cable.
6 Remove the M310 pan head screw on the long stroke reflective optical coupler.
7 Remove the failed optical coupler and install a new one.
Replacement of Short Stroke Optical Coupler away from the Long Stroke
Optical Coupler
4 Remove the button box and do not pull the cables connected to the buttons.
5 Remove the M314 pan head screw on the long stroke reflective optical coupler.
6 Remove the failed optical coupler and install a new one.

After the short stroke reflective optical coupler is replaced, its position and
effectiveness should to be readjusted and verified.
NOTE
Do not pull the optical coupler cable.
5-181
5-182
6 Hydropneumatic System
6-1
6.1 Overview
The Hydropneumatic system of the instrument includes the pneumatic part and
hydraulic part.
The major function of the pneumatic part is:
To provide vacuum for the cuvette wash station, probe/mixer wash unit and ISE
unit.
The major function of the hydraulic part is:
To provide the whole unit with deionized water via the water supply unit.
To provide wash solution (water and wash solution) for the cuvette wash station
and probe/mixer wash unit.
To discharge waste fluid produced during measurements via the drainage
module.
This chapter describes the working principles and repairing methods of the
Hydropneumatic system.
6-2
6.2 Principles of Hydropneumatic System
The hydropneumatic system is divided into five units, which are probe/mixer wash
unit, cuvette wash unit, water supply unit, waste unit and ISE hydropneumatic unit.
See the figure below:
Figure 6.1 Block diagram of hydropneumatic system
Hydropneumatic system
HPS
1. Probe/Mixer 2. Cuvette wash 3. Water supply

wash unit 4. Waste unit 5. ISE unit
unit unit
WDU ISEU
NMWU CACU WSU
Probe interior wash Wash solution sub ISE degassing

External water
Probe/Mixer exterior unit Fluidic outlet control
supply unit
wash DSU
Waste tank / Waste

Cuvette wash Internal water supply
Clog detection pump
preheating unit
Pressure detection Whole unit cleaning

Degassing sub unit
(analog and digital fluid preheating Waste collector
DGSU
pressure gauges)
First-level water
Aspirate/Dispense
circulating and
liquid
distribution
Pneumatic unit
PU
6.2.2 Probe/Mixer Wash Unit

The probe/mixer wash unit includes: 2 sample needles, 4 reagent probes, 12 mixers,
6 sampling valves, 2 return valves, 2 gear pumps, 1 degassing unit, and 6 syringes
(sample syringe: 250l, reagent syringe R11/R12/R21/R22: 1ml).
This unit is mainly used for fixed-quantity sampling and probe/mixer cleaning.
Fixed-quantity sampling is realized through cooperation of the syringes,
sampling valves and probes with the aim of delivering fixed-quantity reagent and
sample.
Probe/mixer cleaning, driven by fluidic pumps, is to clean the interior/exterior
of the sample probe and reagent probes as well as the exterior of the mixers so
as to eliminate carryover among chemistries.
6-3
Wash mode of sample mixers and reagent mixers: All mixers are washed with
diluted wash solution in one phase and then washed with deionized water in the
next phase.
To ensure accurate sampling, the deionized water used for cleaning needs to be
degassed, that is, to be produced by passing through a degasser.
6-4
The schematic diagram of the probe/mixer wash unit is as shown below.
Figure 6.2 Schematic diagram of probe/mixer wash unit
NC
C235
Legend
V07
COM NO
C233 C234
DI water tube Refrigerant tube Restrictor ring

PRE08 PRE07 PRE06
NC
C229 Cleaning fluid tube Vacuum tube Conversion tube
V06
COM NO
C871 C431 C141
Concentrated wash High-concentration Filter
C227 C228
D19
solution tube waste tube
Diluted wash Low-concentration
NC
C259
C274 solution tube waste tube
V05
D15
COM NO SR06
C257 C258
C236
1mL C237
D41 SR05
C230 1mL C231
NC
V04 C265 SR04
Syringe R22
COM NO C260 1mL C261
C263 C264
SR03
Syringe R21
D45
C266 1mL C267
Syringe R12
Clog detection SR02
NC
C221
D10
C222
D11 250uL
Syringe R11
C223 C224 C225
PRE05
V03
COM NO
C219 C220
Clog detection SR01
Syringe S2
NC
C251
D36
C252 C253
D37 250uL
V02
C254 C255
COM NO PRE04
C249 C250
D32 D12 D46 D42 D16 D20
Syringe S1
D06
D17 D43
D39
C246
C216
D13
D08 D34
C215 C245
D38
M1004
M1003
C214 C244
C256
C213 C243
C226 C268 C262 C232 C238
C212
C242
S1 S2 R11 R12 R21 R22

MR22 MR21 MS22 MS21 MR12 MR11 MS12 MS11
D05 D31
C211 C241
OU OU
T T
C217
P13 P04
IN
IN
C247 IN
IN
WQ07
V08 V09 C210 C240
OUT
OUT
C248 C218
C311
D30
D09 D33 D07
D35 D04
D40D44
C501
C204
C205
D14
D18 M1002
C203 WQ06 WQ13 WQ15 WQ17
WQ11
WQ23 WQ24
WQ32 WQ33
WQ53
DG01 T341 WQ52
V10
V11
V12
V13
V14
C309
C310
C321
C322
C325
C328
C331
C324
C327
C330
WQ43
V19
OUT IN COM NC C344 C347 WQ42

C270
P09 C271
DG02
C272 C273 C353 C363
N
O WQ22 WQ31
D03 WQ10
V16
V15
DG04 WQ12
DG03 C342 C345 C346
WQ14 C343
WQ51
V18
V17
WQ16 WQ41
WQ20 C352 C351 C362 C361
C320
C323
C340
C326
C329
DGS
Throt01
C315
WQ08 M1005
WQ05
D02 C302
C307 C341 WQ21
C304 C305 C306 C308
WQ03 WQ04 M1006
C131 C130 JS14 C129 WQ30
HV04 sample probe wash
HV02 circulating WQ02 restrictive valve
water restrictive valve
C202
C303
JS13
Heater 1
CAN14
1000W
JS15
FL04
WQ01
D01
JS20
C140
C201
C301
`
JS12
M1001
Water tank FIL02 C128 C127 WQ40
JS10 JS11 WQ50

ZX01
CAN01 C125 C126
ZX30
V20
Inlet filter, maintained by user C404

C401 C402 C403 C405 C406 C407
ZX02 M1007 ZX03 ZX04 Throt03 Throt04
HV05 auto dilution Throt02
FL01 restrictive valve ZX11
J503 J504
C124 JS09 C123

J502 IN OUT ZQ50
JS08
C360
C430
C350
C560
C107 C425 C424
FIL05 OUT ZX23 M1009
FIL03 J501 ZX12 HV03 wash solution C423 C422
C121
IN P03 P05 restrictive valve
JS04
JS06 C122 JS07 ZX10
ZX24
C410
FL09
C120 JS05
CAN02 ZX22
CAN03 ZX10
FL06 C420
FL05
Diluted wash solution tank ZX20
OUT
Concentrated wash solution tank
ZX21
IN P06
C421
6-5
For convenient identification, the probes are numbered as below:
Two reagent probe 1:
Probe R11: aspirates reagent from outer ring of the R1 reagent carousel and
dispenses it to inner ring of the reaction carousel.
Probe R12: aspirates reagent from inner ring of the R1 reagent carousel and
dispenses it to outer ring of the reaction carousel.
Two reagent probe 2:
Probe R21: aspirates reagent from outer ring of the R2 reagent carousel and
dispenses it to inner ring of the reaction carousel.
Probe R22: aspirates reagent from inner ring of the R2 reagent carousel and
dispenses it to outer ring of the reaction carousel.
Two needles of sample probe:
The two needles S1 and S2 aspirate sample from the same position of the sample
carousel or racks.
S1 dispenses sample on inner ring of the reaction carousel, while S2 on the outer
ring.
6.2.3 Cuvette Wash Unit

The cuvette wash unit is divided into dispense module and aspirate module, which
cooperate with each other to clean the reaction cuvettes on both inner and outer
rings for 8 phases.
Fluidic pumps are employed to dispense diluted wash solution (alkaline) for phase 1
and 2 and deionized water for phase 3-6. No fluid is dispensed or aspirated during
phase 7 and 8. Dirty cuvettes are washed through the complete 8 phases. A dirty
cuvette is considered clean only after passing through a complete 8-phase wash
procedure as well as cuvette blank test.
An vacuum pump is used to provide vacuum for discharging waste fluid and wiping
the cuvettes after cleaning. High-concentration waste is generated in phase 1 and 8,
and low-concentration waste during phase 2-7. Wipe blocks are provided to absorb
the remaining wash solution inside cuvettes during phase 7 and 8.
The cuvette wash unit makes reuse of cuvettes possible by means of repeated
aspirate-dispense actions. The cuvette wash unit is composed of the following
secondary units:
Wash solution unit
Preheating unit
Pressure detection unit (including analog and digital pressure gauges)
Aspirate/Dispense unit
Pneumatic unit
With the key function of cleaning cuvettes, the cuvette wash unit uses deionized
water and diluted wash solution coming from the first-level circulating water and
wash solution unit, which are driven by the pneumatic unit and preheated by the
preheating unit. The schematic diagram of this unit is as shown below.
6-7
Figure 6.3 Schematic diagram of cuvette wash unit
PRE08 PRE07 PRE06 Legend
ZQZ12-J201
ZQZ22-J202
ZQZ32-J203
ZQZ42-J204 DI water tube Refrigerant tube Restrictor ring
ZQZ52-J205
C871 C431 C141 ZQZ62-J206
Cleaning fluid tube Vacuum tube Conversion tube

ZQZ11-J101
Pressure ZQZ21-J102 Concentrated wash High-concentration Filter

ZQZ31-J103
detection ZQZ41-J104 solution tube waste tube
board ZQZ51-J105 Diluted wash Low-concentration
ZQZ61-J106
Primary vacuum solution tube waste tube

C872 PRE01 ZQX12-J401
ZK42 ZQX22-J402
ZQX32-J403
ZQX42-J404
52A
62A
22A
32A
42A
12A
ZQX52-J405
51A
61A
21A
31A
41A
11A
ZQX62-J406
ZQX72-J407
C595
C594
C596
C597
C598
C599
C589
C588
C590
C591
C592
C593
ZQX82-J408
ZQX11-J301
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 ZQX21-J302
ZQX31-J303
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 ZQX41-J304
ZQX51-J305
C583
C540
C543
C550
C553
C586
C573
C520
C523
C530
C533
C576
ZQX61-J306
ZQX71-J307
ZQX81-J308
A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
61B
71B
51B
62B
72B
52B
41B
21B
31B
42B
22B
32B
81B
11B
82B
12B
B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
C801
C811
C802
C813
C815
C823
C825
C803
C804
C810
C812
C814
C820
C821
C822
C824
C830
C840 C850
High- Low- Low- 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 82

concentration concentration concentration
ZQ36
ZQ56 ZQ58 ZQ14 ZQ16 ZQ24 ZQ26 ZQ66 ZQ68 ZQ34 ZQ44 ZQ46 waste secondary waste secondary ZK70
C522 C532 C542 C552
waste vacuum container vacuum container
V25 V27
C521 C531
V31
C541
V33
C551
secondary A B
C519
C572 C575 V24 C529 C582 C585
C539 C549
vacuum CAN06
V22 V26
V30 V32 CAN07
C571
V23
C574
C518
ZQ15 C528 ZQ25
V28
C581
V29
C584
C538 ZQ35 C548 ZQ45 container
ZQ13 ZQ23 ZQ33 ZQ43
ZQ55 ZQ57 ZQ65 ZQ67
CAN05
V42
V39
C537 C547 C851
C517 C527 C853 C852 C854
C570 C580 ZK71
ZQ22 ZQ32 ZQ42
ZQ12
OUT IN IN OUT
ZK72
C516 C536
ZK41
ZK50 ZK60 ZK43
ZQ01
LW62
C501
C204
C205
HW03 LW60
M1002
C203 C904 IN C920 IN C930 IN
V34 V35 V36
C905
OUT C921
OUT C931
OUT ZK73
ZQ11
V41
V38
ZQ31
D03 C843 C842 C841 C844
LW61 LW63 ZK61
OUT IN IN OUT
V37
V40
ZK62
C833 C832 C831 C834 C870
ZK51 ZK63
WQ08
OUT IN HW04 IN OUT ZK53 Reaction LW35
ZK52 LW37 carousel LW36
C951
C922 waste
C511
C302
C845
WQ03 FL10 High-
C906
C952
C903
concentration ZK77
WQ02
waste collector
C509 C510 C973 CAN08 LW64 ZK40
C303 ZQ06 ZQ07 ZQ08 C907 C926
FL11 C835 C860 C861 C862
C940 C961 ZK01

Heater 2
CAN15
C944
500W
Low-concentration C601 ZK03 High-concentration

C974 waste collector C953 waste level
WQ01
LW38
PRE05
ZK09
HV06 cuvette wash
C502 restrictive valve C506 C508 C949 CAN09 C927
C140
C201
C301
`
C503 C504 C505 C507 LW55 LW72 ZK01

ZQ02 ZQ03 M1010 ZQ04 ZQ05 C609 C912
ZQ54 ZQ64
C128
M1001
C127 Primary vacuum
C990
FL12 container High-concentration waste C643
ZX01 ZK10 ZK20

C610 C620
WZ05
Hw05
V20
C404 C563 ZK11 ZK21

LW80 C640 C641
C401 C402 C403 C405 C406 C407 WZ01 WZ02
ZX02 M1007 ZX03 ZX04 Throt03 Throt04 ZK04
restrictive valve ZX11
J503 J504 C561 C562 ZQ53
CAN10 C611 C621 C602 Vacuum WA03 C642
J502 IN OUT ZQ50

ZQ51 ZQ52
ZK22 ZK25
pump WZ04
ZK12 ZK15
C360
C430
C350
C560
C425 C424
IN IN IN C650 C652 IN
ZX23 M1009 IN IN
Heater 3
CAN16
FIL03 ZX12 HV03 wash solution C423 C422 C612 C615 C622 C625
External
500W
J501
P05 restrictive valve P10
C980 P08 P14 vacuum pump
ZX10
LW81 control C651 C653
OUT
ZX24 OUT
IN
C410
FL09 C981 OU C613
OU OU
C616 C623 OU
C626 WZ10 C654 WZ11
ZK13
ZK26 T
ZK23
T ZK16 T T C655
WZ12
CAN02 V43
ZX22 C614 C624
FIL04
CAN03 WZ13
OUT
ZX10 C982
FL06 C420 ZK14 ZK24
C997
Vacuum silencer
FL05
Low-concentration
OUT waste
ZX21
IN P06
C421
6.2.4 Water Supply Unit

The water supply unit supplies water automatically for the instrument, checking
water quality, and filtering supplied water between the water supply equipment and
the internal water tank of the instrument. It is capable of checking fluid level and
giving an alarm when the water tank contains insufficient water. It also allows
manually cutting off water supply in emergent situations.
The water supply unit is composed of the following components:
Water inlet filters: inside and outside the instrument
Inlet valve
Manual control valve
Water quality detection device
Internal water tank
Level sense device
The figure below shows the tubes and connectors of this unit.
6-8
T275
D23
Figure 6.4 Schematic diagram of water supply unit
D01
D07
J18
D07 T122 T117
Restrictive T116
valve T279
1000W
Heater 1
T119
WQ01
J19
FL04
T115
J17
T118
` T201
T301
M1001
Water tank FIL02 T114
T113
T402
CAN01 J14 T004 T005 J16
Inlet filter, maintained by user
FL01
T121 J13 T112
J12
T002 T110
T001
FIL05 T003 OUT T877 T878
J10
IN P03
T120 J15 T111 J11
Low-concentration waste
FIL01
T104 OUT1 OUT2 IN

Water tank
Inlet
V01
T106 T105 Water quality monitoring Water supply module
T103 T867
T108 T107
J03
J06 J04 J02
WQM1 FIL01
HV01
J01
Water unit
T102
T101
While the main power switch and analyzer power switch are turned on, the water
supply unit starts supplying water once detecting the OFF signal of floater FL01,
which means the Water Tank Empty floater is disconnected and the fluid level
decreases below the floater. The inlet valve V01 is turned on and kept till the
conditions for ending water supplying are met.
When one of the following conditions is met, the inlet valve V01 is turned off to
end water supplying:
ON signal of the floater FL04 is detected, which means Water Tank Full floater is
connected and the fluid level raises the floater.
The time of water supplying exceeds 45 minutes, and the floater FL01 is ON.
If none of the above conditions are detected, FL01 is always OFF, and the water
supplying reaches 24 hours, the instrument will turn off the water supply switch
(valve V01) and turn it on again after 10 minutes.
6.2.5 Waste Unit

The waste unit is capable of:
Collecting all high-/low-concentration waste into corresponding containers and then
discharging them off via the waste pump P07.
Discharging high-/low-concentration waste separately.
Detecting fluid level inside the high-concentration waste tank.
Providing overflow alarm device for all waste containers.
6-9
The waste unit consists of the following components:
High-concentration waste collector
Low-concentration waste collector
Waste pump
External high-concentration waste tank
Level sense device
Tubes and connectors
The secondary vacuum container used for cuvette cleaning is one part of the waste
unit, because it is responsible for absorbing waste fluid from cuvettes during each
wash period and then discharging it to corresponding high-/low-concentration waste
collectors.
High-concentration waste includes the waste produced during cuvette cleaning in
phase 1 and 8 and the waste fluid of ISE measurement.
Low-concentration waste comes from the following sources:
Cleaning interior/exterior of sample probe and reagent probes
Mixer cleaning
Cuvette cleaning in phase 2-7
Condensate water of the reagent carousels
Condensate water of the sample carousel (STAT sample positions)
Overflowed fluid of the reaction carousel
Liquid accumulated in primary vacuum container
The first three are the major sources and account for over 99% of low-concentration
waste.
The schematic diagram of this unit is as shown below.
6-10
Figure 6.5 Schematic diagram of waste unit
I01
ISE vacuum
ISE module
ISE buffer
ISE waste
HW01
CAN04
Buffer tank
C901
C801
C811
C802
C813
C815
C823
C825
C803
C804
C810
C812
C814
C820
C821
C822
C824
C902
C830
C840 C850
C256 High- Low- Low-

C226 C268 C262 C232 C238 concentration concentration concentration
ZK70
S1 S2 R11 R12 R21 R22 waste waste secondary waste secondary
MR22 MR21 MS22 MS21 MR12 MR11 MS12 MS11 vacuum container vacuum container
secondary
A B
vacuum
container CAN06 CAN07
CAN05 Reagent compartment 1 Reagent compartment 2
V42
V39
C853 C852 C851 C854
ZK71
LW40
LW43 LW44 LW20 LW30 LW02 LW03 LW21 LW31 LW05 LW06
OUT IN IN OUT
LW41 ZK72
LW01
C941 C942 ZK50 ZK60
HW03 LW60 LW62
C904 IN C920 IN C930 IN

C960
LW42 LW45
C950
C970
C971
V34 V35 V36
C943
C905
OUT C921
OUT C931
OUT ZK73
LW50 LW52
C384
V41
V38
C946 C947
C843 C842 C841 C844
LW32 LW61 LW63 ZK61 LW51 LW53
OUT IN IN OUT C948

Small sample
V37
V40
LW07 ZK62
C833 C832 C831 C834 C870
ZK51 ZK63 compartment
ZK52 LW37 carousel LW36
C951
C922 waste
C972 C845
LW08 HW02 FL10 High-
C906
C952
C903
concentration ZK77
LW04 waste collector
C973 CAN08 LW64 LW32 ZK40
C907 LW54 C926
LW70
FL11 C835 C860 C861 C862
C925
C940 C961 LW71
C944 LW01 Low- LW22
LW46
concentration High-concentration waste level
C974 C953
LW09 waste collector LW38
C949 CAN09 C927

LW55 LW72
C912
Primary vacuum
C990
FL12 container High-concentration waste
Hw05
LW80
HW20
CAN10 C602
Vacuum pump
C992 C991
LW90
C908
LW91
External vacuum
C993 LW83 C980 pump control
LW81
HW06 LW92
IN
C981
IN C909 C994 IN V43
OUT
C982
P07 C983
LW82
OUT C910 C995 OUT C997
LW97
C996
HW07 LW93 LW94

HW08
C911
C102
Water inlet OUT1 OUT2 IN
JS43
V01
Water supply
C101 module
FL13
High-concentration Outlet
waste tank
6.2.6 ISE Hydropneumatic Unit

The ISE Hydropneumatic unit is capable of:
Pipetting sample via the sample probe.
Providing negative pressure for degassing of the ISE module.
Monitoring pressure.
Controlling pressure.
Giving an alarm for overpressure or low pressure.
The waste fluid produced by the ISE module is grouped as high concentration.
This unit does not include the fluidic system integrated with the ISE module. The
schematic diagram of the ISE Hydropneumatic unit is as shown below.
6-11
Figure 6.6 Fluidic diagram of ISE Module
I04
C702 C703
M1008
V21
C704
C705
I05
C706
I06
C707
P12
I03 I02
ISE vacuum
PRE02
C701
Pressure I01
detection
ISE vacuum
board
ISE module
ISE buffer
ISE waste
HW01
CAN04
Buffer tank
C901
6.2.7 Other
The Hydropneumatic system of the instrument contains 6 external interfaces, as
shown in the figure below. Where,
Two fluidic outlets: used for discharging high-/low-concentration waste.
One fluidic inlet: used for supplying deionized water.
One pneumatic outlet: used for connecting the external vacuum pump.
Two control cable connectors: used for connecting the external vacuum pump
and high-concentration waste level sense device.
Figure 6.7 External fluidic interfaces
Waste pump provided
Fluidic interfaces Vacuum pump for selection
Waste tank provided
No. Name
1 Low-con. waste outlet 3 4
3 High-conc. waste outlet
4 High-conc. waste sensor
6 DI water inlet
7 Vacuum pump interface
8 Vacuum pump control 7 8
Std.
Legend
Waste Water
1 6
Optional Vacuum Sensor
6-12
6.3 Introduction of Fluidic Actions
6.3.1 Auto Water Supply

The auto water supply function enables the water tank to be filled automatically.
Conditions to start water supplying: The water supply unit starts supplying water
once detecting the OFF signal of floater FL01, which means the Water Tank Empty
floater is disconnected and the fluid level decreases below the floater.
Procedure: The inlet valve V01 is turned on and kept till the conditions for ending
water supplying are met. If no conditions are detected to end water supplying, the
valve V01 is kept on.
Conditions to end water supplying: When one of the following conditions is met, the
inlet valve V01 is turned off to end water supplying:
ON signal of the floater FL04 is detected, which means Water Tank Full floater
is connected and the fluid level raises the floater.
The time of water supplying exceeds 45 minutes, and the floater FL01 is ON.
If none of the above conditions are detected, FL01 is always OFF, and the water
supplying reaches 24 hours, the instrument will turn off the water supply switch
(valve V01) and turn it on again after 10 minutes.
6.3.2 Auto Dilution Procedure

In order to ensure the auto dilution ratio 1:50, the following control methods are
adopted:
Dilution conditions: Dilution is started if one of the following conditions is met.
OFF signal of the floater FL06 is detected.
No water tank empty alarm is triggered.
No concentrated wash solution tank empty alarm is triggered.
Dilution procedure:
Pump P03 is turned on and kept. If it is already on, the next step continues.
When P03 is turned on (If it is already on, dilution starts directly), the dilution
valve V20 is turned on to allow deionized water in the water tank flow into the
diluted wash solution tank. After a period, pump P05 is turned on for specified
time to allow the concentrated wash solution to flow into the diluted wash
solution tank.
Conditions to end dilution:
Dilution is ended when one of the following conditions is met. Whether to turn off
P03 and P06 after dilution is determined by the pump control instructions. If they
are needed in other control procedures, they will be kept on; otherwise, they will be
turned off after dilution.
Normal ending:
6-13
When an ON signal of the floater FL09 is detected, the dilution will be ended after
the above period is finished.
Abnormal ending:
Dilution will be ended abnormally when one of the following conditions is met:
Water tank empty alarm is triggered.
Concentrated wash solution tank empty alarm is triggered.
No matter if the current dilution period is over or not, the concentrated wash
solution pump P05 and dilution valve V20 are switched off directly.
Abnormal ending: The dilution time exceeds 82 minutes, and the floater FL06 is ON.
6.3.3 Cuvette Wash

Cuvette wash is a series of timing actions, controlling valves and the wash station to
wash cuvettes in a period of 3.6 second. It is completed by cooperating with periodic
rotating of the reaction carousel.
The BS-2000M1 provides three cuvette wash modes: normal wash, deionized water
wash, and emptying fluid residual.
Dirty cuvettes are washed through the complete 8 phases. A dirty cuvette is
considered clean only after passing through a complete 8-phase wash procedure as
well as cuvette blank test.
Each cuvette is washed for 8 times on the BS-2000M1, while each cuvette position
go forwards for 9 times (with one position missed during phase 6 and 7). See the
figure below:
Figure 6.8 Continuous washing of cuvettes
Alkaline Alkaline
Deionized Deionized Deionized Deionized
wash wash Wipe Wipe
water water water water
solution solution
Cuvette wash is performed in period, which is 3.6 seconds, and it goes continuously.
During the wash process, the deionized water circulating pump, diluted wash solution
pump and vacuum pump are kept on.
After normal wash of cuvettes, the cuvettes of phase 1 and 2 may have wash
solution residual, and those of phase 3-6 may have deionized water left. If not
cleared immediately, the remaining wash solution will become crystallized in cuvettes
and affect their performance. "Deionized water wash" is to stop injection of wash
solution after the normal wash procedure and use deionized water to rinse the
cuvette, in order to eliminating the influence of wash solution residual on the
6-14
cuvettes' performance.
After deionized water wash, the wash solution residual in cuvettes is cleared, but little
deionized water remains. In this condition, the "emptying fluid residual" procedure
starts to clear the remaining deionized water in cuvettes.
Cuvette Wash Procedure
One restrictive valve is employed to control the water flow of inner and outer
wash probes in phase 1 and 2. It is adjusted before product delivery and may
need readjustment later due to pressure drift.
During the wash process, valves V22 to V33 are turned on when the wash
station lowers down to the bottom of cuvettes; wash solution and deionized
water are dispensed by phase 1-6 wash probes respectively under the action of
pumps P06 and P03 till the wash station raises.
While the wash station lowers down, valves V37-V39 are turned on, and turned
off when the wash station raises.
6.3.4 Establish Vacuum

The system judges if the current primary vacuum pressure is within 10KPa.
If yes, the next step continues.
If not, the Release Vacuum instruction is executed.
Valves V37-V42 are turned on, and after specified time, the external vacuum pump
P10 (optional) is turned on.
The primary vacuum pumps P08 and P14 are turned on, and after specified time, the
valves V37-V42 are turned off.
6.3.5 Release Vacuum

Implemented by the wash unit:
The primary vacuum pumps P08 and P14 and external vacuum pump P10 are
disconnected from power supply.
Valves V37-V42 are turned on.
The above valves are turned off after turned on for 5 seconds.
After turning on/off valves, the system judges if the current primary vacuum
pressure is within 10KPa.
If not, an alarm is given indicating releasing vacuum failure, and the Release
Vacuum instruction is ended.
If yes, the instruction is ended.
6.3.6 Emptying Primary Vacuum Container

The system judges if the current primary vacuum pressure is within 10KPa.
If not, the Release Vacuum instruction is executed.
6-15
V43 and P07 are turned on. V43 is turned off after 30 seconds and P07 is turned off
after 6 seconds.
6.3.7 Fluidic Initialization

Fluidic initialization is:
executed during startup process to switch the hydropneumatic system to Standby
status.
executed in the event of failure to switch the hydropneumatic system to Standby
status.
executed during waking up process to switch the hydropneumatic system to
Standby status.
The specific procedure is described below:
1. Pumps and valves are powered off for resetting.
All fluidic pumps and valves are powered off.
2. Emptying primary vacuum container
This process is same as Emptying Primary Vacuum Container in section 6.3.6 .
3. Checking floater status
The system checks the status of the water tank, wash solution tank, concentrated
wash solution tank, high-concentration waste collector, low-concentration waste
collector, and primary vacuum container, and checks if the fluidic alarm has been
removed.
If not, the alarm is given again. The fluidic initialization fails.
4. Recovering floater logic error
If the system gives an alarm indicating floater logic error and enters the Failure status,
this step can be performed after floater maintenance to recover the failure.
5. Establish Vacuum
This process is same as Establish Vacuum in section 6.3.4 .
6. Starting water quality check
7. Preparation before fluidic prime:
a) Waste pump P07 is turned on.
b) Preheating of the whole unit is turned off.
c) Auto dilution is turned off, and then deionized water circulating pump P03 is
turned off.
8. Executing Fluidic Prime
9. Ending actions of fluidic initialization:
1) System vacuum is released.
6-16
2) Auto water supply is turned on.
3) Auto dilution is turned on.
4) Whole unit degassing control and pressure check is turned on.
5) Waste pump P07 is turned off.
6.3.8 ISE Fluidic Initialization

Prerequisite of ISE fluidic initialization: An ISE module has been installed.
(When the ISE module executes the Home instruction independently to restore
systematically, P07 is turned on, and then turned off after the instruction is finished.)
ISE degassing vacuum control and pressure check is turned on, and the alarm
monitoring of ISE degassing vacuum is started. When ISE degassing pressure check
is turned on for 45 seconds during the restoring process, the system checks if ISE
degassing pressure check has been turned on. If not, ISE restore fails and following
instructions will not be executed; otherwise, the following instructions will continue.
6-17
6.4 Removing and Installing Hydropneumatic
Components
This section describes removing and installation methods of the Hydropneumatic
components, and provides schematic diagrams and pictures of the components for
service engineers to refer.
6.4.1 Overview
When an alarm is displayed on the operating software, you can analyze the
instrument status and finally locate the failure source, and if necessary, replace the
failed part or component.
Prior to removing Hydropneumatic components, make sure that all pumps and
solenoid valves of the Hydropneumatic system have been turned off, and both the
analyzer power switch and main power switch have been placed to the OFF position.
Table 6.1 Necessary tools for removing/installing Hydropneumatic components

Name Requirement Quantity
Hexagon / 1
screwdriver
Flathead / 1
screwdriver
Strap / Several
Diagonal pliers / 1
Tube cutter / 1
6-18
6.4.2 Probe/Mixer Wash Unit
Figure 6.9 Location of probe/mixer wash unit
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10
6-19
Table 6.2 FRU materials of precise sampling unit
No. Material name (FRU) FRU Code Remark
1 Pressure gauge assembly (with 801-BA80-00077-00

connector)
2 Clog detection 3-way tube 801-BA40-00139-00
assembly
3 Syringe 250l 3101-10-69301
4 Probe interior wash pump 801-BA80-00080-00

assembly
5 Degasser assembly 082-000379-00
6 Syringe 1ml 801-BA80-00047-00

7 Probe interior wash return 115-005650-00
valve assembly
8 Probe interior wash valve 115-014420-00
assembly
9 Degassing valve assembly 801-BA80-00155-00
10 Degassing vacuum pump 801-BA80-00081-00

assembly
6-20
6.4.3 Cuvette Wash Unit
Figure 6.10 Location of cuvette wash unit
1 23
6-21
5 6
Table 6.3 FRU materials of cuvette wash unit
No. Material name FRU code and Remark
material code
1 Concentrated wash solution pump 801-BA80-00096-00
2 Deionized water circulating pump 801-BA80-00095-00
3 Wash valve assembly 115-014420-00 Used for
washing probe
interior, with
bracket
different from
BA80
4 Diluted wash solution pump 801-BA80-00097-00
5 Cuvette wash valve assembly (with 801-BA80-00086-00
connector)
6 Whole unit preheating assembly 115-014309-00
(220V)
Removing/Installing Wash Probe Assembly

When to do
When fluid overflows the cuvettes or the dispensed cleaning fluid is less than the
normal volume, probably a wash probe is clogged and needs to be removed and
unclogged.
Steps
Manually loosen the retaining screws on the wash probe bracket.
Remove the wash probe assembly and place it in a container.
Remove the dispense valves and vacuum valves, and then locate the clogged
wash probe.
6-22
Use a needle to unclog the probe.
Installation Procedure
Align the locating holes on the wash probe assembly with the stop studs on the
bracket, and then slightly tighten the retaining screws.
Slightly lower the wash probe assembly, and adjust its horizontal position on
inner and outer rings of the reaction carousel through the Alignment screen.
Use the alignment tool BA2K-J09 to check the position of the wash probe of
phase 1 and wipe blocks of phase 7 and 8 in reaction cuvettes. Ensure the wash
probe and wipe blocks can smoothly enter the holes on the alignment tool
without deflection.
After finishing the second step, completely tighten the retaining screws on the
wash probe assembly.
NOTE
Operate carefully to prevent liquid from dropping into the reaction carousel and
cuvettes.
Removing/Installing Pumps
When to do
The pump does not work, that is, there is no flow or pressure.
The pump flow and pressure is low.
The pump has leaks.
Noise is produced when the pump is working.
Steps
Disconnect the pumps power cord connector.
Mark the connection mode of the inlet and outlet tubes and prevent them from
being confused.
Remove the tubes and apply straps on their openings to prevent liquid from
entering the instrument.
Loosen the screws on the pump and then remove the pump.
Connect the inlet and outlet tubes according to the marks and then tighten the
tube clamps.
Tighten the retaining screws to fix the pump.
Make sure that the power cord of the DC pump is connected correctly.
In the case of an AC pump, ensure that the grounding wire has been connected
with the instrument's framework.
6-23
NOTE
Exercise caution to avoid confusing the gas tube with the fluidic tube, and the inlet
tube with the outlet tube.
Do not reverse the positive and negative terminals of a DC pump; ensure the AC
pump has been grounded properly.
Removing/Installing Solenoid Valves

When to do
When a solenoid valve cannot be turned on or has leaks, it needs to be removed and
then analyzed or replaced.
Steps
Disconnect the solenoid valves power cord connector.
Mark the installation direction of the valve and the connection mode of the inlet
and outlet tubes to prevent them from being confused.
After removing the tubes, apply straps on their openings to prevent liquid from
entering the instrument.
Loosen the screws on the solenoid valve and then remove the solenoid valve.
Check the installation direction according to the marks, connect the inlet and
outlet tubes, and then tighten the tube clamps or straps.
Tighten the retaining screws to fix the solenoid valve.
Ensure the power cord of the solenoid valve is connected correctly without
reversing the positive and negative poles.
If the solenoid valve has a grounding wire, check if the grounding wire has been
connected with the instrument's frame work.
Removing/Installing Cuvette Wash Preheating Assembly

When to do
The heater is damaged.
The temperature sensor is damaged.
The temperature protection switch is damaged.
The preheating cylinder is leaking.
The connectors are leaking.
Removing steps
Disconnect the power supply.
Open the rear panel.
Mark the connection modes of the following parts: inlet/outlet tubes, heaters,
sensors and temperature protection switches for wash solution and deionized
water.
Disconnect the connectors of the heaters, sensors and protection switches.
6-24
Loosen the grounding screws.
Loosen the two hexagon socket head screws on the cuvette wash preheating
assembly.
Apply straps on the tube openings to prevent liquid from flowing out.
Disconnect the inlet and outlet tubes.
Installation steps
Prepare a new cuvette wash preheating assembly.
Connect the tubes according to the marks.
Use hexagon socket head screws to fix the preheating assembly.
Connect the power connectors according to the marks.
Install the grounding wire.
Check if the installation is complete.
Restore the instrument.
NOTE
Operate carefully to prevent liquid from entering the instrument.
Connect the tubes and connectors correctly.
Exercise caution to distinguish the 110V preheating assembly with the 220V
preheating assembly.
Removing/Installing Whole Unit Preheating Assembly

When to do
The temperature sensor is damaged.
The temperature protection switch is damaged.
The preheating cylinder is leaking.
Removing steps
Disconnect the power supply.
Open the rear panel.
Disconnect the connectors of the heaters, sensors and protection switches.
Loosen the three screws on the whole unit preheating assembly.
Apply strap on the tube openings to prevent liquid from flowing out.
Installation steps
Fix the whole unit preheating assembly.
6-25
Connect the power connectors according to the marks.
NOTE
Figure 6.11 Whole unit preheating assembly
Heater
Sensor
Protection
Outlet
switch
Inlet
6-26
6.4.4 Water Supply Unit
Figure 6.12 Location of water supply unit
1 234 5
6 7 8
6-27
9
Table 6.4 FRU materials of water supply unit

No. Material name FRU code and material Remark
code
1 Concentrated wash solution 801-BA80-00018-01
sensor assembly
2 MR buffer solution (for ISE /
module)
3 Deionized water filter assembly 801-BA80-00019-00
4 Water tank assembly 801-BA80-00011-00
5 Water tank fluid level sensor 801-BA80-00012-01

assembly
6 Inlet valve assembly 801-BA80-00094-00
7 Wash solution tank assembly 115-014500-00
8 Diluted wash solution level sensor 115-014501-00

assembly
9 Ball valve assembly (with bracket) 801-BA80-00079-00
Removing/Installing Water Tank

When to do
The water tank should be maintained regularly.
6-28
Steps
Turn off the ball valve.
Find the water tank floater cable connector on the front panel of the instrument
and then unplug it. Remove the floater and store it properly to prevent damage.
Disconnect the CPC quick connector from the lower part of the water tank,
slightly pull out the water tank, and then remove the tube from it.
Apply strap on the tubes opening or place the tube in a container to prevent
liquid from entering the instrument.
Pull out the water tank from the instrument and then clean it.
Install the floater and water tank.
Insert the tube into the bottom of the water tank and adjust the tube to prevent
tangling.
Plug the floater connector into the front panel of the instrument.
Connect the CPC quick connector with the water tank.
Turn on the ball valve.
The deionized water filter assembly (115-005402-00) includes one material shown in
the table below:
Table 6.5 Deionized water filter assembly

code
1 Stainless steel filter core 082-000371-00 1
Removing/Installing Deionized Water Filter

When to do
The deionized water filter should be maintained regularly.
Steps
Turn off the ball valve.
Disconnect the CPC quick connectors and then take out the filter.
Open the filter, and then clean it or replace the filter core.
Note: While removing the filter, exercise caution to prevent getting injured by
the filter bracket and prevent liquid inside the filter from spraying out.
Install the filter.
Fix the filter on the bracket according to the direction indicates on the
instrument panel.
Connect the CPC quick connectors at the top and bottom of the filter.
Turn on the ball valve.
6-29
The deionized water tube assembly (115-005412-00) contains one FRU as
described in the table below.
Table 6.6 FRU materials of water tank filter assembly

1 Water tank filter 801-BA80-00087-00

assembly
Figure 6.13 Structure of external water supply module
The external water supply module contains the following FRUs.
Table 6.7 FRU materials of external water supply module

code
1 Pressure switch. 801-BA80-00145-00
PS31-30-4MNB-B-SP-RB-FS3.5BAR
R(FRU)
2 Sealing ring, O-shape, 844, 801-BA80-00161-00
silicon gel, A65 semi-transparent
(FRU)
3 Buffer tank assembly for water 801-BA80-00144-00
supply module
4 External water inlet filter 801-BA80-00170-00
6-30
6.4.5 Waste Unit
Figure 6.14 Location of waste unit
1
2
6 7 8
9 10
6-31
Table 6.8 FRU materials of waste unit
1 Low-concentration secondary 115-014393-00

vacuum waste container assembly
2 High-concentration secondary 115-014392-00
vacuum waste container assembly
3 Secondary vacuum release valve 115-014518-00
assembly
4 Primary vacuum container 115-005625-00
assembly
5 Vacuum pump assembly 801-BA80-00082-00
6 Waste pump assembly 801-BA80-00083-00
7 Secondary vacuum suction valve 801-BA80-00085-00
assembly
8 Waste discharge valve assembly 801-BA80-00004-00
9 Low-concentration waste container 801-BA80-00111-00

assembly
10 High-concentration waste 801-BA80-00110-00
container assembly
Removing/Installing Primary/Secondary Vacuum Containers

When to do
When the containers have leaks or need to be maintained regularly.
Removing steps
Confirm and record all tubes connected with the container, and distinguish the
inlet tube from the outlet tube.
Remove the tubes, and then apply straps on the tube openings to prevent liquid
inside the tubes from spraying out.
Use a screwdriver to remove the container.
Replace or maintain the container.
Installation steps
Connect the inlet and outlet tubes according to the recorded connection mode,
and then tighten the tube clamps or straps.
Fix the container on the instrument.
When the instrument is used at an altitude greater than 2000m, an external
vacuum pump module is required to ensure the cuvette wash effects. The
external vacuum pump assembly is as shown below.
6-32
Figure 6.15 Structure of external vacuum pump
Vacuum pump Pressure gauge
Control board
Gas interface
Gas control interface
Power switch
Power socket
Silencing filter
The external high-concentration waste assembly (115-005661-00) contains one FRU

as shown in the table below.
Table 6.9 FRU materials of external high-concentration waste assembly

material code
1 External high-concentration waste 801-BA80-00114-00
sensor assembly
6-33
6.4.6 ISE Hydropneumatic Unit
Figure 6.16 Location of ISE Hydropneumatic unit
6-34
4
Table 6.10 FRU materials of ISE Hydropneumatic unit

material code
1 Rotational diaphragm pump 801-BA34-00001-00
assembly
2 ISE degassing valve 801-BA40-00214-00
3 Degassing membrane (FRU) 801-BA80-00213-00
4 ISE level detection sensor (FRU) 801-BA80-00212-00
6-35
6.5 List of Hydropneumatic Materials
6.5.1 Pump
Table 6.11 Pump FRU
No. Name Code
P02 Refrigeration 801-BA80-00154-00
circulating pump
P03 Deionized water 801-BA80-00095-00
circulating pump
P04 Probe interior wash 801-BA80-00080-00
pump assembly 1
P05 Concentrated wash 801-BA80-00096-00
solution pump
P06 Diluted wash solution 801-BA80-00097-00
pump assembly
P07 Waste pump assembly 801-BA80-00083-00
P08 Vacuum pump 801-BA80-00082-00
assembly 1
P09 Degassing vacuum 801-BA80-00081-00
pump assembly
P10 External vacuum pump 082-000354-00
(optional)
P11 Water inlet pump 009-000873-00
(optional)
P12 ISE degassing pump 801-BA34-00001-00
P13 Probe interior wash 801-BA80-00080-00
pump assembly 2
P14 Vacuum pump 801-BA80-00082-00
assembly 2
Pictures of pump:
Figure 6.17 Picture 1 of pump
P03
P02
P04/P13
6-36
P05 P06
P08
P14
P07
P12
P09
6.5.2 Solenoid Valve

Table 6.12 Solenoid valve FRU
No. Name Code
V01 Inlet solenoid valve assembly 801-BA80-00094-00
V02 Probe interior wash valve assembly (S1) 115-014420-00
V03 Probe interior wash valve assembly (S2) 115-014420-00

V04 Probe interior wash valve assembly (R11) 115-014420-00
V08 Probe interior wash return valve assembly 1 115-005650-00
V09 Probe interior wash return valve assembly 2 115-005650-00
V10 Wash valve assembly (S) 115-014417-00
V11 Wash valve assembly (R11) 115-014417-00
6-37
No. Name Code
V15 Cuvette wash valve assembly with connector 801-BA80-00086-00
(for phase-2 wash of reagent mixers)
(for phase-2 wash of sample mixers)
(for phase-1 wash of reagent mixers)
(for phase-1 wash of sample mixers)
V19 Degassing valve assembly 801-BA80-00155-00
V20 6128A valve assembly with connector (dilution 115-014507-00
valve)
V21 ISE degassing vacuum valve 801-BA40-00214-00
(for phase-12A dispensing of cuvette wash)
V34 Waste drain valve assembly (for 801-BA80-00004-00
high-concentration waste)
low-concentration waste A)
low-concentration waste B)
6-38
No. Name Code
V37 Secondary vacuum suction valve assembly (for 801-BA80-00085-00
high-concentration waste)
low-concentration waste A)
low-concentration waste B)
V40 6128A vacuum release valve assembly with 115-014518-00
connector (for high-concentration waste)
connector (for low-concentration waste A)
connector (for low-concentration waste B)
V43 Waste drain valve assembly (for vacuum 801-BA80-00004-00
container)
Pictures of solenoid valve:

Figure 6.20 Pictures of solenoid valve
V08
V09
V01
V02-V07
V19 V34-V39
V43
V10 and V20 V11-V18

V40-V42 V21-V33
6.5.3 Restrictive Valve

Table 6.13 List of restrictive valves
No. Name Code
HV01 Ball valve M6Q-020027---
HV02 Circulating water 115-006999-00
restrictive valve
HV03 Wash solution 115-006999-00
restrictive valve
HV04 Sample probe wash 115-014381-00
restrictive valve
HV05 Auto dilution 115-014381-00
restrictive valve
6-39
No. Name Code
HV06 Cuvette wash 115-014381-00
restrictive valve
6.5.4 Connector and Conversion Tube

Table 6.14 List of connectors and conversion tubes
No. Name Code
C101 Inlet connector 041-001262-00
C102 Inlet connector 041-001262-00
C103 12 barbed connector 043-000492-00
Sealing ring, O-shape, 13.21.8, EPDM, A70, black 082-000323-00
C107 Connector, PP, 3/8" NPT, HFCD10612 082-000306-00
Connector, elbow, PP,1/2" ID, HFCD23812 082-000307-00
C120 Connector, elbow, 500Barb, 1/2"ID, Natural PP M6Q-030067---
C122 1/2 to 5/8 barbed connector 041-001371-00
C140 Connector, G1/4, 6, gas tube 082-000343-00
C141 Connector, right-angle, 3109-06-10 M6Q-030020---
C201 Connector, thread 1/8-27NPT, 7/16"Hex, 1/4"ID M90-100073---
6-40
No. Name Code
C203 3/8 barbed connector 043-000660-00
C210 Connector, L, 200Barb, 1/4"ID, 1/8-27 NPT, Natural 082-000311-00
PP
PP
C213 Connector, flangeless nut, black delrin, 1/4-28UNF M6Q-030065---
Connector, P-343, Flangeless Ferrule, 3mmOD, ETFE 082-000319-00
C220 Connector, P-208, Flangeless nut, 1/16", Black 0040-10-32304
Connector, P-200N, Flangeless Ferrule, 1/16", ETFE 0040-10-32305
Tube clamp, FERRULE, FLANGELESS, 2.5mm, ETFE, M6Q-120021---
NATURAL
6-41
No. Name Code
NATURAL
PP
PP
NATURAL
6-42
No. Name Code
NATURAL
C272 Connector, 3175-06-10 M6Q-030015---
C273 Connector, 3175-06-10 M6Q-030015---
C274 Connector, tube to tube, 3106-06-00 M6Q-030059---
C232 Connector, SS, 1/4-28, 1/8"BORE 082-000318-00
Stainless steel washer, 0.134X0.2X0.062 030-000112-00
C226 Tube retaining bolt BA30-20-06758
Diba 071-153-031SSWasher, 10-32, stainless steel 0040-10-32306
washer
C256 Tube retaining bolt BA30-20-06758
Diba 071-153-031SSWasher, 10-32, stainless steel 0040-10-32306
washer
6-43
No. Name Code
C302 Connector, Tee, classic, 1/4"ID, Natural PP 082-000310-00
C303 Connector, Y, 200Barb, 1/4"ID, Natural PP 082-000309-00
C307 Connector, straight, 6mm, G1/8 external thread M6Q-030109---
Tube plug, 3126-06-00 M6Q-120001---
C308 Connector, 1/8-27NPT, 200Barb, 1/8ID, white 082-000182-00
C311 Connector, Straight, Classic, 1/4"&1/8"ID, PP M6Q-030061---
PP
C320 Connector, Barbed Adapt, 1/4-28UNF, 1/8"ID, ETFE 0040-10-32302
C341 Connector, Y, 200Barb, 1/8"ID, PP M6Q-030043---
6-44
No. Name Code
C385 Connector, straight, 600Barb, 1/2"&1/4"ID, PP 082-000308-00
C386 Connector, straight, 500Barb, 1/4ID, PP 082-000377-00
C387 Connector, straight, 500Barb, 1/4ID, PP 082-000377-00
C389 Connector, Tee, 600Barbs, 1/2"ID, Natural PP M6Q-030101---
C391 1/2 plug 041-001903-00
Tube plug, 3126-06-00 M6Q-120001---
J501 Conversion tube (3mm-5mm) 049-000213-00
6-45
No. Name Code
C430 Connector, right-angle, 3199-06-10G1/8 M6Q-030102---
Tube plug, 3126-06-00 M6Q-120001---
6-46
No. Name Code
NATURAL
NATURAL
NATURAL
NATURAL
6-47
No. Name Code
NATURAL
C593 Tube clamp, FERRULE, FLANGELESS, 2.5mm, ETFE, M6Q-120021---
NATURAL
NATURAL
NATURAL
NATURAL
NATURAL
NATURAL
NATURAL
NATURAL
NATURAL
NATURAL
NATURAL
NATURAL
NATURAL
6-48
No. Name Code
NATURAL
NATURAL
NATURAL
NATURAL
NATURAL
NATURAL
NATURAL
NATURAL
NATURAL
J101 Conversion tube for washing cuvettes 049-000428-00
6-49
No. Name Code
C704 Connector, split, 1/4-28UNF1/16"barb 082-000115-00
C706 Connector, split, 1/4-28UNF1/16"barb 082-000115-00
C901 Connector, elbow, PP,1/2" ID, HFCD23812 082-000307-00
Connector, tube to tube, ID1/2"HFCD17812 082-000503-00
C830 Connector, L-shape, G1/410, gas tube 082-000342-00
C831 Connector, T-shape, G1/410, gas tube 082-000419-00
PP
PP
C845 Connector, Y-shape, 3140-10-00 M6Q-030080---
PP
6-50
No. Name Code
C861 Connector, right-angle, 3199-06-10G1/8 M6Q-030102---
C870 Connector, T piece, 6OD, 3104-06-00 M6Q-030064---
C902 1/2 plug 041-001903-00
C909 Rc1/8 thread 6.5mm, barbed connector 041-001369-00
C912 Waste connector weld 042-002313-00
C941 Connector, Y, 600Barbs, 1/2"ID, PP M6Q-030096---
6-51
No. Name Code
C997 Waste connector weld 042-002313-00
6-52
6.5.5 Tube
No. Tube ID Product No. No. Tube ID Product No. No. Tube ID Product No.
1 D01 082-000357-00 27 D36 082-000316-00 53 I03 M6G-020026---
2 D02 M6G-020047--- 28 D37 082-000316-00 54 I04 M6G-020026---
3 D03 M6G-020047--- 29 D38 0040-10-32301 55 I05 M6G-020009---
4 D04 082-000312-00 30 D39 082-000316-00 56 I06 082-000314-00
5 D05 082-000312-00 31 D40 M6G-020049--- 57 I07 082-000314-00
6 D06 082-000316-00 32 D41 082-000316-00 58 JS01 082-000313-00
7 D07 082-000316-00 33 D42 082-000316-00 59 JS02 082-000313-00
8 D08 082-000316-00 34 D43 082-000316-00 60 JS03 082-000356-00
9 D09 M90-000026--- 35 D44 M6G-020049--- 61 JS04 082-000356-00
10 D10 082-000316-00 36 D45 082-000316-00 62 JS05 082-000356-00
11 D11 082-000316-00 37 D46 082-000316-00 63 JS06 082-000356-00
12 D12 0040-10-32301 38 DG01 M6G-020026--- 64 JS07 082-000315-00
13 D13 082-000316-00 39 DG02 M6G-020026--- 65 JS08 082-000315-00
14 D14 M6G-020049--- 40 DG03 M6G-020026--- 66 JS09 082-000356-00
15 D15 082-000316-00 41 DG04 M6G-020026--- 67 JS10 082-000356-00
16 D16 082-000316-00 42 DG05 M6G-020026--- 68 JS11 082-000356-00
17 D17 082-000316-00 43 HW01 082-000305-00 69 JS12 082-000356-00
18 D18 M6G-020049--- 44 HW02 082-000305-00 70 JS13 082-000356-00
19 D19 082-000316-00 45 HW03 082-000305-00 71 JS14 082-000356-00
20 D20 082-000316-00 46 HW04 082-000305-00 72 JS15 082-000356-00
21 D30 082-000312-00 47 HW05 082-000305-00 73 JS20 M6G-020026---
22 D31 082-000312-00 48 HW06 082-000357-00 74 LW01 082-000305-00
23 D32 082-000316-00 49 HW07 082-000357-00 75 LW02 082-000305-00
6-53
24 D33 082-000316-00 50 HW08 082-000305-00 76 LW03 082-000305-00
25 D34 082-000316-00 51 I01 M6G-020046--- 77 LW04 082-000305-00
26 D35 M90-000026--- 52 I02 M6G-020026--- 78 LW05 082-000305-00
79 LW06 082-000305-00 105 LW55 082-000305-00 131 RU20 082-000305-00
80 LW07 082-000305-00 106 LW60 082-000305-00 132 RU21 082-000312-00
81 LW08 082-000305-00 107 LW61 082-000305-00 133 RU24 082-000312-00
82 LW09 082-000305-00 108 LW62 082-000305-00 134 RU25 082-000305-00
83 LW20 082-000305-00 109 LW63 082-000305-00 135 RU26 082-000305-00
84 LW21 082-000305-00 110 LW64 082-000305-00 136 RU27 082-000305-00
85 LW22 082-000305-00 111 LW70 082-000357-00 137 RU28 082-000305-00
86 LW30 082-000305-00 112 LW71 082-000305-00 138 WQ01 082-000357-00
87 LW31 082-000305-00 113 LW72 082-000305-00 139 WQ02 082-000357-00
88 LW32 082-000305-00 114 LW80 082-000305-00 140 WQ03 082-000357-00
89 LW35 082-000305-00 115 LW81 082-000305-00 141 WQ04 082-000357-00
90 LW36 082-000305-00 116 LW82 082-000305-00 142 WQ05 082-000314-00
91 LW37 082-000305-00 117 LW83 082-000305-00 143 WQ06 082-000314-00
92 LW38 082-000305-00 118 LW90 082-000305-00 144 WQ07 082-000357-00
93 LW40 082-000305-00 119 LW91 082-000305-00 145 WQ10 082-000314-00
94 LW41 082-000305-00 120 LW92 082-000357-00 146 WQ11 082-000314-00
95 LW42 082-000305-00 121 LW93 082-000357-00 147 WQ12 082-000314-00
96 LW43 082-000305-00 122 LW94 082-000305-00 148 WQ13 082-000314-00
97 LW44 082-000305-00 123 RU01 082-000305-00 149 WQ14 082-000314-00
98 LW45 082-000305-00 124 RU02 082-000305-00 150 WQ15 082-000314-00
99 LW46 082-000305-00 125 RU03 082-000305-00 151 WQ16 082-000314-00
100 LW50 082-000305-00 126 RU04 082-000305-00 152 WQ17 082-000314-00
6-54
101 LW51 082-000305-00 127 RU05 082-000305-00 153 WQ20 082-000314-00
102 LW52 082-000305-00 128 RU10 082-000305-00 154 WQ21 082-000314-00
103 LW53 082-000305-00 129 RU11 082-000305-00 155 WQ22 082-000314-00
104 LW54 082-000305-00 130 RU12 082-000305-00 156 WQ23 082-000314-00
157 WQ24 082-000314-00 183 ZK71 082-000427-00 209 ZQ35 082-000314-00
158 WQ30 082-000314-00 184 ZK72 082-000357-00 210 ZQ36 082-000314-00
159 WQ31 082-000314-00 185 ZK73 082-000427-00 211 ZQ42 082-000314-00
160 WQ32 082-000314-00 186 ZK77 082-000427-00 212 ZQ43 082-000314-00
161 WQ33 082-000314-00 187 ZQ01 082-000356-00 213 ZQ44 082-000314-00
162 WQ40 082-000314-00 188 ZQ02 082-000357-00 214 ZQ45 082-000314-00
163 WQ41 082-000314-00 189 ZQ03 082-000357-00 215 ZQ46 082-000314-00
164 WQ42 082-000314-00 190 ZQ04 082-000357-00 216 ZQ50 082-000356-00
165 WQ43 082-000314-00 191 ZQ05 082-000356-00 217 ZQ51 082-000356-00
166 WQ50 082-000314-00 192 ZQ06 082-000356-00 218 ZQ52 082-000357-00
167 WQ51 082-000314-00 193 ZQ07 082-000357-00 219 ZQ53 082-000314-00
168 WQ52 082-000314-00 194 ZQ11 082-000314-00 220 ZQ54 082-000314-00
169 WQ53 082-000314-00 195 ZQ12 082-000314-00 221 ZQ55 082-000314-00
170 ZK40 M6G-020026--- 196 ZQ13 082-000314-00 222 ZQ56 082-000314-00
171 ZK41 M6G-020026--- 197 ZQ14 082-000314-00 223 ZQ57 082-000314-00
172 ZK42 M6G-020026--- 198 ZQ15 082-000314-00 224 ZQ58 082-000314-00
173 ZK43 M6G-020026--- 199 ZQ16 082-000314-00 225 ZQ64 082-000314-00
174 ZK50 082-000427-00 200 ZQ22 082-000314-00 226 ZQ65 082-000314-00
175 ZK51 082-000427-00 201 ZQ23 082-000314-00 227 ZQ66 082-000314-00
176 ZK52 082-000357-00 202 ZQ24 082-000314-00 228 ZQ67 082-000314-00
177 ZK53 082-000427-00 203 ZQ25 082-000314-00 229 ZQ68 082-000314-00
6-55
178 ZK60 082-000427-00 204 ZQ26 082-000314-00 230 ZQX11 082-000316-00
179 ZK61 082-000427-00 205 ZQ31 082-000314-00 231 ZQX12 082-000316-00
180 ZK62 082-000357-00 206 ZQ32 082-000314-00 232 ZQX21 M6G-020049---
181 ZK63 082-000427-00 207 ZQ33 082-000314-00 233 ZQX22 M6G-020049---
182 ZK70 082-000427-00 208 ZQ34 082-000314-00 234 ZQX31 M6G-020049---
235 ZQX32 M6G-020049--- 252 ZQZ41 M6G-020049--- 269 ZX24 082-000356-00
236 ZQX41 M6G-020049--- 253 ZQZ42 M6G-020049--- 270 ZX30 M6G-020026---
237 ZQX42 M6G-020049--- 254 ZQZ51 M6G-020049--- 271 ZK01 082-000427-00
238 ZQX51 M6G-020049--- 255 ZQZ52 M6G-020049--- 272 ZK10 082-000427-00
239 ZQX52 M6G-020049--- 256 ZQZ61 M6G-020049--- 273 ZK11 M6G-020026---
240 ZQX61 M6G-020049--- 257 ZQZ62 M6G-020049--- 274 ZK12 M6G-020026---
241 ZQX62 M6G-020049--- 258 ZX01 082-000357-00 275 ZK13 M6G-020026---
242 ZQX71 M6G-020049--- 259 ZX02 082-000357-00 276 ZK14 M6G-020026---
243 ZQX72 M6G-020049--- 260 ZX03 082-000314-00 277 ZK15 M6G-020026---
244 ZQX81 M6G-020049--- 261 ZX04 082-000314-00 278 ZK16 M6G-020026---
245 ZQX82 M6G-020049--- 262 ZX10 082-000316-00 279 ZK20 082-000427-00
246 ZQZ11 M6G-020049--- 263 ZX11 082-000316-00 280 ZK21 M6G-020026---
247 ZQZ12 M6G-020049--- 264 ZX12 082-000316-00 281 ZK22 M6G-020026---
248 ZQZ21 M6G-020049--- 265 ZX20 082-000356-00 282 ZK23 M6G-020026---
249 ZQZ22 M6G-020049--- 266 ZX21 082-000356-00 283 ZK24 M6G-020026---
250 ZQZ31 M6G-020049--- 267 ZX22 082-000356-00 284 ZK25 M6G-020026---
251 ZQZ32 M6G-020049--- 268 ZX23 082-000356-00 285 ZK26 M6G-020026---
6-56
6.6 Hydropneumatic Diagram
NC
C235
V07
COM NO
C233 C234
I04
PRE08 PRE07 PRE06 C702
M1008
C703
V21
NC C704
C229
P12 Legend
V06
I05 I06 I07
C705
C706 C707
COM NO
C871 C431 C141 ZQZ12-J201
C227 C228 ZQZ22-J202
I03 I02
ZQZ32-J203
ZQZ42-J204 DI water tube Refrigerant tube Restrictor ring
ZQZ52-J205
ZQZ62-J206
NC
C259
C274
Whole unit degassing
vacuum
ISE vacuum Cleaning fluid tube Vacuum tube Conversion tube
V05
DG05 ZQZ11-J101
COM NO SR06 PRE03 PRE02 ZQZ21-J102 Concentrated wash High-concentration
C257 C258 D19 1mL C701 ZQZ31-J103 Filter
SR05
C236 C237
Pressure ZQZ41-J104 solution tube waste tube
D15 1mL detection
I01
ZQZ51-J105 Diluted wash Low-concentration
C230 C231 ISE vacuum ZQZ61-J106
waste tube
NC
C265 SR04 board solution tube
V04
Syringe R22
COM NO D41
C260 1mL C261 Primary vacuum ZQX12-J401
C263 C264
SR03 C872 PRE01 ZQX22-J402
ZQX32-J403
Syringe R21
D45 1mL C267
ZK42 ISE module ZQX42-J404
52A
62A
C266
22A
32A
42A
12A
ZQX52-J405
51A
61A
21A
31A
41A
11A
ZQX62-J406
Syringe R12
ZQX72-J407
SR02
C595
C594
C596
C597
C598
C599
C589
C588
C590
C591
C592
C593
ZQX82-J408
Clog detection ISE buffer ZQX11-J301
NC
C221
D10
C222
D11 250uL 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 ZQX21-J302
Syringe R11
C223 C225
PRE05
C224
ISE waste ZQX31-J303
V03
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 ZQX41-J304
COM NO
ZQX51-J305
C583
C540
C543
C550
C553
C586
C573
C520
C523
C530
C533
C576
C219 C220 ZQX61-J306
HW01
CAN04 ZQX71-J307
Clog detection SR01 ZQX81-J308
Syringe S2
250uL Buffer tank A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
61B
71B
NC
51B
62B
72B
41B
52B
21B
31B
42B
22B
32B
81B
11B
82B
D36
12B
D37
C251 C252 C253
V02
C254 C255 C901

PRE04 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B
C801
C811
C802
C815
C813
C825
C823
C803
C804
C810
C814
C812
C824
C821
C822
C820
COM NO
C249 C250
D32 D12 D46 D42 D16 D20

C902
Syringe S1
D06
D43 C830
D17 C840 C850
D39
C246
C216
D13
D08 D34
C215 C245
D38
High-
M1004
M1003
C244
C214
C213 C243
C256 Low- Low- 11 21 31 41 51 61 71 81 12 22 32 42 52 62 72 82
C226 C268 C262 C232 C238
ZQ36
concentration concentration concentration
ZQ34 ZQ46
C212
C242
ZQ56 ZQ58 ZQ14 ZQ16 ZQ24 ZQ26 ZQ66 ZQ68 ZQ44 ZK70
S1 S2 R11 R12 R21 R22 C522 C532 C542 C552
waste waste secondarywaste secondary
MR22 MR21 MS22 MS21 MR12 MR11 MS12 MS11 V25 V27
D05 D31 C521 C531
V31
C541
V33
C551
secondary vacuum tank vacuum tank
C519
C211 C241
C572 C575 V24 C529 C582 C585
C539
V30
C549
V32
vacuum tank A B
V22 V23 C518 V26 V28 V29
OU OU C538 C548 ZQ45
ZQ35
T T C571 C574 ZQ15 C528 ZQ25 C581 C584 CAN05 CAN06 CAN07 Reagent compartment 1
ZQ55 ZQ57
ZQ13 ZQ23
ZQ65 ZQ67
ZQ33 ZQ43
Reagent compartment 2
V42
V39
C217
P13 P04 C537 C547
IN
IN
C247 IN C517 C527 C853 C852 C851 C854

IN
WQ07 C570 ZK71
V08 V09 LW40 ZQ22 C580 ZQ32 ZQ42
C210 C240 LW43 LW44 LW20 LW30 LW02 LW03 LW21 LW31 LW05 LW06 ZQ12
OUT IN IN OUT
OUT
OUT
C248 C218 LW41 ZK72

C311 LW01
C516 C536
D30 ZK41 ZK43
D09 D33 D07
D35 D04 C941 ZK50 ZK60
ZQ01 C942
D40D44 LW62 RU10
C501
C204
C205
HW03 LW60
D18
D14
M1002
RU20
C203 WQ06 WQ11 WQ13 WQ15 WQ17 C904 IN C920 IN C930 IN
C960
LW42 LW45
C950
C970
C971
WQ23 WQ24
WQ32 WQ33
WQ53 V34 V35 V36
DG01 T341 WQ52
RU05 RU12
V10
V11
V12
V13
V14
C309
C310
C321
C322
C325
C328
C331
C324
C327
C330
C943
WQ43
C905
OUT C921
OUT C931
OUT ZK73
LW50 LW52
V19
OUT IN COM NC C344 C347 WQ42 C382 RU04 C383 C384

C270
P09 C271
DG02
C272 C273 C353 C363
ZQ11 RU11
N
V41
V38
C381 C946 C947 C385
ZQ31
O WQ22 WQ31 C841
D03 WQ10
V16
C843 C842 C844
V15
DG04 WQ12 LW32 LW51 LW53
LW61 LW63 ZK61
DG03
WQ14 C342 C343 C345 C346
IN IN OUT RU03 C948
WQ51 OUT
V18
V17
WQ16 WQ41
V37
V40
LW07 ZK62
WQ20 C352 C351 C362 C361 C833 C832 C831 C834 C870 Small sample compartment
C320
C323
C340
C326
C329
DGS
Throt01 ZK51 ZK63

WQ08
C315
M1005
WQ05 ZK52 LW37 carousel LW36
C380
C951
C922 waste RU02
C511
D02 C302 C972
C307 C341 WQ21 LW08 C845 C391
WQ03
C304 C305
WQ04
C306
M1006
C308 HW02 FL10 High-
C906
C952 RU28
C131 C130 JS14 C129 WQ30 C903
HV04 sample probe wash concentration ZK77 RU01 C390
HV02 circulating WQ02 restrictive valve LW04 waste collector Refrigeration unit
water restrictive valve C509 C510 C973 CAN08 LW64 LW32 ZK40 R27
C202
C303 ZQ06 ZQ07 ZQ08 C907 LW54 C926

RU25
C388 RU23 RU21
JS13
P02 RU26 RU24
C387
LW70
FL11 C835 C860 C861 C862 C389 RU22 C386
C925
C940 C961 ZK01 LW71
Heater 2
CAN15
Heater 1
CAN14
C944 LW01 LW22

500W
1000W
JS15 LW46 Low-concentration C601 ZK03

FL04 C974 waste collector C953 High-concentration waste level
WQ01
D01 LW09 LW38
PRE05
JS20 ZK09
HV06 cuvette wash
C502 restrictive valve C506 C508 C949 CAN09 C927
C140
C201
C301
`
JS12 C503 C504 C505 C507 LW55 LW72 ZK01

ZQ02 ZQ03 M1010 ZQ04 ZQ05 C609 C912
M1001 ZQ54 ZQ64
Water tank FIL02 C128 C127 WQ40 C990

FL12 Primary vacuum tank High-concentration waste C643
JS10 JS11 WQ50 ZK10 ZK20
ZX01
CAN01 C125 C126
ZX30
C610 C620
WZ05
Hw05
V20
Inlet filter, maintained by user C404 C563 ZK11 ZK21

LW80 C640 C641
C401 C402 C403 C405 C406 C407 WZ01 WZ02
ZX02 M1007 ZX03 ZX04 Throt03 Throt04 ZK04 HW20
HV05 auto dilution Throt02 C642
J503 J504 C561 C562 ZQ53
CAN10 C611 C621 C602
Vacuum pump
WA03
ZQ52
C124 JS09 C123
J502 IN OUT ZQ50
ZQ51
C992 C991 ZK22 ZK25
WZ04
JS08 LW90 ZK12 ZK15
C360
C430
C350
C560
C107 C425 C424

IN IN IN C650 C652 IN
OUT C908 IN IN
FIL05 ZX23 M1009
Heater 3
CAN16
FIL03 ZX12 HV03 wash solution C423 C422 LW91 C612 C615 C622 C625
External vacuum
500W
J501
IN P05 restrictive valve P10
JS04 C121 P03 C993 LW83 C980 P08 P14 pump control
JS06 C122 JS07 ZX10
LW81 C651 C653
ZX24 HW06 LW92 OUT OUT
IN
C410
FL09 C981 OU C613
OU OU
C616 C623 OU
C626 WZ10 C654 WZ11
ZK13
C120 JS05
T ZK16 T T ZK23
ZK26T C655
WZ12
CAN02 IN C909 C994 IN V43

ZX22 C614 C624
FIL04
CAN03 WZ13
OUT
ZX10 C982
FL06 C420
P07 C983 ZK14 ZK24
OUT C910 C995 OUT

LW82
C997
Vacuum silencer
FL05
C996
LW97
OUT HW07 LW93 LW94

Concentrated wash solution tank FIL01
ZX21
IN P06 HW08 JS41 JS40
C421
C911
JS42
C102
Inlet OUT1 OUT2 IN
Water tank
Water quality monitoring
V01
Water supply JS43
C101 module
C106 C105
C104 C103
JS03 JS02 JS01 JS31
FL13
HV01 WQM1 FIL01 High-concentration Outlet
Water unit
JS30 waste tank
CAN11
6-57
6-58
7 Pyrology
7-1
7.1 Refrigeration Unit
7.1.1 Overview
The refrigeration unit works for 24 hours every day, providing refrigeration of 2-8
for the reagent carousels and sample carousel. It consists of the following functional
modules:
Circulating tube: used for circulation of refrigerant and coated with insulating
sponge.
Refrigerant: the liquid circulating in the refrigeration tube, having low freezing
point.
Refrigeration circulating pump: driving circulation of refrigerant and having a
refrigerant outlet at the inlet.
Refrigeration unit: contains 10 peltiers and 2 sets of radiating fans to cool down
the refrigerant.
Sample/Reagent compartment units: a closed chamber providing a
low-temperature environment for refrigerant to absorb heat. The sample and
reagent compartment units are connected in serial mode.

The figure below shows the locations of the components (rear view).
Figure 7.1 Location diagram 1 of refrigeration unit FRU
1
1
7-2
Figure 7.2 Location diagram 2 of refrigeration unit FRU
2 1
Figure 7.3 Refrigeration module and refrigerant
6
8
Table 7.1 FRU details of refrigeration unit

1 Non FRU Reagent refrigeration compartment assembly
1*
2 Non FRU Reagent refrigeration compartment assembly
2*
3 Non FRU Sample refrigeration compartment assembly
4 801-BA80-00109-00 Reagent refrigeration module assembly
5 801-BA80-00154-00 Refrigeration circulating pump assembly
6 801-BX50-00074-00 Refrigeration fan
7 801-BX50-00076-00 Reagent refrigeration temperature sensor
8 801-BA80-00165-00 Refrigerant
*Refer to Chapter 5 for removing and installation instructions of the reagent and
sample refrigeration compartment assemblies.
7-3
7.1.3 Replacement of Refrigerant
Exploded View
Figure 7.4 Prime fixture
Prime fixture
Figure 7.5 Structure of reagent refrigeration compartment
Air vent Sealing

bolts rings
Injection
ports
Reagent Reagent
compartment 1 compartment 2
Figure 7.6 Installation of prime fixture in sample compartment
Tools
Table 7.2 Necessary tools for replacement of refrigerant

Name Remark Quantity
Slot-head screwdriver For removing tube 1
clamp
Hexagon wrench Model: 1
7-4
Box spanner Model: 1
Tweezers / 1
Flashlight / 1
Cotton swabs fat free Several
Priming fixture BA80-J46-003 1
Filter core 082-000406-00 1
Refrigerant 801-BA80-00165-00 6 bottles
Refrigerant recycle Volume no less than 1
bucket 4L
Plug In same size with the 2
fluidic plug on the
rear panel
Gloves Rubber 1 pair
Discharging Refrigerant
When to do:
The refrigerant should be discharged through the drain outlet if the refrigeration
module, circulating pump, sample compartment, or reagent compartment is replaced.
Steps:
Switch off the power supply of the whole unit.
Remove the rear panel, the panel with the injection port of reagent
compartments, and the sample carousel cover.
Put the drain tube of the circulating pump into a clean refrigerant recycle bucket
with volume no less than 4L. Make sure that the drain outlet is lower than the
circulating pump. Use a flathead screwdriver to loosen the tube clamp on the
drain plug, and then remove the drain plug.
Use a flathead screwdriver to loosen the bolts at the air vent of the reagent and
sample compartments. The liquid flows into the recycle bucket under the action
of gravity.
When the liquid is drained, install a plug on the drain tube and tighten the tube
clamp, and then add new refrigerant according to the priming procedure.
Precautions:
During refrigerant discharging, exercise caution to prevent the refrigerant from
spraying out and dropping on PCBs and circuit connectors.
The discharged refrigerant should be retrieved and filtered with a filter core,
which is in the prime fixture.
General or partial ventilation should be provided to ensure good working
environment.
Use oil-proof chemical-resistant gloves during operation.
Wash your hands with fresh water after finishing the operation.
Refrigerant should be stored while sealed properly, and it must not be exposed
to air for a long time.
7-5
Priming Refrigerant
When to do:
Before the instrument leaves the factory.
Refrigerant is found insufficient (less than 1 bottle) during instrument installation on
customer end.
Refrigerant is found insufficient (less than 1 bottle) during active visit on customer
end.
Refrigerant priming during maintenance procedure. (The refrigerant should be
discharged through the drain outlet if the refrigeration module, circulating pump,
sample compartment, or reagent compartment is replaced, and then replaced with 7
bottles of new refrigerant.)
Note: You need not to discharge the refrigerant when replacing the refrigeration fans,
refrigeration temperature sensor, and reagent temperature sensors.
Procedure:
Prepare 1 to 7 bottles of refrigerant, 1 funnel, and 1 prime fixture.
Switch off the main power supply of the instrument. Remove the rear panel, the
panels around the reagent compartment, and the reagent carousel cover
assembly.
While facing the analyzer, carefully remove the sealing strip on the 10 clock place
of each reagent compartment to expose the air vent bolt.
Remove the air vent bolts, 2 on the reagent compartment and 1 on the sample
compartment.
Install the prime fixture on the air vent of the sample compartment.
Connect the funnel to the prime fixture on the injection port of the sample
compartment, making the refrigerant slowly flow into the funnel. Exercise
caution to prevent the refrigerant from overflowing the funnel. After priming
about 4 bottles of refrigerant, stop the priming if the refrigerant level in the
priming fixture of the sample compartment no longer decreases or refrigerant
bleeds out from the air vent bolt of the reagent compartments.
Install a plug on the priming fixture of the sample compartment, and tighten the
air vent bolts on the two reagent compartments.
Check if the sensors on the refrigeration board are intact, switch on the power
supply, and run the operating software. Select Utility -> Maintenance ->
Alignment -> Pyrology Unit -> Rgt Refrig Temp Curve, query and check the
refrigeration parameters, and then set the Refr Status Flag as 0. (Note: Select
Search before modifying the status flag. Select Configure and then Search to
check the modified parameter. Repeat this operation when modifying other
parameters.)
Turn on the refrigeration circulating pump P02, and then turn it off after 1
minute. Remove the plug from the priming fixture, loosen the air vent bolts on
the 2 reagent compartments and keep the injection ports always sealed. Continue
adding refrigerant to the priming fixture till the refrigerant level no longer
decreases or refrigerant bleeds out from the air vent bolt of the reagent
compartments. Tighten the air vent bolts on the 2 reagent compartments and
install the plug on the priming fixture of the sample compartment. Repeat this
7-6
step till the refrigeration circulating pump is turned off and the refrigerant level
no longer decreases after the air vent bolts and plug are removed. Tighten the air
vent bolts on the reagent compartments.
After priming, some refrigerant may be left in the prime fixture. While leaving
the plug unremoved, unscrew the prime fixture. If some refrigerant flows out
when removing the prime fixture, wipe with tissue the internal surface of the
sample compartment.
Install and tighten all sealing bolts on the reagent and sample compartments, and
wipe off the exuded refrigerant from the compartments.
Turn on the circulating pump P02 and reagent refrigeration to display the
temperature curve. Check the cooler current and refrigeration temperature for
about 20 minutes. If the cooler current is between 2-6.5A and no alarms are
triggered indicating low refrigeration temperature, set the refrigeration status flag
as 1.
Restore the sealing strips, reagent carousel covers and panels.
Figure 7.7 Reagent refrigeration temperature curve window
Precautions:
During refrigerant priming, exercise caution to prevent the refrigerant from
spraying out and dropping on PCBs and circuit connectors.
Fill refrigerant strictly as instructed by the procedure mentioned above. When
turning on the circulating pump, be sure to block the air vent of the sample
compartment.
General or partial ventilation should be provided to ensure good working
environment.
Use oil-proof chemical-resistant gloves during operation.
Wash your hands with fresh water after finishing the operation.
Refrigerant should be stored while sealed properly, and it must not be exposed
to air for a long time.
7-7
Alignment and confirmation (regular check of refrigerant)
When to do:
The instrument has been filled with refrigerant before leaving the factory and should
be checked prior to use. When installing the instrument at the user end, check if the
refrigerant is sufficient.
When performing annually spontaneous maintenance at the user end, check the
refrigerant inside the refrigeration tube, and if necessary, fill more refrigerant.
Remove and check the filter screen from the injection port of the reagent
compartments, and if necessary, clean it.
Figure 7.8 Refrigerant level detection
Air vent Sealing

bolts rings
Injection
ports
Reagent Reagent
Figure 7.9 Installation of refrigerant filter screen
Air vent Sealing

bolts rings
Injection
ports
Reagent Reagent
7-8
Steps:
Tear the tape on the injection port of reagent compartment 1 to expose the
sealing bolt.
Remove sealing bolt with a flathead screwdriver.
Use a pair of tweezers to remove the filter from the injection port and then
clean it with fresh water.
Use a flash light to visually check the refrigerant level from the injection port of
the reagent compartment. If visual check is not allowed due to the environment
limit, use a cotton swab to detect the refrigerant level from the injection port.
Make sure that the refrigerant level is not lower than the center line of the
horizontal connector tube, and the center line of the tube is about 30mm away
from the top of the connector.
If the refrigerant level does not meet the requirements, fill more refrigerant
according to the priming steps.
When the priming is completed, install the filter on the injection port.
Install the screw plug back on the injection port of the reagent compartments.
Install the insulating sponge on the injection port of the reagent compartment,
and stick transparent adhesive paper.
7.1.4 Removing/Installing Reagent Refrigeration Module

Exploded view
Figure 7.10 Reagent refrigeration module
Inlet
Outlet
Screws
Tools
Table 7.3 Necessary tools for replacing reagent refrigeration module

7-9
Hexagon wrench / 1
Flathead screwdriver / 1
Prime fixture BA80-J46-003 1
bucket 4L
802 glue 095-000052-00 1
Adhesive tape 095-000049-00 1 roll
Steps
When to do:
The refrigeration module (115-005636-00) should be checked and replaced if the
reagent refrigeration temperature is beyond the range due to impaired coolers.
Procedure:
Switch off the power supply of the instrument and remove the rear panel.
Disconnect the 10 coolers, 2 refrigeration fans, and 1 temperature sensor of the
reagent refrigeration module.
Discharge the refrigerant from the refrigeration system according to the steps
described in the previous section.
Remove the insulating sponge from the inlet and outlet of the pump. Use a
flathead screwdriver to loosen the tube clamps on the inlet and outlet, and then
unplug the fluidic tubes.
Use a hex wrench to loosen the two mounting screws from the refrigeration
module, and then pull out the refrigeration module in the direction indicated by
the arrow.
Precautions:
spraying out and dropping on PCBs and connectors.
When unplugging the fluidic tubes of the refrigeration module, hold them carefully
to prevent the residual fluid from spilling on PCBs and connectors.
Procedure:
Install the new refrigeration module by pushing it along the guide slot on the
bottom plate of the whole unit, making the fan side facing inside of the
instrument.
Tighten the two mounting screws using a hex wrench.
Connect the inlet and outlet tubes according to the labels on the refrigeration
module and use a flathead screwdriver to install the tube clamps. Wrap the
insulating sponge using class A insulating adhesive tape AS-ATAPEC1T-9M
(095-000049-00).
7-10
Connect the 10 coolers, 2 refrigeration fan, and 1 temperature sensor of the
reagent refrigeration module.
Fill refrigerant according to the steps described in the previous section.
Install the enclosure of the instrument and switch on the power supply.
Precautions:
Connect the tubes properly.
Do not fix the tube clamp on a barbed connector.
Wrap the insulating sponge tightly to avoid any space.

Procedure:
Switch on the power supply and turn on refrigeration. Select
UtilityMaintenanceAlignmentPyrology UnitRgt Refrig Temp Curve. If the
cooler current is within 2-6.5A, it means it works normally.
7.1.5 Removing/Installing Refrigeration Circulating Pump

Assembly
Exploded view
Figure 7.11 Removing/Installing refrigeration circulating pump assembly
7-11
Figure 7.12 Inlet and outlet of refrigeration circulating pump
Inlet
Outlet
Screws
Tools
Table 7.4 Necessary tools for replacing refrigeration circulating pump

Hexagon wrench / 1
Slot-head screwdriver / 1
Prime fixture BA80-J46-003 1
bucket 4L
802 glue 095-000052-00 1
Steps
When to do:
The refrigeration circulation pump should be checked and replaced if an alarm is
given indicating refrigerating temperature too low.
Procedure:
Switch off the power supply of the instrument and remove the rear panel. You
will see the refrigeration circulating pump inside the instrument.
Remove the refrigeration module to expose the refrigeration circulating pump.
Disconnect the 24V power cord from the circulating pump.
Remove the insulating sponge from the inlet and outlet of the pump. Use a
flathead screwdriver to loosen the tube clamps on the inlet and outlet, and then
unplug the fluidic tubes.
7-12
Use a hexagon wrench to loosen the two retaining screws on the circulating
pump and then remove the circulating pump.
Precautions:
spraying out and dropping on PCBs and connectors.
When unplugging the fluidic tubes, hold them carefully to prevent the residual fluid
from spilling on PCBs and connectors.
Steps:
Connect the outlet with the tube of the refrigeration module and the inlet with
the other tube, and then tighten the tube clamps.
Wrap the insulating sponge using class A insulating adhesive tape
AS-ATAPEC1T-9M (095-000049-00).
Fix the circulating pump assembly on the bracket using two screws.
Connect the power cord with the pump.
Restore the refrigeration module.
Fill refrigerant.
Install the enclosures and restore the instrument.
Precautions:
Do not fix the tube clamp on a barbed connector.

Procedure:
Switch on the power supply of the instrument and turn on refrigeration. Select
Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Pyrology Unit -> Rgt Refrig Temp Curve.
If the refrigeration temperature is no less than -8C, it means it refrigeration pump
works normally.
7-13
7.1.6 Removing/Installing Refrigeration Fans
Exploded view
Figure 7.13 Removing/Installing refrigeration fan assembly
Refrigeration module
Screw 1
Fan assembly
Screw 2
Screw 3
2 1
Screw 4
Figure 7.14 Reagent refrigeration fans
Tools
Table 7.5 Necessary tools for replacing refrigeration fan

Hexagon wrench / 1
Steps
When to do:
The refrigeration fans (801-BX50-00076-00) should be checked and replaced if an
alarm is given indicating refrigeration fan abnormal.
7-14
Procedure:
Remove the refrigeration module.
Loosen screws 1 and 2, and remove screws 3 and 4. Lift the refrigeration fan
assembly in the direction indicated by the arrow and then pull it out.
Loosen the 4 screws to remove the fans.
Precautions:
Do not fix the tube clamp on a barb connector.
Steps:
Lay the new fans in the same way as the old ones are set and arrange the cables.
Refer to the wind direction marked on the fan cover, and make sure that the fans
are installed correctly with wind entering the refrigeration module from its front
and leaving from its back.
Tighten each fan with four screws and nuts. Exercise caution to avoid damaging
the plastic fan cover. Install the refrigeration fan assembly.
Figure 7.15 Picture of reagent refrigeration module
Install the fan assembly on the refrigeration module in the correct angle.
Install screws 3 and 4, and tighten screws 1-4.
Restore the refrigeration module.
Precautions:
Do not mistake the installation direction of the fans.
7-15
When installing the fans, use the screwdriver carefully to avoid damaging the fan
cover.
Ensure that the protrusion below the fan assembly is inserted into the counterpart
on the refrigeration air duct.

Procedure:
Switch on the power supply and turn on refrigeration. Select
Utility->MaintenanceAlignment->Pyrology Unit->Fan Status Query. Check if
refrigeration fan 1 and 2 work normally.
7.1.7 Removing/Installing Refrigeration Temperature Sensors

Exploded view
Figure 7.16 Removing/Installing temperature sensor of reagent compartment
2 1
Figure 7.17 Removing/Installing temperature sensor on refrigeration module
7-16
Tools
Table 7.6 Necessary tools for replacing refrigeration temperature sensors

Snap-off knife / 1
Thermistor BA40-J09 1
installation fixture
802 glue 095-000052-00 1
Steps
When to do:
The temperature sensor on the refrigeration module should be replaced if an alarm
is given indicating refrigeration temperature too low and the temperature is obviously
abnormal.
The temperature sensor in the reagent compartment should be replaced if an alarm
is given indicating refrigeration temperature beyond range and the temperature is
obviously abnormal.
Judgment of abnormal sensors:
Abnormal resistance: Disconnect the sensor, measure its resistance with a multimeter,
and then judge the resistance according to Table 1.
Table 7.7 Resistance - Temperature comparison of NTC sensor
Temperature () Resistance (K) Temperature () Resistance (K)

-10 22.50 25 5.00
-5 17.77 30 4.14
0 14.13 35 3.44
5 11.32 40 2.87
10 9.14 45 2.41
15 7.43 50 2.03
20 6.08 55 1.72
Resistance not varying with temperature: The NTC sensor has been employed, which
has high resistance coefficient and resolution at low temperature. Influence of the
sensor cable on the basic resistance K can be neglected.
Steps
Find the sensors according to the exploded view.
Disconnect the temperature sensor cables.
Use a knife to scratch the insulating sponge around the sensors and then remove
the sensors with a thermistor installation fixture.
Coat the front end of the new sensors with heat conductive silicon and screw
the sensors into the mounting holes using the fixture.
7-17
Fill the breach of the insulating sponge with 820 glue.
Wrap the breach with adhesive tape.
Connect the sensor cables and install the instrument enclosure.
Precautions:
Prior to installation, make sure that the sensors are intact.
When holding the sensors with the thermistor installation fixture, exercise caution to
avoid breaking the sensor cables.
Apply the 820 glue according to glue operation process.
Refer to steps 4-7 in the previous section.

Procedure:
Switch on the power supply of the instrument and turn on refrigeration, and then
check if the refrigeration temperature is between -5-30C.
7-18
7.2 Preheating Unit (110V/220V)
7.2.1 Overview
The instrument has employed the comprehensive heating mode, in which the
deionized water in the water tank is heated for level 1 to wash the probes and mixers,
and the deionized water and wash solution for washing cuvettes are heated for level 2
based on level 1 in order to ensure the temperature between 42-43.
Table 7.8 Heater power and resistance of preheating unit

Preheating Component FRU Code Quantity Power Resistance
Unit Name of 500W
heater
Level 1 Whole unit 115-014309-00 1 1000W 220V:
heating preheating (includes 89.0-98.0
assembly 2 500W (single)
heaters) 110V:
Level 2 Cuvette wash 115-014311-00 1 500W 22.3-24.5
heating solution (single)
preheating
assembly
Cuvette 115-014313-00 1 500W
cleaning fluid
preheating
assembly
Note: 110V heater and 220V heater are different and must not be confused.
7-19
Figure 7.18 Fluidic diagram of preheating unit
Probe interior wash
D30
D04
ZQ01
C501
C204
C205
M1002
C203
DG01
V19
Pressure gauge
OUT
C270
P09
IN
C271
COM
DG02
C272
NC
C273
N
Reagent probe Cuvette phase 3-6
O
DG03
D03 WQ08 exterior wash wash Cuvette phase 1-2
Protection of wash Mixer phase-2 wash ZQ06
wash
DGS
return flow DG04
Heater 2
ZQ51
Sample probe
CAN15
500W
WQ03
wash return flow
Probe interior
D02 C302
exterior wash Pressure gauge
Heater 3
C131 C130 JS14 C129
CAN16
HV02 circulating WQ02
500W
water restrictive valve
C202
C303
JS13
Heater 1
CAN14
1000W
JS15 ZQ05
FL04
WQ01
D01
Mixer phase-1 wash
HV06 cuvette wash
C502 restrictive valve C506 C508
C140
C201
C301
`
JS12 JS20 C503 C504 C505 C507

External water supply
ZQ02 ZQ03 M1010 ZQ04 WQ40

M1001
Water tank FIL02 C128 C127
JS10 JS11 ZX01

CAN01 C125 C126
V20
Inlet filter, maintained by user C404
C401 C402 C403 C405 C406 C407
ZX02 M1007 ZX03 ZX04 Throt03 Throt04
J503 J504
C124 JS09 C123

J502 IN OUT WQ50
ZQ50
JS08
C360
C430
C350
C560
ZX30
C107 C425 C424
FIL05 OUT ZX23 M1009
FIL03 J501 ZX12 HV03 wash solution C423 C422
C121
IN P03 P05 restrictive valve
JS04
JS06 C122 JS07 ZX10
ZX24
C410
FL09
C120 JS05
CAN02 ZX22
CAN03 ZX10
FL06 C420
FL05
OUT
ZX21
IN P06
C421
As shown in the figure above, heater 1 is on the return circuit of the water tank's
water supply sidestream. Driven by the pump, partial deionized water in the tank is
heated by the whole unit preheating assembly and then transferred back to the water
tank to heat the remaining water.
Partial warm water in the water tank, driven by the pump, flows into the diluted wash
solution tank and then is mixed at specified ratio with the concentrated wash solution
to exchange heat. The mixed wash solution is then heated for level 2 by heater 3 in
order to wash the cuvettes in phase 1 and 2 and also wash the mixers.
The warm water in the water tank is driven by the pump to realize the following
three functions:
1. Partial of them is used to wash the exterior of the sample probe, reagent probes
and mixers.
2. Partial of them passes the degassing device to wash the interior of the sample
probe and reagent probes, as well as the ISE module.
3. The remaining part is heated by heater 2 to wash the cuvettes in phase 3-6.
7.2.2 Removing/Installing Whole Unit Preheating Assembly

(110V/220V)
Exploded view
The figures below show the locations of the cuvette wash preheating assembly and
whole unit wash preheating assembly on the instrument.
7-20
Figure 7.19 Locations of cuvette wash preheating assembly and whole unit wash
preheating assembly
Cuvette wash
preheating assembly
Whole unit
preheating assembly
Figure 7.20 Structure of cuvette wash preheating assembly
Heater
Sensor
Protection
Outlet
switch
Inlet
Tools
Table 7.9 Necessary tools for replacing cuvette wash preheating assembly
Strap / Several
Diagonal pliers / 1
Tube cutter / 1
Steps
When to do:
The sensor is damaged.
7-21
The protection switch is damaged.
The canister has leaks.
Steps
Remove the rear panel.
Disconnect the air plugs of the heaters, sensors and protection switches.
Loosen the three screws fixing the whole unit preheating assembly.
Precautions:
Prepare a new preheating assembly.
Connect the tubes.
Fix the preheating assembly.
Connect the circuit connectors.
Precautions:
After replacing the preheating assembly, execute fluidic prime before powering on
the instrument.

Procedure:
When the operating software is started, check the whole unit preheating temperature
on the Temperature screen and ensure no related alarms are given.
7.2.3 Removing/Installing Cuvette Wash Solution Preheating

Assembly (110V/220V)
Component Location
The figures below show the locations of the cuvette wash solution preheating
assembly and whole unit wash preheating assembly on the instrument.
7-22
preheating assembly
Cuvette wash
preheating assembly
Whole unit
preheating assembly
Figure 7.22 Structure of cuvette wash solution preheating assembly
Heater
Sensor
Protection
Outlet
switch
Inlet
Tools
Table 7.10 Necessary tools for replacing cuvette wash solution preheating assembly
Strap / Several
Diagonal pliers / 1
Tube cutter / 1
High-temperature / Several
gummed paper
Steps
When to do:
7-23
Steps
water.
Loosen the 3 screws fixing the cuvette wash preheating assembly.
Precautions:
Mark the tubes and connectors correctly to prevent mis-installation.
Use screws to fix the preheating assembly.
Connect the connectors according to the marks.
Check if the preheating assembly is complete.
Precautions:
the instrument.

Procedure:
When the operating software is started, check the preheating temperature on the
Temperature screen and ensure no related alarms are given.
7-24
7.2.4 Removing/Installing Cuvette Cleaning Fluid Preheating
Assembly (110V/220V)
Exploded view
The figures below show the locations of the cuvette cleaning fluid preheating
assembly and whole unit wash preheating assembly on the instrument.
preheating assembly
Cuvette wash
preheating assembly
Whole unit
preheating assembly
Figure 7.24 Structure of cuvette cleaning fluid preheating assembly
Heater
Sensor
Protection
Outlet
switch
Inlet
Tools
Table 7.11 Necessary tools for replacing cuvette cleaning fluid preheating assembly
Tape / Several
Diagonal pliers / 1
7-25
Tube cutter / 1
High-temperature / Several
gummed paper
Steps
When to do:
Steps
water.
Loosen the 3 screws fixing the cuvette wash preheating assembly.
Precautions:
Mark the tubes and connectors correctly to prevent mis-installation.
Use screws to fix the preheating assembly.
Connect the connectors according to the marks.
Check if the preheating assembly is complete.
Precautions:
7-26
the instrument.

Procedure:
When the operating software is started, check the preheating temperature on the
Temperature screen and ensure no related alarms are given.
7-27
7.3 Reaction Carousel Temperature Control Unit
7.3.1 Overview
The instrument has employed a solid temperature bath to control the temperature of
the reaction carousel as shown in the figure below. The temperature control unit
consists of the reaction carousel, temperature bath, heater, temperature sensor,
insulation layer, and control circuit.
Figure 7.25 Structure of reaction carousel
Cuvette
Air
Temperature bath
Insulating layer
Heater
The temperature bath is U-shaped and solid, and between the reaction carousel
exterior and bath interior is a small air gap. During working, the temperature bath
does not move, and the reaction carousel is driven by the motor to move along the
temperature bath. At the bottom of the temperature bath is a heater and sensor. The
sensor collects temperature signal and feeds it back to the control circuit, which then
controls the output power of the heater based on specific algorithm, thus achieving
"constant temperature" of the bath. The heat of the temperature bath successively
passes the air gap, reaction carousel, reaction cuvette, and reaction liquid, with an aim
of incubating the reaction liquid at a constant temperature.

The figure below shows the heater in the reaction chamber.
7-28
Figure 7.26 Reaction carousel heater
Table 7.12 FRU details of reaction carousel assembly

1 801-BA80-00109-00 Reagent refrigeration module assembly
2 801-BA80-00154-00 Refrigeration circulating pump assembly
3 801-BX50-00074-00 Refrigeration fan
4 801-BX50-00076-00 Reagent refrigeration temperature sensor
5 801-BA80-00165-00 Refrigerant
7.3.3 Replacement of Reaction Carousel Heating Assembly

Replace reagent: The reaction carousel heating assembly fails. The table belows
shows the resistance of the heaters in normal conditions:
Heater type Resistance
220V heater 92.0-101.6
110V heater 23.0-25.4
Steps:
Precautions:
7.3.4 Replacement of Reaction Carousel Temperature Sensor

When to do:
The reaction carousel temperature sensor fails.
Steps
Precautions:
After replacing the temperature sensor, configure the sensor parameters according to
the following instructions:
7-29
Configuration of R0, A, B, and cable length: Enter the resistance value for 0, 37
and 100, and the cable length; select Calculate to calculate the corresponding R0,
A and B; and then check if the sensor is qualified. If yes, select Configure to
configure the R0, A and B on the sensor.
Configuration of AD: Enter the AD value of the sensor, and select Configure
to configure it on the sensor.
Check and configure the PID parameter of the reaction carousel temperature
control.
In addition, the original cable of the reaction carousel temperature sensor is 28AWG
and 26mm long, which cannot be modified. The cable length you enter on the
operating software is the total length, which includes the original length 26mm. The
extended cable should be also 26AWG.
Procedure:
Switch on the power supply of the instrument. After initialization, wait for 40
minutes and then check if the sensor temperature is within 37.00.3.
Do the following checks prior to alignment:
1. Check if the drain tube of the reaction carousel can be emptied normally.
2. Check if the heater, temperature switch and temperature sensor have been
connected correctly.
7-30
7.4 Whole Unit Radiation Unit
7.4.1 Overview
The instrument is capable of preventing dust through a special dust screen on the air
inlet and radiating heat through air vent and fans. The vacuum pump also has
employed dust prevent measures on the air inlet. The radiating fans include:
refrigeration fan, vacuum pump fan, ISE fan, and light source fan. All of them
possess the jam detection function.

Figure 7.27 Locations of vacuum pump fan and fluidic pump fan
1 2
Figure 7.28 Locations of reagent refrigeration fan and radiator
3,4
7-31
Figure 7.29 Locations of light source fan and radiator
5,6
Figure 7.30 Location of ISE fan
Figure 7.31 Location of dust screen
8 9 10
Table 7.13 Fans and radiators that need maintenance

No. Name FRU Code
1 Vacuum pump radiating fan 1 801-BA40-00210-00

2 Vacuum pump radiating fan 2 801-BA40-00210-00

3 Reagent refrigeration fan 1 801-BA40-00008-00
4 Reagent refrigeration fan 2 801-BA40-00008-00
5 Reagent refrigeration radiator /
6 Light source radiating fan 024-000402-00
7 Light source radiator /
7-32
No. Name FRU Code
8 ISE radiating fan 801-BA80-00169-00
9 Left dust screen 034-000045-00
10 Middle lower dust screen 034-000240-00
11 Right dust screen 034-000044-00
7.4.3 Removing/Installing Fans

Removing/Installing Vacuum Pump Fan
Use a screwdriver to remove the rear panel, and then find the vacuum pump
module and fan.
Disconnect the air plug of the vacuum pump fan.
Use the screwdriver to remove the fan.
Removing/Installing Reagent Refrigeration Fan and Cleaning Radiator
Remove the refrigeration fan assembly according to "Removing/Installing
Refrigeration Fans" in this manual.
Removing/Installing Light Source Fan and Cleaning Radiator
Remove the lamp housing fan according to "Replacement of Light Source Fan" in
this manual.
Cleaning ISE Fan
Use a cross screwdriver to remove the panels around the ISE module.
Use the cross screwdriver to remove the air vent of the ISE module.
Disconnect the air plug of the ISE radiating fan.
Use the cross screwdriver to remove the fan.
7-33
7.4.4 Removing Dust Screens
Figure 7.32 Removing dust screens
5 6
2 3
4
1 7
When removing dust screen 1, push it slightly, lift upwards and then pull it outwards
according to the arrows "1-2-3" in the figure above.
When removing dust screen 2, follow the direction of arrow "7" and pull it out.
When removing dust screen 3, push it slightly, lift upwards and then pull it outwards
according to the arrows "4-5-6" in the figure above.
7.4.5 Test and confirmation

Check if the fans and dust screens are installed properly.
Check if the fan cables are connected correctly.
Check if the fans are working normally without alarms.
Do not leave screws inside the instrument.
7-34
8 Optical System
8-1
8.1 Module Functions
Chemistry analyzer is a typical precision instrument integrating optics, mechanics,
electronics and algorithm. The spectrophotometer is one of the key components,
which directly determines the precision and accuracy of the instrument.
The photometric system of the BS-2000M/BS-2200M has employed two
photometers to simultaneously measure the absorbance change of cuvettes on both
inner ring and outer ring of the reaction carousel. It uses a single light source
structure, which greatly saves the space and maintenance cost of the instrument. It
has also inherited the mature concave gratings light-splitting technology of the BS
series. Concave gratings refer to holographic concave flat-field gratings, The
holographic concave flat-field gratings can not only simplify the optical design to
compact the optical structure, but also eliminate the stray light. A combined light
passing through the entrance slit projects on the PDA (Photodiode Array) via the
concave flat-field gratings. One or multiple light-activated elements on different
positions receive the monochromatic light at certain wavelength. During operation,
the photometric system controlled by the computer receives the electric signals
produced by the light-activated elements of corresponding wavelength and then
converts them into absorbance. In case the spectrum is defined, the absorbance at
multiple wavelengths can be calculated quickly. A special light source detection
module has been designed to monitor the energy and fluctuation of the lamp itself,
and it can more accurately and promptly reflect the lamp's performance and ensure
accurate test results.
8-2
8.2 Composition and Structure of Optical System
8.2.1 Introduction
The BS-2000M/BS-2200M applies the 1 to 2 fiber, holographic concave flat-field
gratings and PDA for photometric measurement. See the figure below. The front lens
converges the light beam sent from the tungsten-halogen lamp to the big end of the
fibers, and then to reaction cuvette via the fiber bundle. The light beam passes
through the reaction cuvette and then converges at the entrance slit via the second
lens group. The gratings divide the light beam from the entrance slit and then
converge them to the slit array. Finally the PDA behind the slit array converts the
light signals into electric signals and then outputs them.
Figure 8.1 Photometric structure
Reflector
PDA Slit array
Filter
Small end of fiber
Lens
Cuvette Lens
Tungsten-halogen lamp
Entrance slit
Big end of fiber Grating
8.2.2 Composition of Optical Measurement Assembly

The photometer assembly of the BS-2000M/BS-2200M is composed of the light
source assembly and optical measurement assembly. The optical measurement
assembly consists of two optical assemblies, AD box assembly and support assembly.
8-3
Figure 8.2 Optical measurement assembly 1
Optical assembly
Optical assembly
Supporting rod
Figure 8.3 Optical measurement assembly 2
AD box assembly
8-4
Figure 8.4 Optical assembly
8-5
8.3 Light source assembly
The light source assembly collects light beam transmitted from the tungsten halogen
lamp and then converges it to the big end of the fibers. It consists of the lamp base,
lens assembly, lamp, and radiating fans.
Figure 8.5 Light source assembly
Radiating fan
Lamp base
Lens assembly
1 to 2 fiber (big end)
50W lamp
8-6
8.4 Component Locations and Replacement Methods
8.4.1 Locations and FRU details

Component location:
Component location picture
List of FRU materials:
Table 8.1 FRU details of light source assembly

No. FRU code and material code Material name Remark
1 115-014942-00 50W lamp
2 024-000402-00 Light source
radiating fan
3 115-014017-00 Optical assembly
4 081-000085-00 4*5 glass cuvette
7 081-000046-00 1 to 2 fiber (BA2K)
8.4.2 Replacing optical assembly

When to do
The optical assembly should be replaced if some of functions are disabled or its
performance cannot meet the requirements.
Materials required
Cross screwdriver, hexagon wrench, new optical assembly
8-7
Figure 8.6 Exploded view of optical assembly
Optical assembly
0.1 optical
adjustment
washer
0.3 optical
adjustment
washer
Conversion bottom plate

Supporting rod
NOTE
Please remove the reaction carousel carefully to protect the reaction cuvettes.
After removing the optical assembly, place it in a package, and then bring the
package back or mail it to our company for repairing.
Do not touch the fiber end after removing the small end, and if needed, wash the
fiber end with ethanol.
Use a new lamp to align gains of each channel after replacing the optical assembly,
in order to avoid strong light of the lamp.
Connect the pre-amplification-AD collection cable and power cord of the inner ring
photometer to the 3 connectors at the bottom of the AD board, and connect those of
the outer ring photometer to the 3 connectors at the top of the AD board.
Use a particular guide fixture to install the heat chamber in order to prevent
damaging the optical assembly.
When installing the inner ring photometer, use a particular positioning fixture to
ensure that the incident angle meets the requirement.
Steps
Remove the mixers and cuvette wash station and store them properly to avoid
bending.
Remove the reaction carousel cover and all panels around it. Unplug all dispense
and aspirate tubes from the wash station for convenient removing of the
reaction carousel and heat chamber. Rotate the reagent probes to the reagent
8-8
aspiration position, and rotate the sample probe to the above the sample
carousel.
Use a tool to remove the reaction carousel. Remove the reaction carousel
carefully to protect the reaction cuvettes.
Loosen the drain tube of the reaction carousel heat chamber and remove the
heat chamber. (Exercise caution to avoid losing the washers between the heat
chamber and the supporting rods and the optical adjustment washers.)
Loosen the two retaining screws on the pre-amplification box of relevant optical
assembly, and then unplug the pre-amplification-AD collection cable from the
pre-amplification board.
Loosen the 2 hexagon socket screws on the fibers and remove the fibers.
Loosen the 3 retaining screws on the optical assembly and remove the optical
assembly. Loosen the screws on the small end of the relevant fibers. Note: When
replacing the inner ring optical assembly, also remove the outer ring optical
assembly for convenient installation.
Install the new optical assembly following the above steps reversely.
After replacement, use a fixture to adjust the gap between the temperature bath
and the reaction carousel according to relevant instructions in Chapter 7
Pyrology.
Switch off the main power and analyzer power, and run the operating software.
When the lamp becomes steady, verify if the photoelectric signal collecting
position and channel gains meet the requirements. If you have adjusted the zero
position optical coupler bracket during alignment, adjust the probes, mixers and
wash station horizontally on the reaction carousel according to the Alignment
Guide.
After verifying the alignment, run a water test to check the instrument's
performance according to the Installation Guide.
8.4.3 Replacement of Lamp

When to do
An alarm is given indicating that the light intensity is weak or the lamp is not turned
on.
An alarm is given indicating the lamp is unsteady.
The lamp has been used for over 2,000 hours.
Materials required
New lamp
Keep the analyzer power on.
8-9
Figure 8.7 Exploded view of lamp
Light source
assembly
Lamp base
retaining screw
50w lamp
NOTE
Replace the lamp by executing the Replace Lamp maintenance command on the
operating software, in order to prevent abnormal alarms due to inaccurate
calculation of lamp's using time and brightness change.
Please wait for at least 5 minutes (if the lamp fan works properly) after turning off
the lamp to avoid injury.
Do not touch the bulb shell when installing a new lamp.
Steps
Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> Biochemistry Maintenance,
and select Replace Lamp.
Follow the instructions prompted by the software and wait for 5 minutes until
the lamp cools down.
Loosen the screws on the lamp replacement door on the rear panel, and open
the lamp replacement door.
Unscrew the O-ring connector fixed on the cable terminal and lamp base
retaining screws, and then remove the lamp.
Install the lamp and panel in a reversed order. Before installing the panel, ensure
that the lamp has been installed properly in the right place and there is no gap
between the lamp and the lamp base. (Refer to the Installation Guide for details.)
Select Continue and wait for 20 minutes for the new lamp to get steady. Select
Photometer Check - Photometer Energy Test to check if the lamp can work
normally.
8.4.4 Replacement of Lamp Radiating Fan

When to do
The fan does not work properly, which is not caused by PCB or connector problem.
8-10
Materials required
Cross screwdriver, hexagon wrench, new lamp radiating fan
Figure 8.8 Exploded view of lamp radiating fan
Light source assembly

Fan bracket
Radiating fan
WARNING
Please wait for at least 10 minutes until the lamp cool down before replacing the
lamp, to avoid any injury.
Install the radiating fan with the wind flow to the light source assembly and the tab
facing the sheet metal bracket.
When removing the light source assembly, protect the fibers from being damaged.
Steps
Switch off the power supply of the whole unit and wait for 10 minutes until the
lamp cools down to avoid any injury.
Remove the middle rear panel, the rear panel on the sample carousel side and the
panel above the light source assembly, and then remove the light source
assembly and fan bracket.
Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the 4 screws on the lamp radiating fan and
then remove the fan.
Fix the fan bracket and light source assembly on the chassis, and ensure the
sheet metal side of the fan bracket faces the light source assembly.
Install the lamp replacement door, the lamp and all removed panels, and then
switch on the power supply.
Check if the fan works properly and blows to the lamp base.
Restart the operating software. If the problem still exists, there may be some
problems with PCB.
8-11
8.4.5 Replacement of Reaction Cuvettes
When to do
The cuvettes are dirty, damaged or overflowing.
Materials required
Fiber-free gloves, concentrated wash solution of Mindray, tweezers, air pressure gun
(cold air), cross screwdriver, and hexagon wrench
Switch off the analyzer power if you need to remove the reaction carousel.
WARNING
Remove the reaction carousel carefully to avoid any damage.
While removing or installing the reaction cuvettes, exercise caution to avoid
scratching them. Do not touch the optical surface of the reaction cuvettes. If the
optical surface is polluted, the obtained absorbance may be inaccurate.
Wear gloves free of fiber and powder to avoid polluting the optical surface of the
reaction cuvettes.
Do not use fiber tools like cotton swabs, cotton and cotton cloth to wipe the reaction
cuvettes. If fibers are left on the optical surface, inaccurate absorbance may be
obtained.
Do not use a hot air pressure gun to dry the reaction carousel, to avoid deformation
of the components.
If a cuvette is damaged, please clear the glass fragments on the reaction carousel
surface and in the cuvette install holes, other cuvettes and temperature bath, in
order to avoid scratching the components, blocking the wash station or influencing
subsequent installation of reaction cuvettes.
After replacing the reaction cuvettes, perform the Cuvette Check maintenance
procedure in order to avoid alarms indicating abnormal water blank 10X.
The replacement methods vary with the number of reaction cuvettes that need to be
replaced.
Replacing or maintaining a small number of reaction cuvettes
If only a few cuvettes are to be maintained, you need not to remove the reaction
carousel. Please perform the following steps:
Observe the reaction carousel and record the No. of overflowing cuvettes.
Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -> Biochemistry Maintenance ->
Replace Cuvette.
Remove the wash station, mixers and reaction carousel cover following the
software instructions.
Enter the No. of cuvettes you want to replace on the screen.
Wear a pair of gloves and remove the contaminated cuvettes along the radial
direction of the reaction carousel. In the event of a cracked cuvette, remove the
cuvettes besides it, use a knife to lift the spring plate and then remove the
cracked cuvette.
Repeat step 4 and step 5 to remove all cuvettes to be maintained.
8-12
If overflow occurs, the liquid and vapor inside the temperature bath are hard to
be volatilized due to the small gap between the reaction carousel and the
temperature bath. In this situation, remove the reaction carousel, use absorbent
paper to clear the liquid from the reaction carousel, temperature bath and
exterior of reaction cuvettes, and use a cold air blower to dry them. Then install
the reaction carousel.
Perform the Replace Cuvette procedure to install the reaction cuvettes and press
them to the bottom of the installation holes. Note to clear all glass fragments
inside the cuvette installation holes.
After installing all cuvettes, use a pipettor to inject over 300l concentrated wash
solution into the new cuvettes, and then perform the Cuvette Check procedure.
If abnormal cuvettes still exist (indicated in yellow), perform the Replace
Cuvette procedure to replace them.
Replacing or maintaining a large number of reaction cuvettes
If a large number of cuvettes are to be maintained or the reaction carousel assembly
is seriously contaminated, remove the reaction carousel. Please perform the following
steps:
Remove the mixers and cuvette wash station and store them properly to avoid
bending.
Remove the reaction carousel cover, rotate the reagent probes to the reagent
aspiration position, and rotate the sample probe to above the sample carousel.
Use a tool to remove the reaction carousel. Remove the reaction carousel
carefully to protect the reaction cuvettes.
Wear a pair of gloves and remove the contaminated cuvettes along the radial
direction of the reaction carousel. Clear the residual liquid inside the cuvettes. In
the event of a cracked cuvette, use a knife to lift the spring plate and then
remove the cracked cuvette.
If a large number of cuvettes are contaminated because of overflow, maintain
them according to instructions of Cleaning Cuvettes in the Operator's Manual.
Clear the residual liquid in the reaction carousel using cotton swabs, cloth or
gauze, and dry it with a cold air blower.
Install the clean or new cuvettes on the reaction carousel and press them to the
bottom of the installation holes. Note to clear all glass fragments inside the
cuvette installation holes.
Install the reaction carousel and cover, wash station and mixers. Use a pipettor to
inject over 300l concentrated wash solution into the new cuvettes, and then
perform the Cuvette Check procedure. If abnormal cuvettes still exist (indicated
in yellow), perform the Replace Cuvette procedure to replace them.
8-13
8.5 Adjustment of Photometer
8.5.1 Photometer Alignment Window

The software provides 9 photometer alignment tests.
Turn On Lamp: provides an instruction to turn on the lamp and check if it has
been turned on normally.
Turn Off Lamp: provides an instruction to turn off the lamp and check if it has
been turned off normally.
Signal Collecting Position Adjustment: checks if signal collection position of
cuvettes meets the test requirement, if the inner and outer ring signal collection
interferes with each other, and if certain channel has abnormal output.
Lamp Brightness Adjustment: adjusts the voltage on two ends of the lamp to the
target value.
Photoelectric Signal Collection: measures the signal strength and dark current of
specified cuvette position.
Photoelectric Gain Adjustment: adjusts the gain parameters of 27 channels
without adjusting the voltage on two ends of the lamp.
Photometer Energy Adjustment: adjusts both lamp voltage and gain parameters
of 27 channels in order to make the photometer energy meet the requirements.
Photoelectric Gain Adjustment: sets up the photometer energy and gain index.
Lamp Hour Inquiry: provides query of lamp's using time and clearing of water
blank reference value.
Figure 8.9 Photometer alignment window
8-14
8.5.2 Adjustment of New Photometer's Energy Parameters
The function is applied when:
installing a new optical assembly.
Parameter requirements after alignment:
The lamp voltage is within 11.1-11.8V.
Water blank AD of all channels are less than 60,000.
Dark current of all channels is between 1 and 200.
The photoelectric gain is no less than 65 for 340nm, and no less than 30 for
other channels.
NOTE
Please use a new lamp to configure the gain parameters to prevent configuration
error due to difference between new and old lamps.
Add 200l deionized water to the reaction cuvettes before the adjustment.
Otherwise, the adjustment result may be different from the actual one.
Adjusting the gain value cannot prolong the lamps service life.
Ensure the lamp has been turned on for more than 10 minutes before the adjustment.
If the adjustment fails, select Continue to configure the adjusted results. To
terminate the configuration and restore the previous parameters, select Stop.
The operating procedure is as follows:

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Photoelectric Energy
Adjustment.
Figure 8.10 Photometer Energy Adjustment window
8-15
Before adjustment, make sure that photoelectric waves and signal collection
positions have been aligned, and the lamp has been turned on for more than 10
minutes.
Add 200l deionized water to relevant cuvettes according to the software
prompts, and then select Next.
The software measures the photometer energy of the cuvettes, calculates the
gain parameters of 27 channels and lamp voltage, and then displays the results
on the screen. Check if the results meet the requirements.
Figure 8.11 Photometer energy adjustment results
If the results meet the requirement, click Done to save them.

If the water blank AD is still greater than 60000, contact the R&D department.
If the dark current of a channel exceeds 200 or is less than 1, check if the
relevant gain parameters are lower than the index (no less than 65 for 340nm
and no less than 30 for other channels). If the gain parameters are within the
range, perform the Photoelectric Signal Collection alignment to check the PCBs.
If the gain parameters are beyond the range, replace the lamp and retry.
8.5.3 Gain Parameter Adjustment of Each Channel

An alarm indicating strong light intensity is triggered; the lamp, however, has not
reached the claimed life span yet.
If an alarm is given indicating cuvette contamination or overflowing, or the dark
current is high, it may be caused by board error. Please contact an R&D engineer.
Water blank AD of all channels: < 60,000
Dark current of all channels is between 1 and 200.
8-16
The photoelectric gain is no less than 65 for 340nm, and no less than 30 for
other channels.
NOTE
Please use a new lamp to configure the gain parameters to prevent configuration
error due to difference between new and old lamps.
Add 200l deionized water to the reaction cuvettes before the adjustment.
Adjusting the gain value cannot prolong the lamps service life.
Ensure the lamp has been turned on for more than 10 minutes before the adjustment.
If the adjustment fails, select Continue to configure the adjusted results. To
terminate the configuration and restore the previous parameters, select Stop.

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Photoelectric Gain Adjustment.
Figure 8.12 Photoelectric gain adjustment procedure
Before adjustment, make sure that photoelectric waves and signal collection
positions have been aligned, and the lamp has been turned on for more than 10
minutes.
Add 200l deionized water to relevant cuvettes according to the software
prompts, and then select Next.
The system measures the energy of relevant reaction cuvettes, and calculates
automatically gain parameters of all channels. Check the gain value of each
channel, water blank AD and dark current, and take actions accordingly.
8-17
Figure 8.13 Photoelectric gain adjustment results
If the results meet the requirement, click Done to save them.

If the water blank AD is still greater than 60,000 after adjustment, reduce the
voltage of the lamp according to section 8.5.4 and adjust the water blank AD
again after the lamp becomes steady.
If the dark current of a channel exceeds 200 or is less than 1, check if the
relevant gain parameters are lower than the index (no less than 65 for 340nm
and no less than 30 for other channels). If the gain parameters are within the
range, perform the Photoelectric Signal Collection alignment to check the PCBs.
If the gain parameters are beyond the range, replace the lamp and retry.
8.5.4 Light Intensity Adjustment

A warning occurs indicating strong light intensity; the lamp has not exceeded its life
span; and the water blank AD of each channel cannot be adjusted below 60,000 by
adjusting the gain parameters.
Voltage of the lamp: <12V
Water blank AD of all channels: <60,000AD
NOTE
The target voltage should be no higher than 12V.
This function is only available when the light intensity is too strong and cannot be
aligned through gain adjustment. Higher voltage will shorten the lamps service life.
After adjusting the voltage, please keep the lamp on for more than 10 minutes
before re-adjusting the photoelectric gain.
8-18
The alignment procedure is as follows:
Select Maintenance -> Alignment -> Photometer Unit -> Lamp Brightness
Adjustment.
Input the target voltage according to the screen prompts. If the photometer
energy is too strong and the lamp has not exceeded its life span, Input VTarget =
VActual - 0.3 in the Target Voltage edit box, and then select Next. The software
will automatically calculate the current voltage according to the target one you
have input.
Figure 8.14 Lamp Brightness Adjustment window
After voltage adjustment, reconfigure the gain parameters of each channel. If

the water blank AD is below 60,000, exit the alignment window when the
procedure is complete. Continue with other operations when the system is
restored. (Note: Do not start measurement until the lamp has become steady for
over 10 minutes.)
If the water blank AD of certain channel is still greater than 60,000 after
photoelectric gain adjustment, re-adjust the lamp brightness with 0.1V for every
1500AD according to steps 3-5 based on the difference between the actual water
blank AD and 60,000, until the water blank AD of all channels is below 60,000.
8.5.5 Adjustment of Photoelectric Waveform and Signal

Collecting Position
The optical assembly is replaced.
A part of the reaction carousel assembly is replaced.
The reaction carousel assembly may be deviating from its home position.
The photoelectric signal output of each channel may be abnormal.
8-19
The green lines in the middle of all green boxes lie in the corresponding red lines.
All green boxes lie in the flat area of each cuvette.
On the inner/outer ring waveforms, the green boxes of the two curves at the bottom
are beyond the yellow lines.
NOTE
Before analysis, you need to adjust the lamp voltage and keep the lamp on for more
than 3 minutes.
If you have replaced the reaction carousel assembly, input the best alignment
position of the cuvette wash station.
Please remember to add 200l DI water to the reaction cuvette when scanning the
flat area. Otherwise, the scan result may not be correct.
If photoelectric collection of the inner/outer ring waveforms lies within the yellow
lines, check and clean the optical coupler of the reaction carousel and ensure
photoelectric collection of the two rings does not interfere with each other.
Perform the following steps:

Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Signal Collecting Position
Adjustment.
Figure 8.15 Adjustment of photoelectric waveform and signal collecting position
Signal collecting position on outer ring
Signal collecting position on inner ring
Relation between inner ring and outer ring
Adjust the lamp voltage and keep the lamp on for more than 3 minutes.
Select Start, and add 200l DI water to the relevant reaction cuvettes.
Select Next. The software starts scanning the flat area of specified cuvettes and
displays the signal collecting area on the screen.
8-20
Figure 8.16 Adjustment 1 of photoelectric waveform and signal collecting position
Central line of signal collecting position
Allowable alignment range
8-21
Cuvette waveform of outer ring Signal collecting area of outer ring
Cuvette waveform of inner ring
Signal collecting area of inner ring
Warning positions of interference
As shown in the figures above, the waveform at the top represents the specified
cuvettes of the outer ring, the waveform in the middle represents those of the inner
ring, and the waveform at the bottom is drawn based on the two rings.
Requirements:
On the top and middle waveforms, the green lines (central line of signal collection
position) in all green boxes lie within the corresponding red lines.
All green boxes of the top and middle waveforms lie in the flat area of each cuvette.
On the two waveforms at the bottom, the green boxes are beyond the yellow lines.
If the green lines on the inner ring cuvette waveform are not within the two red
lines, and the signal collecting areas of the inner and outer rings meet the
requirements stated above, select the Confirm Signal Collecting Position tab and
select Start. The software will check if all signals of the two photometers are
normal. If certain channel is obviously delaying or has no output, check if the
photoelectric collection board is normal.
8-22
Figure 8.19 Confirm Signal Collecting Position window
Select a photometer
8.5.6 Photoelectric Signal Collection (alignment)

When to use:
Checking if the lamp is steady.
Troubleshooting the photometric system.
Measuring dark current.
N/A
NOTE
This function is only used to measure the brightness and dark current of the
photometric system, and will not affect the parameters. If you remove a cuvette or
turn off the lamp during the test, restore them after the test and wait for a moment
till they get steady.

1. Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Photometer Unit. Select
Photoelectric Signal Collection.
2. The Photoelectric Signal Collection window is displayed. Enter the cuvette number
and test time of the inner ring or outer ring. To measure the dark current, click Light
Off to turn off the lamp. To measure the air blank AD of the photometer, you
should remove cuvettes from the reaction carousel. To measure the water blank AD
of cuvettes, add deionized water to corresponding cuvettes.
Figure 8.20 Photoelectric Signal Collection window
8-23
3. Select Start. The operating software starts photoelectric signal collection according
to the settings. At this moment, only the Stop button is available for use.
Figure 8.21 Start photoelectric signal collection
4. After the test, the following window appears. Select Exit to reset the reaction
carousel.
Figure 8.22 Finish photoelectric signal collection
5. The test results are saved in the LampSignalGatherResults file of the InstrumentX
(X refers to the sequential number of analyzer) folder under the OperationSoft
directory. The naming rule is: LampSignalGatherRst_********.csv. (******** refers
to the test date and time.) The test time, lamp brightness, gain of each channel, and
concrete values and statistic values of each channel are included in the file.
8-24
8.5.7 Lamp Hour Inquiry
When to use:
Inquiring the using time of the lamp.
Clearing water blank values of all cuvettes when an alarm is given indicating water
blank error 10X.
N/A
1. Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Photometer Unit. Select Lamp
Hour Inquiry.
On the screen shows the using time, sleeping time and last replacement time of the
lamp. If the using time is over 2000 hours, replace the lamp to avoid erroneous
results due to lamp's abnormal fluctuation.
Select Clear Blank to clear the water blank values of all cuvettes.
Figure 8.23 Clear water blank value
8-25
9 Troubleshooting
9-1
9.1 Overview
This chapter provides all foreseeable alarms of the BS-2000M/BS-2200M, as well as
the triggering mechanism, possible causes and corrective actions. However, the
alarms may not cover all failures, and the possible causes and corrective actions may
not completely comply with the actual failure mode. The alarms provided in this
chapter are for reference only and cannot be taken as the final judgment criteria.
9-2
9.2 Result Flags
Result flags are saved in sample results, calibration results and QC results in order to
indicate abnormities happening in the test process. They may appear when certain
alarms occur or the original test results are processed. See the table below:
Table 9.1 List of result flags

Flag Description Remark
RCE Response calculation error
ABS Absorbance out of range
RBK R1 blank absorbance out of range
BOE Substrate depletion
NLN No linear interval
EXP Enzyme linearity range extension
ENC No calculation interval
LIN Non-linear
PRO Prozone check error
> Exceeds linearity range high
< Exceeds linearity range low
! Exceeds critical range high
! Exceeds critical range low
Exceeds reference range high
Exceeds reference range low
RRN Response greater than that of the
maximum-concentration calibrator
LOW Response less than that of the
minimum-concentration calibrator
CAL Corrected result
Recalculated calibration factor
EDT Edited result
Edited calibration factor
R Rerun result
DTGL Insufficient concentrated wash
solution
T1 Reaction disk temperature error
RGTE Expired reagent
SMPE Expired sample Sample and control
RGTL Insufficient reagent
SMPL Insufficient sample
12s The QC result does not comply with
the 12s rule.
9-3
the 13s rule.
the 22s rule.
R4s The QC result does not comply with
the R4s rule.
the 41s rule.
10x The QC result does not comply with
the 10x rule.
DEL Deleted QC result
OVE Overridden calibration factor
EXT Extended calibration factor
CALE Edited calibration factor
CALR Recalculated calibration factor
CALF Calibration failed
RGTH ISE sample injection port liquid Applicable for ISE tests
level too high only
T2 Temperature sensor error Applicable for ISE tests
only
ADC ADC (analog to digital conversion) Applicable for ISE tests
out of range only
MBK Mixed blank absorbance out of
range
BLK Blank response out of range
DUP Calibration repeatability error.
Potential difference between two
ISE calibration replicates out of
range
SEN Calibration sensitivity out of range.
ISE calibration test out of range
CSD Calibration curve standard
deviation out of range
DET Calibration determination
coefficient out of range
FAC Calibration slope difference out of
range
MON Calibration curve not monotonic
COV Calibration curve not convergent
REF Output of reference electrode Applicable for ISE tests
lower than 400mv only
SLO Slope out of range Applicable for ISE tests
only
DILO Dilution factor out of range Applicable for ISE tests
only
9-4
BIAS C1 bias out of range Applicable for ISE tests
only
REPL Exceeds calibration replicates Applicable for ISE tests
only
ICA The response is normal, but results
cannot be calculated.
BRRW ISE test results are calculated
based on previous calibration
factors.
REC Recalculated result
L Number of continuous cuvettes
with water blank error is greater
than 10.
9-5
9.3 Error Code
Error alarms are divided into prompts and popup messages. Prompts are displayed in
the prompt message area to indicate alarms. See the figure below:
Figure 9.1 Prompt messege
Popup messages are shown on a dialog box displayed to remind the operator of an
error that is happening. See the figure below:
Both of the two types of error alarms are recorded in the error logs. The description
of alarms in prompts and popup messages is brief and are explained in detail in the
error logs. The error alarms listed below may appear in the error logs.
9-6
Figure 9.2 Error Logs
9-7
Error Error Log Result When to Trigger Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code Flags
C00001 Incompatible operating / The operating software, The operating system is not Check if the operating system is
system. Please install when started up, detects Windows 7. Windows 7 (32-bit, Professional).
Windows 7 an operating system rather Reinstall the operating software and
than Windows 7. operating software.
C00002 Memory is less than 2G / Memory is less than 1.5G. Insufficient memory. Install a memory above 2G and then
reboot the operating system.
C00003 Resolution error / The operating software, Screen resolution setting error. Set the screen resolution of the display
when started up, detects monitor as 1280*1024.
that the screen resolution is
not 1280*1024.
C00004 Color error / The operating software, The color is below 16 bit. Set the color to above 16 and then
when started up, detects reboot the operating system.
that the display color is not
16 bit or above.
C00005 Insufficient disk space / The remaining space of the Insufficient disk space Rearrange the hard disk and delete the
hard disk on which the useless files.
operating software is
installed is less than 4G.
C00007 CPU performance low / The use rate of CPU The use rate of CPU is too hight Reboot the computer and operating
exceeds 90% continuously because of other applications software. If this message appears for 3
for 1 minute. running or computer virus. times, contact our company or your
local distributor.
C00008 Printer cannot be / The computer and printer The printer is not powered on; Check the printer connection; check if
connected cannot communicate during the communication cable is the printer is powered on and if the
printing. loose; printer driver is not driver and default printer have been
installed; or the printer goes installed.
wrong.
C00009 Printer failure / The computer and printer Paper jam; no ink; other failure Check for paper jam. Check if printer is
can communicate, but of the printer. busy, and print tasks are too many.
printing fails (with paper
available).
9-8
Code Flags
C00010 Print paper running out / The error is detected during Paper jam or no paper. Check for paper jam. Check if printer is
printing. busy, and print tasks are too many.
C00012 Sound card failure / No sound card is installed. No sound card is installed. Reinstall the sound card or the sound
Sound card failure. Sound card failure. Incorrect card driver.
Incorrect sound card driver. sound card driver.
C01001 Equipment cannot be / The main control unit of the The serial cable is not Check the serial port connection.
connected analyzer receives no connected; or the analyzer Replug the cable. Check if the analyzer
instructions from the power is switched off. and rack feeder system are powered on.
operating software within 3 The track is powered off. Start the initialization again. Restart
seconds. the computer and analyzer. If three
Three continuous continuous attempts are failed, contact
instructions sent by the our company or your local distributor.
operating software are not
executed.
The main control unit of the
rack feeder system receives
no instructions from the
operating software within 3
seconds.
C02001 Database initializing / The database cannot be Database software is not Install the database software;
failed logged on when the installed; database is not re-establish the database; if problem
operating software is established; database system or remains, contact our company.
started. database file is damaged or lost;
database is opened exclusively
C02002 Database upgrade / The database version is The database is seriously Install the database software;
failed detected not matching the damaged; the database is not re-establish the database; if problem
operating software. The for the BS-2000; the database is remains, contact our company.
database is bound to the opened exclusively; or the
operating software and may database version does not
be upgraded together with match the operating software.
the software.
9-9
Code Flags
C02004 Database backup failed / Execution of SQL statement The database file is damaged or Reboot the computer and analyzer. If
fails during database lost. three continuous attempts are failed,
backup. contact our company or your local
distributor.
C02005 Reading/Writing / SQL statement cannot be Cannot read or write necessary Check if the database has been
database failed read or written. information from or into damaged. If yes, contact our company.
database
C03001 Result cannot be REC The absorbance used for The absorbance data is Find the reasons of lost photoelectric
calculated calculating response is incomplete, or the divisor is 0. data, probably on PCBs or software.
Sample ID/bar code: incomplete, or the divisor is
Position: 0.
Chemistry:
C03002 Absorbance out of ABS The absorbance measured The sample contains Check the sample for foreign matters or
range at the primary and interferents; the reagent is interferents; check if the reagent is
Sample ID/bar code: secondary wavelength is deteriorated; the cuvette is qualified and placed in the correct
Position: (Outer sample greater than 3.4A. dirty; or the optical system is position; check the cuvette is clean;
carousel / Inner abnormal. check if the photometric system is
sample carousel / Rack working normally.
ID and position)
Chemistry:
C03003 R1 blank absorbance RBK The R1 reagent blank The reagent goes wrong; the Check if cuvette is clean or overflowed;
out of range absorbance is beyond the cuvette is not clear; the check if reagent is sufficient, without
Sample ID/bar code: set range. reaction cuvette is overflowed; air bubbles; check if chemistry
Position: or insufficient reagent is parameters are reasonable; if previous
dispensed. problems do not exist, replace reagent
Chemistry:
and rerun the test.
C03004 Substrate depletion BOE The absorbance in Kinetic Concentration of the sample is Check the reaction curve and the
Sample ID/bar code: measurements exceeds the too high. substrate depletion limit. Rerun the test
Position: set limit. with diluted sample.
Chemistry:
9-10
Code Flags
C03005 Result cannot be ENC Kinetic chemistries have Concentration of the sample is Check the reaction curve and the
calculated substrate depletion within too high. substrate depletion limit. Rerun the test
Sample ID/bar code: the delay time. with diluted sample.
Position:
Chemistry:
C03006 Linearity limit out of LIN The linearity limit between Concentration of the sample is Check the reaction curve and the
range measuring points of Kinetic too high, and the substrate substrate depletion limit. Rerun the test
Sample ID/bar code: chemistries is beyond the depletion limit is not set or is with diluted sample.
Position: set range. unreasonable.
Chemistry:
C03007 Prozone check error PRO Turbidity chemistries have Concentration of the sample is Check the reaction curve and the
Sample ID/bar code: antigen excess during too high. prozone check parameters. Rerun the
Position: measurement. test with diluted sample.
Chemistry:
C03008 Sample concentration RRN Response of the sample Concentration of the sample is Rerun the test with diluted sample.
is higher than that of exceeds that of the too high.
the highest-level highest-level calibrator.
calibrator This alarm only applies to
Sample ID/bar code: nonlinear calibrations.
Position:
Chemistry:
C03009 Mixed blank MBK During measurement of The reagent goes wrong; the Check if cuvette is clean or overflowed;
absorbance out of 0-level calibrator, the cuvette is not clear; the check if reagent is sufficient, without
range mixed reagent blank reaction cuvette is overflowed; air bubbles; check if chemistry
Chemistry: absorbance at the reaction or insufficient reagent is parameters are reasonable; if previous
end point is beyond the set dispensed. problems do not exist, replace reagent
range. This alarm will not and rerun the test.
occur if no mixed reagent
blank absorbance range has
been set.
9-11
Code Flags
C03010 Blank response out of BLK Blank response is checked The reagent goes wrong; Check if the cuvette is not overflowed,
range only in measurement of insufficient reagent is the reagent is sufficient without air
Chemistry: 0-level calibrator. The input dispensed; the cuvette contains bubbles, the light does not drift and the
range is -35000-35000. The air bubbles; the light drifts; or chemistry parameters are reasonable. If
default is blank, which the cuvette is overflowed. yes, replace the reagent and then rerun
means not performing this the test.
check.
C03011 Calibration DUP The difference between the The reagent may go wrong; the Find the reasons by observing the
repeatability out of maximum and minimum calibrator is invalid; the probe is reaction curve.
range. responses in multiple contaminated; or the cuvette is
Chemistry: measurements of each overflowed.
Calibrator: calibrator exceeds the set
limit. This alarm will not
Position:
occur if no repeatability
limit has been set.
C03012 Calibration sensitivity SEN The response difference of The reagent may go wrong; the Check the expiration date of the
out of range. the highest-/lowest-level calibrator is invalid; or the reagent and calibrator; check if the
Chemistry: calibrators exceeds the set calibrator is mistakenly calibrator has been placed as set on the
Calibrator: limit. This alarm will not positioned. operating software.
occur if no sensitivity limit
Position:
has been set.
C03013 Calibration curve CSD The standard deviation of The reagent or calibrator goes Check if the parameters are reasonable,
standard deviation out multi-point linear and wrong; or parameter settings and the reagent and calibrator are
of range. nonlinear calibration curves are unreasonable. normal, and then recalibrate.
Chemistry: exceeds the set limit. This
alarm will not occur if no
standard deviation has
been set.
C03014 Calibration DET The determination Parameters are incorrect; the Check if the parameters are reasonable,
determination coefficient of calibration reagent or calibrator is invalid. and the reagent and calibrator are
coefficient out of curve exceeds the set limit. normal, and then recalibrate.
range This alarm will not occur if
9-12
Code Flags
Chemistry: no determination
coefficient has been set.
C03015 Calibration coefficient FAC The slope difference is Parameters are incorrect; the Check if the parameters are reasonable,
differential limit applicable to linear reagent or calibrator is invalid. and the reagent and calibrator are
exceeds limit. calibration only and refers normal, and then recalibrate.
Chemistry: to the K factor (slope)
difference between two
adjacent calibrations. The
slop difference exceeds the
set limit. This alarm will
not occur if no slop
difference has been set.
C03016 Calibration curve not MON In nonlinear calibration, The calibrator is contaminated Check if the calibrator is defined and
monotonic. the response of high-level or invalid; or the placed correctly, and then recalibrate.
Chemistry: calibrator is lower than in high-/low-level calibrators are
ascending reaction or mistakenly positioned.
greater than in descending
reaction that of low-level
calibrator.
C03017 Calibration curve is not COV For nonlinear calibration, a The reagent or calibrator goes Check the expiration date of the
convergent. satisfying base cannot be wrong. reagent and calibrator, and then
Chemistry: calculated and no recalibrate. If troubleshooting fails,
calibration curve is drawn. choose other calibration rules and
recalibrate.
C03018 Chemistry: 12s The QC result is between 2 / No actions are required.
Control: 1-2S warning and 3 standard deviations
from the assigned mean
concentration.
C03019 Chemistry: 13s The current QC result is The reagent or control goes Check if the reagent is qualified,
Control: 1-3S out of greater than 3 standard wrong; or the instrument is in control sample is normal, and the
control deviations from the abnormal status. instrument is working correctly.
assigned mean
9-13
Code Flags
concentration.
C03020 Chemistry: 22s Results of two controls or The reagent or control goes Check if the reagent is qualified,
Control: 2-2S out of two results of one control wrong; or the instrument is in control sample is normal, and the
control within a run are abnormal status. instrument is working correctly.
simultaneously greater than
+2 or -2 standard deviations
from the assigned mean.
C03021 Chemistry: R4s One result of a run is The reagent or control goes Check if the reagent is qualified,
Control: R-4S out of greater than +2 standard wrong; or the instrument is in control sample is normal, and the
control deviations from the abnormal status. instrument is working correctly.
assigned mean and the
other greater than -2SDs.
C03022 Chemistry: 41s Results of two runs (4 The reagent or control goes Check if the reagent is qualified,
Control: 4-1S out of results), or 4 continuous wrong; or the instrument is in control sample is normal, and the
control results of a control are on abnormal status. instrument is working correctly.
the same side and greater
than 1 standard deviation
from the assigned mean
concentration.
C03023 Chemistry: 10x Results of five runs (10 The reagent or control goes Check if the reagent is qualified,
Control: 10-X out of results), or 10 continuous wrong; or the instrument is in control sample is normal, and the
control results of a control are on abnormal status. instrument is working correctly.
the same side.
C04001 Sample bar code / Two or more sample tubes Duplicate bar code is used. Replace the duplicate sample bar code
already exists. on the same carousel or label.
Sample ID/bar code: rack have identical bar
Position 1: code.
Position 2: In auto rerun mode, a
sample with same bar code
is scanned when the
current sample on the rack
has not left the buffer area.
9-14
Code Flags
In manual rerun mode, a
sample with same bar code
is scanned when the
current sample on the rack
has not entered the buffer
area.
During analysis, samples
with same bar code as
those on the carousel are
scanned on rack, or samples
with same bar code as
those on rack are scanned
on the carousel.
C04002 Corresponding program / During sample scanning, no The sample of the bar code has Program the sample of the bar code.
information does not sample information not been programmed.
exist corresponding to the bar
Sample ID/bar code: code is found in the local
Position: database or the LIS
database.
C04006 Sample is expired. / The difference between the The sample is loaded after its Request tests with a new sample or new
Sample ID/bar code: collection time or shelf life is exceeded. sample information. Reject the expired
Position: programming time and the sample. If the sample's shelf life is too
scanning time of a sample short, change it to a reasonable one.
exceeds the set validity
period.
C04007 Sample bar code / The sample bar code The bar code does not meet the Redefine the bar code with numbers
contains invalid contains characters other requirements. and letters.
characters. than numbers and letters.
Position: (Outer sample
carousel / Inner
sample carousel / Rack
ID and position)
9-15
Code Flags
C04008 Sample bar code is / The length of the sample The bar code does not meet the Redefine the bar code with no more
longer than 27 digits. bar code exceeds 27 digits. requirements. than 27 digits.
Position: (Outer sample
carousel / Inner
sample carousel / Rack
ID and position)
C05001 Duplicate reagent bar / Reagent with the same bar Incorrect reagent or reagent bar Reprint the reagent bar code, or
code code has already existed. code is being used, or an invalid replace the reagent bottle with an
Reagent: reagent bar code is being used invalid bar code.
Position 1: in a closed-reagent system.
Closed-reagent bar code is
Position 2:
aligned with closed reagents,
and cannot be used again for
new reagent when a reagent is
exhausted.
C05002 Reagent bar code / No chemistries are found by Incorrect reagent bar code is Print the new reagent bar code with
information error. ID number or name; the being used, or reagent bar code correct settings and check the bar code
Position: bottle type is invalid; or the is not configured reasonably. against the settings. In the case of a
expiration date is invalid. The reagent bar code contains closed-reagent system, replace the
incomplete or incorrect reagent reagent bottle, or contact the reagent
information, such as expiration supplier.
date, reagent volume, etc. Check if the reagent has been
If the reagent is placed mistakenly positioned.
incorrectly, adjust them to the
correct positions, that is, R1 to
reagent carousel 1 and R2 to
reagent carousel 2.
C05003 Reagent bar code / The bar code length is Incorrect reagent bar code is Check the reagent bar code settings, or
analysis error. incorrect; or the key of being used, or reagent bar code reprint the reagent bar code against the
Position: closed reagent bar code is settings are incorrect. settings. In the case of a closed-reagent
incorrect and cannot be Non-closed reagent bar code is system, contact the reagent supplier.
analyzed. being used in a closed-reagent
9-16
Code Flags
system. The system is failed to
extract reagent information
from the bar code.
C06001 LIS initialization error / The LIS version does not Host file is damaged or does not Restart or reinstall the operating
match or does not exist; or exist. software.
the TCP/IP protocol stack is
abnormal.
C06002 LIS communication / The IP address or port Host parameters error Check system configuration
parameter error number of the LIS, parameters; re-connect LIS
communication protocol, or
delay time are set
incorrectly.
C06003 LIS communication / The LIS can be connected, Network connection is If the error occurs accidentally, send or
error but then is disconnected abnormal; or the LIS software receive the instruction again. If the
due to data packet sending goes wrong. error occurs for several times, contact
failure or network LIS vendor.
connection failure.
C06004 LIS host cannot be / Three attempts to connect Abnormal network connection, Check if LIS host and LIS station is
connected the LIS host fail. or the LIS host is not started. started normally.
C06005 Sending sample results / The computer succeeds in Network connection is If the error occurs accidentally, send or
failed. sending sample results to abnormal; or the LIS software receive the instruction again. If the
Sample ID/bar code: the LIS host, but receives goes wrong. error occurs for several times, contact
Position: no correct response when LIS vendor.
the specified time is
reached.
C06007 Inquiring sample / When a sample query LIS host failure. If the error occurs accidentally, neglect
information failed request is sent successfully, it. If the error occurs for several times,
Sample ID/bar code: no correct response is contact LIS vendor.
Position: received within 300
seconds.
C06008 Downloading sample / The sample information Incorrect channel settings; or Check and re-set the chemistry
9-17
Code Flags
failed. queried on the LIS does not insufficient or redundant correspondence between the operating
Sample ID/bar code: include the keywords, such chemistries on the LIS host. software and the LIS host.
Position: as sample ID, bar code and
chemistries.
C03024 Biochemistry test / The time difference Software error Rerun the test, or restart the operating
period time out. between sending of test Operating system error software and analyzer.
Cannot continue period instruction and
returning of test result
exceeds the specified limit.
C03025 ISE test period time / The time difference Software error Restore the system and rerun the test.
out. Cannot continue between finishing sample Calculation of ISE calibration Replace the calibrator and recalibrate.
injection and becoming factor is time out due to Replace the electrode.
Standby status exceeds the incorrect response.
specified limit.
C03026 Photoelectric data is / Valid photoelectric data for Communication failure, or Rerun the operating software, or rerun
lost calculating results are lost. hardware issue. the test. If the error occurs repeatedly,
check the middle-/lower-layer units of
the instrument.
C07012 Storage device error. / An error occurs when No floppy disk or U disk is Check if a USB drive or floppy disk is
Cannot import data writing into the portable inserted. No file is found in the inserted or full. Check if the storage
storage device. floppy disk or U disk, or file device is damaged.
error, or file is damaged. The
floppy disk or U disk is locked or
damaged.
C07013 Storage device error. / An error occurs when No floppy disk or U disk is Check if a USB drive or floppy disk is
Cannot export data reading data on a portable inserted. Insufficient disk inserted or full. Check if the storage
storage device. space. The floppy disk or U disk device is damaged.
is locked or damaged.
C07015 ISE buffer solution is / The floater of the buffer The ISE buffer tank is empty. Fill more ISE buffer solution.
exhausted solution tank does not rise. The liquid level sensor of the ISE Reconnect the liquid level sensor of the
module is not connected. ISE module.
9-18
Code Flags
The liquid level sensor of the ISE Make sure that the liquid level sensor of
module goes wrong. ISE module is connected correctly.
Replace the liquid level sensor of ISE
module.
C07016 Insufficient wash / The remaining volume of Insufficient wash solution on the Refill the wash solution on the reagent
solution wash solution is less than reagent carousel. carousel.
Position: the set value.
C07017 Wash solution is / No wash solution is The wash solution on the Refill the wash solution on the reagent
exhausted detected during aspiration. reagent carousel is exhausted. carousel.
Position:
C07022 Less than X tests are / The remaining biochemistry All reagents of the reagent type Refill or replace the reagent.
left in biochemistry reagent is less than X tests. for the chemistry are less than
reagent (X is set by user.) the minimum limit. All reagents
Chemistry: of the type are too little to be
detected.
C07023 Chemistry: %s, 30 / The difference between the The calibration factors are Recalibrate the chemistries.
minutes left for next system time and the about to be expired.
calibration. (%s expiration date of the
represents a chemistry. calibration factors is less
It is used in the same than 30 minutes.
way in the following
texts.)
C07027 Calibrator %s has been / The system time is The calibrator is expired. Replace the calibrator, or recalibrate.
expired compared with the
expiration date of the
calibrator.
C07028 Chemistry: %s, lot / The system time is Expired reagent Replace the reagent, or recalibrate.
No.: %s, compared with the
position: %s, has been expiration date of the
expired reagent.
C07029 Chemistry: %s, lot / The system time is Expired reagent Replace the reagent, or recalibrate.
9-19
Code Flags
No.: %s, compared with the
position: %s, has uncapping time of the
exceeded the reagent.
uncapping time
C07030 Reference electrode is REF The voltage of the Reference electrode Replace the reference electrode.
invalidated reference electrode performance is degenerated
decreases to around 100.
C01002 Instruction response / No response or incorrect Communication between Check the serial port connection.
error response for operation upper-/lower-layer units of the Replug the cable. Switch off the
instruction is received. analyzer fails. analyzer power and switch on it again.
Recover the failure.
C05006 Wash solution position / Bar code of another reagent Reagent rather than wash Reposition the reagent, or remove it
on reagent carousel is is detected on the fixed solution is placed in the fixed from the fixed wash solution position.
occupied by another wash solution position of R1 wash solution position on
reagent reagent carousel. reagent carousel 1.
Position:
C05007 Wash solution position / Bar code of another reagent Reagent rather than wash Reposition the reagent, or remove it
on reagent carousel is is detected on the fixed solution is placed in the fixed from the fixed wash solution position.
occupied by another wash solution position of R2 wash solution position on
reagent reagent carousel. reagent carousel 2.
Position:
C05008 Physiological saline / Bar code of another reagent Reagent rather than Reposition the reagent, or remove it
position on reagent is detected on the fixed physiological saline is placed in from the fixed wash solution position.
carousel is occupied by physiological saline position the fixed physiological saline
another reagent of R1 reagent carousel. position on reagent carousel 1.
Position:
C03030 Photoelectric / The photoelectric Operating software error. Rerun the operating software or the
measurement is time measurement period is out analyzer. If the problem remains,
out of range contact our company.
Sample ID/bar code:
Position:
9-20
Code Flags
Chemistry:
C03031 Multiple photoelectric / Five consecutive Operating software error. Rerun the operating software or the
measurements are photoelectric measurement analyzer. If the problem remains,
time out periods of a test are time contact our company.
Sample ID/bar code: out.
Position:
Chemistry:
C07033 Less than X tests are / The detected reagent ISE buffer solution is about to be Check the inventory, and refill ISE
left in ISE buffer inventory is less than the exhausted. buffer solution if necessary.
solution set threshold.
C04009 Sample bar code is / Sample bar code is shorter The bar code is invalid. Redefine the bar code with no less than
shorter than 3 digits. than 3 digits. 3 digits.
Position:
C07034 Insufficient / The remaining physiological Physiological saline is Refill the physiological saline on the
physiological saline on saline is less than the set insufficient. reagent carousel.
reagent carousel limit.
Position:
C07035 Physiological saline on / No physiological saline is Physiological saline is Refill the physiological saline on the
reagent carousel is detected. exhausted. reagent carousel.
exhausted
Position:
C05009 Reagent bar code / Parameters of the bar code Communication between the If configuration error remains, perform
reader configuration reader, such as symbology, bar code reader and the the bar code reader diagnosis procedure
error digits, check digit, are lower-layer units fails, or the to troubleshoot.
inconsistent with those on bar code reader goes wrong.
the operating software.
C04010 Sample bar code / Parameters of the bar code Communication between the If configuration error remains, perform
reader configuration reader, such as symbology, bar code reader and the bar code reader diagnosis procedure to
error digits, check digit, are lower-layer units fails, or the troubleshoot.
inconsistent with those on bar code reader goes wrong.
9-21
Code Flags
the operating software.
C07036 Chemistry:%s. / The calibration factors have Recalibrate the chemistry.
Calibration factors are been expired.
expired
C07037 Reagent bottle number / Serial number of the reagent is Recalibrate the chemistry.
of %s chemistry is changed.
changed. Please
recalibrate
C07038 Reagent lot number / Lot number of the reagent is Recalibrate.
of %s chemistry is changed.
changed. Please
recalibrate
C04011 No bar code is scanned / No sample bar code is No sample is loaded. Reposition the samples.
in sample position. detected on positions set Sample bar code is too poor to Use clear and complete sample bar
Position: on the operating software. be identified. code.
Sample bar code label is not Adjust the sample bar code label to
applied correctly. make it face the gap on the sample cup
Sample bar code scanning adapter.
window is dirty. Clean the sample bar code scanning
Symbology, digits and check window.
digit of sample bar code are not Check if the symbology, digits and check
set correctly. digit of sample bar code are set
correctly.
C08006 Sample arrives late / A sample rack does not The movement mechanism or Reset the whole unit and observe the
Rack ID: arrive at the specified sensors of the rack transfer unit rack transfer unit to find the reasons.
Position: aspirate position within the go wrong.
specified time.
(Sample bar code:
displayed only in bar
code mode)
C08005 Rack bar code already / If a rack with same bar code Duplicate bar code. Reprint the sample bar code.
is detected before the
9-22
Code Flags
exists. current rack that has been
Bar code: scanned successfully enters
the storage unit or supply
unit, it will not be
delivered.
C08004 Bar code on sample / Sample bar code of position The sample bar code does not Reprint the bar code according to the
rack cannot be X on the current rack comply with the rules. required symbology.
identified cannot be identified. Sample bar code is too poor to Use clear and complete sample bar
Rack ID: be identified. code.
Position: Sample bar code label is not Adjust the sample bar code label to
applied correctly. make it face the gap on the sample cup
Sample bar code scanning adapter.
window is dirty. Clean the sample bar code scanning
Symbology, digits and check window.
digit of sample bar code are not Check if the symbology, digits and check
set correctly. digit of sample bar code are set
correctly.
C08003 At least one extra / A sample not programmed The sample tube is placed in an Reposition the sample tube.
sample is detected on on the operating software is incorrect position.
sample rack detected in certain position
Rack ID: of the current rack.
Position:
C08002 At least one sample is / A sample programmed on The sample tube is placed in an Reposition the sample tube.
lost on sample rack the operating software is incorrect position.
Rack ID: not found on the set
Position: position of the current
rack.
C08001 Sample rack delivery is / The scanned rack bar code The rack bar code label is Check the rack or replace it with a new
forbidden does not match the rack damaged, or the magnetic ring one.
Position: type. at the bottom of the rack falls
Error: off.
9-23
Code Flags
Rack type cannot be
identified.
Rack bar code cannot
be identified.
Rack type conflicts
with rack bar code.
C08007 Samples on rack have / In sequential mode, all Samples on the current rack Check the program information against
no program samples on the current have no program information. the samples on the current rack.
information. normal or STAT rack have no
program information.
C04012 Sample bar code / During programming of The bar code is invalid. Reset the bar code format, or reprint
analysis error bar-coded samples, the bar and scan the bar code.
Sample bar code: code cannot be analyzed or
Position: is found in invalid format.
A00001 System communication / The control software Instrument instructions cannot Switch off the analyzer power and
error undergoes logic error, be executed. switch on it again. Recover failure by
resulting in instruction performing the Home maintenance
error or instruction procedure.
executing logic error.
A00006 Equipment / Main control unit E2PROM E2PROM read/write error. Switch off the analyzer power and
configuration cannot reading or writing error. switch on it again. Recover failure by
be read or saved performing the Home maintenance
Error: procedure.
A01006 Sample probe vertical / Sensor status is incorrect. Sensor status error: Sensor status error:
movement error The system checks the Belt or belt pulley is loose. Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
Position: vertical home position Failed to find the zero position: tighten them if so;
Error: sensor when the component 1) Assembly is jammed; Failed to find the zero position:
Sensor status is stops moving. If the sensor 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a
2) Driving circuit error;
incorrect status is not consistent with new assembly;
the theoretical status, the 3) Vertical motor error;
Failed to find the zero
9-24
Code Flags
position. alarm is triggered. 4) Vertical sensor error; 2) Replace PCB;
Collision occurs during Failed to find the zero 5) Belt pulley is loose; 3) Replace motor;
operation other than position. Collision occurs during 4) Replace sensor;
aspirating The probe does not find the operation other than aspirating: 5) Tighten properly;
Collision error mechanical zero position 1) Collision sensor or circuit or Collision occurs during operation other
Moving vertically is not after moving for specified cable failure; than aspirating:
allowed in current steps. 2) Collision sensor is not 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
position Collision occurs during blocked when assembling the 2) Reassemble;
Deviation from home operation other than sample probe;
aspirating. 3) Rotate the positioning sensor to
position is out of 3) Incorrect sample probe remove dust or adjust the probe to be
range. During vertical movement positioning; vertical; if problem remains, adjust the
Vertical motor missed of the sample probe, the 4) Incorrect sample carousel positioning parameters;
steps. vertical obstruct detection positioning;
sensor on the level sense 4) Adjust sample carousel positioning
Collision error remains: parameters.
board is not blocked.
1) Collision sensor or circuit or Collision error remains:
Collision error remains.
cable failure; 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
The probe moves upwards
2) Collision sensor is not 2) Reassemble;
when detecting an obstruct
blocked when assembling the
in vertical direction, but 3) Mount the spring of blocking plate
sample probe;
the vertical obstruct again;
detection sensor on the 3) Collision sensor is not
Vertical movement is not allowed in
level sense board returns blocked due to deformation of
current horizontal position:
no obstruct signal. blocking plates driving spring;
Home the instrument or the sample
Moving vertically is not Vertical movement is not
probe unit.
allowed in current allowed in current horizontal
horizontal position. position:
Deviation from zero Operating software error.
position is out of range.
The vertical movement
steps for passing the
mechanical zero position
are beyond the preset
range. For instance, the
9-25
Code Flags
probe should move for 100
steps instead of 200 to pass
the mechanical zero
position.
Vertical motor missed
steps.
When the probe moves
vertically to the top of a
cuvette, no signal of
vertical middle position is
detected.
A01006 Sample probe / Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status error: Sensor status error:
horizontal movement The system checks the Belt or belt pulley is loose. Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
error horizontal home position 1 Failed to find the zero position: tighten them if so;
Position: sensor when the component 1) Driving circuit error; Failed to find the zero position:
Error: stops moving. If the sensor 1) Replace PCB;
2) Motor error;
Sensor status is status is not consistent with
3) Home position sensor error; 2) Replace motor;
incorrect the theoretical status, the
alarm is triggered. 4) Belt pulley is loose; 3) Replace sensor;
Failed to find the zero 4) Tighten properly;
Failed to find the Collision occurs during
position.
mechanical zero position. horizontal movement: Collision occurs during horizontal
Collision occurs during movement:
No mechanical zero 1) Driving circuit error;
horizontal movement
position is detected after 2) Motor error; 1) Replace PCB;
Moving horizontally is
moving for specified steps 3) Home position sensor error; 2) Replace motor;
not allowed in current
during resetting process. 4) Belt pulley is loose; 3) Replace sensor;
vertical position.
Collision occurs during Horizontal movement is not 4) Tighten properly;
Deviation from home
horizontal movement. allowed in current vertical Horizontal movement is not allowed in
position is out of
range. Coder jump signal is not position: current vertical position:
detected after moving Software error Home the instrument or the sample
horizontally for specified probe unit.
even number of steps.
Moving horizontally is not
9-26
Code Flags
allowed in current vertical
position.
The probe moves
horizontally from a position
rather than the vertical
home position.
Deviation from zero
The moving steps of passing
two horizontal zero
positions are out of range.
A01006 Sample syringe / Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status is incorrect. Sensor status is incorrect.
Position: syringe home position Failed to find the zero position: tighten them if so;
the theoretical status, the 3) Motor error;
Failed to find the zero 4) Sensor error; 2) Replace PCB;
alarm is triggered.
position. 3) Replace motor;
Failed to find the zero 5) Belt pulley is loose;
Deviation from home 4) Replace sensor;
position.
position is out of 5) Tighten properly;
range. The mechanical zero
position is not found after
moving for specified steps.
Deviation from home
The moving steps for
passing the zero position
are out of range.
A01007 Sample probe collides / When the sample probe is Collision sensor or circuit or Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
with an obstacle when aspirating, the obstruct cable failure; Reassemble;
aspirating detection sensor on the Collision sensor is not blocked Rotate the positioning sensor to remove
9-27
Code Flags
Position: level sense board detects when assembling the sample dust or adjust the probe to be vertical;
Sample ID/bar code: an obstruct signal. probe; if problem remains, adjust the
Position: Incorrect sample probe positioning parameters;
positioning; Adjust sample carousel positioning
Incorrect sample carousel parameters.
positioning;
A01021 Probe S1 clog detection / No response or incorrect Connection between the clog Check relevant cable for any signs of
board communication response is returned for detection board and the wash fray or loose cable, or disconnection, or
error. communication between control drive board is abnormal. short circuit;
the sample control drive Clog detection board error. Check if the power indication light for
board and the clog clog detection board is on properly;
detection board 1. check if clog detection board is working
correctly;
Replace clog detection board if
malfunction has been identified.
A01100 Probe S2 clog detection / No response or incorrect Connection between the clog Check relevant cable for any signs of
board communication response is returned for detection board and the wash fray or loose cable, or disconnection, or
error. communication between control drive board is abnormal. short circuit;
the sample control drive Clog detection board error. Check if the power indication light for
board and the clog clog detection board is on properly;
detection board 2. check if clog detection board is working
correctly;
Replace clog detection board if
malfunction has been identified.
A01022 S1 syringe aspirates too / Software problem. The The aspirate volume is beyond Check the aspirate volume settings and
much syringe volume is only the range of the syringe. upgrade the software.
Sample ID/bar code: 500l, but the software
Position: sends an instruction to
aspirate 600l.
A01101 S2 syringe aspirates too / Software problem. The The aspirate volume is beyond Check the aspirate volume settings and
much syringe volume is only the range of the syringe. upgrade the software.
500l, but the software
9-28
Code Flags
Sample ID/bar code: sends an instruction to
Position: aspirate 600l.
A01023 S1 syringe dispenses / Software problem. The The dispense volume is beyond Check the dispense volume settings and
too much syringe volume is only the range of the syringe. upgrade the software.
Cuvette No.: 500l, but the software
dispense 600l.
Chemistry:
A01102 S2 syringe dispenses / Software problem. The The dispense volume is beyond Check the dispense volume settings and
too much syringe volume is only the range of the syringe. upgrade the software.
Cuvette No.: 500l, but the software
dispense 600l.
Chemistry:
A01024 Insufficient sample / The alarm will be triggered No sample is loaded on the Check if there is sufficient sample, and
Position: (diluting when one of the following designated position; run the test again;
position on reaction conditions happens: Insufficient sample. If there is level detection error, check
carousel) The sample probe fails to Sample probe level detection sample probe, level detection board
Sample ID/bar code: detect liquid level on error. and connecting cable; replace them if
sample carousel when any abnormity is identified.
aspirating.
The sample probe fails to
detect liquid level on
reaction carousel when
aspirating.
No special wash solution is
detected during aspirating.
The sample probe fails to
detect liquid level on
sample rack when
aspirating.
A01027 S1: Sample is / When probe S1 is No sample is loaded on the Check if there is sufficient sample, and
insufficient or contains aspirating, the clog designated position; run the test again;
9-29
Code Flags
air bubbles detection board detects an Insufficient sample. If level detection error is identified,
Position: empty aspirate signal. Sample probe level detection check sample probe, level detection
Sample ID/bar code: error. board and connecting cable; replace
Clog detection error. them if any abnormity is identified.
If clog detection error is identified,
check if there is loose connection or
liquid leakage in sample probe hydro
system.
A01104 S2: Sample is / When probe S2 is No sample is loaded on the Check if there is sufficient sample, and
insufficient or contains aspirating, the clog designated position; run the test again;
air bubbles detection board detects an Insufficient sample. If level detection error is identified,
Position: empty aspirate signal. Sample probe level detection check sample probe, level detection
Sample ID/bar code: error. board and connecting cable; replace
Clog detection error. them if any abnormity is identified.
If clog detection error is identified,
check if there is loose connection or
liquid leakage in sample probe hydro
system.
A01028 Sample probe fails to / The level sense board No deionized water, or fluidic Check if the fluidics are normal;
detect liquid level should detect a liquid level error; troubleshoot if there is any abnormity;
during cleaning signal when the sample Sample probe level detection If level detection error is identified,
probe is being washed in its error. check sample probe, level detection
wash well. board and connecting cable; replace
them if any abnormity is identified.
A01029 S1: Sample is / Clog signal is detected The sample contains clots or is Check if sample has been pre-processed
insufficient or contains during aspirating. insufficient. properly; check if sample contains
fibrins and clogs During aspirating, the Sample probe fluidics error. foreign matters such as clot; check if
Position: control drive board of the Clog detection system error. there is sufficient sample;
Sample ID/bar code: sample probe unit gives Clean the sample probe with special
relevant signals and wash solution. If the problem remains,
monitors the clog and remove the sample probe and unclog it.
empty aspirate signals Check if the fluidics are normal,
9-30
Code Flags
output by the clog especially if there is any air bubbles in
detection board. clog detection pressure sensor;
Check the clog detection board and clog
detection pressure sensor, if previous
two possible causes have been
eliminated.
A01105 S2: Sample is / Clog signal is detected The sample contains clots or is Check if sample has been pre-processed
insufficient or contains during aspirating. insufficient. properly; check if sample contains
fibrins and clogs During aspirating, the Sample probe fluidics error. foreign matters such as clot; check if
Position: control drive board of the Clog detection system error. there is sufficient sample;
Sample ID/bar code: sample probe unit gives Clean the sample probe with special
relevant signals and wash solution. If the problem remains,
monitors the clog and remove the sample probe and unclog it.
empty aspirate signals Check if the fluidics are normal,
output by the clog especially if there is any air bubbles in
detection board. clog detection pressure sensor;
Check the clog detection board and clog
detection pressure sensor, if previous
two possible causes have been
eliminated.
A01030 S1: Sample probe is / When the probe interior The sample probe is clogged. Clean the sample probe with special
clogged during wash valve is turned off for Sample probe fluidics error. wash solution. Remove the sample
cleaning. a period of time, the probe and unclog it.
Sample ID/bar code: system detects the probe Check if the sample probe tubing, pump
Position: clogged according to the and valve for interior wash are normal.
reply or the clog signal Check the clog detection board and clog
after sending an inquiry detection pressure sensor.
instruction to the clog
detection board.
A01106 S2: Sample probe is / When the probe interior The sample probe is clogged. Clean the sample probe with special
clogged during wash valve is turned off for Sample probe fluidics error. wash solution. Remove the sample
cleaning a period of time, the probe and unclog it.
9-31
Code Flags
Sample ID/bar code: system detects the probe Check if the sample probe tubing, pump
Position: clogged according to the and valve for interior wash are normal.
reply or the clog signal Check the clog detection board and clog
after sending an inquiry detection pressure sensor.
instruction to the clog
detection board.
A01034 ISE sample injection / The sample probe detects The electrodes are blocked; the Check if liquid volume within ISE
port liquid level too high liquid level on the ISE ISE tubes have leak or are injection port is correct, and run the
high sample injection port. clogged; test again;
The sample probe is low in Check if the ISE module is leaking or
sample injection position of the clogged.
ISE module; Adjust the horizontal and vertical
Sample probe level detection position from sample probe to ISE
error. injection port.
A01035 Liquid level at ISE / The sample probe detects Tube is leaking or clogged. Check if there is any leaking or clogging,
sample injection port low liquid level on the ISE The sample probe is high in and troubleshoot if any.
is too low sample injection port. sample injection position of the Adjust the horizontal and vertical
ISE module. position from sample probe to ISE
Sample probe level detection injection port.
error.
A07006 Sample carousel / Step missed when moving Failed to find the home Failed to find the home position
movement error to zero position on the position. Replace sensor or cable
Error: inner and outer carousels. Home position sensor error The coder missed steps.
Step missed when During resetting, the The coder missed steps. 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a
moving to zero position sample carousel fails to find 1) Assembly is jammed; new assembly;
on the outer carousel. the mechanical zero
2) Driving circuit error; 2) Replace PCB;
Step missed when position after rotating for
specified tube positions. 3) Motor error; 3) Replace motor;
moving to zero position
The coder of the 4) Sensor error; 4) Replace sensor or cable;
on the inner carousel.
inner/outer carousels 5) Belt pulley is loose; 5) Replace belt pulley and motor
The coder of the outer
missed steps. Steps missed when moving to assembly;
carousel missed steps.
Next valid edge of the the home position. Steps missed when moving to the home
9-32
Code Flags
The coder of the inner coder is not detected Home position sensor error position.
carousel missed steps. within the specified time Replace sensor or cable
from the first valid edge or
since the motor starts
working.
A07009 Sample bar code / The sample bar code reader The communication cable is Recover the failure. If the error
reader error is not connected normally disconnected, or the bar code remains, initialize the sample bar code
or cannot work. reader goes wrong. reader. If initialization cannot be
performed, check if bar code reader is
connected properly. If the error
remains, then replace the bar code
reader or the control drive board.
A07010 Sample bar code error / Received bar code contains Communication error, bar code Perform bar code scanning again and
Position: no ending character. reader communication error, or check the connection of the bar code
bar code symbology error. reader.
A02006 Probe R11 vertical / Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status error: Sensor status error:
Failed to find the zero 4) Vertical sensor error; 2) Replace PCB;
alarm is triggered.
Collision occurs during 4) Replace sensor;
position. Collision occurs during
operation other than 5) Tighten properly;
The probe does not find the operation other than aspirating:
aspirating
mechanical zero position Collision sensor or circuit or Collision occurs during operation other
Collision error than aspirating:
after moving for specified cable failure;
Moving vertically is not steps. 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
Collision sensor is not blocked
allowed in current
Collision occurs during when assembling the reagent 2) Reassemble;
position
operation other than probe; 3) Rotate the positioning sensor to
Deviation from home aspirating Incorrect reagent probe remove dust or adjust the probe to be
position is out of
9-33
Code Flags
Vertical motor missed of the probe R11, the Incorrect reagent carousel positioning parameters;
steps. vertical obstruct detection positioning; 4) Adjust sample carousel positioning
sensor on the level sense Collision error remains: parameters
board is not blocked. Collision error remains:
1) Collision sensor or circuit or
Collision error cable failure; 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
The probe moves upwards 2) Collision sensor is not 2) Reassemble;
when detecting an obstruct blocked when assembling the 3) Mount the spring of blocking plate
in vertical direction, but reagent probe; again;
the vertical obstruct
3) Collision sensor is not Vertical movement is not allowed in
detection sensor on the
blocked due to deformation of current horizontal position:
level sense board returns
blocking plates driving spring; Reset the whole unit or the reagent
no obstruct signal.
Vertical movement is not probe unit.
Moving vertically is not
allowed in current horizontal
allowed in current position
position:
Deviation from zero
Operating software error.
the mechanical zero
position.
steps.
detected.
9-34
Code Flags
A02006 Probe R11 horizontal / Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status error: Sensor status error:
Position: horizontal home position Failed to find the zero position: tighten them if so;
alarm is triggered.
Failed to find the 5) Belt pulley is loose;
mechanical zero position. Collision occurs during
horizontal movement 5) Tighten properly;
No mechanical zero horizontal movement:
Moving horizontally is Collision occurs during horizontal
position is detected after 1) Driving circuit error;
not allowed in current movement:
moving for specified steps 2) Motor error;
vertical position.
during resetting process. 3) Home position sensor error; 1) Replace PCB;
Deviation from home
Collision occurs during 4) Belt pulley is loose; 2) Replace motor;
position is out of
horizontal movement 3) Replace sensor;
range. Horizontal movement is not
Coder jump signal is not allowed in current vertical 4) Tighten properly;
detected after moving position: Horizontal movement is not allowed in
horizontally for specified current vertical position:
Software error
Reset the whole unit or the reagent
Moving horizontally is not probe unit.
position.
The probe moves
home position.
Deviation from zero
the horizontal zero position
are out of range.
9-35
Code Flags
A02006 R11 syringe movement / Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status error: Sensor status error:
error The system checks the Belt or belt pulley is loose. Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
alarm is triggered.
position.
position is out of 5) Tighten properly;
Deviation from home
passing the zero positions
are out of range.
A23100 Probe R12 vertical / Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status error: Sensor status error:
Specific position: vertical home position Failed to find the zero position: tighten them if so;
alarm is triggered.
operation other than 5) Tighten properly;
The probe does not find the operation other than aspirating:
aspirating
mechanical zero position 1) Collision sensor or circuit or Collision occurs during operation other
Collision error than aspirating:
after moving for specified cable failure;
Moving vertically is not steps. 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
2) Collision sensor is not
9-36
Code Flags
allowed in current Collision occurs during blocked when assembling the 2) Reassemble;
position operation other than reagent probe; 3) Rotate the positioning sensor to
Deviation from home aspirating 3) Incorrect reagent probe remove dust or adjust the probe to be
position is out of During vertical movement positioning; vertical; if problem remains, adjust the
range. of the probe R11, the 4) Incorrect reagent carousel positioning parameters;
Vertical motor missed vertical obstruct detection positioning; 4) Adjust sample carousel positioning
steps. sensor on the level sense Collision error remains: parameters
board is not blocked. Collision error remains:
1) Collision sensor or circuit or
Collision error cable failure; 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
The probe moves upwards 2) Collision sensor is not 2) Reassemble;
when detecting an obstruct blocked when assembling the 3) Mount the spring of blocking plate
in vertical direction, but reagent probe; again;
3) Collision sensor is not Vertical movement is not allowed in
detection sensor on the
blocked due to deformation of current horizontal position:
level sense board returns
blocking plates driving spring; Reset the whole unit or the reagent
no obstruct signal.
Vertical movement is not probe unit.
Moving vertically is not
allowed in current horizontal
allowed in current position
position:
Deviation from zero
the mechanical zero
position.
steps.
9-37
Code Flags
detected.
A23100 Probe R12 horizontal / Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status error: Sensor status error:
Specific position: horizontal home position Failed to find the zero position: tighten them if so;
alarm is triggered.
vertical position.
Deviation from home
position is out of
Software error
position.
The probe moves
home position.
Deviation from zero
9-38
Code Flags
are out of range.
A23100 R12 syringe movement / Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status is incorrect. Sensor status error:
Specific position: syringe home position Failed to find the zero position: tighten them if so;
alarm is triggered.
position.
position is out of 5) Tighten the belt pulley.
Deviation from home
are out of range.
A02007 Reagent probe collides / When the probe R11 is Collision sensor or circuit or Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
with an obstacle when aspirating, the vertical cable failure; Reinstall the reagent probe.
aspirating obstruct detection sensor Collision sensor is not blocked Rotate the positioning sensor to remove
Reagent position: on the level sense board when assembling the reagent dust or adjust the probe to be vertical;
Specific position: detects an obstruct signal. probe; if problem remains, adjust the
Incorrect reagent probe positioning parameters;
positioning; Adjust the positioning parameters of
Incorrect reagent carousel the reagent carousel.
positioning;
with an obstacle when aspirating, the vertical
9-39
Code Flags
aspirating obstruct detection sensor cable failure; Reinstall the reagent probe.
Reagent position: on the level sense board Collision sensor is not blocked Rotate the positioning sensor to remove
Specific position: detects an obstruct signal. when assembling the reagent dust or adjust the probe to be vertical;
probe; if problem remains, adjust the
positioning;
A02021 Reagent syringe / Software problem. The The aspirate volume of probe Check the aspirate volume settings and
aspirates too much syringe volume is only R11 is beyond the range of the upgrade the software.
Chemistry: 500l, but the software syringe.
aspirate 600l.
aspirate 600l.
A02022 Reagent syringe / Software problem. The The dispense volume of probe Check the dispense volume settings and
dispenses too much. syringe volume is only R11 is beyond the range of the upgrade the software.
Cuvette No.: 500l, but the software syringe.
dispense 600l.
Chemistry:
dispense 600l.
Chemistry:
A02023 Insufficient reagent / Probe R11 fails to detect There is no reagent or Check if the reagent is sufficient, and
Chemistry: liquid level on the reagent insufficient reagent on the then try again.
carousel. designated position. If level detection error is identified,
9-40
Code Flags
Position: Probe R11 level detection error. check the probe, level detection board
and connecting cable; replace if any
abnormity is identified.
Position: carousel. designated position. If level detection error is identified,
Probe R12 level detection error. check the probe, level detection board
A02025 Reagent probe / When lowering to specified The probe aspirates nothing. Check if the reagent meets the
dispenses insufficient height in cuvette to The syringe assembly goes requirement and is sufficient in volume,
reagent. dispense R1, the probe R11 wrong. and then try again.
Cuvette No.: is immersed at its tip, but Check for abnormities on the syringe
Sample ID/bar code: no level signal is detected. assembly.
Chemistry:
A23105 Reagent probe / When lowering to specified The probe aspirates nothing. Check if the reagent meets the
dispenses insufficient height in cuvette to The syringe assembly goes requirement and is sufficient in volume,
reagent. dispense R1, the probe R12 wrong. and then try again.
Cuvette No.: is immersed at its tip, but Check for abnormities on the syringe
Sample ID/bar code: no level signal is detected. assembly.
Chemistry:
A02026 Probe R11 fails to / The level sense board No deionized water, or fluidic Check if tubing, pump and valve for
detect liquid level should detect a liquid level error; exterior wash of probe R1 is normal;
during cleaning. signal when the probe R11 Probe R1 level detection error. If level detection error is identified,
is being washed in its wash check probe R1, level detection board
well. and connecting cable; replace if any
A02100 Probe R12 fails to / The level sense board No deionized water, or fluidic Check if tubing, pump and valve for
detect liquid level should detect a liquid level error; exterior wash of probe R1 is normal;
is being washed in its wash check probe R1, level detection board
9-41
Code Flags
well. and connecting cable; replace if any
A02027 Water residues exist in / The probe R11 detects a DI water residual exists in Check if aspirating tubing and solenoid
the cuvette level signal before cuvette. valves of wash station are normal;
Cuvette No.: dispensing liquid in check if system vacuum is normal.
Sample ID/bar code: cuvette.
Chemistry:
A23106 Water residues exist in / The probe R12 detects a DI water residual exists in Check if aspirating tubing and solenoid
the cuvette level signal before cuvette. valves of wash station are normal;
Cuvette No.: dispensing liquid in check if system vacuum is normal.
Sample ID/bar code: cuvette.
Chemistry:
Chemistry: liquid level during insufficient reagent on the then try again.
Position: inventory check. designated position. If level detection error is identified,
A02030 Probe R11 level / Data receiving/sending is Communication cable between Check relevant cable for any signs of
detection board time out or data receiving the level sense board and fray or loose cable, or disconnection, or
communication error. fails during communication lower-layer units goes wrong. short circuit.
between the control drive
board and the level sense
board.
9-42
Code Flags
board.
A02031 Probe R11 level / The control drive board Communication cable between Check relevant cable for any signs of
detection board self sends a self-calibration the level sense board and fray or loose cable, or disconnection, or
calibrating failed. instruction to the level lower-layer units goes wrong. short circuit;
sense board when the Probe R1 error or level Check if probe R1 is installed correctly;
instrument is resetting, the detection board connection check if probe R1 is bent, cracked or
level sense board executes error; loose;
the instruction and returns Probe R1 level detection error. Check if level detection board is
a signal of calibration normal; replace it if not.
failure. If a signal of
succeeded calibration is
returned, the alarm will not
be given.
be given.
A02032 Reagent is insufficient / Probe R11 aspirates no Air bubbles exist in the reagent Check if the reagent bottle contains air
or contains air bubbles reagent on the reagent bottle. bubbles, and then try again.
carousel. Check if the reagent bottle meets the
9-43
Code Flags
Chemistry: requirement.
Position:
A23110 Reagent is insufficient / Probe R12 aspirates no Air bubbles exist in the reagent Check if the reagent bottle contains air
or contains air bubbles reagent on the reagent bottle. bubbles, and then try again.
Chemistry: carousel. Check if the reagent bottle meets the
Position: requirement.
A02033 Insufficient reagent is / Probe R11 fails to detect The reagent is insufficient, or Check if the reagent is sufficient and
dispensed or air liquid level after air bubbles exist in the reagent the reagent bottle contains air bubbles,
bubbles exist dispensing. bottle. and then try again.
Cuvette No.: Probe R1 level detection error. If level detection error is identified,
Sample ID/bar code: check the probe, level detection board
Chemistry: and connecting cable; replace if any
Reagent position:
A23111 Insufficient reagent is / Probe R12 fails to detect The reagent is insufficient, or Check if the reagent is sufficient and
dispensed or air liquid level after air bubbles exist in the reagent the reagent bottle contains air bubbles,
bubbles exist dispensing. bottle. and then try again.
Cuvette No.: Probe R1 level detection error. If level detection error is identified,
Sample ID/bar code: check the probe, level detection board
Chemistry: and connecting cable; replace if any
Reagent position:
A03006 Probe R21 vertical / Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status is incorrect. Sensor status is incorrect.
alarm is triggered.
operation other than
9-44
Code Flags
aspirating The probe does not find the operation other than aspirating: 5) Tighten properly;
Collision error mechanical zero position 1) Collision sensor or circuit or Collision occurs during operation other
Moving vertically is not after moving for specified cable failure; than aspirating:
allowed in current steps. 2) Collision sensor is not 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
position Collision occurs during blocked when assembling the 2) Reassemble;
Deviation from home operation other than reagent probe; 3) Rotate the positioning sensor to
position is out of aspirating 3) Incorrect reagent probe remove dust or adjust the probe to be
Vertical motor missed of the probe R11, the 4) Incorrect reagent carousel positioning parameters;
steps. vertical obstruct detection positioning; 4) Adjust sample carousel positioning
sensor on the level sense
Collision error remains: parameters
board is not blocked.
Collision error
blocked when assembling the 3) Mount the spring of blocking plate
in vertical direction, but
reagent probe; again;
detection sensor on the 3) Collision sensor is not Vertical movement is not allowed in
level sense board returns blocked due to deformation of current horizontal position:
Moving vertically is not Vertical movement is not probe unit.
allowed in current position allowed in current horizontal
position:
Deviation from zero
position is out of range. Operating software error.
the mechanical zero
position.
9-45
Code Flags
steps.
detected.
A03006 Probe R21 horizontal / Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status is incorrect. Sensor status is incorrect.
Position: horizontal home position Failed to find the zero position: tighten them if so;
alarm is triggered.
vertical position.
Deviation from home
position is out of
detected after moving position: Vertical movement is not allowed in
horizontally for specified current horizontal position:
position.
The probe moves
9-46
Code Flags
home position.
Deviation from zero
are out of range.
A03006 R21 syringe movement / Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status is incorrect. Sensor status is incorrect.
alarm is triggered.
position.
Deviation from home
are out of range.
A24100 Probe R22 vertical / Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status is incorrect. Sensor status is incorrect.
Specific position: vertical home position Failed to find the zero position: tighten them if so;
9-47
Code Flags
Failed to find the zero alarm is triggered. 4) Vertical sensor error; 2) Replace PCB;
position. Failed to find the zero 5) Belt pulley is loose; 3) Replace motor;
Collision occurs during position. Collision occurs during 4) Replace sensor;
operation other than The probe does not find the operation other than aspirating: 5) Tighten properly;
aspirating mechanical zero position 1) Collision sensor or circuit or Collision occurs during operation other
Collision error after moving for specified cable failure; than aspirating:
Moving vertically is not steps. 2) Collision sensor is not 1) Replace sensor or PCB or cable;
allowed in current Collision occurs during blocked when assembling the 2) Reassemble;
position operation other than reagent probe;
aspirating 3) Rotate the positioning sensor to
Deviation from home 3) Incorrect reagent probe remove dust or adjust the probe to be
position is out of During vertical movement positioning; vertical; if problem remains, adjust the
range. of the probe R11, the 4) Incorrect reagent carousel positioning parameters;
Vertical motor missed vertical obstruct detection positioning;
sensor on the level sense 4) Adjust sample carousel positioning
steps. Collision error remains:
board is not blocked. parameters
Collision error
blocked when assembling the
in vertical direction, but 3) Mount the spring of blocking plate
reagent probe;
the vertical obstruct again;
detection sensor on the 3) Collision sensor is not
Vertical movement is not allowed in
level sense board returns blocked due to deformation of
current horizontal position:
Moving vertically is not Vertical movement is not
probe unit.
allowed in current position allowed in current horizontal
position:
Deviation from zero
position is out of range. Operating software error.
9-48
Code Flags
the mechanical zero
position.
steps.
detected.
A24100 Probe R22 horizontal / Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status is incorrect. Sensor status is incorrect.
Specific position: horizontal home position Failed to find the zero position: tighten them if so;
alarm is triggered.
vertical position.
Deviation from home
position is out of
Coder jump signal is not allowed in current vertical 4) Tighten the belt pulley.
Software error
9-49
Code Flags
position.
The probe moves
home position.
Deviation from zero
are out of range.
A24100 R22 syringe movement / Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status is incorrect. Sensor status is incorrect.
Specific position: syringe home position Failed to find the zero position: tighten them if so;
alarm is triggered.
position.
Deviation from home
are out of range.
with an obstacle when aspirating, the level sense cable failure; Reinstall the reagent probe.
aspirating board detects an obstruct Collision sensor is not blocked Rotate the positioning sensor to remove
Reagent position: signal. when assembling the reagent dust or adjust the probe to be vertical;
9-50
Code Flags
Specific position: probe; if problem remains, adjust the
positioning;
with an obstacle when aspirating, the level sense cable failure; Reinstall the reagent probe.
aspirating board detects an obstruct Collision sensor is not blocked Rotate the positioning sensor to remove
Reagent position: signal. when assembling the reagent dust or adjust the probe to be vertical;
Specific position: probe; if problem remains, adjust the
positioning;
aspirate 600l.
aspirate 600l.
dispense 600l.
Chemistry:
9-51
Code Flags
Chemistry: dispense 600l.
A03025 Reagent probe / No level signal is detected The probe aspirates nothing. Check if the reagent meets the
dispenses insufficient after the probe R21 The syringe assembly goes requirement and is sufficient in volume,
reagent. dispenses R2. wrong. and then try again.
Cuvette No.: Check for abnormities on the syringe
Sample ID/bar code: assembly.
Chemistry:
A24105 Reagent probe / No level signal is detected The probe aspirates nothing. Check if the reagent meets the
dispenses insufficient after the probe R22 The syringe assembly goes requirement and is sufficient in volume,
reagent. dispenses R2. wrong. and then try again.
Cuvette No.: Check for abnormities on the syringe
Sample ID/bar code: assembly.
Chemistry:
A03026 Probe R21 fails to / The level sense board No deionized water, or fluidic Check if pump and valve for exterior
detect liquid level should detect a liquid level error; wash of probe R2 are normal;
is being washed in its wash
9-52
Code Flags
well. check the probe, level detection board
and connecting cable; replace them if
any abnormity is identified.
A24105 Probe R22 fails to / The level sense board No deionized water, or fluidic Check if pump and valve for exterior
detect liquid level should detect a liquid level error; wash of probe R2 are normal;
is being washed in its wash check the probe, level detection board
well. and connecting cable; replace them if
any abnormity is identified.
board.
9-53
Code Flags
board.
be given.
be given.
A03032 Reagent is insufficient / The probe R21 aspirates Air bubbles exist in the reagent Check if the reagent bottle contains air
or contains air bubbles nothing in the reagent bottle. bubbles, and then try again.
Chemistry: bottle. Check if the reagent bottle meets the
A24107 Reagent is insufficient / The probe R22 aspirates Air bubbles exist in the reagent Check if the reagent bottle contains air
or contains air bubbles nothing in the reagent bottle. bubbles, and then try again.
Chemistry: bottle. Check if the reagent bottle meets the
9-54
Code Flags
A09006 Reagent carousel R1 / Step missed when moving Failed to find the zero position. Failed to find the zero position.
movement error. to zero position on outer Home position sensor error Replace sensor or cable
Error: ring. The coder missed steps. The coder missed steps.
Step missed when During resetting, the 1) Assembly is jammed; 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a
moving to zero position reagent carousel fails to new assembly;
on outer ring. find the mechanical zero
3) Motor error; 2) Replace PCB;
Coder of outer ring position after rotating for
specified steps. 4) Sensor error; 3) Replace motor;
missed steps.
Step missed when moving 5) Belt pulley is loose; 4) Replace sensor or cable;
Step missed when
on inner ring or outer ring. 5) Replace belt pulley and motor
Next valid edge of the assembly;
on inner ring.
Coder of inner ring coder is not detected
missed steps. within the specified time
working.
A10006 Reagent carousel R2 / Step missed when moving Failed to find the zero position. Failed to find the zero position.
movement error. to zero position on outer Home position sensor error Replace sensor or cable
Error: ring. The coder missed steps. The coder missed steps.
1. Step missed when During resetting, the 1) Assembly is jammed; 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a
moving to zero position reagent carousel fails to new assembly;
on outer ring. find the mechanical zero
2. Coder of outer ring position after rotating for
specified steps. 4) Sensor error; 3) Replace motor;
missed steps.
Step missed when moving 5) Belt pulley is loose; 4) Replace sensor or cable;
3. Step missed when
on inner ring or outer ring. 5) Replace belt pulley and motor
Next valid edge of the assembly;
on inner ring.
4. Coder of inner ring coder is not detected
missed steps. within the specified time
9-55
Code Flags
working.
A09009 Cover of reagent / The open/close sensor of The reagent carousel cover is Restore the reagent carousel cover.
carousel R1 is opened the R1 reagent removed.
compulsively. compartment cover detects
an open signal during the
test process.
A10009 Cover of reagent / The open/close sensor of The reagent carousel cover is Restore the reagent carousel cover.
carousel R2 is opened the R2 reagent removed.
compulsively. compartment cover detects
an open signal during the
test process.
A09011 Reagent bar code / Communication between The communication cable is Restore the failure, check if the bar
reader does not work the R1 reagent bar code disconnected, or the bar code code reader cable has been connected
normally reader and the control reader goes wrong. tightly, or replace the bar code reader
Carousel: drive board fails. or control drive board.
Reagent position:
Error:
No bar code received.
Bar code reader serial
port error.
Received bar code
contains no ending
character.
A10011 Reagent bar code / Communication between The communication cable is Restore the failure, check if the bar
reader does not work the R2 reagent bar code disconnected, or the bar code code reader cable has been connected
normally reader and the control reader goes wrong. tightly, or replace the bar code reader
Carousel: drive board fails. or control drive board.
Reagent position:
Error:
No bar code received.
Bar code reader serial
9-56
Code Flags
port error.
Received bar code
contains no ending
character.
A06006 Reaction carousel / Step missed when moving Failed to find the home position Failed to find the home position
movement error to home position. Home position sensor error Replace sensor or cable
Error: During resetting, the The coder missed steps. The coder missed steps.
Step missed when reaction carousel fails to 1) Assembly is jammed; 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a
moving to home find the mechanical zero new assembly;
position. position after rotating for
The coder missed specified cuvette positions.
4) Sensor error; 3) Replace motor;
steps. The coder missed steps.
5) Belt pulley is loose; 4) Replace sensor or cable;
Next valid edge of the
coder is not detected 5) Replace belt pulley and motor
within the specified time assembly;
working.
A05006 Reagent mixer vertical / Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status is incorrect
Position: vertical home position Failed to find the zero position. tighten them if so;
Error: sensor every time before 1) Assembly is jammed; Failed to find the zero position.
Sensor status is moving. If the sensor status 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a
incorrect is not consistent with the new assembly;
theoretical status, the 3) Vertical motor error;
alarm is triggered.
Moving vertically is not 4) Replace sensor;
position. Vertical movement is not
allowed in current 5) Tighten properly;
The zero position is not allowed in current horizontal
position
found after moving for position. Vertical movement is not allowed in
Deviation from home current horizontal position.
specified steps. Software error
position is out of
Moving vertically is not Home the instrument or the relevant
9-57
Code Flags
range. allowed in current position unit.
Vertical motor missed Deviation from zero
steps. position is out of range.
are out of range.
steps.
When the vertical motor
drives the probe to move to
the top of a cuvette, no
signal of vertical middle
position is detected.
A05006 Reagent mixer / Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status error Sensor status error
error horizontal home position Failed to find the zero position. tighten them if so;
Position: sensor every time before 1) Driving circuit error; Failed to find the zero position.
Error: moving. If the sensor status 1) Replace PCB;
2) Motor error;
Sensor status is is not consistent with the
incorrect theoretical status, the
Failed to find the zero Horizontal movement is not
position.
position. allowed in current vertical Horizontal movement is not allowed in
Moving horizontally is position. current vertical position.
not allowed in current The probe does not find the
mechanical zero position Software error Home the instrument or the relevant
vertical position.
after moving towards it for unit.
Deviation from home
specified steps.
position is out of
range. Moving horizontally is not
allowed in current position.
The software commands
the reagent mixer assembly
to rotate horizontally,
9-58
Code Flags
which is not in the vertical
home position.
Deviation from zero
are out of range.
A05016 Reagent mixer rotation / Rotation speed of the mixer The mixer motor goes wrong. Replace the motor.
error is beyond the specified The gear is jammed. Adjust the gear or replace the assembly.
Rotation speed: range continuously for two The rotational speed sensor of Replace the sensor or relevant cables.
Mixer No.: times. the mixer goes wrong.
A04006 Sample mixer vertical / Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status is incorrect
Position: vertical home position Failed to find the zero position. tighten them if so;
Error: sensor every time before 1) Assembly is jammed; Failed to find the zero position.
Sensor status is moving. If the sensor status 1) Remove obstacle or replace with a
incorrect is not consistent with the new assembly;
theoretical status, the 3) Vertical motor error;
alarm is triggered.
Moving vertically is not 4) Replace sensor;
position. Vertical movement is not
allowed in current 5) Tighten properly;
The zero position is not allowed in current horizontal
position
found after moving for position. Vertical movement is not allowed in
Deviation from home current horizontal position.
specified steps. Software error
position is out of
Moving vertically is not Home the instrument or the relevant
range.
allowed in current position unit.
steps. Deviation from zero
are out of range.
9-59
Code Flags
steps.
When the vertical motor
drives the probe to move to
the top of a cuvette, no
signal of vertical middle
position is detected.
A04006 Sample mixer / Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status is incorrect
error horizontal home position Failed to find the zero position. tighten them if so;
Position: sensor every time before 1) Driving circuit error; Failed to find the zero position.
Error: moving. If the sensor status 1) Replace PCB;
2) Motor error;
Sensor status is is not consistent with the
incorrect theoretical status, the
Failed to find the zero Horizontal movement is not
position.
position. allowed in current vertical Horizontal movement is not allowed in
Moving horizontally is position. current vertical position.
not allowed in current The probe does not find the
mechanical zero position Software error Home the instrument or the relevant
vertical position.
after moving towards it for unit.
Deviation from home
specified steps.
position is out of
range. Moving horizontally is not
allowed in current position.
The software commands
the sample mixer assembly
to rotate horizontally,
which is not in the vertical
home position.
Deviation from zero
9-60
Code Flags
are out of range.
A04015 Sample mixer rotation / Rotation speed of the mixer The mixer motor goes wrong. Replace the motor.
error is beyond the specified The gear is jammed. Adjust the gear or replace the assembly.
Rotation speed: range continuously for two The rotational speed sensor of Replace the sensor, or relevant cables
Mixer No.: times. the mixer goes wrong. and circuits.
A12005 Reaction carousel / The reaction carousel The ambient temperature is out Observe ambient temperature through
temperature is out of temperature exceeds 37 of range. the Status screen to check if it is out of
range 2. The temperature sensor goes range.
Temperature: wrong. (component error, cable Temperature sensor error: check for any
error) signs of short circuit or broken circuit;
The temperature protection check if connections are secure.
switch goes wrong. (component Temperature protection switch error:
error, cable error) check if protection switch is shut and
The heater goes wrong. connections are secure.
(component error, cable error) Heater error: measure the resistance
PCB error. under normal temperature, and check if
Parameters are lost. the connections are secure.
Electromagnetic interference PCB error.
exists. Parameters are lost: check if
temperature control parameters are
correct.
Find the reasons of electromagnetic
interference.
A12006 Temperature of wash / The temperature of wash The ambient temperature is out Observe ambient temperature through
solution for cleaning solution for cleaning of range. the Status screen to check if it is out of
cuvettes is out of range cuvettes is out of range. The temperature sensor goes range.
9-61
Code Flags
correct.
A12007 Temperature of / Temperature of the The ambient temperature is out Observe ambient temperature through
deionized water for deionized water preheater of range. the Status screen to check if it is out of
cleaning cuvettes is is out of range (425). The temperature sensor goes range.
out of range wrong. (component error, cable Temperature sensor error: check for any
Temperature: error) signs of short circuit or broken circuit;
correct.
A12008 Temperature of / Temperature of the The ambient temperature is out Observe ambient temperature through
deionized water for deionized water preheater of range. the Status screen to check if it is out of
cleaning the whole unit for the whole unit is out of The temperature sensor goes range.
is out of range range (375). wrong. (component error, cable Temperature sensor error: check for any
Temperature: error) signs of short circuit or broken circuit;
check if protection switch is shut and
9-62
Code Flags
error, cable error) connections are secure.
The heater goes wrong. Heater error: measure the resistance
(component error, cable error) under normal temperature, and check if
PCB error. the connections are secure.
Parameters are lost. PCB error.
Electromagnetic interference Parameters are lost: check if
exists. temperature control parameters are
correct.
A12009 Internal temperature / External temperature of The ambient temperature is out Observe ambient temperature through
of the whole unit is out the whole unit should be of range. the Status screen to check if it is out of
of range within 15-30 , and the The fan goes wrong. range.
Temperature: internal temperature The dust screen is blocked. Check if the radiating fan is OK.
should be within 15-40. The air vent is blocked in the Check if the dust screen is blocked and
The ambient temperature specified range. needs cleaning.
sensor detects the internal Check if the air vent is blocked within
temperature out of range. specified range.
A11005 Wash station / Sensor position is incorrect. Sensor status is incorrect Sensor status is incorrect
movement error The zero position sensor is Belt pulley is loose; Check if belt or belt wheel is loose,
Error: detected inconsistent with Failed to find the home tighten them if so;
Sensor status is the theoretical status position. Failed to find the home position.
incorrect continuously for three 1) Driving circuit error; 1) Replace PCB;
Failed to find the home times.
2) Motor error; 2) Replace motor;
position. Failed to find the home
3) Home position sensor error; 3) Replace sensor;
Collision occurs during position.
4) Belt pulley is loose; 4) Tighten properly;
movement. The mechanical zero
position is not found after Collision occurs during Collision occurs during movement.
Deviation from zero movement.
moving for specified steps. 1) Align wash probes;
position is out of
Collision occurs during 1) Wash probes are not 2) Align reaction carousel positioning;
range.
movement. vertical; 3) Replace sensor, cable or PCB
The vertical obstruct 2) Reaction carousel
detection sensor of the positioning is deviated;
3) Collision sensor or circuit
9-63
Code Flags
wash station outputs a low error
level.
Deviation from zero
passing the home position
are out of range.
A11010 Releasing vacuum / When the primary vacuum The valves V37-V42 go wrong. Check if the valves V37-V42 can be
failed. pump is powered off, and The vacuum pump goes wrong. turned on and off normally.
valves V37-V42 are turned The vacuum sensor goes wrong. Check if the vacuum pump can be
on and then turned off turned off.
after 5 seconds, the current Check if the vacuum sensor is normal.
vacuum pressure is not
within 10KPa.
A11012 Water supplying is too / Within the last 37 seconds The water unit goes wrong. Check the water unit.
slow when the low level floater The water inlet valve goes Check if the water inlet ball valve is
of the water tank changes wrong. opened and the handle is horizontal.
from ON to OFF, the floater The water inlet ball valve is not Check if the water inlet ball valve is
is always OFF and not opened. (The handle is blocked.
rising. horizontal when it is opened.) Check if water inlet valve can be turned
The water inlet ball valve goes on and off normally.
wrong. Check if the signal of the low level
The low level floater of the floater is correct.
water tank goes wrong. Check if the water inlet tube is smooth.
The water inlet tube is bent. Check if the outlet filter of the water
The outlet filter of the water inlet tube is clogged.
inlet tube is clogged.
A11013 Water tank is empty / Within the last 51 seconds The water unit goes wrong. Check the water unit.
when the low level floater The water inlet valve goes Check if the water inlet ball valve is
of the water tank changes wrong. opened and the handle is horizontal.
from ON to OFF, the floater The water inlet ball valve is not Check if the water inlet ball valve is
is always OFF and not
9-64
Code Flags
rising. Or the low level opened. (The handle is blocked.
floater of the water tank is horizontal when it is opened.) Check if water inlet valve can be turned
detected OFF when the The water inlet ball valve goes on and off normally.
instrument is started up. wrong. Check if the signal of the low level
A11014 Filling diluted wash / When an ON signal of the The valve V20 goes wrong. Check the valve V20.
solution tank is too floater FL06 is detected, an The restrictor ring is clogged. Check the restrictor ring.
slow OFF signal is detected The inlet filter at the front Check if the inlet filter at the front
continuously in the panel is clogged. panel is clogged.
following 211 seconds. If no
The DI water circulating pump Check if the DI water pump is on and
ON signal is detected prior
goes wrong. the pressure gauge at the top reads
to continuous OFF signals,
The water tank is empty. between 40kPa-50kPa.
it indicates that the diluted
wash solution tank is being The concentrated wash solution Check the floater of the deionized
filled when it is empty, and tank is empty. water tank.
this alarm will not be given. The concentrated wash solution Check the floater of the concentrated
pump goes wrong. wash solution tank.
The low level floater of the Check the concentrated wash solution
diluted wash solution tank goes pump.
wrong. Check the low level floater of the
diluted wash solution tank.
A11015 Insufficient diluted / When an ON signal of the The valve V20 goes wrong. Check the valve V20.
wash solution floater FL06 is detected, an The restrictor ring is clogged. Check the restrictor ring.
OFF signal is detected The inlet filter at the front Check if the inlet filter at the front
continuously in the panel is clogged. panel is clogged.
following 300 seconds. Or
the floater FL06 is detected
P03 goes wrong. the pressure gauge at the top reads
OFF when the instrument is
9-65
Code Flags
started up. The concentrated wash solution Check the floater of the deionized
The alarm is removed when tank is empty. water tank.
an ON signal of the floater The concentrated wash solution Check the floater of the concentrated
FL06 is detected. pump P05 goes wrong. wash solution tank.
A11016 Insufficient / The floater FL05 is The concentrated wash solution Check if the concentrated wash solution
concentrated wash detected OFF continuously is exhausted and the floater is exhausted and the floater status is
solution within 10 seconds. status is Empty. Empty. If yes, fill more concentrated
The alarm is removed when The low level floater of the wash solution.
the floater FL05 is detected concentrated wash solution tank Check if the floater of the concentrated
ON continuously within 10 goes wrong. wash solution tank goes wrong.
seconds.
A11017 Liquid accumulates in / The floater FL12 is The valve V43 goes wrong. Check the valve V43.
primary vacuum detected ON continuously The waste pump P07 goes Check if the waste pump can be turned
container within 10 seconds. wrong. on and off normally.
The low-concentration waste Check if the low-concentration waste
drain tube is bent. drain tube is smooth.
A11018 High concentration / The floater FL10 is The waste pump P07 goes Check if the waste pump can be turned
waste collector is full detected ON continuously wrong. on and off normally.
within 10 seconds. The high-concentration waste Check if the high-concentration waste
The alarm is removed when drain tube is bent. drain tube is smooth.
OFF continuously within 10
seconds.
A11019 Low concentration / The floater FL11 is The waste pump P07 goes Check if the waste pump can be turned
waste collector is full detected ON continuously wrong. on and off normally.
within 10 seconds. The low-concentration waste Check if the low-concentration waste
The alarm is removed when drain tube is bent. drain tube is smooth.
9-66
Code Flags
OFF continuously within 10
seconds.
A11020 High concentration / The floater FL13 is The high-concentration waste Check the high-concentration waste
waste tank is full detected ON continuously tank is full. tank. If the tank is full, replace it.
within 10 seconds. The floater of the Cover the full tank and dispose of the
The alarm is removed when high-concentration waste tank waste properly.
the floater FL13 is detected goes wrong. Check if the floater of the
OFF continuously within 10 high-concentration waste tank goes
seconds. wrong.
A11021 ISE degassing pressure / The ISE degassing pressure The valve V21 goes wrong. Check if the valve V21 can be turned
is too low is lower than -36Kpa The ISE vacuum sensor goes off.
continuously within 30 wrong. Check the ISE vacuum sensor.
seconds. The ISE degasser goes wrong. Check if the ISE degasser is clogged.
A11022 ISE degassing pressure / The ISE degassing pressure The valve V21 goes wrong. Check if the valve V21 can be turned on.
is too high is detected higher than The ISE degassing pump P12 Check if the ISE degassing pump P12 can
-25kPa continuously within goes wrong. be turned on normally.
30 seconds. The ISE vacuum sensor goes Check the ISE vacuum sensor.
wrong. Check if the ISE degasser is leaking.
The ISE degasser goes wrong. Check if the connectors and tubes are
Connectors and tubes go wrong. leaking.
A11023 Insufficient vacuum / The vacuum pressure is The primary vacuum pumps P08 Check if the primary vacuum pumps P08
detected higher than and P14 go wrong. and P14 can be turned on and off
-30kPa continuously within The primary vacuum sensor goes normally.
3 seconds after system wrong. Check the primary vacuum sensor.
vacuum is established. Connectors and tubes go wrong. Check if the connectors and tubes
The primary vacuum container related to primary vacuum are leaking.
goes wrong. Check if the primary vacuum container
The valves V37-V43 go wrong. is leaking.
Check if the valves V23, V24, V25 and
V26 can be turned on and off normally.
9-67
Code Flags
A11024 Degassing unit pressure / When detecting the The valve V19 goes wrong. Check if the valve V19 can be turned
is too low pressure lower than 8kPa The degassing vacuum sensor off.
continuously within 3 goes wrong. Check the degassing vacuum sensor.
seconds, the system turns The degasser goes wrong. Check if the degasser is clogged.
off P09 and turns on SV19,
which is then turned off if
the pressure increases to
8kPa. If the pressure does
not increases to 8kPa within
300 seconds since SV19 is
turned on, SV19 is turned
off and this alarm is
triggered.
A11025 Degassing unit pressure / The pressure is detected The valve V19 goes wrong. Check if the valve V19 can be turned on.
is too high higher than 45kPa The degassing pump P09 goes Check if the degassing pump P09 can be
continuously within 300 wrong. turned on normally.
seconds. The degassing vacuum sensor Check the degassing vacuum sensor.
goes wrong. Check if the degasser is leaking.
The degasser goes wrong. Check if the connectors and tubes are
Connectors and tubes go wrong. leaking.
A13006 ISE communication / Data abnormity occurs Software error or ISE module Recover the failure and then rerun the
error during communication error. operating software.
between the ISE unit and
the main control board.
A13007 ISE calibration factor / The slope, dilution factor Software error Rerun ISE calibration, or upgrade the
error and Cl bias are out of range software.
or cannot be calculated
because of certain reasons.
A13008 Operation of ISE / This alarm is given together The ISE module goes wrong. Recover the failure or rerun the
module is abnormal with other alarms. operating software.
Instruction:
9-68
Code Flags
A13009 ISE parameter / ISE parameter configuration The configured parameters Enter the ISE parameters again, or
configuration error fails when the module is exceed the allowable values. restore them to the default values.
Instruction: initialized or some
parameters like Cl bias are
manually modified,
because the parameters do
not meet the requirements.
A13010 ISE module accepts no / The instruction sent by the The ISE module goes wrong. Recover the failure or rerun the
instruction in current upper-layer unit to the ISE operating software.
status module is invalid or does
Instruction: not match the current
status of module. For
instance, if the ISE module
is priming, it will not
respond to the sample
injection instruction sent
from the upper-layer unit.
A13011 ISE module error: / During ISE test of the same Software error Recover the failure or rerun the
Sample IDs for sample sample, the sample ID sent operating software.
programming and by the upper-layer unit is
dispensing do not different from the one
match being analyzed on the ISE
module. The ISE module
must return a reply
containing the same sample
ID as that in the instruction
sent from the upper-layer
unit.
A13012 ISE module error: Not / This alarm will happen only The measurement data is Rerun the precision test.
enough data for CV in diagnostic mode. A insufficient for calculating the
calculation. repeatability test is run for CV, or other errors occur.
specified times for certain
electrode in diagnostic
9-69
Code Flags
mode. If the test is
terminated due to certain
reasons, the alarm will be
given.
A13013 ISE module error: ADC / ADC refers to the EMF value The ISE electrodes, ground Check the connection of electrodes,
initialization error. of an electrode, that is, terminal and temperature ground terminal and temperature
voltage of the electrode. sensor are not connected sensor, and then recover the failure.
The EMF value of an correctly. Switch off the main power and then
electrode is detected out of ISE ADC error. switch on it again after 10 seconds.
range during initialization Perform the startup procedure.
of the ISE module. Replace CPU board of ISE module.
This alarm is given only
during the initialization
process.
A13014 ISE module error: ADC ADC This alarm is given only The ISE electrodes, ground Check the connection of electrodes and
out of range during test process to check terminal and temperature ground terminal connection, and then
Chemistry: the EMF of an electrode. sensor are not connected recover the failure.
It is always given together correctly. Switch off the main power and then
with alarm A13013. Temperature sensor or switch on it again after 10 seconds.
electrodes error. Perform the startup procedure.
The ISE temperature sensor and Replace electrodes or temperature
ISE CPU board are disconnected. sensor.
ISE ADC error. Replace CPU board of ISE module.
A13016 ISE module error: T2 The temperature sensor The ISE temperature sensor is Check the connection of the
Beyond temperature inside the ISE module not connected correctly. temperature sensor, and then recover
sensor range detects the temperature The ISE temperature sensor goes the failure.
out of normal range. wrong. Replace ISE temperature sensor.
The ISE temperature sensor and Replace the CPU board of ISE module.
ISE CPU board are disconnected.
A13018 ISE calibration failed. DILO The dilution factor is not The calibrator is stored for too Replace the calibrator and recalibrate.
Dilution rate out of within 25-60. long time, or the electrode is Recalibrate.
9-70
Code Flags
range degenerated. Reinstall the electrode. Make sure that
Chemistry: The electrode is not installed an O-shape washer is mounted
Sample Type: correctly. correctly. There should be only one
O-shaped washer existing between
every two electrodes, and between the
electrode and the module.
Replace the electrode.
Check if the back aspirate volume of the
ISE buffer is normal.
A13019 ISE calibration failed. DILE Dilution rate is not The calibrator is stored for too Replace the calibrator and recalibrate.
Dilution rate calculated because the long time, or the electrode is Recalibrate.
calculation error dilution ratio is not degenerated. Reinstall the electrode. Make sure that
Chemistry: calculated within the The electrode is not installed an O-shape washer is mounted
Sample Type: specified time. correctly. correctly. There should be only one
A13020 Calibration failed. SLO The slope range of all The calibrator is stored for too Replace the calibrator and recalibrate.
Slope out of range. electrodes is 38-65. This long time, or the electrode is Recalibrate.
Chemistry: alarm will be given if the degenerated. If the electrode is new, activate it and
range is exceeded. The electrode is not installed then recalibrate.
The range cannot be correctly. Reinstall the electrode. Make sure that
modified. an O-shape washer is mounted
correctly. There should be only one
A13021 ISE calibration failed. SLE Slope is not calculated The calibrator is stored for too Replace the calibrator and recalibrate.
Slope calculation error during calibration. long time, or the electrode is Recalibrate.
degenerated. If the electrode is new, activate it and
9-71
Code Flags
Chemistry: The electrode is not installed then recalibrate.
correctly. Reinstall the electrode. Make sure that
an O-shape washer is mounted
correctly. There should be only one
A13022 Calibration failed. Cl BIAS The Cl bias is not within the The Cl electrode is dirty. Clean the electrode repeatedly and
bias out of range. normal range of -4-2. The Cl electrode is then recalibrate.
degenerated. Replace the Cl electrode.
A13023 ISE calibration REPL The measurement The dispensing repeatability of Replace the calibrator and recalibrate.
failed.Calibration replicates of the sample probe is poor. Recalibrate.
replicates exceed set high-/low-level calibrators ISE electrode performance is If the electrode is new, activate it and
value. exceed 8. abnormal. then recalibrate.
Check ISE tubing connection.
Check sample probe dispensing
performance.
A13024 ISE calibration SEN Voltage of high-/low-level The calibrator is placed in an Check the calibrator position and
aborted. Electrode calibrators is out of range. incorrect position. replace the calibrator, and then
voltage out of range The electrode voltage can The electrode is degenerated. recalibrate.
be observed on the The sample probe aspirates or If the electrode is new, activate it and
operating software. dispenses incorrectly. (The error then recalibrate.
occurs for several ISE Replace the electrode.
chemistries.) Check sample probe tubing.
A13025 Electrode voltage out SEN Calibrator voltage is beyond The calibrator is placed in an Check the calibrator position and
of range during ISE the normal range. incorrect position. replace the calibrator, and then
calibration The electrode is degenerated. recalibrate.
Chemistry: The sample probe aspirates or If the electrode is new, activate it and
dispenses incorrectly. (The error then recalibrate.
9-72
Code Flags
occurs for several ISE Replace the electrode.
chemistries.) Check the sample probe tube.
A13027 ISE test order error / Instructions between the Operating software error. Recover the failure.
upper-layer unit and the ISE Rerun the operating software.
unit are abnormal. For
instance, the upper-layer
unit does not send an
sample injection
instruction to the ISE
module, but the module
returns a response
indicating that sample
injection is complete.
A13028 ISE syringe / During initialization of the ISE syringe missed steps. Recover the failure.
initialization error: ISE module, the syringe The ISE syringe resetting sensor Replace the relevant assembly.
Syringe fails to reach fails to find the zero goes wrong.
home position. position after moving for
specified steps.
A13029 ISE syringe / During initialization of the ISE syringe missed steps. Recover the failure.
initialization error: ISE module, zero position The ISE syringe resetting sensor Replace the relevant assembly.
Syringe fails to leave signal is still detected after goes wrong.
home position. the syringe passes the home
position for certain time.
A13030 ISE syringe movement / This alarm is given only ISE syringe missed steps. Recover the failure.
error: Syringe fails to during the test or The ISE syringe resetting sensor Replace the relevant assembly.
reach home position. maintenance process. The goes wrong.
ISE syringe fails to find the
zero position after moving
for specified steps.
A13031 ISE syringe movement / This alarm is given only ISE syringe missed steps. Recover the failure.
error: Syringe fails to during the test or The ISE syringe resetting sensor Replace the assembly.
leave home position. maintenance process. Zero goes wrong.
9-73
Code Flags
position signal is still
detected after the syringe
passes the home position.
A13032 ISE syringe already / The operator selects Up The syringe already reaches the Stop selecting the Up button.
reaches the top. again on the Diluent Syringe top.
window when the syringe
has already moved up.
A13033 ISE syringe already / The operator selects Down The syringe already reaches the Stop selecting the Down button.
reaches the bottom. again on the Diluent Syringe bottom.
window when the syringe
has already moved down.
A14006 Reagent refrigeration / The reagent refrigeration The ambient temperature is out Observe ambient temperature through
temperature is out of temperature is beyond the of range. the Status screen to check if it is out of
range range of 2-8C. The temperature sensor goes range.
Carousel: error) signs of short circuit or broken circuit;
The cooler goes wrong. connections are secure.
(component error, cable error) Cooler error: check if the cooler is
The fan goes wrong. broken, and connections are secure.
(component error, cable error) Fan error: check if fan is working
The circulating pump goes normally, and connections are secure.
wrong. (component error, cable Circulating pump error: check if
error) circulating pump is working normally,
The refrigerant goes wrong. and connections are secure.
PCB error. Refrigerant error: check if there is
Parameters are lost. sufficient refrigerant (check after
power off).
Electromagnetic interference
exists. PCB error.
Parameters are lost: reconfigure
9-74
Code Flags
parameters.
A14007 Temperature of / Temperature of The ambient temperature is out Observe ambient temperature through
refrigeration module is refrigeration module is of range. the Status screen to check if it is out of
low lower than -8C. The temperature sensor goes range.
wrong. (component error, cable Temperature sensor error: check for any
The circulating pump goes check if connections are secure.
wrong. (component error, cable Circulating pump error: check if
error) circulating pump is working normally,
The refrigerant goes wrong. and connections are secure.
PCB error. Refrigerant error: check if there is
Parameters are lost. sufficient refrigerant (check after
power off).
Electromagnetic interference
exists. PCB error.
Parameters are lost: reconfigure
parameters.
A14011 Reagent refrigerating / The reagent refrigerating Jam Replug the fan connector.
fan 1 is abnormal fan 1 is blocked. The fan is damaged. Check if power supply for fan is normal.
The power supply goes wrong. Clean dust off the fan.
Replace the fan.
A14012 Reagent refrigerating / The reagent refrigerating Jam Reproduce the failure.
fan 2 is abnormal fan 2 is blocked. The fan is damaged. Replug the fan connector.
The power supply goes wrong. Check if power supply for fan is normal.
Clean dust off the fan.
Replace the fan.
A14013 Lamp fan 1 is / The lamp fan is blocked. Jam Replug the fan connector.
abnormal. The fan is damaged. Check if power supply for fan is normal.
Replace the fan.
A14100 Lamp fan 2 is / The lamp fan is blocked. Jam Replug the fan connector.
9-75
Code Flags
abnormal. The fan is damaged. Check if power supply for fan is normal.
Replace the fan.
A14014 Pump fan 1 is / The vacuum pump fan is Jam Replug the fan connector.
abnormal. blocked. The fan is damaged. Check if power supply for fan is normal.
Replace the fan.
A14101 Pump fan 2 is / The vacuum pump fan is Jam Replug the fan connector.
abnormal. blocked. The fan is damaged. Check if power supply for fan is normal.
Replace the fan.
A14015 ISE fan is abnormal / The ISE fan is blocked. Jam Replug the fan connector.
The fan is damaged. Check if power supply for fan is normal.
Replace the fan.
A09016 R1 reagent carousel is / The reagent carousel cover Operation error. The reagent Restore the reagent carousel cover and
opened compulsively sensor detects the cover carousel cover is opened during recover the failure, and then try again.
during scanning opened during reagent bar bar code scanning.
code scanning. The reagent carousel cover
sensor is in poor contact.
A10016 R2 reagent carousel is / The reagent carousel cover Operation error. The reagent Restore the reagent carousel cover and
opened compulsively sensor detects the cover carousel cover is opened during recover the failure, and then try again.
during scanning opened during reagent bar bar code scanning.
code scanning.
A17001 Sample track / Rack supply push-in part The sensor goes wrong or is not Check the sensor connection, check if
movement failure movement error. connected properly. the motor or belt pulley is blocked, or
Part: Status of the home position Communication fails, or the replace the motor sensor.
Error: sensor is not consistent motor goes wrong.
Sensor status is with the component Communication fails.
movement; or the sensor
9-76
Code Flags
incorrect status is incorrect when the The motor, belt pulley or belt
Resetting failed component has moved to goes wrong.
Resetting is needed the defined position. Mis-operation is performed.
Jam occurs during Resetting cannot be Mis-operation is performed.
movement completed. Mis-operation is performed.
Rack is not aligning The resetting instruction Software error
with the scanning cannot be executed.
Software error
channel Jam occurs when actions
Sample rack is found in other than resetting are
retrieval channel executed.
Sample rack is found in Sample rack has moved to
scanning channel the scanning channel but is
failed to press the position
Positioning error
switch
Other
Movement is forbidden
because a sample rack is
detected at the exit of
retrieval channel.
Movement is forbidden
because a sample rack is
detected in the scanning
channel.
The stroke is out of range.
Position parameter is not
defined.
A17002 Sample track / STAT push-back part The sensor goes wrong or is not Check the sensor connection, check if
incorrect movement; or the sensor The motor, belt pulley or belt
status is incorrect when the goes wrong.
9-77
Code Flags
Resetting failed component has moved to Sample rack is detected in the
Resetting is needed the defined position. scanning channel, which cannot
Jam occurs during Resetting cannot be move
movement completed. Software error
Sample rack is found in The resetting instruction Software error
scanning channel. cannot be executed.
Positioning error The resetting instruction
Other cannot be executed.
A sample rack is detected
at the entrance of the
scanning channel.
Parameter position is not
defined.
A17004 Sample track / Scanning push-in part The sensor goes wrong or is not Check the sensor connection, check if
Resetting failed
component has moved to
Resetting is needed Sample rack is detected in the
the defined position.
Jam occurs during scanning channel, which cannot
Resetting cannot be move
movement completed.
Sample rack is found in Software error
The resetting instruction
scanning channel. Software error
cannot be executed.
scanning channel.
9-78
Code Flags
defined.
A17005 Sample track / Scanning push-out part The sensor goes wrong or is not Check the sensor connection, check if
Resetting failed
Resetting is needed Software error
Jam occurs during Mis-operation is performed.
Resetting cannot be
movement completed. Software error
Rack does not reach cannot be executed.
the buffering unit The resetting instruction
Sample rack is failed to
enter the rack buffer unit
completely
defined
A17006 Sample rack bar code / The bar code reader is not The bar code reader goes Check the bar code reader connection,
reader does not work working normally and wrong. reboot the analyzer, or replace the bar
normally cannot respond to code reader or control drive board.
instructions sent by the
control drive board.
A17007 Sample bar code error / The received sample rack The rack bar code is incorrect. Check if the rack bar code is clear and
Position: bar code contains no ending the racks of Mindray are being used.
9-79
Code Flags
character.
A17008 Sample rack bar code / The sample bar coder Software problem. Recover the failure or reboot the
sending buffer is full instruction buffer is full due analyzer.
to communication error.
A18001 Sample track / The rack storage push-in The sensor goes wrong or is not Check the sensor connection, check if
movement failure part goes wrong. connected properly. the motor or belt pulley is blocked, or
Resetting failed
Resetting is needed Movement is forbidden because
Jam occurs during a sample rack is detected on the
Resetting cannot be retrieval channel.
movement completed.
cannot be executed.
retrieval channel.
defined
A18002 Rack storage unit is / The inventory check sensor The number of racks in the Clear the rack storage unit.
about to be full of the storage unit is storage unit is going to reach 20.
blocked by racks.
A18003 Rack storage unit is / The full detection sensor of The number of racks in the Clear the rack storage unit.
full. the storage unit is blocked storage unit has reached 20.
by racks.
9-80
Code Flags
A18004 Sample track / The rack storage push-in The sensor goes wrong or is not Check the sensor connection, check if
movement failure part goes wrong. connected properly. the motor or belt pulley is blocked, or
Resetting failed
Resetting is needed Movement is forbidden because
Jam occurs during a sample rack is detected on the
Resetting cannot be retrieval channel.
movement completed.
cannot be executed.
retrieval channel.
defined
A18005 Sample track / Rerun buffer part The rerun buffer part goes wrong Clear racks from the track before
movement failure movement error. during resetting because a rack resetting, and check if the relevant
Part: The pulses detected within found in the track. sensor and motor of the buffer unit are
Error: the specified time are less normal.
Jam occurs during than the specified value.
movement The FSM2 sensor detects a
Sample rack is found in signal at the exit of the
scanning channel scanning channel.
Sample rack is found in The FHC1 sensor detects a
retrieval channel signal at the entrance of
the retrieval channel.
9-81
Code Flags
Sample rack is found in The FCC5 and FCC6 sensors
track detect signals at the
Sample rack is found in entrance of the front track.
front of the buffering The FCC1 sensor detects a
part signal when the buffer unit
Sample rack is found moves forwards.
behind the buffering The FCC4 sensor detects a
part signal when the buffer unit
Sensor status is moves backwards.
incorrect The FCC2 and FCC3 sensors
Rack does not reach detect signals prior to
the buffering unit movement.
Waiting for FCC1 signal is
time out.
A19001 Sample track / Rack delivery in the normal During resetting, a rack is found Prior to reset, clear the lane of sample
movement failure lane fails. in the normal lane or the sensor racks.
Part: The sensor status is goes wrong. Do not take out racks from the normal
Error: incorrect, or the reflex Mis-operation is performed. lane during test process.
Sample rack is found in sensor detects a signal Sample rack is taken out or Check the movement motor and sensor.
normal lane when caterpillar resets. jammed.
Positioning error Sample rack switching
error.
Movement is time out
Caterpillar movement is
time out but relevant
sensor signal does not
change
A19002 Sample track / Stopper station of normal The motor or sensor of the Check the sensor connection, reboot
movement failure unit stopper station goes wrong. the analyzer, or replace the motor or
Part: Failed to leave the home sensor of the stopper station.
Error: positioning error position or the end position
optical coupler goes wrong;
failed to return to the home
9-82
Code Flags
position or end position.
A20001 Sample track / Rack delivery in non-normal During resetting, a rack is found Prior to reset, clear the lane of sample
movement failure lane fails. in the normal lane or the sensor racks.
Part: The sensor status is goes wrong. Do not take out racks from the normal
Error: incorrect, or the reflex Mis-operation is performed. lane during test process.
Sample rack is found in sensor detects a signal Sample rack is taken out or Check the movement motor and sensor.
passing lane or return when caterpillar resets. jammed.
lane Sample rack switching
Positioning error error.
Movement is time out Caterpillar movement is
time out but relevant
sensor signal does not
change
A20002 Sample track / Stopper station of The motor or sensor of the Check the sensor connection, reboot
movement failure non-normal unit stopper station goes wrong. the analyzer, or replace the motor or
Part: Failed to leave the home sensor of the stopper station.
Error: position or the end position
Positioning error optical coupler goes wrong;
failed to return to the home
position or end position.
A20003 Sample track / The lane change part goes The lane change motor goes Check the motor and sensor of the lane
movement failure wrong. wrong or is blocked, or the change part.
Part: Resetting fails, or jam home position sensor goes
Error: occurs during resetting. wrong.
Resetting failed Jam occurs, or steps are
Jam occurs during missed.
movement No response is given to the
Resetting is needed resetting instruction.
Sensor status is Status of the home position
incorrect sensor is not consistent
with the component
Other
9-83
Code Flags
status is incorrect when the
defined.
A20004 Sample track / The rack return push-out The return push-out motor goes Check the return push-out motor, sensor
movement failure part goes wrong. wrong or is blocked, or the and belt.
incorrect sensor is not consistent
with the component
Other
defined.
A19004 Sample track / The normal lane positioning The aspirate positioning station Check the motor and sensor of the
movement failure station goes wrong. goes wrong or is blocked, or the aspirate positioning station.
sensor is not consistent
9-84
Code Flags
incorrect with the component
Other movement; or the sensor
defined.
A20006 Sample track / The non-normal lane The aspirate positioning station Check the motor and sensor of the
movement failure positioning station goes goes wrong or is blocked, or the aspirate positioning station.
Part: wrong. home position sensor goes
Error: Resetting fails, or jam wrong.
Resetting failed occurs during resetting.
Jam occurs during Jam occurs, or steps are
movement missed.
Resetting is needed No response is given to the
resetting instruction.
Sensor status is
incorrect Status of the home position
sensor is not consistent
Other
with the component
defined.
A17009 No sample racks in rack / Sample rack has moved to The sensor goes wrong, or Do not take out racks from the scanning
supply unit the scanning channel but is mis-operation is performed. channel, and replace the sensor.
Part: not detected by the FFR2
sensor.
A17003 Rack supply unit is full / The sensor indicating that The rack supply unit is full. Take out some racks.
Part: the rack supply unit is full is
pressed by certain rack.
9-85
Code Flags
A18006 Sample rack is taken / When a rack is transferred The rack is taken out directly Do not take out racks from the buffer
out. from the return lane to the from the buffer unit. unit during test process.
Rack ID: buffer unit and then to the
entrance of the retrieval
channel, it is not detected
by the sensor FCC4.
A16001 Instrument instructions / The control software of the Software error Switch off the rack feeder power and
cannot be executed. rack feeder system switch on it again. Recover failure by
Error unit: undergoes a logic error, performing the Home maintenance
Error: resulting in instruction procedure.
error or instruction
executing logic error.
A16002 Equipment / Reading/Writing of the Software error Switch off the rack feeder power and
configuration cannot main control E2PROM of the switch on it again. Recover failure by
be read or saved rack feeder system fails. performing the Home maintenance
Error: procedure.
A09017 Reagent carousel R1 / The R1 reagent carousel Mis-operation is performed, or Open the reagent carousel cover and
scanning failed. cover is opened during bar the reagent carousel cover close it, and then try scanning again.
code scanning. sensor goes wrong.
A10017 Reagent carousel R2 / The R2 reagent carousel Mis-operation is performed, or Open the reagent carousel cover and
scanning failed. cover is opened during bar the reagent carousel cover close it, and then try scanning again.
code scanning. sensor goes wrong.
A16003 This operation is not / The main control unit of the The operation cannot be Neglect the error, which is caused by
permitted in current rack feeder system does not performed in the current mis-operation.
status. meet the requirements of working status of the
Error: executing the instruction or instrument.
is in an incorrect status.
A18007 Rack buffer unit is full / When receiving a finished The sample results are not Check and set up auto rerun, and if
and auto rerun is not rack from the return lane, calculated, but the buffer unit needed, rerun the samples.
permitted. the buffer unit will wait for is already full and cannot
Rack ID: the relevant sample results accommodate new racks.
9-86
Code Flags
and then transfers the rack
to the storage unit or the
supply unit. If more racks
are sent to fill full the
buffer unit during the
waiting, this alarm is given.
A11028 Water tank floater / While FL01 is OFF, FL04 is The floaters are short-circuited. Check if the floaters are connected
failure. ON for 3 seconds. normally.
A11029 Diluted wash solution While FL06 is OFF, FL09 is The high-/low-level floaters of Check if the high-/low-level floater
tank floater logic error. ON for 3 seconds. the diluted wash solution tank signal of the diluted wash solution tank
go wrong. is correct.
A25100 Photometer dark / The average dark current of The circuit gain is too high and Perform dark current fluctuation test to
current of inner ring is the inner ring photometer beyond the measurement range. identify failure.
high. at any channel is more than The power board of the lamp is Check if abnormal channel is relevant
Channel: 200AD or below 1 within 10 not connected properly. with channel gains. Adjust gains if it is
AD value: seconds. The photoelectric collection caused by gains being to large.
board, or power supply Check if connect of lamp power supply
conversion board, or main board is loose; pull off and plug in the
control board goes wrong. connector.
Improper connection, poor If the dark current of all channels is
signal shielding or violently fluctuating, check the power
electromagnetic interference supply conversion board or the main
happens between the PDA control board.
assembly, AD collection board If only certain channel has fluctuating
and main control board. dark current, check the AD collection
board. If the error remains, use a
multimeter to check if the signal
terminal goes wrong. If yes, replace the
relevant photometer.
A25101 Photometer dark / The average dark current of The circuit gain is too high and Perform dark current fluctuation test to
current of outer ring is the outer ring photometer beyond the measurement range. identify failure.
high. at any channel is more than The power board of the lamp is Check if abnormal channel is relevant
9-87
Code Flags
Channel: 200AD or below 1 within 10 not connected properly. with channel gains. Adjust gains if it is
AD value: seconds. The photoelectric collection caused by gains being to large.
board, or power supply Check if connect of lamp power supply
conversion board, or main board is loose; pull off and plug in the
control board goes wrong. connector.
Improper connection, poor If the dark current of all channels is
signal shielding or violently fluctuating, check the power
electromagnetic interference supply conversion board or the main
happens between the PDA control board.
assembly, AD collection board If only certain channel has fluctuating
and main control board. dark current, check the AD collection
board. If the error remains, use a
multimeter to check if the signal
terminal goes wrong. If yes, replace the
relevant photometer.
A25102 Lamp is not turned on / When the lamp is turned The lamp is off or damaged. Replace the lamp.
on, the AD value of the The photoelectric signal Check the input signal of the AD
reference light should be collection circuit, main control collection board. If it is abnormal,
less than 1000. This alarm is board or analog power supply check the filter or preamplifier board.
given if the lamp voltage is conversion board goes wrong. Check the signal output of the AD
beyond the normal range. collection board, and if necessary,
replace it.
Configure the gain parameters of the
reference channel and check the main
control board.
A25103 Lamp power is L! The AD difference of the The lamp is not installed Check if the lamp is installed correctly.
unsteady. Extreme reference light is more than correctly. Check if the flagged absorbance curve
difference: 900 within 10 minutes. The lamp's life span is about to has abnormal fluctuation or triggered
be exceeded. the LIN alarm. If yes, replace the lamp.
A25104 Cuvette blank out of / The AD value of any Bubbles exist during cleaning. If the error occurs only on certain
range. Outer ring / channel is less than Dispensing wash solution failed. cuvette and does not happen again,
Inner ring: Y=[13000(255/x+1)]/(255/ ignore it.
9-88
Code Flags
85+1) for the cuvette. x The cuvette is contaminated, Check if the cleaning liquid inside the
refers to the gain scratched or damaged. cuvette is less than half of the cuvette.
parameter of 340nm. The lamp is not installed Check if the cuvette is contaminated,
correctly. scratched or damaged.
The lamp is aged. Check if the lamp is installed correctly.
Replace the lamp.
A25105 Photoelectric signal / Incorrect marking of signal Dust has accumulated on the Check if the signal collecting position is
collection error. collection appears on the reaction carousel optical interfered by performing the Signal
FPGA. coupler. Collecting Position Adjustment test.
The reaction carousel optical Clear the dust on the reaction carousel
coupler is loose. optical coupler.
The photoelectric collection Check if the optical coupler on the
circuit is interfered. outer ring is loose.
Board error. Readjust the signal collecting position.
A25106 Lamp has been used for / The total using time of the The lamp has been used for over Replace the lamp.
more than 2000 hours. lamp exceeds 2000 hours 2000 hours. Perform the Replace Lamp maintenance
Replace it. for the first time. The lamp has not been replaced procedure.
through the maintenance
procedure on the operating
software.
A25107 Light intensity is too / AD value collected by the No cuvette is installed in this Check the alarming position for
strong. Position (outer inner/outer photometer at position. cuvette.
ring / inner ring): any channel for any cuvette The lamp is aging. Replace the lamp.
is more than 64000. Lamp brightness error, or Readjust the photometer energy.
photoelectric gain error.
A25108 Photometer power of L! The AD value collected by 1. Cuvette overflow or Open the reaction carousel and check
inner ring / outer ring the inner/outer contaminated. for overflow.
is insufficient. photometer of any channel 2. The wash station dispenses Check if the dispense volume of the
is less than liquid incorrectly. wash station is half more than the
Y=[13000(255/x+1)]/(255/ 3. The lamp is aging. cuvette height.
85+1) for 5 consecutive Perform the diluted wash procedure and
4. The lamp is not installed
9-89
Code Flags
cuvettes. x refers to the correctly. then the lamp check procedure.
gain parameter of 340nm. Check if the lamp is installed correctly.
The brightness of the Replace the lamp.
reference light is less than
Check for output error after cuvettes
the alarm limit.
are removed by performing the
Photoelectric Signal Collection
procedure. If yes, troubleshoot the
photoelectric signal collection board.
A25109 Water blank of outer L! The difference between Cuvette check is not performed Perform cuvette check again.
ring is abnormal 10X. current AD value of 340nm on time. Perform the Replace Lamp or Replace
and the previous one for 10 The lamp or cuvettes are not Cuvette maintenance procedure.
consecutive cuvettes is replaced through the Open the reaction carousel and check
more than 12%. maintenance procedures on the for overflow.
operating software. Check if the dispense volume of the
Cuvette is overflowed or wash station is half more than the
contaminated. cuvette height.
The wash station dispenses Perform the diluted wash procedure and
liquid incorrectly. then the lamp check procedure.
The lamp is aging. Check if the lamp is installed correctly.
The lamp is loose. Replace the lamp.
A25112 Water blank of inner L! The difference between Cuvette check is not performed Execute the Cuvette Check command
ring is abnormal 10X. current AD value of 340nm on time. again.
and the previous one for 10 The lamp or cuvettes are not Perform the Replace Lamp or Replace
consecutive cuvettes is replaced through the Cuvette maintenance procedure.
more than 12%. maintenance procedures on the Open the reaction carousel and check
operating software. for overflow.
Cuvette is overflowed or Check if the dispense volume of the
contaminated. wash station is half more than the
The wash station dispenses cuvette height.
liquid incorrectly. Perform the diluted wash procedure and
The lamp is aging. then the lamp check procedure.
9-90
Code Flags
The lamp is loose. Check if the lamp is installed correctly.
Replace the lamp.
A25110 Cuvette contaminated / The AD value collected by Cuvette is overflowed or Open the reaction carousel and check
or overflow on inner the inner photometer at contaminated. for overflow.
ring or outer ring. any channel is less than The wash station dispenses Check if the dispense volume of the
Y=[13000(255/x+1)]/(255/ liquid incorrectly. wash station is half more than the
85+1) for 5 consecutive The lamp is aging. cuvette height.
cuvettes. x refers to the Perform the diluted wash procedure and
The lamp is not installed
gain parameter of 340nm. then the lamp check procedure.
correctly.
The brightness of the
Check if the lamp is installed correctly.
reference light is no less
than the alarm limit. Replace the lamp.
Check for output error after cuvettes
are removed by performing the
Photoelectric Signal Collection
procedure. If yes, troubleshoot the
photoelectric signal collection board.
A25111 Reagent blank is RG! Absorbance difference of Overflow or water intrusion on If the alarm only occurs on certain
abnormal 10X on inner 340nm between the three reaction carousel is not cuvette, it may be caused by foreign
ring or outer ring. measuring points is more processed. matters or bubbles. Check the cuvette
than 0.2A. Bubbles are dispensed together for foreign matters. If there are surely
with reagent. no bubbles in cuvette, ignore it.
Foreign matters exist in If overflow or water intrusion happens,
cuvette. remove the reaction carousel and clear
R1 volume is insufficient. it and the temperature bath.
Check the height and vertical extreme
position of the reagent probe.
A22025 Equipment cannot be / No reply is returned within The serial cable is not Check the serial port connection.
connected 1 second since the connected; or the analyzer Replug the cable. Check if the analyzer
Unit: (control units of middle-layer unit sends a power is switched off. and rack feeder system are powered on.
the control software) handshake instruction. Start the initialization again. Restart
the computer and instrument.
9-91
Code Flags
A22026 Configuring key / Key parameters are
parameters failed. detected not configured
Unit: (control units) during the startup
initialization procedure.
Check the parameters of
the E2PROM.
A22027 Fluidic prime failed. / When the Fluidic Prime The fluidic configuration Perform the Fluidic Prime procedure.
alignment procedure is parameter is lost, or it is not Switch off the analyzer power and
performed, the fluidic configured because the Fluidic switch on it again.
prime parameter becomes Prime is not performed during
1. instrument installation.
If the key fluidic Only check if the fluidic prime
parameters are detected parameter is 1 to determine if
not configured during the fluidic prime has been
startup initialization performed. The error has
procedure, check if the nothing to do with hardware
fluidic prime parameter of failure.
the E2PROM is 1.
A22028 Downloading key / During the startup Downloading key parameters Switch off the analyzer power and
parameters failed. procedure, downloading failed, or reading parameters switch on it again; or upgrade the
Unit: (control units) the low-layer unit from E2PROM failed, or software.
parameters to the configuring parameters of
upper-layer unit fails. low-layer unit failed.
A22100 Mechanical reset / Mechanical resetting fails Moving parts are interfered, or Switch off the analyzer power and
failed. during the startup the motor, belt or sensor goes switch on it again.
initialization procedure. wrong.
A22101 AD value of reference / AD value of the reference The lamp is aging or not Check the lamp's using time, and
light is out of range. light is less than or equal to installed correctly. replace it if it has exceeded the life
1000 during the startup span.
initialization procedure.
A22102 Resetting pumps and / During the startup The pumps/valves, power Switch off the analyzer power and
valves failed. initialization procedure, supply or software goes wrong. switch on it again. If the error occurs
9-92
Code Flags
the first step of fluidic continuously for 3 times, check the
initialization is to power off power supply and the pumps and valves.
all pumps and valves and
then turn on relevant ones
during fluidic prime. This
alarm is given if the pumps
and valves cannot be
powered off in certain
conditions. For instance, if
communication fails or the
system status does not
allow powering off the
pumps and valves.
A22030 Discharging primary / The system checks if the The waste pump, valve or Check the P07, V43 and floater, and
vacuum waste failed. primary vacuum pressure is floater goes wrong. check the tube connecting the primary
within 10kPa. If it is not, vacuum tank and P07.
the system releases the
vacuum; otherwise, the
system turns on P07 and
V43, and turns off V43 after
30s and P07 after another
6s. If the floater of the
vacuum container is still ON
at the moment, this alarm
is given.
A22103 Auto water supply / The floater FL01 of the The water unit goes wrong. Check the water unit.
failed. water tank is still OFF after The water inlet valve goes Check if the water inlet ball valve is
water supply is turned on wrong. opened and the handle is horizontal.
for 5 minutes. The water inlet ball valve is not Check if the water inlet ball valve is
opened. (The handle is blocked.
horizontal when it is opened.) Check if water inlet valve can be turned
The water inlet ball valve goes on and off normally.
wrong. Check if the signal of the low level
9-93
Code Flags
A22104 Auto dilution failed. / The floater FL06 is still OFF The valve V20 goes wrong. Check the valve V20.
after auto dilution is turned The restrictor ring is clogged. Check the restrictor ring.
on for 15 minutes. The inlet filter at the front Check if the inlet filter at the front
panel is clogged. panel is clogged.
goes wrong. the pressure gauge at the top reads
The concentrated wash solution Check the floater of the deionized
tank is empty. water tank.
The concentrated wash solution Check the floater of the concentrated
pump goes wrong. wash solution tank.
A22031 Establishing vacuum / The system releases the The primary vacuum pump goes Observe the analog pressure gauge to
failed. vacuum before establishing wrong, the air path is not check if the vacuum pressure is greater
new vacuum. If the vacuum properly airtight, or the valve than -20kPa. If yes, the pressure
pressure is greater than goes wrong. detection board may goes wrong;
instead of less than -20kPa otherwise, the vacuum pump or valves
within 20s, this alarm is (V37-V42) may fail.
given.
A22032 Floater status error: / The fluidic floaters has the Water tank low-level floater is Check the water unit and inlet tube.
Floater: (Floater No.) following correct statuses: full. Or Check floaters of the water tank,
Water tank low-level Diluted wash solution tank diluted wash solution tank,
floater is not full. floater is full. Or concentrated wash solution tank,
9-94
Code Flags
Diluted wash solution tank Concentrated wash solution low-concentration waste container, and
floater is not full. tank floater is full. Or external high-concentration waste tank.
Concentrated wash solution Low-concentration waste Check the primary vacuum container.
tank floater is not full. collector floater is empty. Or
Low-concentration waste Primary vacuum container is
collector floater is not empty. Or
empty. External high-concentration
Primary vacuum container waste tank floater is empty.
is not empty.
External high-concentration
waste tank floater is not
empty.
If any floater is not in the
correct status, this alarm is
given.
A22033 Resetting probe / Syringe sensor signal is not The syringe sensor, motor, lead Switch off the analyzer power and
interior wash syringe detected when the syringe screw, and cable may go wrong. switch on it again. If the error occurs
failed. resets. continuously for 3 times, check the
syringe motor and cable.
A22105 Fluidic prime failed. / Some pumps and valves The pumps P03/P06/P04/P13 Check if the pumps and valves are
cannot be turned on or off and probe interior/exterior working normally.
during fluidic prime of the wash valves cannot be turned on Check the syringe assembly (including
startup initialization or off; the sample and reagent motor and sensor).
procedure. syringes fail in resetting; the Check if the level sense boards are
level sense boards fail in self working normally.
calibration or detecting liquid
level in wash well.
A22035 Releasing vacuum / Before releasing vacuum The valves V37-V42 cannot be Use a analog mechanical pressure gauge
failed. during the startup turned on/off normally; the to check if the pressure is within
initialization procedure, vacuum pump goes wrong; or 010kPa. If yes, the pressure detection
the system powers off the the pressure detection board board may go wrong; otherwise, check
vacuum pump, turns on fails. the valves V37-V42.
9-95
Code Flags
V37-V42 and turns them off
after 5s. If the vacuum
pressure is beyond 010kPa
at the moment, this alarm
is given.
A22036 Initializing sample bar / During the startup The control drive board or bar Check the connection between the bar
code reader failed. procedure, the sample bar code reader goes wrong, or the code reader and the control drive
code reader is initialized bar code reader communication board; replace the bar code reader or
and communicates with the cable is not connected properly. control drive board.
sample control drive board. Software problem.
If data sending and
receiving fails during the
process, this alarm is given.
A22037 Initializing reagent bar / During the startup The control drive board or bar Check the connection between the bar
code reader failed. procedure, the reagent bar code reader goes wrong, or the code reader and the control drive
code reader is initialized bar code reader communication board; replace the bar code reader or
and communicates with the cable is not connected properly. control drive board.
reagent control drive Software problem.
board. If data sending and
receiving fails during the
process, this alarm is given.
A22038 Scanning reagent bar / During the startup Bar code scanning is terminated Check if the reagent carousel cover is
code failed. initialization procedure, because the reagent carousel closed; check the connection between
the reagent control drive cover is opened. the reagent bar code reader and the
board receives no data The bar code reader fails in control drive board; or replace the bar
returned from the bar code initialization. code reader.
reader.
A22039 Unmatched software / 1. Executing version query The upgraded control software Upgrade the operating software and
version. instruction failed. and operating software do not control software, and note if they
2. Returned control match; or the software goes match.
software version and that wrong.
stored in the operating
9-96
Code Flags
software does not match.
9-97
9-98
P/N: 046-004438-00 (1.0)

BS 2000M

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

BS 2000M

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

BS-2000M Chemistry Analyzer

This warranty shall not extend to:

Fax: +86 755 26582934 26582500

BIOHAZARD Read the statement following the symbol. The

CAUTION Read the statement following the symbol. The

NOTE Read the statement following the symbol. The

Labels and Silkscreens

In Vitro diagnostic equipment

Biohazard: risk of potentially biohazardous infection

Warning: risk of personal injury or equipment damage

Warning: risk of burn

Warning: risk of eye hurt

Environment-friendly use period (20 years)

Electric Shock Hazards

Moving Parts Hazards

Photometer Lamp Hazards

Reagent and Wash Solution Hazards

System Disposal Hazards

Fire and Explosion Hazards

Electromagnetic Noise Precautions

Reagent, Calibrator and Control Precautions

Computer and Printer Precautions

External Equipment Precautions

Intellectual Property Statement ............................................................................................................... ii

1.2.2 Functions of the System

Table 1.1 Functions of system units

1 - Passing lane; 2 - Normal lane; 3 - Return lane; 4 - Lane change part

Table 1.2 Description of function areas

1.5.1 Operation Unit

1.5.2 Display Monitor

1.5.4 Water Supply Equipment

1.5.5 Power Supply Equipment

1.7.1 Common Specifications

1.7.2 Sample Specifications

Table 1.4 Dead volume of sample containers

1.7.3 Reagent Specifications

Table 1.6 Dead volume of Mindray reagent bottles

Reagent bar code

Table 1.7 Reagent bar code parameters

Note: Mindray reagents use the code128 bar code.

1.7.4 Specifications of Reaction System

1.7.5 Specifications of Operation Unit

2.4.1 Sequential Actions of Reagent Probe

Rotate to top of reaction carousel

Rise to vertical Washing position

2.4.2 Sequential Actions of Sample Probe

Sequential actions of sample probe:

Rise to vertical position

2.4.3 Sequential Actions of Mixer Unit

2.5.1 Test Procedure of Double-Reagent Chemistry

Test procedure of double-reagent chemistry

A photometric measuring period is 18 seconds. The measuring points for

2.5.2 Antigen Addition Procedure

2.5.3 Sample Dilution Procedure

2.5.4 Special Wash Procedure

2.5.5 Dilution Procedure of Concentrated Wash Solution

2.5.6 Start/End Points of Test

2.6.1 Workflow of ISE module

System parameter configuration

Test parameter configuration

Routine ISE tests Daily maintenance of ISE module

2.6.2 Startup Procedure

System parameter configuration